Communication Server Integral 55 / Integral 55 LX

IP Telephony

Contact Centers

Mobility

Services

Communication Server

Integral 55 / Integral 55 LX

© 2005 All rights reserved for Avaya Inc. and Tenovis GmbH & Co. KG.

4.999.000.000 · 00/00/03 · T3 · de · es · gb · fr · it · nl ·

Avaya-Tenovis GmbH & Co. KG

Kleyerstraße 94

60326 Frankfurt am Main

Telefon 0 800 266 - 10 00

Fax 0 800 266 - 12 19 [email protected]

avaya.tenovis.de

Operating instructions

Service Manual CSI55 LX

2 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Contents

1 About this Manual 14

2 Important notes 15

2.1 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

2.2 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

2.3 Delivery and transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

2.4 Protective earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

2.5 Required Servicing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

2.6 Connections to V.24 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18

2.7 EU Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

3 Product overview 20

3.1 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20

3.1.1

Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20

3.1.2

Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22

3.1.3

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

3.1.4

Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26

3.2 Expansion options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26

3.2.1

Standing casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26

3.2.2

19” cabinets - 19” frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27

3.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27

3.3.1

Other weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29

3.3.2

Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30

3.3.3

traffic capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31

4 Modules 32

4.1 Single and twin module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32

4.1.1

Procedure for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32

4.1.2

Board slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32

4.1.3

General information on boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33

4.1.4

Access to the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35

4.1.5

Inserting the Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35

4.1.6

Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37

4.1.7

Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37

4.1.8

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40

4.2 ICS (multi-module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41

CSI55 LX 07/2006 3


4.2.1

Rack and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

43

4.2.2

Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

44

4.2.3


44

4.2.4

Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

45

4.2.5


47

4.3 B3 module (multi-module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

48

4.3.1

Board slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

49

4.3.2


50

4.3.3

Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

50

4.3.4

Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

53

4.3.5

Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

55

4.3.6


57

5 19” cabinets and cooling 59

5.1 Standing casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

59

5.1.1

Cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

60

5.2 33HU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

61

5.3 42HU 500mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

64

5.4 42HU 730mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

65

5.5 42HU-can be disassembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

66

5.6 Overview of components (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

67

5.7 Overview of components (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

73

5.8 Selection of cabinets for installation of the Integral 55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

80

5.9 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

82

5.9.1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

82

5.9.2

Intrinsic convection, heat transmission through the cabinet surface . . . . . . . . . . . .

83

5.9.3

Intrinsic convection with issue of the hot air from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

84

5.9.4

Forced convection, direct heat exchange using fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

85

5.9.5

Thermal offtake by cooling device: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

87

5.9.6

Forced circulation due to heat exchanger (air/air) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

88

5.9.7

Calculation formula for the effective cabinet surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

88

5.9.8

Flow chart: Air conditioning in a 19”cabinet for the installation of I55 . . . . . . . . . . .

90

5.10 Universal installation aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

91

5.11 Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

92

5.12 Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 33 F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

92

5.13 Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

93

6 Power supply 94

4 CSI55 LX 07/2006


6.1 19”rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

94

6.1.1

PS350 Adaption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

94

6.1.2

FPE in cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

6.2 B3 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

6.2.1

Fuse Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

6.2.2

FPE in B3 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6.3 PSL55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

6.4 PS280A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

6.5 PS350A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

6.6 ISPS (IMTU Supplementary Power Supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

6.6.1

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

6.7 Uninterrupted Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

6.7.1

Online UPS systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

6.7.2

Line-Interactive UPS systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

6.7.3

Supplementary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

6.7.4

Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

6.7.5

Installation and service concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

6.7.6

Earthing measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

6.8 Earthing concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

6.8.1

General Requirements and Explanations for the Decision-Making Diagram . . . . . . . 137

6.8.2

Explanations for the terms SELV, TNV1, TNV2 and TNV3: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

6.8.3

Annex 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

6.8.4

Annex 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

6.8.5

Annex 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

6.8.6

Annex 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

6.8.7

Annex 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

6.8.8

Annex 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

6.9 Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

7 Doubling 143

7.1 Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

7.2 Single module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

7.2.1

doubling PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

7.2.2

doubling CF* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

7.2.3

doubling *CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

7.3 Twin module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

7.3.1

doubling PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

CSI55 LX 07/2006 5


7.3.2

doubling CF* (within a module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

7.3.3

doubling *CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

7.4 Multi-module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

7.4.1

Interconnected systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

7.4.2

MLB (Module Link Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

7.4.3

ISMx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

7.4.4

ICF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

7.4.5

IVZ on *CB boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

7.4.6

IVZ on separate *CB boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

7.4.7

Doubling of the PS in the B3 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

7.4.8

Complete doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

8 Boards 156

8.1 General Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

8.2 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

8.3 Block diagram of R1 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

8.4 Control, Central Functions and Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

8.4.1

ACB/ACB1 Advanced Computer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

8.4.2

ASM3 Announcement Module 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

8.4.3

CBI1A3 CBus Interface 1 Adapter Version 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

8.4.4

CF22 Central Functions 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

8.4.5

CF2E Central Functions 2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

8.4.6

CFIML Central Functions Inter Module Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

8.4.7

CL2M Clock 2 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

8.4.8

CL2ME Clock 2 Module Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

8.4.9

DSPF Digital Signal Processing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

8.4.10 EOCPF Electrical Optical Converter Plastic Fibre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

8.4.11 EOCSM/MM Electrical Optical Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

8.4.12 HSCB High Speed Computer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

8.4.13 ICF IMTU Central Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

8.4.14 ISMx Switching Matrix x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

8.4.15 MLB Module Link Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

8.4.16 MLBIML Module Link Board, Inter Module Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

8.4.17 R1RC Rack Connector for I55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

8.4.18 V24I/NI Insulated/Non-Insulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

8.4.19 V24M Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

8.5 Connector technology and signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

6 CSI55 LX 07/2006


8.5.1

ACB/ACB1 Advanced Computer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

8.5.2

AEV24B adapter Ethernet / V24 B module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

8.5.3

ASCxx Analogue Subscriber Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

8.5.4

AV24B Adapter V24 B Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

8.5.5

CA Cable Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

8.5.6

CA1B cable adapter 1 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

8.5.7


8.5.8


8.5.9

CA3B/T cable adapter 3 for B modules TAREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

8.5.10 CA4B cable adapter 4 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245



8.5.13 CAIB Cable Adapter I for B Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

8.5.14 CARUB Cable Adapter Russia B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

8.5.15 CF22 Central Functions 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

8.5.16 CF2E Central Functions 2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

8.5.17 EDU Error Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

8.5.18 EES0B Emergency Extension Switch S0 B Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

8.5.19 EESS0 Emergency Extension Switch S0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

8.5.20 EESxB emergency extension switch B module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

8.5.21 ESBx External Signalling B Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

8.5.22 HSCB High Speed Computer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

8.5.23 ICF IMTU Central Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

8.5.24 OFA2B/OFAS Optical Fibre Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

8.5.25 TER Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

8.6 Analog interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

8.6.1

ABSM Analog Subscriber Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

8.6.2

ABSM1 Analog Subscriber Submodule 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

8.6.3

ACSM Alternating Current Signalling Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

8.6.4

ADM Analog Digital Mixboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

8.6.5

ALSM Active Loop Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

8.6.6

ALSMF Active Loop Submodule France . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

8.6.7

ALSMH Active Loop Submodule Hong Kong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

8.6.8

ASC2 Analog Subscriber Circuit 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

8.6.9

ASC21 Analog Subscriber Circuit 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

8.6.10 ASCxx Analogue Subscriber Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

8.6.11 ATA Analog Trunk Interface A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

CSI55 LX 07/2006 7


8

8.6.12 ATA2 Analog Trunk Interface A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

8.6.13 ATB Analog Trunk Interface B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

8.6.14 ATC Analog Trunk Interface C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

8.6.15 ATLC Analog TIE Line Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

8.6.16 DDID Direct Dialling Inward Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

8.6.17 JPAT JISCOS Public Analog Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

8.6.18 PLSM Passive Loop Sub Modul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

8.6.19 SIGA Signalling Unit A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

8.6.20 SIGB Signalling Unit B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

8.6.21 SIGC Signalling Unit C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

8.6.22 SIGD Signalling Unit D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

8.6.23 SIGE Signalling Unit E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

8.6.24 SIGF Signalling Unit F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

8.6.25 SIGG Signalling Unit G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

8.6.26 SIGH Signalling Unit H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

8.6.27 SSBA Signalling Sub Board A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

8.6.28 SSBB Signalling Sub Board B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

8.6.29 SSBC Signalling Sub Board C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

8.6.30 SSBD Signalling Sub Board D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

8.6.31 SSSM Simplex Signaling Sub Modul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

8.6.32 SUPA Supplement A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

8.6.33 SUPB Supplement B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

8.6.34 SUTC Signaling Unit Trunk C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

8.6.35 SUTD Signalling Unit Trunk D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

8.7 Digital interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

8.7.1

ADM Analog Digital Mixboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

8.7.2

BVT2 Motherboard, Voice Transmitting Module 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

8.7.3


8.7.4


8.7.5


8.7.6

CA3B/T cable adapter 3 for B modules TAREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

8.7.7


8.7.8


8.7.9


8.7.10 CAS Channel Associated Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

8.7.11 CL2M Clock 2 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

8.7.12 CL2ME Clock 2 Module Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

CSI55 LX 07/2006


8.7.13 DCON Digital Protocol Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

8.7.14 DECT21 ICU for DECT-Applications 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

8.7.15 DS02 Digital Linecard S0 Variant 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

8.7.16 DS03 Digital Linecard S0 Variant 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

8.7.17 DT0 Digital Linecard T0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

8.7.18 DT21 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

8.7.19 DUP03 Digital Subscriber UP0 HW Variant 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

8.7.20 DUPN Digital Subscriber UPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

8.7.21 EEADM Emergency Extension Analog Digital Mixboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

8.7.22 EES0B Emergency Extension Switch S0 B Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

8.7.23 EESS0 Emergency Extension Switch S0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

8.7.24 EMAC Extended Multi Access Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

8.7.25 HAMUX Home Agent Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

8.7.26 IMUX Integrated Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

8.7.27 IPN Intelligent Private Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

8.7.28 MAC Multi Access Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

8.7.29 MULI Multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

8.7.30 OFA2B/OFAS Optical Fibre Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

8.7.31 S64LI Structured 64 KBit Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

8.7.32 SPCU Speech Compression Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

8.7.33 STSM S0/T0 Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

8.7.34 UIP Universal Interface Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

8.7.35 UKSM UK0 Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

8.7.36 UPSM UPN submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

8.7.37 V24M Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

8.7.38 X64LI kBit Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

8.8 IP Telephoning Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

8.8.1

IPGW Internet Protocol Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

8.8.2

VOIP Voice over IP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

9 BS Confidata: 517

9.1 Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

9.2 GCU configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

9.2.1

Package S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

9.2.2

Package S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

9.2.3

Package I1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

9.2.4

I2 Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

CSI55 LX 07/2006 9


9.2.5

I3 Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

9.2.6

Package I4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

9.3 Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

9.3.1

Single Modules S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

9.3.2

Twin module S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

9.3.3

Multi-Module I1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

9.3.4

Multi-Module I1 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

9.3.5

Multi-Modules I2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

9.3.6


9.3.7

Multi-Modules I3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

9.3.8


9.3.9

Multi-Modules I4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

9.3.10 Multi-Module I4 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

10 Cable network 545

10.1 Connections from CSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

10.1.1 Main Distribution Frame or Network Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

10.1.2 Service panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

10.2 Line lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

10.3 Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

10.4 Contact occupation of the modular plug connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

10.5 LWL-specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

11 Note on DECT: 569

11.1 Intermodule Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

11.1.1 Application in the Multi-Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

11.1.2 Application in the Twin module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

11.1.3 Configurations not allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

11.1.4 Connection of the external high precision reference clock to the CSI55 . . . . . . . . . . 573

11.2 Supply of the DECT-Net Base Station to the Integral 55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

11.3 Suitable cable types used to connect DECT RBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

11.4 The structure of the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

12 Notes to VolP

13 Operator sets

577

578

14 Measuring and Testing Tools 579

14.1 BA Board Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

10 CSI55 LX 07/2006


14.2 CBT C-Bus Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

14.2.1 Hardware and Software Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

14.2.2 Installing the Printed Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

14.2.3 Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

14.2.4 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

14.2.5 Connection cable between CBT and PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

14.2.6 LEDs and Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

14.2.7 Removing and Inserting the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584

14.3 MAHC Measuring Adapter Half Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584

14.3.1 Line Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

14.3.2 Digital Measuring Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

14.3.3 Analog Measuring Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

14.3.4 LEDs and Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

14.4 SP1 Spy Probe 1 (SP1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

14.5 V24IA V24 Interface Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX 590

15.1 About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

15.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

15.2.1 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

15.2.2 Required Servicing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

15.3 Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

15.3.1 Comparison Integral 55/Integral 55 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

15.3.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

15.4 Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598

15.4.1 Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

15.4.2 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602

15.4.3 Housing open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

15.4.4 Table unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

15.4.5 Install in the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

15.4.6 Mounting on the wall.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

15.4.7 Setting up in the room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607

15.5 Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

15.5.1 ACBO Advanced Computer Board Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610

15.5.2 ASC21 Analog Subscriber Circuit 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

15.5.3 ASCxx Analogue Subscriber Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623

15.5.4 ATA Analog Trunk Interface A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

CSI55 LX 07/2006 11


15.5.5 CAS Channel Associated Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632

15.5.6 DECT21 ICU for DECT-Applications 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638

15.5.7 DSPF Digital Signal Processing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

15.5.8 DT21 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

15.5.9 HSCBO High Speed Computer Board Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

15.5.10IPN Intelligent Private Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654

15.5.11MBO Motherboard Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656

15.5.12SBAO System Board Adapter Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664

15.5.13VOIP Voice over IP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664

15.6 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

15.6.1 PSO Power Supply Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

15.6.2 PE or FPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

15.7 View of module in the ISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

15.8 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675

15.9 Cable network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676

15.9.1 Cross-connect cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676

15.9.2 Connections from the BU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680

16 Index 685

12 CSI55 LX 07/2006


(c) All rights reserved. Copyright 2006 AVAYA GmbH & Co. KG Frankfurt/Main.

Edition: 07/2006

Reproductions and disclosure of information contained in this copyright-protected document, in any form or by any means - graphical, electronic or mechanical, by photocopying, recording on disk or tape or storage in a data retrieval system - even in parts - require the prior consent in writing of AVAYA.

All technical data, information and properties of the product described in this document have been compiled to the best of our knowledge. They correspond to the state at the time of issue.

Subject to modification and improvements to the product in the course of technical developments.

AVAYA GmbH & Co. KG

CSI55 LX 07/2006 13

1 About this Manual

1 About this Manual

This manual contains information for sales personnel, service technicians and installers for the acquisition, installation, service, maintenance and expansion of the Integral 55 Communication Server and Integral 55

Compact.

In this manual, abbreviations of boards and modules marked with an ”x” apply to specific variants of boards and/or modules.

A separate manual is available for each individual application.

14 CSI55 LX 07/2006

2 Important notes


2.1

Safety Information

Prior to completing the connection of the system to the mains power, all cabling of the communication server

Integral 55 must be completed and checked.

System service and repairs are the exclusive domain of an authorised specialist!

The telecommunications system must be connected to properly installed, earthed mains socket. The power supply voltage must correspond to the mains voltage. The provided mains cables must be used.

When connecting devices to the V.24 interfaces, only use the supplied shielded cables.

Each module must be connected to voltage compensation!

The occurrence of strong magnetic fields in the vicinity of the communication server Integral 55 must be prevented!

The communication server Integral 55 must not be exposed to shock, impact or vibrations!

ESD precautions must be followed when working with boards susceptible to electrostatic shock.

For reasons of EMC, vacant slots should be covered with frontplates.

Prior to removing power supply modules, they must be separated from the mains voltage!

Prior to commissioning, pull the protective hoods over the power supply devices on the front side.

Subsequent to system startup, the communication server Integral 55 must be closed (dust covers and rear panels depending on hardware configuration and module types)!

The following regulations or guidelines must be considered during system installation, startup and operation:

• DIN VDE 0100 Setting up heavy current systems

• DIN VDE 0105 Operating heavy current systems

• DIN VDE 0132 Fire countermeasures in electrical systems

• DIN VDE 0298 Use of cables and insulated wiring for heavy current systems

• DIN VDE 0800 Telecommunications engineering

• DIN VDE 0891 Use of cables and insulated wiring for telecommunication and information processing systems

• DIN 4102 Combustive properties of building materials and components

• DIN 5035 Interior lighting with artificial light

• VDI 2054 Air conditioning systems for data processing environments

Additional regulations or guidelines may apply in special or individual circumstances.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 15


2.2

Environmental Conditions

The following placement guidelines must be considered in order to ensure trouble free operation of the Communication Server Integral 55:

• The room must be dry and provide options for ventilation.

• Gross weight, fully equipped - seeTechnical data → 27.

• The floor covering should possess antistatic properties. It should be easy to clean and abrasion resistant.

• If the system is to be installed in tight quarters, sufficient ventilation should be ensured. The Communication Server Integral 55 should not be exposed to radiated heat (e.g. radiator).

• If the PSL55 is doubled, the mains connections should be established using separate circuits (phase and fuse).

• An additional number of earthed mains sockets must be provided for service purposes.

Climatic conditions for operation, storage and transportation - see Technical data → 27.

Access to the Communication Server Integral 55 (cabinet, standing casing) must be guaranteed from the front and the back.

2.3

Delivery and transportation

Only transport the Communication Server Integral 55 in its original packaging.

Check that the system is complete by referring to the delivery note and the accompanying installation documents.

2.4

Protective earthing

All modules must generally be earthed via a separately routed protective conductor. Earthing via the protective conductor of the power cord does not suffice.

The protective conductor must have a green-yellow insulating jacket and a minimum cross-section of 2.5 mm2 if mechanical protection is present, or 4 mm2 if this is not the case. More detailed information can be found in the chapter Earthing concept → 136

You will find ready-made solutions in the chapters GRAB=”T”>19” cabinet → 107, Standing casing → 110 and Housing/Cabinet solutions → 112.

The following must always be taken into account:

• The lockable earth plug with cable (49.9804.5750) is only used in standing casings with one rack.

• The FPE conductors in the cabinet are executed in green-yellow and have a minimum cross-section of 2,5 mm2. The potential equalisation conductor (PA) outside is protected and has a minimum crosssection of 6 mm2.

• Two cables have been defined for the fixed connection of the cabinet:

– 49.9906.7592 5m with CEE plug blue

16 CSI55 LX 07/2006


– 49.9906.7593 10m with CEE plug blue

• If more devices have been installed it is necessary to check if the leakage current is greater than 3.5

mA. If this is the case these devices, too, have to be connected tightly to the potential equalisation bar.

• If the leakage current is greater than 3.5 mA it is imperative to provide an earthing connection prior to connection to the supply circuit!

• Leakage currents of UPS systems must be taken into account. If the current is >3.5 mA the UPS must be provided with a FPE fixed connection.

• If a cabinet is supplied by an external UPS the connection must be made using the cable 49.9906.8660

(3x1.5 mm2 with earthing-pin plug and conductor end sleeves).

• With redundant power supply of the CSI55 ensure that the power supplies are powered by two different supply circuits. (cabinet with two multiple sockets)

• If the CSI55 rack is to be installed in third-party cabinets without a potential equalisation bar make sure that the FPE of the rack is connected to the potential equalisation conductor (PA) via a potential equalisation bar that has to be retro-fitted or that it is connected directly to the potential equalisation conductor.

• If cabinets on rollers are connected this always has to be done using a flexible connecting cable (litz-wire cable).

• If the computer board with V24 interface of the CSI55 is used, preference should be given ot the insulated interface V24I (28.7640.3242) or similar.

In the chapters FPE in cabinets → 106 andFPE in B3 module → 120 you will find a description of how to connect the earthing conductor.

19”cabinet → 107

2.5

Required Servicing Procedures

If servicing is required the Helpdesk has been called by:

• the customer,

• the technician/service technician,

• Remote alarm signalling,

• TNS (off hours)

.

In most cases, the Helpdesk will already have located the fault through the use of remote diagnostics. If this is the case, if necesary, simply replacing the faulty module will suffice. It should be stated, however, that remote diagnostics are not capable of locating every fault.

You must then:

• Condense the available information

• Interpret fault returns/indications or displays

• Locate the fault using the service PC

• Carry out diagnostics with the aid of the Helpdesk.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 17


2.6

Connections to V.24 Interfaces

To prevent the destruction of the V.24 interface drivers and receiver components when connecting circuits, it is imperative to use cables that are shielded on both ends (e.g.

27.5630.0561, .0562, .0564, .0565 or similar).

18 CSI55 LX 07/2006


2.7

EU Declaration of Conformity

We Avaya GmbH & Co. KG declare that the products Integral 55 and Integral 55 Compact (telecommunication systems in various upgrade stages) concur with the basic requirements and other relevant provisions of EU guideline 1999/5/EU concerning on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.

The EU Declaration of Conformity is enclosed to the product and can be also requested at the Internet addresses: http://www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/includedcontent/termsofuse.htm

or http://www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/includedcontent/conformity.htm

or you use the search with the headword ”conformity” in our Internet.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 19

3 Product overview


The boundaries between computers and telephones are becoming increasingly hazy. TC systems that can be installed directly in the data environment represent a further step in this direction. In this context, it is important to find integral solution approaches, which regard EDP, internet and telephone environments as a unit.

CSI55 is a product in 19” technology, which adapts itself with this construction to the IT environment. It is made up of uniform racks, which can be upgraded in any way. Accordingly, the CSI55 can handle port numbers of less than 30 to over 32,000 within a multi-modular configuartion.

In essence, the marketing strategy is based on the sale of solutions. This strategy is already in practice under the term ICC ”Integral Communication Center”. CSI55’s high flexibility enables the satisfaction of any customer wishes.

The merging CSI55 with the application integration of the ICC has created a highly flexible product, which will satisfy any customer. The new system offers a large range of opportunities in order to make use of all aspects of modern telecommunications. These include e.g. voice over IP, call identification, least cost routing and many more.

Integral 55 systems do not require regularly scheduled maintenance procedures.

The technician requires no system specific tools.

Special tools are available for factory trained technicians.

3.1

Structure

CSI55 is made up of uniform racks, built in 19-inch technology. They can be installed in standard 19” cabinets or in 19” frames. In addition, the racks can be installed in specially developed, more cost-efficient standing cases (see chapter Standing cases).

Up to four racks can be joined together to form a single module by means of 8-wire CAT6 copper cables with a length of up to 30m. This means that the racks can be assembled flexibly. For example they can be distributed over several 19-inch cabinets. The following provides a more detailed explanation of the HW components.

3.1.1

Rack

One rack consists of 8 slots for connecting circuit boards (ISUs) and 2 slots for the control boards (HSCB/ACB,

CF2E/CF22). In addition, each end (right and left) has a slot for the power supply.

20 CSI55 LX 07/2006


3.1.1.1

Rack assembly

Communication Server Integral 55, rack for installation in a 19” cabinet or in a standing casing (max. 256 ports), view from the front.

1. Left side

2. Upper part

3. Backplane

4. Fan (a fan must be fitted to the rack with ACB/HSCB and CF22/CF2E)

5. Right side

6. Board frame for eight connecting circuit boards

CSI55 LX 07/2006 21


Communication Server Integral 55, rack for installation in a 19” cabinet or in a standing casing (max. 256 ports), view from the rear.

1. Right side

2. Connection boards on the backplane

3. Upper part

4. Board frame

5. Left side

6. Backplane

7. Rear cover

8. Fastening groove

9. Fan (a fan must be fitted to the rack with ACB/HSCB and CF22/CF2E)

Dimensions: 485x400(9HU)x418 (WxHxL)

3.1.2

Modules

In the CSI55 one module is made up of up to 4 individual uniform racks. In this way, a single module that is initially made up of one rack can be expanded later on simply by adding further racks. One module of the

CSI55 is made up of up a maximum of 4 racks.

Up to 3 expansion racks can be connected to the basic rack using the connecting module ”R1 Rack Connector”

R1RC.

Depending on the number of racks in use, the configurations are called C1 to C4.

22 CSI55 LX 07/2006


• C1: consists of one rack

• C2: consists of 2 racks



The control modules are only used in the basic rack. The expansion racks (racks 2 to 4) are connected with the basic rack via an 8-wire copper cable in a star-shaped pattern and do not require any separate control.

The slots for HSCB/ACB and CF2E/CF22 are not used beyond the second rack and are covered by frontplates.

Several modules (C1 to C4) can be joined together to form a twin or multi-group system.

For this purpose it is possible to use both, modules of different sizes (C1 to C4) in mixed form, and a system network made up of the CSI55 and the predecessor system I33.

3.1.2.1

Single module

A single module can be made up of up to 4 racks, thus enabling a maximum of 1,024 ports with only one control. This number of ports is achieved in that each subscriber receives a B-channel for the transmission of speech and a D-channel for signaling. The maximum possible number of ports may be reduced, depending on the number of participants with 2B+D configuration. In extreme cases, in which each subscriber has a

2B+D connection, the maximum number of ports is reduced to 512.

The expansion racks are connected by 8-wire CAT6 copper cable with a length of up to 30m, which transmits all information (signal pulse, CBus, Highways...). They are a form of separate modules without control, and can be stacked or arranged in star shapes.

The Single module in tabular form

Modules:

One module is made up of 1-4 racks (R1, R2, R3, R4). The CF22/CF2E is only connected with the R1 in slot 10. The ACB/HSCB board is only connected with the

R1 rack, usually slot 9 (unless there is doubling of CF22/CF2E).

Module types:

The following names have been defined for the various module types:

C1: Module with one rack

C2:

C3:

C4:

Module with 2 racks

Module with 3 racks

Module with 4 racks

The racks in the modules receive consecutive numbers. The basic rack is called R1, followed by R2 to R4.

Rack number:

The following slots and CBI addresses have been defined for the racks R1-R4:

R1:

R2:

Slot 1-10/CBI-address 06 - 0F + 40

Slot 11-18/CBI-address 10 - 19 + 41

Backplane:

Power supply:

R3:

R4:

Slot 19-26/CBI-address 46 - 4F +42

Slot 29-36/CBI-address 50 - 59 + 43

The backplane used in racks R1-R4 is always the same. The bus terminal resistances are integrated on the backplane. Additional submodules are not necessary.

2 power supplies can be connected to each rack. The 1st power supply is connected to the right-hand power supply slot. The 2nd power supply can be connected to the left-hand power supply slot for redundant operation or to increase power.

Alternatively a PS350A can be installed on the left side of the rack. For this purpose the PS350 Adaption set is available.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 23


Restriction on the number of subscribers:

• 960 digital/analogue subscribers (assumption: at least two boards per module are not intended for subscribers)

• 640 analogue subscribers (restriction due to available DSP resources)

• 864 subscribers with Stimulus terminals (restriction due to available processing capacity on the computer board)

3.1.2.2

Twin module

Twin module configurations consist of two single modules, coupled with each other. These are connected directly to the CF2E/CF22 board via the EOCSM or EOCMM or EOCPF submodules using fibre-optic cable.

The individual modules can be put together and assembled in any way. The maximum number of ports with a twin module configuration is 2,048 (per subscriber 1B+D).

The fibre-optic connection between two modules can have a cable length of up to 15 kilometres. Larger distances can also be covered. In this case the modules can be network connected for example with QSIG.

Connections of this kind are installed very often in corporate networks.

1. FOC

2. 8-wire CAT6 copper cable with a length of up to 30m

3.1.2.3

Multi-module

Large systems are built using multi-modules. A multi-module is used to link several individual modules. For up to 16 modules this can be done by means of an Interconnection Server ICS. If more than 16 modules have to be linked, up to 32 single modules (up to 128 racks if only C4 modules are used) can be connected to a B3 module to form one system. Such a system provides 32.768 ports.

Here, too, the connection to the multi-module is done on the system module side via the CF2E/CF22 module with the EOCSM or EOCMM or EOCPF submodules and using fibre-optic cable.

24 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Thanks to fibre-optic links, the individual modules can be installed at a large distance from each other (up to

15 km, larger distances using QSIG). This way, for example individual modules or module systems can be distributed over the company premises. This is possible either across several storeys within one building or even in different buildings.

1. FOC

2. 8-wire CAT6 copper cable with a length of up to 30m

3.1.3

Power supply

The CSI55 is fed from a power supply unit specially designed for this purpose, called

PSL55, material number: 49.9902.4943 → 122.

The system contains two slots to provide the option of doubling the power supply. The mains units can be used for redundant operation and also in order to double capacity. in redundant operation, the second mains unit takes over the functions in the event of the first unit failing. Connect a second mains unit to the left-hand slot in the event of technical reasons (more than 5 DECT boards in one rack!) necessitating an increase in capacity.

Please observe that redundant operation will not be possible in this case!

CSI55 LX 07/2006 25


Occupancy of slots in R1 rack

1. AO boards

2. Control modules

3. PSL55 (mandatory)

4. PSL55 (optional)

Alternatively a PS350A can be installed on the left side of the rack. For this purpose the

PS350 Adaption → 94

3.1.4

Configurations

Like I33, the CSI55 also realises single, twin and multi-modular configurations. CSI55 offers high flexibility, thus enabling the realisation of systems in a small port range and also up to 32,000 ports as a single system.

Unlike I33, CSI55 does not require an exchange of modules for any system expansion! All you need to do is connect a new expansion rack. Even if a customer still owns an I33 system, he or she can expand it using new I55 racks, thus realising a mixed form of the old and the new integral systems.

CSI55 and I33 systems can be operated together in a system network.

3.2

Expansion options

One single rack represents a fully operative Communication Server I55. The rack can be installed in a standard

19” cabinet or in a standing casing.

One rack consists of 8 slots for connecting circuit boards (ICUs) and 2 slots for the control boards (ACB/HSCB,

CF22/CF2E). As a result, there are the following expansion options:

• A single 19”-Rack.

• One single rack in a 19” standing casing.

• A single or multi rack for installation in a 19” cabinet or 19” frame existing at the customer’s location.

• A single or several racks in a provided 19” cabinet or 19” frame.

• Up to four racks (standing casing, racks in 19” cabinets, racks in 19” frames or any combination thereof) connected by flexible cables, can form a single module .

3.2.1

Standing casing

26 CSI55 LX 07/2006


In this assembly option, a CSI55 rack can be installed in a specially developed standing casing.

The special construction means that there are two height units available for additional components such as a 19” server or UPS systems.

The dimensions of the standings casings are 550 mm x 550 mm x 11 HU; they stand on four lockable wheels. No more than two standing casings may be stacked.

3.2.2

19” cabinets - 19” frames

The CSI55 racks are installed in standard 19” cabinets or in frames. A maximum of 3 racks (one rack has 9 U) can be installed in one 19” cabinet with 33 U, which can be transported vertically through a standard door on a transport pallet. However, this does assume that the cabinet will be sufficiently ventilated or air conditioned (see Technical specifications).

At the installation of additional components (data systems technology, server, UPS) the climatological conditions on every individual case must be checked according to the guidelines described in the chapter

Tecnical Data!

Additionally, single or several racks can be installed in a 19” assembly frame. On the one hand, like the 19” cabinets, these frames can be supplied as new ones, on the other hand, these racks can also be installed in frames existing at the customer’s location.

3.3

Technical Data

Connecting options, interfaces

CSI55 LX 07/2006 27


Network interfaces

Administration network management

Subscriber interfaces

T0

S0 a/b UPN

T2

V.24

US0 UPD UK0 maximum number of subscribers analogue/ module

640 digital/ module

960

Modules

Connection possibilities in ports: 1B+D per port

Connection possibilities in ports: 2B+D per port

C1

256

128

Connecting circuit modules (max.)

Control module

Power supply

8

2

C2

512

256

16

2

Stimulus/ module

840 total/ module

960

24

2

C3

768

384

IP clients/ system

5000

DECT subscr./ system

2000

C4

1024

512

32

2

Rack

Dimensions WxHxL

Empty weight

Weight equipped with one PSL55, all module slots occupied

Weights in detail

485x400(9HU)x418

16.6 kg

22.9kg

Other weights → 29

Network connection

Mains voltage

Mains frequency

Circuit protection

230V ± 10%

50 Hz -6% +26%

Automatic circuit breaker 16A Type C slow acting

Further information

Sound pressure level at a distance of 1 m according to

EN ISO 3744 in the rack

Reliability and traffic values

Technical reliability

Traffic values

< 39dB(A)

45dB(A)

Reliability → 29

Traffic capacity → 30

28 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Telephones/terminals

Terminals of the T93 and T1 series and the telephones of the T3 series can be connected as well as various

IP phones if our IPV solution is used.

Environmental conditions/Air conditioning

DIN ETS

Storage:

Transport:

Operation:

300.019-Kl.1.1

300.019-Kl.2.2

300.019-Kl.232

Air conditioning

Temperature range

-5

◦

C to +45

◦

C

-25

◦

C to +70

◦

C

-5

◦

C to +45

◦

C

Relative humidity

5 to 95%

Passive ventilation (e.g. an opening for incoming air in the skirting board or door) is sufficient if up to 2 racks are installed. Active ventilation is necessary if more than 2 racks or additional active components are installed.

3.3.1

Other weights

Other weights

two modules R1RG a fan assembly set

Power Supply PSL55

Standard cable 16x2 connecting circuit, length: 5 m

Mains connection cable, length: 3 m

The weight of a rack was found using the following equipment

Rack without cable with: a fan a HSCB board incl. a Calluna disk drive a CF2E board a DT21 board a DUPN boards a DUPN board a ADM board with a submodule ABSM and a submodule STSM two ASC2 boards two ATA boards, each with four SIGA submodules eight cable adapters CA1B a AV24B board a ESB board as well as one power supply PSL 55

22.920 kg

0.278 kg

0.338 kg

3.600 kg

0.800 kg

0.240 kg

CSI55 LX 07/2006 29


3.3.2

Reliability

The reliability values (MTBF, availability, failure time per year) are specified for CSI55. This focuses on different system parameters.

Total system failure is considered. Total failure means that none of the functions in the entire system can be used. This corresponds with a failure of all subscribers.

In all of the values stated herein, the power supply devices were also taken into consideration. However, the failure of power supply devices is less frequent than the failure of mains voltage due to the the power plant. If

UPS (uninterrupted power supply) is not used, this will lead to total system failure in both cases. This must be taken into account during the use of the values.

If invitations to tender specify that the system reliability values must be stated without power supply devices, the tables for the system can be applied with the power supply doubled.

Reliability CSI55

Single module configuration

not redundant

Redundant power supply

Redundant power supply and central functions

MTBF (years)

34

59

147

Availability (%) Failure time p.a.

99,9993

99,9996

3.5 min.

2 min.

99,9998 < 1 min.

Twin module configuration

not redundant



MTBF (years)

2 548 151

7 724 300

47 176 407


99,9999

99,9999

<

<

1 s

1 s

99,9999 < 1 s

Multi-module configuration

not redundant



MTBF (years)

2 548 151

7 724 300

47 176 407


99,9999

99,9999

<

<

1 s

1 s

99,9999

<

1 s

30 CSI55 LX 07/2006


3.3.3

traffic capacity

The term traffic capacity can be broken down into dynamic and static traffic capacity.

The dynamic traffic capacity is the capacity provided by the system. It is specified in BHCA (Busy Hour Call

Attempts) and measures the number of calls that can be processed in an average busy hour. For ACD systems the unit BHCC is used (Busy Hour Call Completions) and measures the number of calls that are connected in an average busy hour and reach at least a queue with a recorded announcement.

The static traffic capacity describes the capacity of the switching matrix. It is specified in Erlang (Erl).

The basis for the dimensioning of telephone systems the FTZ guideline 12TR2. It specifies a traffic value of

0.3 Erlang for digital subscribers (2B+D) (see German BAPT regulations for traffic values).

The values listed in the tables below apply to the CSI55:

Traffic capacity up to E070V08:

Single module

Twin module

Multi-module

Single module

Twin module

Multi-module

Dynamic

8000 BHCA

16000 BHCA

24000 to 350000 BHCA depending on configuration

Static

Non-blocking (1 Erlang/B channel)


0.88 Erlang with digital ports only and with a proportion of 50% of the traffic inside the module and 50% between modules.

Traffic capacity with IEE2:

Single module

Twin module

Multi-module

Single module

Twin module

Multi-module

Dynamic

20000 BHCA

40000 BHCA

60000 to 750000 BHCA depending on configuration

Static



0.88 Erlang with digital ports only and with a proportion of 50% of the traffic inside the module and 50% between modules.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 31

4 Modules

4 Modules

A module is a complete unit which is fully operative. The smalles module is an Integral 55 rack. The following table shows a rough overview of the possible modules:

Module overview

Module Description

Single modules 4

Racks max.

Twin module

Multi-module consists of 1 to 4 racks

Connection: 8-wire CAT6 copper cable, length <30m

Two single modules Connection fibre-optic cable, length <15km, or via QSIG for larger distances

3 to 16 modules with ICS, up to 32 modules with B3

Connection: Fibre-optic cable, length <15km.

8

64 or 128

4.1

Single and twin module

One module can be made up of up to four racks.

The following restriction on the number of subscribers per module must be assumed for various reasons:

• 960 digital/analogue subscribers (assumption: at least two boards per module are not intended for subscribers)

• 640 analogue subscribers (restriction due to available DSP resources)

• 864 subscribers with Stimulus terminals (restriction due to available processing capacity on the computer board HSCB)

These restrictions only take effect with the use of the new ratio boards (twice the number of ports).

Twin module configurations consist of two single modules, coupled with each other.

4.1.1

Procedure for Installation

Depending on the configuration, the racks are, or must be, installed in standing casings or in 19” cabinets.

4.1.2

Board slots

For reasons of electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), board slots which are not occupied must be provided with metal shields.

Board slot

Power supply unit

Material number:

Material number:

49.9901.9774

49.9903.1809

32 CSI55 LX 07/2006

4 Modules

When installing the shields they have to be held parallel to the front side because otherwise there is danger that no contact to the housing will be established.

In the view on the left you can see a C4 module with the board slots, the corresponding in decimal form and the in hexadecimal form.

The addresses and slot numbers of smaller modules are identical, please ignore other expansion modules in this view (for example, consider only R1 and

R2 for C2).

Please note:

The slots with the CBI addresses

19;4F;59 (slots 20, 28 and 38) are not suitable for the use of a ACB/HSCB because there is no power fail signal on these slots.

4.1.3

General information on boards

The boards used in the module are listed hereafter:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 33

4 Modules

Boards for Connection Technology and Signalling

AEV24B

AV24B

ESBx

CAxB

OFA2B

OFAS

CARUB

EESxB

Adapter Ethernet V24 B module

Adapter V.24 for B Modules

External Signalling B Module

Cable Adapter

Optical Fibre Adapter 2 B Module

Optical Fibre Adapter Single mode

Cable Adapter Russia B Module

Emergency Extension Switch B Module

Boards for Control, Central Functions and Transport

ACB

HSCB

DSPF

CF22

CF2E

R1RC

Advanced Computer Board

High Speed Computer Board

Digital Signal Processing Function

Central Function 22 (used in all modules)

Central Function 2E (used in all modules)

R1 Rack Connector for I55

Boards for Analog Interfaces

ASCxx

ATLC

ATxx

DDID

JPAT

ADM

Analog Subscriber Circuit

Analog Tie Line Circuit

Analog Trunk Interface

Direct Dialling Inward Circuit

JISCOS Public Analog Trunk

Analogue/Digital Mixboard

Boards for Digital Interfaces

DUP03

DUPN

DT0

DT21

DS02

DECT21

CAS

IPN

IMUX

DCON

MAC

HAMUX

BVT2

MULI

Digital Linecard UPN

Digital Linecard UPN

Digital Linecard TIE/T0

Digital Linecard TIE/T2 (S2M)

Digital Linecard S0

Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunication

Channel Associated Signalling

Intelligency Private Network

Integrated Multiplexer

Digital Protocol Converter

Multi Access Circuit Board

Home Agent Multiplexer

(part of a PC, Home Agent)

Multi-line

34 CSI55 LX 07/2006

4 Modules

UIP

ADM

Boards for IP telephony

IPGW

VoIP

Universal Interface Platform

Analogue/Digital Mixboard

Internet Protocol Gateway

Voice over IP Board

Boards for Power Supply

PSL55 in racks R1 to R4

PS350A in racks R1 to R4

(optional)

Power Supply Low 55

Power Supply 350A

4.1.4

Access to the system

The available and familiar service programmes can be accessed in the following ways:

• Via V.24 with a connected terminal/PC in MML dialogue.

• Using the operator position in MML dialogue.

• Using S0 access via protocol stack.

The V.24 and S0interfaces can be accessed on the Service Panel.

Although this communication level presupposes the availability of a PC with corresponding software, it corresponds only to a conventional MML dialogue (transparent mode).

File Transfer

File transfer PC <—> HGS (Background Memory)

Traffic measurement

The VEME traffic measurement can be activated by one of the aforementioned methods; the resulting data however is output via the file handling system to the V.24 interfaces.

Central Call Charge Data Recording (ZGDE)

The ZGDE generally outputs data via the file handling system to the V.24 interfaces.

Callback

It is possible to set up an automatic connection to a PC or a service centre.

4.1.5

Inserting the Connecting Cables

The connection of the Communication Server Integral 55 with the MDF or NT is implemented using the supplied connecting cables. The connectors for these cables are located on the adapter modules (cable adapters), which can be reached from the rear side of the rack.

Example: 19” cabinet

CSI55 LX 07/2006 35

4 Modules

Open the 19” cabinet

Mark the cable at both ends (server and MDF) using the supplied labels.

Attach the connecting cable at the main distribution frame first, and then at the PBX.

Feed the ends of the connecting circuit cable into the console and then into the modules. The cable guides are illustrated.

Rear side of cabinet with wiring

Insert the Champ plug of the connecting cable into the plug sockets of the adapter modules according to the configuration. The adapter modules are held in place by set-squares.

Attach the connecting cables to the provided fastening clamps in the racks using cable binders.

Cover the area with the CA cover.

36 CSI55 LX 07/2006

4 Modules

Rack in standing casing, rear side with CA cover.

Each connecting circuit of a connecting circuit board is fitted with an overvoltage protection device to 4 kV on the output side. Make sure that removed boards are placed back into the same slot (various equipment of the

4.1.6

Connectivity

No more than four racks can be connected to form a module during the installation of a 19” cabinet.

Furthermore, an optical waveguide cable can be used to connect two of these modules directly.

• four racks (one module) and four racks (second module).

This presumes that the group is equipped with the CF22/CF2E boards. This board must also be compleeted

If three or more of these groups are to be connected to form a PBX, they must be connected using a B3 multi-module or ICS.

This is done via the fibre-optic cable on the MLB board of the multi-module. This presumes also that the modules are equipped with the CF22/CF2E boards.

The R1 rack can also be used as part of a network. Coupling is implemented via S2M on the DT21 or S0 submodules of the DT0 or ADM boards.

4.1.7

Switching on

Single module

Check the stable position of the power supply devices and power supply cables.

Cover all slots with the slot covers.

Insert all required covers over the front panels of the ACB or HSCB and CF22 or CF2E boards.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 37

4 Modules

R1 rack in the standing casing

1. Slot cover

2. Covers for ACB or HSCB and CF22 or CF2E

3. Protective bracket for the mains connection cable

Pull the protective hoods over the slots of the mains connection cable on the front of the power supply devices.

Insert the earthed mains plug(s) of the mains connection cable(s) for the racks in their designated earthed mains sockets.

Startup with the ACB board

The module is now switched on and is loading the programs (loading duration less/equal 15 min).

38 CSI55 LX 07/2006

4 Modules

If the illustrated green LEDs L1 to L2 of the Advanced Computer Board ACB are illuminated, the module is ready for operation.

Startup with the HSCB board

The module is now switched on and is loading the programs (loading duration less/equal 10 min).

If the illustrated yellow LEDs L7 to L10 of the High Speed Computer Board HSCB are off, the module is ready for operation.

Twin module

Check whether only one ESU is active in the Communication Server Integral 55 (DIL switch to CF22/CF2E).


(Information yet to come!)


In twin operation, the S3 switch of the HSCB board without HGS should be placed in the right-hand position.

Switch on both modules of the server.

The loading phases shown in the modules (LEDs of the HSCB boards) may differ from time to time.

Having switched on both modules, first run through loading phases 15 to 6.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 39

4 Modules

From this point, the HSCB board without HGS is held at loading phase 6 while the HSCB with inserted HGS runs through the remaining loading phases 5 and 4 (access to HGS).

The HSCB board without HGS subsequently runs through loading phases 5 and 4.

Finally both HSCB boards run through loading phases 3 to 0.

HSCB Loading Phases

1

0

4

3

6

5

2

8

7

10

9

No.

15

14

13

12

11

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

L7

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

L8

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

L9

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

L10

1

Phase name

Start reset phase

Test flash-PROM

Test QUICC

Test real time clock

Test C-bus interface

Test DUART (V.24 ports)

Test dynamic RAM

Output hardware image

End reset phase

Initial program loading (IPL)/IPL ready flag

STIN program loader is loaded and started

Operating system has been loaded and started (restart)

User programs (have been dispatched) have been loaded

Start of customer data loading in the user programs

All customer data loaded Start commissioning of module(s)

Module(s) in operation

1 = LED on

0 = LED off

4.1.8

Troubleshooting

Power supply

Fault

Yellow LED on the PS350A power supply unit does not light up

Green LED on the power supply unit does not light up

Action

Check the mains voltage.

If mains voltage is present, replace the power supply unit.


Check the battery voltage (for PS350A only). Observe battery switch function on PS350A!

First check whether the malfunction can be rectified by removing the board(s).

If this is the case, replace with new board(s).

If this is not the case, replace the power supply unit.

General Points

40 CSI55 LX 07/2006

4 Modules

Fault with ACB

Loading procedure failed during first startup

with HSCB

Loading procedure failed during first commissioning (single module)

Action


Loading procedure failed during first commissioning (twin module)

Small reset (restart)

Switch S2 (HSCB board) in left position, switch S1 (HSCB) in left and then back to middle position

Large reset

Switch S2 in right position, switch S1 in left and then back to middle position, switch S2 to left position after loading has finished (loading phase 0)

In the module with HSCB board and without HDD, check whether LED L8 on the CF22/CF2E board is flashing.

If not, check the optical waveguide connections. If there is no connection, establish it.

If subsequently necessary for these modules:

Small reset (restart)

Switch S2 (HSCB board) in left position, switch S1 (HSCB) in left and then back to middle position

Large reset

Switch S2 in right position, switch S1 in left and then back to middle position, switch S2 to left position after loading has finished (loading phase 0)

Further Course of Action with ACB


with HSCB

First check the displays of the HSCB board with inserted HGS.

Then check the displays of the HSCB board without HGS (Twin Module).

Note down the status of the LEDs on all boards.

Inform your Service Control Centre.

4.2

ICS (multi-module)

Mains voltage

The ICS is operated with the PSL55. Therefore it is suitable for connection to 230 V; ±10 %, 50 Hz -6% +26%

( 47 to 63 Hz). For more details, see PSL55 → 122.

Power dissipation

Max. power dissipation with expansion for an 8-group system

(A MLB board fully equipped with 8 EOC)

Max. power dissipation with expansion for a 12-group system

(two MLBs, one equipped with 8 EOC, the other with 4 EOC)

95 W

115 W

CSI55 LX 07/2006 41

4 Modules

Max. power dissipation with expansion for a 16-group system

(Full expansion with two MLBs each equipped with 8 EOC)

Board slots

The slots in the ICS are arranged as follows:

130 W

The slots for the ICF and ISM2 boards have a 27.5 mm spacing. The two slots for the MLB boards have a spacing of 68.75 mm. as the MLBs are equipped with EOC submodules.

The slots for the individual boards have the following C-bus addresses:

42 CSI55 LX 07/2006

4 Modules

4.2.1

Rack and assembly

The assembly kit 49.9904.4791 must be ordered for the assembly of the ICS.

Shielding

Since the front side of the rack is the EMC barrier it is necessary to always create a complete cover. The slots of the ISM, ICF boards and a PSL55 power supply are always occupied, the shielding function is provided by the front panels of the boards.

The slots of the MLB board must be provided with the same shields regardless of whether they are occupied or free. The shields are part of the scope of delivery of the rack.

The table shows the material numbers of the shields for the MLB and power supply slots:

Slot

MLB

free and occupied slots

Power supply (free slot)

Cover material number

49.9906.2856

49.9903.1809

Installation of optical waveguides

The optical waveguides are led in via an opening in the backplane, which is located behind the MLB slots.

They are linked to the EOCXX boards on the front side and these are then fitted to the MLB or MLBIML board

(as applicable) and locked in place.

Board MLB EOCx submodules

1. Tool for locking and unlocking submodule EOC *

2. MLB board

3. OWG twin cable

4. Isolating hose facility *

5. Duct for OWG

6. Sending

CSI55 LX 07/2006 43

4 Modules

7. Receiving

8. EOCPF submodule

9. EOCMM/SM submodule

10. locking

11. unlocking

* Component of tool kit for B3 module (OWG/EOCxx)

Contacting the fans, ESB installation; CA3B

The multipoint connectors for installation of the ESB and CA3B boards are located under the rear cover hood.

The slot TP1E is designed for the ESB board and the slot TP1C for the CA3B board. To connect them, the fixing screws on the rear ICS hood are loosened and the hood is removed. The boards are pressed into the slots designed for them.

The connections on the fans are linked to the connections on the ESB board for fans (see also Pin strips on the ESB → 278). The cables for this are laid out so that they go through the cover hood.

Then the hood is replaced and screwed on firmly using the two screws at the lower end.

Earth connection

The protective earth connection is achieved via the earthing terminal on the rear side of the housing. The ground clamp is mounted between the earthing sign and the ICS type plate.

4.2.2

Doubling

To increase the stability of communications in a multigroup system, two ICS can be linked to one another and to the corresponding modules via OWG (twin cable). One ICS performs normal function, and the second moves to the hot standby operating mode. The second ICF takes over the function of the first as soon as it reports a malfunction.

For more details, see also Complete doubling → 153.

4.2.3


The boards used in the B3 module and in the ICS are listed below.

Service board

CBT C-Bus Tester (only B3 module)

44 CSI55 LX 07/2006

4 Modules


CA3B

AV24B

EDU

ESB

TER

Cable Adapter 3 B Module

Adapter V.24 B Module

Error Display Unit


Termination 2 and 3 (only B3 module)


ISMx/ISM2x IMTU Switching Matrix

MLB

ICF

Module Link Board

IMTU Central Functions

CL2M/CL2ME Clock 2 Module (if CL2ME is used see also Intermodule-Handover)


ISPS

PS

IMTU Supplementary Power Supply (only B3 module)

Power Supply (PS280A or PS350A in B3 module, PSL55 and PS350A in racks R1 to

R4, PSL55 in ICS)

Check the correct positioning of TER2 and TER3 before switching on the B3 module! Make sure that any removed boards are reinserted in the same slot!

4.2.4

Switching on


Pull the protective hoods over the slots on the front of the power supply devices.

Check whether only one ESU is active in the Communication Server Integral 55 (DIL switch to CF22/CF2E/

ICF).

Insert the grounded plug of the mains connecting cable into the protection unit or earthed mains socket provided.

If necessary, connect the battery connector (e.g. inserting the -48 V fuse in the battery unit, etc).

If required, move the battery switch on all inserted PS350A power supply units to position 1 (front panel).

The I55 server is switched on and loading programs (loading time depends on number of modules).




CSI55 LX 07/2006 45

4 Modules


In multi-module operation, the S3 switch of the

HSCB boards without HGS should be placed in the right-hand position.

The loading phases shown in the HSCB boards

(LEDs L7-L10) may differ from time to time.

Having switched on the modules, the HSCB boards first run through loading phases 15 to 6.


The HSCB boards without HGS subsequently run though loading phases 5 and 4.

Finally all HSCB boards run through loading phases 3 to 0.

The L7 LEDs of the CF22/CF2E boards flash in the modules during the loading phases (signalling input of the valid module address).

If the yellow LEDs L7 to L10 (loading phase 0) of the HSCB boards shown are off in all modules, this denotes that the server I55 is ready for operation.

Meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the

HSCB board


No.

15

14

13

12

11

L7

1

1

1

1

1

L8

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

L9

1

0

1

0

1

L10

1

Phase name

Start reset phase

Test flash-PROM

Test QUICC



46 CSI55 LX 07/2006

4 Modules

No.

6

5

8

7

10

9

2

1

4

3

0

L8

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

L7

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

L10

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

L9

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

Phase name


Test dynamic RAM


End reset phase








1 = LED on

0 = LED off

4.2.5

Troubleshooting

Power supply

Fault



Action



Check the mains voltage (for PS280A only).


First check whether the malfunction can be rectified by removing the boards(s).



General Points

Fault with ACB


with HSCB

Action


CSI55 LX 07/2006 47

4 Modules


In all modules containing HSCB boards without HGS, check whether the L8 LEDs on the CF2x boards are flashing.

If not, check the optical waveguide connections for these modules. Create any missing optical waveguide connections.


Small reset (restart):

Switch S2 of the HSCB board in left-hand position, switch S1 of the HSCB board in left-hand and then back to middle position.

Large reset:

Switch S2 in right position, switch S1 in left and then back to middle position, switch S2 to left position after loading has finished (loading phase 0).



with HSCB





4.3

B3 module (multi-module)

Communication Server Integral 55 - B3 Built-In-Module in the 1/2 K rack

1. Status display and service device connection

2. Console

3. 1/2 K rack

4. B3 Built-In-Module

5. Empty B module

Procedure for Installation

The B3 Built-In-Module is accommodated in the 1/2 K rack The rack is on rollers.

Remove the covers of the console.

48 CSI55 LX 07/2006

• Release the quick-action closures on the front side and remove the cover

• Press up and remove the remaining covers

The four rollers in the console can be locked into place.

4 Modules

Console, position of rollers

1. Lock the rollers using 13 mm socket wrench

2. Connect the racks with M8 screw (two or more racks)

4.3.1

Board slots

Slot

1. Slot

2. External module number, decimal

3. A second PS350A and a ISPS are required if more than 14 groups are installed.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 49

4 Modules

4.3.2


The boards used in the B3 module and in the ICS are listed below.

Service board

CBT C-Bus Tester (only B3 module)


CA3B

AV24B

EDU

ESB

TER

Cable Adapter 3 B Module

Adapter V.24 B Module

Error Display Unit


Termination 2 and 3 (only B3 module)


ISMx/ISM2x

MLB

IMTU Switching Matrix

Module Link Board

ICF IMTU Central Functions

CL2M/CL2ME Clock 2 Module (if CL2ME is used see also Intermodule-Handover)


ISPS

PS

IMTU Supplementary Power Supply (only B3 module)

Power Supply (PS280A or PS350A in B3 module, PSL55 and PS350A in racks R1 to

R4, PSL55 in ICS)

Check the correct positioning of TER2 and TER3 before switching on the B3 module! Make sure that any removed boards are reinserted in the same slot!

4.3.3

Connectivity

Inserting the Connecting Cables

The B3 module is connected to the other modules belonging to the Communication Server Integral 55 using optical waveguides (twin cables).

Open the quick-action closures of the cover plates. Remove the cover plates.

Close the rear panel of the communication server Integral 55 using the supplied keys.

• 1/2 K rack: one rear panel without ventilation holes

Lift out the covers.

50 CSI55 LX 07/2006

4 Modules

Feed the ends of the LWL twin cable into the console and then into the module

(bending radius min. 35

mm!).

Remove the covers of the LWL cable ducts on the rear side of the backplane.

With the I55 system switched on and unprotected coupling, there is a risk of short-circuiting when assembling the LWL twin cable!

For each LWL twin cable, insert the two insulating tubes (auxiliary item, part of the tool kit for the B3 module) through the respective cable duct of the backplane. See also

Insert the optical waveguide cable in the insulating tubes. Pull the insulating tubes containing the optical waveguide twin cable through the cable ducts toward the front.

Insert and secure the connections of the optical waveguide twin cable to the connectors of the EOCx submodule.

Make sure that the transmitting section of the EOCx submodule belonging to the B3 module is connected to the receiving section of the EOCx submodule. Conversely, the receiving section of the EOCx submodule belonging to the B3 module is to be connected to the transmitting section of the EOCx submodule.

EOCSM/EOCMM

The optical waveguide wire with the red plugs is to be inserted in the transmitting socket of the EOCSM/

EOCMM and in the receiving socket of the B3 module. The opposite applies to the LWL wire with the black plugs.

EOCPF

The LWL wire with the grey plugs is to be inserted in the grey sockets of both EOCPF submodules. The LWL wire with the blue plugs is to be inserted in the blue sockets.

Insert the EOCx submodules onto the MLB and lock the submodules into place (hook the tool on the locking rail of the EOCx and lock or unlock).

The slot addresses of the MLB/EOCx boards are defined in TIP.

Insert the edge protector into the optical waveguide cable duct and fasten the connecting cable using cable binders on the fastening grooves provided (optical waveguide cable duct and side wall) in the B3 module.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 51

4 Modules

Cable routing of fibre-optic twin cables, view of a 1/2 K rack with a B3 module from the rear side

1. OWG twin cable

2. Fastening groove

3. OWG twin cable

4. Edge protector

5. LWL cable duct

6. B3 module

7. Cover

8. Bending radius min. 35 mm!

9. OWG twin cable

Connections MLB

52 CSI55 LX 07/2006

4 Modules

Board MLB EOCx submodules

1. Tool for locking and unlocking submodule EOC *

2. MLB board

3. OWG twin cable

4. Isolating hose facility *

5. Duct for OWG

6. Sending

7. Receiving

8. EOCPF submodule

9. EOCMM/SM submodule

10. locking

11. unlocking

* Component of tool kit for B3 module (OWG/EOCxx)

4.3.4

Doubling

To increase the stability of communications in the system, two B3 modules can be linked to one another and to the corresponding modules via OWG (twin cable). This presumes that the B3 modules are equipped with the MLB boards.

Refer to the TIP documents for the required slots and assignment.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 53

4 Modules

Doubling of the B3 module

AO = connecting circuit

CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

ICF = IMTU Central Functions

ISM = IMTU Switching Matrix

ISPS = IMTU Supplementary Power Supply

LWL = Optical waveguide (OWG)

MLB = Multi Link Board

PS = only PS350A

PSL55 = Power Supply Low 55

Wall-mounted and built-in modules can also be connected.

54 CSI55 LX 07/2006

4 Modules

4.3.5

Switching on


Pull the protective hoods over the slots on the front of the power supply devices.

Check whether only one ESU is active in the Communication Server Integral 55 (DIL switch to CF22/CF2E/

ICF).

Insert the grounded plug of the mains connecting cable into the protection unit or earthed mains socket provided.

If necessary, connect the battery connector (e.g. inserting the -48 V fuse in the battery unit, etc).

If required, move the battery switch on all inserted PS350A power supply units to position 1 (front panel).

The I55 server is switched on and loading programs (loading time depends on number of modules).




CSI55 LX 07/2006 55

4 Modules


In multi-module operation, the S3 switch of the

HSCB boards without HGS should be placed in the right-hand position.

The loading phases shown in the HSCB boards

(LEDs L7-L10) may differ from time to time.

Having switched on the modules, the HSCB boards first run through loading phases 15 to 6.


The HSCB boards without HGS subsequently run though loading phases 5 and 4.

Finally all HSCB boards run through loading phases 3 to 0.

The L7 LEDs of the CF22/CF2E boards flash in the modules during the loading phases (signalling input of the valid module address).

If the yellow LEDs L7 to L10 (loading phase 0) of the HSCB boards shown are off in all modules, this denotes that the server I55 is ready for operation.

Meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the

HSCB board


No.

15

14

13

12

11

L7

1

1

1

1

1

L8

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

L9

1

0

1

0

1

L10

1

Phase name

Start reset phase

Test flash-PROM

Test QUICC



56 CSI55 LX 07/2006

4 Modules

No.

6

5

8

7

10

9

2

1

4

3

0

L8

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

L7

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

L10

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

L9

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

Phase name


Test dynamic RAM


End reset phase








1 = LED on

0 = LED off

4.3.6

Troubleshooting

Power supply

Fault



Action



Check the mains voltage (for PS280A only).


First check whether the malfunction can be rectified by removing the boards(s).



General Points

Fault with ACB


with HSCB

Action


CSI55 LX 07/2006 57

4 Modules


In all modules containing HSCB boards without HGS, check whether the L8 LEDs on the CF2x boards are flashing.

If not, check the optical waveguide connections for these modules. Create any missing optical waveguide connections.


Small reset (restart):

Switch S2 of the HSCB board in left-hand position, switch S1 of the HSCB board in left-hand and then back to middle position.

Large reset:

Switch S2 in right position, switch S1 in left and then back to middle position, switch S2 to left position after loading has finished (loading phase 0).



with HSCB





58 CSI55 LX 07/2006

5 19” cabinets and cooling


/>

The communication server Integral 55 is marketed in a 19” cabinet or integrated in the existing customer infratsurtcure.

The RJ45 slot connection system is used for the panels.

For the Communication Server Integral 55 there are available different cabinet versions:

5.1

Standing casing

Standing casing S1 (material number: 49.9902.0611)

A rack can be installed in a standing casing S1. It can accommodate no more than one Communication

Server Integral 55. In addition, two HU (height units) are available for the server and / or service panel

(material number: 49.9904.8477).

The standing casing S1 is fitted with hidden rollers.

The front plate (plastic pane) can be ordered as a spare part.

Standing casing S1

1. Ground clamps (max. 3)

2. The standing casing S1 is locked using a no. 13 nut key

Dimensions

• Width = 550 mm

• Length = 550 mm

• Height = 11 HU

CSI55 LX 07/2006 59


Cabinet colour RAL 7035

Two standing casings S1 can be stacked on each other. Three standing casings must not be stacked on each other.

1. Hexagonal screw M6x30

2. Spacer roller

3. Covering plate

The two standing casings are connected using two M6 screws (1.). Spacer rollers (2.) must be fitted in between for each screw.

The two standing casings must be connected to each other using a earthing wire.

5.1.1

Cable routing

The Communication Server Integral 55 is placed on the ground in the standing casing S1 and then screwed tight on the guides.

The cable adapters are accessible from the rear. This is where the connecting circuit cables must be connected.

60 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Section standing casing, cable on cable adapter

5.2

33HU

19-inch cabinet 33HU

Dimensions

• Width (exterior) = 600 mm

• Length (exterior) = 600 mm

CSI55 LX 07/2006 61


• Height (exterior) = 1,650 mm

• Height (interior) = 33HU

• Profile rail = 495 mm

The cabinet colour and the colour of accessory parts is RAL 7035

Description

The cabinet can accommodate a maximum of 3 communications servers I55. Additionally, 6 HU are reserved for the application server, which must be separated thermally from the communication server I55.

Features: the cabinet is fitted with hidden rollers.

vertical profile rail in 2 levels front level 120mm separation from the front door in the section where the communication server I55 is located no separation in the section where the application server is located lockable glass door in the front closed locakable door at the rear

Lockable side panels

Cable insertion at the rear under the door and/or through the roof

Strain relief of the cables is installed at the server shield

1 multiple socket with 8 sockets

1 earthing rail for the connection of earthing cables 2,5-16 mm2

Work lead

Sliding rail for 1 application server

50 cage nuts, 50 mounting screws are attached in bulk form

Delivery will be in pallets, the supplier’s packaging will be used for packaging.

There is a documentation pocket in the door at the rear.

ECONET program options

Roof with 2 fans

Multiple socket with 8 sockets

Bottom of the device, fixed

19-inch keyboard tray type A

Patch panel 1HU

Blind panel 1HU

Blind panel 2HU

Blind panel 3HU

Blind panel 6HU

49.9905.9115

49.9904.8474

49.9904.6386

27.9798.2413

27.9798.2404

27.9798.2406

27.9798.2407

27.9798.2408

is required if 3 racks are used is required for redundant power supply

Blind panels serve to cover unoccupied height units

62 CSI55 LX 07/2006


CSI55 LX 07/2006 63


19-inch cabinet 33HU

Section of the 19-inch cabinet 33 HU on the pallet

5.3

42HU 500mm


Dimensions







Description

The system can be equipped with several Communication Servers I55 (max. 4) and several application servers.

Depending on the needs it is also possible to install uninterrupted power supplies UPS in the cabinet.

The level difference between the profile rails in the front and the rear is 500 mm.

Features: vertical profile rail at one level, front level 125 mm separation from the front door

Base 100 mm high with three-part floor panel (removable)

Adjustable levelling feet for levelling on irregular floors ventilated lockable glass door in the front closed locakable door at the rear

64 CSI55 LX 07/2006



Roof panel for cable insertion at the back

Ventilation holes and prepared for active ventilation (fan kit can be retrofitted)

Cable insertion through the floor, base and/or the roof

Jumpering bracket for cable routing left, right, front and rear

2 multiple sockets with 7 sockets each on 2 branching boxes.

1 earthing rail horizontal for the connection of earthing cables 2,5-16 mm2

Work lead

50 cage nuts, 50 mounting screws Torx are attached in bulk form



ECONET program options:

is required if more than 2 I55 are used Fan insert for active ventilation incl. 2 fans 18W

140 m3/h

Fan expansion kit consisting of 1 fan

Patch panel 1HU

Blind panel 1HU

Blind panel 2HU

Blind panel 3HU

Blind panel 6HU

Bottom of the device, fixed

500mm

Telescopic rail for bottom of device

Sliding rail for the second and further servers

49.9808.0869

27.9798.2258

27.9798.2413

27.9798.2404

27.9798.2406

27.9798.2407

27.9798.2408

27.9798.2474

27.9798.2553

27.9798.2289

is required for expansion of the fan insert and for replacement


5.4

42HU 730mm


Dimensions






CSI55 LX 07/2006 65



Description

This cabinet is used when the E200 application server is used. An assembly kit with a telescopic rail and a cable shears is preinstalled in the cabinet.

The system can be equipped with several Communication Servers I55 (max. 4) and several application servers.

Depending on the needs it is also possible to install uninterrupted power supplies UPS in the cabinet.

The level difference between the profile rails in the front and the rear is 730 mm.

Features: vertical profile rail at one level, front level 120 mm separation from the front door

Base 100 mm high with three-part floor panel (removable)

Adjustable levelling feet for levelling on irregular floors ventilated lockable glass door in the front closed locakable door at the rear


Roof panel for cable insertion at the back

Ventilation holes and prepared for active ventilation (fan kit can be retrofitted)

Cable insertion through the floor, base and/or the roof

Jumpering bracket for cable routing left, right, front and rear

2 multiple sockets with 7 sockets each on 2 branching boxes

1 earthing rail for the connection of earthing cables 2,5-16 mm2

Work lead

50 cage nuts, 50 mounting screws Torx are attached in bulk form



ECONET program options:

Fan insert for active ventilation incl. 2 fans 18W

140 m3/h

Fan expansion kit consisting of 1 fan

Patch panel 1HU

Blind panel 1HU

Blind panel 2HU

Blind panel 3HU

Blind panel 6HU

49.9808.0869

27.9798.2258

27.9798.2413

27.9798.2404

27.9798.2406

27.9798.2407

27.9798.2408

is required if more than 2 racks are used is required for expansion of the fan insert and for replacement


5.5

42HU-can be disassembled

ICC cabinet 42HU-can be disassembled

66 CSI55 LX 07/2006





• Height (interior) = 42 HU


Cabinet same as2 HE 730mm” GRAB=”T”>19” 42HU 730mm → 65but with removable horizontal struts for easy disassembly of the cabinet as it is possible, depending on local conditions, that the cabinet must be disassembled.

42HU 730mm → 65

5.6

Overview of components (1)

Edition:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

Maximum tilting height without pallet and packaging

Maximum tilting height with pallet and packaging

Transport on pallet equipped with racks

4.999.059.049 ICC-XXL

6+27HU

W 600 X H 600 X

L 1680

Schroff Proline

4.999.059.117 ICC-XXL 42HU with side panels

W 800 X H 800 X

L 2150

Rittal

TS8-System

DK 7995.453

HU Weight in kg

ICC cabinet

6+27HU

W X H X L

600 X 600 X

1650

Schroff Proline

< 1900

25 per rack

120

240

< 1900

X

1 to 3 racks

(max..27HU)

X

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 800 X

2150

Rittal TS8-Syst.

2295

Notes

2402

X

1 to 4 racks

X

CSI55 LX 07/2006 67


Edition:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

4.999.070.388 ICC-XXL 42HU without side panels

W 800 X H 800 X

L 2150

Rittal

TS8-System

DK 7995.561

4.999.070.418 1 pair of side panels

2000 X 800 for cabinet

4.999.070.388

DK 7824.208


W 800 X H 900 X

L 2150

Rittal

TS8-System

DK 7995.454


W 800 X H 900 X

L 2150

Rittal

TS8-System

DK 7995.563



4.999.070.399

and

4.999.070.411

DK 7824.209


W 800 X H 900 X

L 2150 can be disassembled

Rittal

TS8-System

DK 7995.455

HU Weight in kg

ICC cabinet

6+27HU

W X H X L

600 X 600 X

1650

Schroff Proline

187

53

260

205

55

260

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 800 X

2150

Rittal TS8-Syst.

X

Notes

O

68 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Edition:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name


W 800 X H 900 X


Rittal

TS8-System

DK 7995.564

4.999.070.420 Locks for 1 pair of side panels

(4pcs)

DK 7824.500

4.998.081.260 Baying kit incl.

fixing material PU

=4pcs

(2 PU are required to join 2 cabinets)

PS 4582.500

Base with closed frontplates

Floor panel, three-part, slidable

Sliding rail (Rittal) for server

2.797.982.289

Sliding rail

(Schroff) for server

Telescopic rail for server E200

4.999.020.096

DK 7063.900

Sliding rail variable depth

(Rittal) DK

7063.880 for installation of server E120

Multiple socket

HU Weight in kg

ICC cabinet

6+27HU

W X H X L

600 X 600 X

1650

Schroff Proline

205

1X

(for server)

X

1X 8 sockets with

5m cable and earthing-pin plug

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 800 X

2150

Rittal TS8-Syst.

O

O

X

X

2X

(for server + I55)

X

2X 7 sockets on branching box

Notes

CSI55 LX 07/2006 69


Edition:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

Lockable glass door front with ventilation holes

Closed lockable door at the rear


Profile rails front

Profile rails rear

Level difference profile rails front and rear

Cable insertion from rear

Cable insertion from below

Cable insertion from above

Earthing rail with clamp

12 jumpering bracktes front,

12 jumpering brackets rear.

Document pocket

Rollers

Levelling feet

Earth conductor

2,5mm2 conductor sleeves on both ends.

HU Weight in kg

ICC cabinet

6+27HU

W X H X L

600 X 600 X

1650

Schroff Proline

X left hinge

X left hinge

X

X

33HU distributed over 2 levels, 6HU for server and 27HU for CS I55 and others

X

6HU below in the server section

X

495mm in the server section

X

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 800 X

2150

Rittal TS8-Syst.

X right hinge

X right hinge

X

X

42HU

X

42HU

X

500mm

X

X

X through base

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

2

X

X

X

X

4

Notes

Separation

100-125mm from front door.

Clamps in enclosed plastic bag on rear door

70 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Edition:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name x cage nuts, M6 mounting screws and plastic washers.

Racks I55

HU Weight in kg

ICC cabinet

6+27HU

W X H X L

600 X 600 X

1650

Schroff Proline

X

(50x)

9 25

5

O max. 3

O 4.998.034.799 Application

Server E120

Standard

4.999.034.798 Application

Server E120

Professional


Server E200

Enterprise

4.998.095.981 Retrofitting kit for

E120

5

6

O

O

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 800 X

2150

Rittal TS8-Syst.

X

(100x)

Notes

In enclosed plastic bag

O max. 4

O

O

Voice

Server

2.797.982.289 Sliding rail for server

DK 7063.500

4.999.020.096 Telescopic rail for server E200

DK 7063.900

4.999.069.426 Sliding rail variable depth

(Rittal) DK

7063.880 for installation I55

4.999.059.115 Roof with fan sheet

4.998.080.869 Fan insert with 2 fans

TS 7886.000

O

O

O

2X part of the cabinet

O

1X per

E120

Server, sliding rail available in cabinet

Is required if more servers are used.


is required additionally if more than one I55 are not installed one on top of the other

Is required if

3 I55 racks are installed.

Is required if

3 or 4 I55 racks are installed.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 71


Edition:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

2.797.982.258 Fan expansion set

DK 7980.000

4.999.048.474 Bottom of the device, fixed

2.797.982.474 Bottom of the device 500

DK 7145.035

4.999.063.238 Assembly kit variable depth for bottom of the device

DK 7063.860

2.797.982.553 Telescopic drawer for bottom of the device

(50kg)

DK 7081.000

4.999.046.386 19” keyboard tray

2.797.982.413 Jumpering bracket

2.797.982.404 Blind panel

1

1

1




HU Weight in kg

ICC cabinet

6+27HU

W X H X L

600 X 600 X

1650

Schroff Proline

O

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 800 X

2150

Rittal TS8-Syst.

O

Notes

Is required if


The set consists of one fan for installation in the fan roof

Accessory shelf

O

2

3

6

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

+Bottom of the device 500

O

O

O

O

O

O

Extractable shelf for covering slots that are not needed for covering slots that are not needed for covering slots that are not needed for covering slots that are not needed

72 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Edition:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

4.999.046.814 Patch panel internal 3X8WE

(4-wire)

4.999.046.813 Patch panel internal 48WE

(2-wire)

4.999.048.477 Service panel

4.998.045.619 Telecommunications patch panel external 24WE

2.797.982.353 External patch panel CAT5

16WE

HU Weight in kg

1

ICC cabinet

6+27HU

W X H X L

600 X 600 X

1650

Schroff Proline

O

1

1

1

1

O

O

O

O


32WE


48WE

4.999.065.625 Multiple socket

2

3

O

O

O

4.998.079.986 C profile rail in

482,6 (6PU)

4.998.079.987 Cable rail

4.999.067.592 Mains cable with

CEE plug blue

5m


CEE plug blue

10m

4.998.080.012 19” frames for

LSA-Plus strips series 2(10 for

150 WP

3 O

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 800 X

2150

Rittal TS8-Syst.

O

Notes

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

1X for doubling not possible X = standard O = optional

5.7

Overview of components (2)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 73


Edition:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

Maximum tilting height without pallet and packaging

Maximum tilting height with pallet and packaging

Transport on pallet equipped with racks

4.999.059.049 ICC-XXL

6+27HU

W 600 X H 600 X

L 1680

Schroff Proline


W 800 X H 800 X

L 2150

Rittal

TS8-System

DK 7995.453


W 800 X H 800 X

L 2150

Rittal

TS8-System

DK 7995.561



4.999.070.388

DK 7824.208

HU Weight in kg

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 800 X

2150

Rittal TS8-Syst.

2330

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 900 X

2150 can be disassembled

Rittal TS8-Syst.

2330

Notes

25 per rack

120

240

187

53

2438

X

1 to 4 racks

2438

X

1 to 4 racks

74 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Edition:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name


W 800 X H 900 X

L 2150

Rittal

TS8-System

DK 7995.454


W 800 X H 900 X

L 2150

Rittal

TS8-System

DK 7995.563



4.999.070.399

and

4.999.070.411

DK 7824.209


W 800 X H 900 X


Rittal

TS8-System

DK 7995.455


W 800 X H 900 X


Rittal

TS8-System

DK 7995.564

S4.999.070.420Locks for 1 pair of side panels

(4pcs)

DK 7824.500

HU Weight in kg

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 800 X

2150

Rittal TS8-Syst.

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 900 X


Rittal TS8-Syst.

260 X

205

55

260

205

X

O

O

O

X

X

O

Notes

CSI55 LX 07/2006 75


Edition:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

4.998.081.260 Baying kit incl.

fixing material PU

=4pcs

(2 PU are required to join 2 cabinets)

PS 4582.500

Base with closed frontplates

Floor panel, three-part, slidable

Sliding rail (Rittal) for server

2.797.982.289

Sliding rail

(Schroff) for server

Telescopic rail for server E200

4.999.020.096

DK 7063.900

Sliding rail variable depth

(Rittal) DK

7063.880 for installation of server E120

Multiple socket

HU Weight in kg

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 800 X

2150

Rittal TS8-Syst.

O

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 900 X


Rittal TS8-Syst.

O

Notes

X

X

1X

(for server)

1x

(for I55)

X

X

1X

(for server)

2X

(for server + I55)

Lockable glass door front with ventilation holes

Closed lockable door at the rear


Profile rails front

X


X right hinge

X right hinge

X

X

42HU

X


X right hinge

X right hinge

X

X

42HU

Separation

100-125mm from front door.

76 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Edition:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

Profile rails rear

Level difference profile rails front and rear

Cable insertion from rear

Cable insertion from below

Cable insertion from above

Earthing rail with clamp

12 jumpering bracktes front,

12 jumpering brackets rear.

Document pocket

Rollers

Levelling feet

Earth conductor

2,5mm2 conductor sleeves on both ends.

x cage nuts, M6 mounting screws and plastic washers.

Racks I55


Server E120

Standard


Server E120

Professional


Server E200

Enterprise

HU Weight in kg

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 800 X

2150

Rittal TS8-Syst.

X

42HU

X

730mm

X through base

X

X

X

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 900 X


Rittal TS8-Syst.

X

42HU

X

730mm

X through base

X

X

X

9

5

5

6

25

X

X

X

X

4

X

(100x)

O max. 4

O

O

O

X

X

X

X

4

X

(100x)

O max. 4

O

O

O

Notes

Clamps in enclosed plastic bag on rear door

In enclosed plastic bag

Voice

Server

CSI55 LX 07/2006 77


Edition:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

4.998.095.981 Retrofitting kit for

E120

2.797.982.289 Sliding rail for server

DK 7063.500

4.999.020.096 Telescopic rail for server E200

DK 7063.900

4.999.069.426 Sliding rail variable depth

(Rittal) DK

7063.880 for installation I55

4.999.059.115 Roof with fan sheet

4.998.080.869 Fan insert with 2 fans

TS 7886.000

2.797.982.258 Fan expansion set

DK 7980.000

4.999.048.474 Bottom of the device, fixed

HU Weight in kg

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 800 X

2150

Rittal TS8-Syst.

O


O


O

O

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 900 X


Rittal TS8-Syst.

O

Notes

O


O


O

O

1X per

E120

Server, sliding rail available in cabinet



is required additionally if more than one I55 are not installed one on top of the other

Is required if

3 I55 racks are installed.

Is required if


Is required if


The set consists of one fan for installation in the fan roof

Accessory shelf

78 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Edition:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name

2.797.982.474 Bottom of the device 500

DK 7145.035

4.999.063.238 Assembly kit variable depth for bottom of the device

DK 7063.860

2.797.982.553 Telescopic drawer for bottom of the device

(50kg)

DK 7081.000

4.999.046.386 19” keyboard tray

2.797.982.413 Jumpering bracket





HU Weight in kg

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 800 X

2150

Rittal TS8-Syst.

O

+ assembly kit variable depth

O

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 900 X


Rittal TS8-Syst.

O

+ assembly kit variable depth

O

Notes

1

1

1

2

3

6

O

+assembly kit variable depth

+bottom of device

O

+assembly kit variable depth

+bottom of device

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

Extractable shelf for covering slots that are not needed for covering slots that are not needed for covering slots that are not needed for covering slots that are not needed

4.999.046.814 Patch panel internal 3X8WE

(4-wire)

4.999.046.813 Patch panel internal 48WE

(2-wire)

4.999.048.477 Service panel

4.998.045.619 Telecommunications patch panel external 24WE

1

1

1

1

O

O

O

O

O

O

CSI55 LX 07/2006 79


Edition:

Material number

01.06.2002

Name


16WE


32WE


48WE


4.998.079.986 C profile rail in

482,6 (6PU)

4.998.079.987 Cable rail


CEE plug blue

5m


CEE plug blue

10m

4.998.080.012 19” frames for

LSA-Plus strips series 2(10 for

150 WP

HU Weight in kg

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 800 X

2150

Rittal TS8-Syst.

1 O

ICC cabinet

42HU

W X H X L

800 X 900 X


Rittal TS8-Syst.

O

Notes

2

3

3

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

1X for doubling

X = standard O = optional not possible

5.8

Selection of cabinets for installation of the Integral 55

The rack is designed in such a way that it can be installed in any standard 19” cabinet, regardless of the other components. In order that components can be inserted in the rack from the front (EOC, cable etc.), there must be a gap of at least 150 mm length between the front of the rack and the cabinet door. Depending on the size of the cabinet, several racks or other 19” components can be installed stacked on top of each other.

The installation of lockable doors can prevent unauthorised access to the modules.

Selection of cabinets taking into account heat dissipation

How do I select a suitable 19” cabinet or how do I assess the suitability of an existing 19” cabinet for installation of a Integral 55 (1-n racks and/or additional devices), taking into account the thermal requirements?

Why is heat offtake so important?

80 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Temperature is public enemy number one for the sensitive microelectronic components. A rule of thumb suggests that each increase in temperature by 10

◦

C (based on the recommended operating temperature) cuts the life-expectancy in half. Accordingly, it is very important that this energy is kept away from the components and is taken off outwards.

Thermal offtake concept for the 19” cabinet

The following options are available for thermal offtake from the 19” cabinet:

Passive ventilation

Passive ventilation of the cabinets is the simplest method. Using incoming air apertures in the base and/or the door and waste air apertures in the roof plate and/or door, the air exchange is managed on the basis of the principle ”front bottom for incoming, cool air” and ”top back to let the hot air out.” Whether or not this variant can be used depends on the power dissipation of the installed components and on the max. inner cabinet temperature (dependent on the equipment in use).

Active ventilation

Active ventilation (forced ventilation) is another possibility. Using incoming air apertures in the base and/or the door and waste air apertures in the roof plate and/or door, the air exchange is managed on the basis of the principle ”suck in incoming, cool air from the front bottom” and ”blow out hot air at the top back.” The number of fans is dependent on the power dissipation of the installed components and on the max. inner cabinet temperature (dependent on the equipment in use). As a standard, manufacturers offer roofs with 2 fans (air output per fan from 120 m3/h upwards). In general, additional fans can be retro-fitted. Furthermore, the fans can be controlled and monitored by thermostat or electronic, remote monitoring.

Solution: I55 in a 19” cabinet:

Conditions for the selection of cabinets for installation of the Integral 55:

19” cabinet with

Passive ventilation

Active ventilation with

No fan X at least

2 fans

X

I55 in a 19” cabinet without additional active components

1 rack

(9HU)

2 racks

(18HU)

3 racks

(27HU)

4 racks (36HU)

X

X

X

X

-

X

X

-

-

X at least

3 fans at least

4 fans

X X X X at least

5 fans

X X X X

19” cabinet with

Passive ventilation

Active ventilation with

No fan at least 2 fans at least 3 fans

I55 in a 19” cabinet

with additional active components -> determine power loss Pv up to 500

W

X

501W-

750W

-

751W-

1000W

-

1001W-

1250W

-

1251W-

1500W

-

>

W

-

1500

X

X

X

X

-

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

CSI55 LX 07/2006 81


at least 4 fans at least 5 fans

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

-

X

-

Exact calculation is required.

Explanation/help:

• passive ventilation: Incoming air apertures in the base and/or door at the front and waste air apertures in the roof and/or door at the rear

• active ventilation: Forced ventilation using a fan, incoming air apertures in the base and/or door at the front and fans in the roof/side panel

• Power dissipation Pv Rack: 250 W are assumed per rack

• Determine total power loss = Pv (rack) x number of racks + Pv plus components + Pv plus components

+ .......

• Volume flow of the fans min. 120 m3/h

• An exact calculation is required if the power dissipation is greater than 1500 W

• The max. ambient temperature for the Integral 55 is 45 the 19” cabinet should not exceed +40

◦

C.

◦

C, i.e. the max. ambient temperature outside of

Option: thermostat for fan control, remote monitoring of the fans

In view of the extremely varied possibilities, manufacturers of 19” cabinets ensure a flexible design of the cabinet systems, so that the cabinets can be adjusted to suit the thermal requirements retrospectively.

5.9

Air conditioning

5.9.1

Overview

Taking into consideration the following ambient conditions

• electric power dissipation Pv of the Integral 55 in the cabinet

• electric power dissipation Pv of additional devices in the cabinet

• Ambient temperature Tu (outside of the cabinet)

• Temperature inside the cabinet Ti

• Temperature difference Delta Ti-Tu

• IP protection

• Cooling performance Qk

• Type and location of assembly and cabinet size (height HU, width, length)

82 CSI55 LX 07/2006


the following options are available for the ventilation and cooling of the 19” cabinet:

• Intrinsic convection, heat transmission through the cabinet surface

• Passive ventilation, intrinsic convection with issue of the hot air from inside

• Active ventilation, forced convection, direct heat exchange using fans

• Heat offtake through the cooler (is not taken into consideration)

• Heat offtake through the cooler (is not taken into consideration)

5.9.2

Intrinsic convection, heat transmission through the cabinet surface

• Closed design, no apertures for incoming or outgoing air

• Max. feasible power dissipation between 300 and 500 W, depending on cabinet size, form of installation and temperature difference

• The feasible power loss is reduced by approx. 15 % in the event of series assembly

• IP protection max. IP55 possible

Calculation of the power loss that can be taken off

Po = k x A x (Ti - Tu) [W]

Po k

A

Ti

Tu power that can be taken off via the cabinet surface

Heat transfer coefficient (steel plate 5 W/m2K)

Effective cabinet surface, depending on the form of installation, for calculation see

”Calculation formula of the effective cabinet surface”

Inner temperature of cabinet

Ambient air temperature

CSI55 LX 07/2006 83


5.9.3

Intrinsic convection with issue of the hot air from inside

• Open design, incoming air apertures on the base or door, waste air apertures in the roof

• Max.feasible power loss between 600 and 700 W, depending on cabinet size, form of installation and temperature difference

• The feasible power loss is reduced by approx. 10 % in the event of series assembly


Incoming air in the base, waste air in the roof

84 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Incoming air from the front (side of door), waste air at the rear (aperture in door)

5.9.4

Forced convection, direct heat exchange using fans

• Open design

• Max. feasible power loss 1500 W, depending on fans in use (size, number) and temperature difference

• IP protection max. IP54 possible a) Filter fans

CSI55 LX 07/2006 85


b) Fan operation c) Roof fans

86 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Calculation of the required volume flow

V = 4 x Pv / (Ti- Tu) [m3h]

V

Pv

Ti

Tu

Required volume flow dissipation in the cabinet (heat output on the surface of the cabinet has been neglected)



5.9.5

Thermal offtake by cooling device:

• Closed design

• Max. feasible power loss approx. 1000 W, depending on cabinet size, form of installation, air conditioning system and temperature difference


Calculation of the required cooling performance


Qk = Pv - Po [W]

Po k

A

Ti

Power that can be taken off via the cabinet surface





CSI55 LX 07/2006 87


Tu

Qk


Required cooling performance of the cooling device

5.9.6

Forced circulation due to heat exchanger (air/air)

• Closed design

• Max. feasible power loss approx. 1500 W, depending on cabinet size, form of installation and heat exchanger


Calculation of the required cooling performance


Qk = Pv - Po [W]

Po k

A

Ti

Tu

Qk

Power that can be taken off via the cabinet surface






Required cooling performance of the cooling device

5.9.7

Calculation formula for the effective cabinet surface

Individual casing, free-standing on all sides

A = 1.8 x H x (W+D)+1.4 x W x D

Individual casing for wall mounting

A = 1.4 x W x (H+D)+1.8 x D x H

88 CSI55 LX 07/2006

W = cabinet with

H = cabinet height

D = cabinet depth


Start-end casing, free-standing

A = 1.4 x D x (H+W)+1.4 x W x H

Start-end casing for wall mounting

A = 1.4 x H x (W+D)+1.4 x W x D

Central casing, free-standing

A = 1.8 x W x H + 1.4 x W x D + D x H

Central casing for wall mounting

A = 1.4 x W x (H+D) + D x H

CSI55 LX 07/2006 89


5.9.8

Flow chart: Air conditioning in a 19”cabinet for the installation of I55

90 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Flow chart

5.10

Universal installation aids

The universal installation aid consists of two round bolts with a groove running around and a M6 thread.

Section of cabinet, round bolts (1) and M6 thread (2)

This pins are screwed by hand into the upper mounting nuts on the left and right of the cabinet. Then grasp the rack by the bracket with one hand and underneath the rack with the other hand and place the cabinet on to the pins.

The mounting screws are screwed into the rack on the left and right sides, but are not tightened.

The round bolts are then crewed out of the upper part; the rack is raised slightly by the bracket in order to facilitate the removal of the bolts. Now screw in the upper screws and tighten, the lower screws are also tightened.

The upper mounting screws are removed and the bolts are fastened in order to remove a rack from the cabinet.

The lower screws are then removed and the rack is raised carefully by the bolts.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 91


Take care that the lower section of the rack suspended from the bolts is always pressed with one hand against the cabinet, as the rack is only held by the nut on the bolt when on the pins.

The bolts are not enclosed with the system. They can be ordered separately.

The material number is: 4.999.054.358

The installation aids work in any cabinet in which the installations are attached using cage nuts M6.

There is no counterpressure exerted against the insert screws M6 that run in the tracks (e.g.

for Kn ürr cabinets), so that the screws may fall out.

The bracket used to collect the cable is also used as a grip. It is a standard part of each rack and remains attached.

The bracket used to collect the cable should not be used as a grip for carrying during transport.

5.11

Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 01

TS-DK networkcabinet DK 7821750 modified, reference number: : 4.999.089.755

Dimensions

Width

Height

Depth

Colour

Surface execution

Flat parts

800 mm

2020 + 100 mm (42 U)

800 mm

Profile frame rack in RAL 7044, electrophoresis immersion primer

RAL 7035 powder-coated texture

Further information can be found at Technology Portal/Data networks/System cabinets/ free-standing MDF.

5.12

Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 33 F

TS-DK networkcabinet DK 7821.510 modified, reference number: 4.999.089.756

Dimensions

Width

Height

Depth

Colour

Surface execution

600 mm

1600 + 100 mm (33 U)

800 mm


92 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Flat parts RAL 7035 powder-coated texture


5.13

Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 02

TS-DK networkcabinet DK 7821760 modified, reference number: 4.999.089.757

Dimensions

Width

Height

Depth

Colour

Surface execution

Flat parts

800 mm

2020 + 100 mm (42 U)

900 mm


RAL 7035 powder-coated texture


CSI55 LX 07/2006 93

6 Power supply

6 Power supply

General Points

In principle, all modules can be connected to the mains voltage of

230 V, 50 Hz and 60 Hz

The fuse protection for every electric circuit consists of a C Type 16 A slow acting automatic circuit breaker.

Doubled PS must be fed by separate circuits (phase and fuse).

4 different power supply modules are available, used according to module or application: The same type of power supply unit is used for the two devices in the 19” rack, the CSI55 and the ICS.

Power supply CSI55 and ICS (19” racks)

• PSL55

For projects an adaption set - see PS350 Adaption → 94 In the ICS this set cannot be used.

Power supply units for the B3 module

• Direct feed PS280A (only B3 module)

• PS350A for reserve battery operation, doubling (for B3 module)

• Additional ISPS power supply for B3 module with more than 10 connected modules

The power supply boards PS280A and PS350A are connected to the designated slots on the B3 module.

Redundant doubling of the PS in the B3 module can only be done using the PS350A.

In the B3 module, the supplementary ISPS power supply may only be used in the appropriate slot.

The supplementary ISPS power supply module is made up of two similar DC/DC converters. It is supplied with -48 V from two PS350As.

6.1

19”rack

/>

The following power supply units are used in the 19” rack:

• PSL55 → 122

• PS350A → 124 combined with PS350 Adaption (not in the ICS)

For the installation of the PS350A the

6.1.1

PS350 Adaption

By means of a special adaption set a PS350A can be installed in the Integral 55 rack. The installation is done on the left side (front side). The first connecting circuit slot is lost.

94 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

The PS350A can be operated with both 48V and with 230 V, 50/60 Hz or 115 V, 60 Hz mains voltage. The electrical values of the PS350A are shown under PS350A, Technical data → 124

In combination with the PSL55, ringing voltage frequency 50 Hz, the PS350A can be operated as a redundant power supply.

Assembly kit 1 or 2 has to be included in the order for the installation of the PS350A. It comprises the cover plate, filter, internal wiring and installation material.

1. PS350 Adaption

Six assembly kits have been defined:

1. Assembly kit for 48V power supply with 50/25 Hz AC ringing voltage, material number: 49.9907.8083

2. Assembly kit for 230V/115V AC power supply with 50/25 Hz AC ringing voltage, material number:

49.9907.6490

3. Assembly kit fuse clamp for 19” cabinet, material number: 49.9907.7417

4. Assembly kit fuse clamp for standing casing, material number: 49.9907.7416

5. Assembly kit for expansions (19” cabinets and standing casings), material number: 49.9907.7419

6. Installation kit, material number: 49.9907.4791

CSI55 LX 07/2006 95

6 Power supply

The installation procedures during operation vary depending on the different application cases:

96 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

Failure and replacement of the PS350A in the case of redundant power supply or retrofitting of the

PS350A

PBX only with mains voltage 230V/115V

Note / Necessary auxiliary means Activity

Disconnection of 230V/115V

Removal of the defective PS350A

Connection of 230V/115V to a new PS350A Mains cable with protective conductor required!

Contained in assembly kit 2.

Insertion of the preloaded PS350A

Disconnection of 230V/115V by removing the mains cable

Install cover assembly kit

Connection of 230V/115V to PS350A cover

Installation kit 2

Mains cable without protective conductor

(contained in assembly kit 6), or combination of mains cable with protective conductor and adapter cable


PS350A

System with 48V battery voltage

Note / Necessary auxiliary means Activity

Put the switch to OFF

Disconnection of -48V

Removal of the defective PS350A

Put the switch of the new PS350A to OFF

Connection of the -48V battery voltage;

Screw cable to cover clamps

Put the battery plug of the cover into the PS350A

Put the switch to ON, preloading of the PS350A

Insertion of the preloaded PS350A

Install cover assembly kit Installation kit 1


PS350A

System with 230V and 48V battery voltage

Here, preference should be given to preloading using the 48V battery voltage.

The installation/replacement is done with assembly kit 1.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 97

6 Power supply

6.1.1.1

Installation

Startup procedure of a PS350A in Integral 55

The startup procedure of a PS350A in I55 is as follows:

1. Simple power supply with PS350A

• Installation of the PS350A

• Connection of 230V

• Put the switch to off

• Connection of -48V

• Put the switch to on

2. Redundant power supply with PS350A and PSL55




• Connection of -48V

• Put the switch to on

• Installation of the PSL55


3. Failure and replacement of the PS350A in the case of redundant power supply


• Disconnection of -48V

• Disconnection of 230V

• Removal of the defective PS350A

• Put the switch of the new PS350A to off

• Connection of -48V (preloading of the PS350A), hast to be preloaded with -48V because 230V must not be used due to the interruption of the protective conductor (PE).



Installation PS350 Adaption

1. Insert the PS350A into the slot

2. Screw the separators at the top and at the bottom (1.) into the rack.

98 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

3. Connect the wire ends for

• 230V (1.)

• -48V to the PS350A (2.) and

• -48V to the clamps (3.).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 99

6 Power supply

Put the cover onto the rack and screw it at the top and at the bottom (1).

100 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

6.1.1.2

Switching off the ringing current PSL55

The power supply unit PSL55 can be operated in conjunction with a PS350A Rev 02.

If it is necessary to ring with 72VAC/25Hz, the ringing current output on the PSL55 must be switched off so that the ringing current generator of the PS350A 72VAC/25Hz can be activated, see Ringing current switchover

PS350A → 102.

This is done by means of the switch located on the underside of the PSL55. The switch must be placed in the direction of the multiple socket.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 101

6 Power supply

1. Ringer switch

The supplied sticker must be attached to the PSL55.

6.1.1.3

Ringing current switchover PS350A

The power supply unit PS350A Rev 02 can be operated in conjunction with the PSL55.

If it is necessary to ring with 72VAC/25Hz the ringing current output on the PS350A must be switched from ringing voltage frequency 50 Hz to 25 Hz, see also Switching off the ringing current PSL55 → 101.

This is done by means of the switch located on the underside of the PS350A.

102 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

PS350A, underside

1. Switch for ringing voltage frequency

The instructions are shown on the side panel of the housing.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 103

6 Power supply

PS350A

1. PS350A

2. Instruction plate

6.1.1.4

48V in cabinet

There is a fuse clamp for 19” cabinet for the connection of the -48V voltage in the cabinet.

104 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

The fuse clamp can be extended by up to four connecting options.

In the standing casing the fuse clamp is mounted as shown in the picture.

6.1.1.5

Special aspects

The following points should be noted in the case of redundant power supply with PS350A:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 105

6 Power supply

• It is not possible to have redundant 48V supply in one rack. Only one PS350A can be plugged.

• The switchover time of the ringing voltage generators in the event of failure of a generator is approx.

20 ms from PS350A to PSL55 and approx. 200 ms from PSL55 to PS350A. This might disconnect an analogue connection that is in the calling state at that time.

• A redundant operation mode of the ringing voltage is not possible for the 25 Hz setting (for redundant power supply the ringing voltage must be deactivated on the PSL55).

• Fault signalling is not assigned unequivocally to the power supply unit and is also created twice.

• A special configuration and identification of the first connecting circuit slot is required for the use of the

PS350A in CAT and IMS.

• When plugging or unplugging the PS350A a special startup procedure has to be followed.

Please note also the connection of the

6.1.2

FPE in cabinets

Connect the copper wire (FPE=green/yellow, greater/equal 2.5 mm2) to the earthing rail in the 19” cabinet.

There is a clamp on the base of the standing casing for the copper wire.

All racks must be earthed via a separately routed protective conductor. Earthing via the protective conductor of the power cord does not suffice.

The protective conductor has a green-yellow insulating jacket and a minimum cross-section of 2.5 mm2.

It is clamped to:

• The earthing rail (19” cabinet) or ground clamp (standing casing).

• The ground clamp on the rear side depicted in the following diagram.

106 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

Section of the rear of the rack

1. Ground clamp

6.1.2.1

19”cabinet

The general information of the earthing concept must be taken into account. In the following you will see graphic presentations of various configurations and their earthing measures.

Arrangement in 19” cabinet without UPS or with UPS outside the cabinet

CSI55 LX 07/2006 107

6 Power supply

1. Multiple sockets

2. Junction boxes in the cabinet

3.

For mains connection:Fixed connection with separation option e.g. cable 49.9906.7592 with CEE plug

For UPS: Connecting cable UPS system/cabinet 49.9906.8660

4. Potential equalisation conductor (PA) leads to the potential equalisation bar of the electrical installation of the building minimum 6 mm2

5. Potential equalisation bar cabinet

6. Cabinet housing

Arrangement in a 19” cabinet with UPS systems in the cabinet

108 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

1. Multiple socket of the UPS system

2. UPS system

3. Multiple socket in the cabinet

4. Junction box in the cabinet

5. Fixed connection with separation option, e.g. cable 49.9906.7592 with CEE plug

6. Potential equalisation conductor (PA) min. 6 mm2 to potential equalisation bar of electrical installation of the building


8. Cabinet

CSI55 LX 07/2006 109

6 Power supply

CSI55 and other devices such as servers can be connected to the sockets of the upper or lower configuration.

An intermediate cable with material number 29.4752.3540 must be used to connect the

PSL55 power supply unit.

The mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003 is then connected to this intermediate cable that only has L and N conductors. The mains cable has L, N and PE.

The mains cable can then be connected to the mains connection for example via the multiple socket in the cabinet.

6.1.2.2

Standing casing

Connection of a rack in the standing casing (C1 module)

1. Intermediate cable 29.4752.3540

2. Mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003

3. Mains connection circuit or UPS connection

4. Lockable earth plug with cable 49.9804.5750

5. Cabinet

The lockable earth plug with cable 49.9804.5750 is only used in C1 modules!

Connection of two racks in the standing casing (C2 module)

110 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply


2. Mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003


4. FPE conductor min. 2.5 mm2

5. Potential equalisation bolt on standing casing


7. Cabinet



CSI55 LX 07/2006 111

6 Power supply



6.1.2.3

Housing/Cabinet solutions

The general information of the earthing concept must be taken into account. In the following you will see graphic presentations of various configurations and their earthing measures.

Arrangement in 19” cabinet without UPS or with UPS outside the cabinet

1. Multiple sockets

2. Junction boxes in the cabinet

3.

For mains connection:Fixed connection with separation option e.g. cable 49.9906.7592 with CEE plug

For UPS: Connecting cable UPS system/cabinet 49.9906.8660

112 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

4. Potential equalisation conductor (PA) leads to the potential equalisation bar of the electrical installation of the building minimum 6 mm2


6. Cabinet housing

Arrangement in a 19” cabinet with UPS systems in the cabinet

1. Multiple socket of the UPS system

2. UPS system

3. Multiple socket in the cabinet

CSI55 LX 07/2006 113

6 Power supply

4. Junction box in the cabinet

5. Fixed connection with separation option, e.g. cable 49.9906.7592 with CEE plug



8. Cabinet





Connection of a rack in the standing casing (C1 module)


2. Mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003


4. Lockable earth plug with cable 49.9804.5750

5. Cabinet

The lockable earth plug with cable 49.9804.5750 is only used in C1 modules!

114 CSI55 LX 07/2006

Connection of two racks in the standing casing (C2 module)

6 Power supply

.


2. Mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003


4. FPE conductor min. 2.5 mm2

5. Potential equalisation bolt on standing casing


7. Cabinet

CSI55 LX 07/2006 115

6 Power supply

6.2

B3 module

The following power supply units are used in B3 modules:

• PS280A → 123

• PS350A → 124

• ISPS (IMTU Supplementary Power Supply) → 125

The connection of 230V and 48V is made in the

6.2.1

Fuse Panels

Connection to the Supply Circuit

The B3 module is suitable for connection to 230 Volt alternating mains voltage or 48 Volt direct voltage or both.

The modules may have more than one connection to the supply circuit.

Operation with Battery or External 48 Volt Direct Current Voltage

The connecting cables for the battery or the external 48 Volt direct current voltage supply to the 1/2 kg rack must have a minimum cross-section of 6 mm2.

Depending on the cable length, higher cable cross-sections may be required to prevent the voltage drop from exceeding the permissible values.

If the system is supplied by an external 48 Volt direct current voltage source, this must be safely isolated from the mains voltage and correspond with the classification for SELV. A suitable, easily accessible disconnecting device which corresponds to the current values above is to be provided in the supply circuit.

Protective Earthing

All modules must generally be earthed via a separately routed protective conductor. Earthing via the protective conductor of the power cord does not suffice.

The protective conductor must have a green-yellow insulating jacket and a minimum cross-section of 2.5 mm2 if mechanical protection is present, or 4 mm2 if this is not the case. More detailed information can be found in the “Earthing concept” section.

116 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

6.2.1.1

Fuse panel -48 V 1/2 K rack

Fuse panel -48V 1/2 K rack

1. Fuses F1 to F2 DIAZET Type USED 16, S16 A/500 V, time-lag

2. From primary current supply

PS 1

PS 2

PS 3

PS 4 o = Single PS x = Doubled PS

F 1 o x

F 2 o x

Sequence pattern of PS1 to PS4 (front view)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 117

6 Power supply

Text on label

Rear view of the 1/2 K rack

1. first B3 module

2. second B3 module

3. Mains supply assembly kit B1, B3 230V 29.5630.8061

or

Mains supply assembly kit B3 230V 29.5630.8071

for power supply second B module (PS2)

4. UPS operation assembly kit B1, B3 -48 V 29.5630.8081

or

UPS operation assembly kit B1E -48V 29.5630.8091

for power supply second B module (PS2) or assembly kit -48V doubling of B modules 29.5630.830

5. Mains supply assembly kit B1, B3 230V 29.5630.8061

for power supply first B module (PS1)

118 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

6. UPS operation assembly kit B1, B3 -48V 29.5630.8081

for power supply first B module (PS1) or assembly kit -48V doubling of B modules 29.5630.8301

6.2.1.2

Connecting the Battery

Move the battery switch to position 0 on all inserted PS350 power supply units. The battery switch is located on the front panel of the unit.

Disconnect the battery connection (e.g. remove the -48V fuse in the battery compartment).

Strip the end of the cable (approx. 15 cm). Feed the connecting cable from the battery into the console. Strip the ends of both wires.

Clamp the red wire (GND) and the blue wire (-48 V) to the terminals on the locking plate illustrated.

1. Console, section of the front side

6.2.1.3

Cross-section of the cable between the B3 module and the battery

Simple distance

2 m

4 m

6 m

8 m

10 m

12 m

14 m

Fuse as per standard value

16 A 20 A 25 A

2.5 mm2

2.5 mm2

4 mm2

6 mm2

6 mm2

10 mm2

10 mm2

2.5 mm2

4 mm2

6 mm2

6 mm2

10 mm2

10 mm2

16 mm2

2.5 mm2

4 mm2

6 mm2

10 mm2

10 mm2

16 mm2

16 mm2

32 A

2.5 mm2

6 mm2

10 mm2

10 mm2

16 mm2

16 mm2

25 mm2

50 A

4 mm2

10 mm2

16 mm2

16 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

35 mm2

63 A

6 mm2

10 mm2

16 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

80 A

6 mm2

16 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

50 mm2

CSI55 LX 07/2006 119

6 Power supply

46 m

48 m

50 m

52 m

54 m

56 m

58 m

60 m

62 m

30 m

32 m

34 m

36 m

38 m

40 m

42 m

44 m

64 m

66 m

68 m

70 m

Simple distance

16 m

18 m

20 m

22 m

24 m

26 m

28 m

Fuse as per standard value

16 A 20 A 25 A

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

10 mm2

16 mm2

16 mm2

16 mm2

16 mm2

16 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

70 mm2

16 mm2

16 mm2

16 mm2

16 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

16 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

32 A

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

25 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

63 A

120 mm2

120 mm2

120 mm2

120 mm2

120 mm2

150 mm2

150 mm2

150 mm2

150 mm2

150 mm2

150 mm2

150 mm2

185 mm2

185 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

50 A

95 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

120 mm2

120 mm2

120 mm2

120 mm2

120 mm2

120 mm2

120 mm2

150 mm2

150 mm2

35 mm2

35 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

50 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

80 A

150 mm2

150 mm2

150 mm2

150 mm2

150 mm2

185 mm2

185 mm2

185 mm2

185 mm2

185 mm2

185 mm2

240 mm2

240 mm2

240 mm2

50 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

70 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

95 mm2

120 mm2

120 mm2

120 mm2

120 mm2

150 mm2

Clamp cross-section: B3 module 16 mm2

Intermediate distribution will be required for larger supply conductor cross-sections.

.

Please note also the connection of the

6.2.2

FPE in B3 module

The standing casings, 19” cabinets and possibly also the standing cabinets must be connected to a FPE.

The dimensions of the copper wire are dependent on the installations (sum of the amperage of the individual devices). The exact procedure is described in the chapter Earthing concept → 136 .

Feed the copper wire (FPE=green/yellow, greater/equal 2.5 mm2) through one of the cable openings in the console.

120 CSI55 LX 07/2006

Strip the end of the wire.

Direct Supply

Use a cable lug to clamp the wire to the screw with toothed lock washer illustrated.

6 Power supply

Console of the PBX Integral 55, section from the front side

Uninterrupted Power Supply

Clamp the wire on the screw terminal shown into the locking plate.

Check whether the FPE is properly connected to the potential equalisation bar, distribution battery and server!

Clamp the wire on the screw terminal shown into the locking plate.

1. Console, section of the front side

To protect against fire and energy hazards, fuses must only be replaced with fuses of the same type. Fuses F1 to F4 DIAZET Type USED 16, S16 A/500 V, time-lag

CSI55 LX 07/2006 121

6 Power supply

.

6.3

PSL55

The power supply module PSL55 has the following performance features:

• Harmonics as per EN 61000 (PFC).

• Noise immunity input 4 kV (1.2/50).

• Delayed disconnection of outputs -28 V, -48 V, -60 V during overload/short-circuit

• Delayed disconnection of device during overload/short-circuit of +5 V output.

• Board ID data

• I2C bus port

Technical Data

Voltages and Frequencies

Mains voltage

Mains frequency

PSL55, Part number: 49.9902.4943

230 V; ±10 % (single phase alternating current)

230 V, 50 Hz -6% +26%;

Reduced voltage

AC ringing voltage

-5 V, +5 V, -28 V, -48 V, -60 V

72 V

Ringing voltage frequency 50/60 Hz

Protection class 1 (in accordance with VDE 0100)

Radio interference suppression

Limit class B (in accordance with EN 55022 and VDE 878)

Device input

Power and currents

Pprim

Iprim

Device output


PSL55, Part number: 49.9902.4943

325 VA

1.52 A

P

+ 5V

-5V

-28 / 48V

-60V

72 V

PSL55, Part number: 49.9902.4943

262 W

18 A

1 A

*#2.2 / 3.2* A

1.3*# A

0.18 A

122 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

* = total performance max. 154W

# = total performance max. 140W

6.4

PS280A

The power supply module PS280A has the following performance features:



• Delayed disconnection of outputs -28 V, -48 V, -60 V during overload/short-circuit


Technical Data


Mains voltage

PS280A, Part number: 49.9807.6163

230 V; plus/minus 10 % (single phase alternating current), switchable to 115

V; plus/minus 10 %

Mains frequency

Reduced voltage

230 V, 50 Hz or 60 Hz; plus/minus 3 Hz; 115 V, 60 Hz; plus/minus 3 Hz

-5 V, +5 V, -28 V, -48 V, -60 V

AC ringing voltage 72 V

Ringing voltage frequency 50/60 Hz

Protection class


1 (in accordance with VDE 0100)


Device input


Pprim

Iprim

Device output


PS280A, Part number: 49.9807.6163

450 VA

1.82 A

P

+ 5V

-5V

-28 / 48V

-60V

72 V

PS280A, Part number: 49.9807.6163

337 W

23 A

1.5 A

3.2* A

0.8 A

0.18 A

CSI55 LX 07/2006 123

6 Power supply

* total performance max. 154 W

6.5

PS350A

The power supply module PS350A (Frako) has the following performance features:



• Power increase of outputs compared to PS280 (see table).

• Delayed disconnection of outputs -28 V, -48 V, -60 V during overload/short-circuit and power increase 28

V/5 A


• Call generator synchronisation when doubling the power supply (PS350A/PSL55 only in case of 50 Hz ringing voltage frequency)

Technical Data


Mains voltage

Mains frequency

Battery voltage

Reduced voltage

PS350A, Part number: 49.9807.6164

230 V; plus/minus 10 % (single phase alternating current), switchable to 115

V; plus/minus 10 %

230 V, 50 Hz or 60 Hz; plus/minus 3 Hz; 115 V, 60 Hz; plus/minus 3 Hz

-48 V

-5 V, +5 V, -28 V, -48 V, -60 V

AC ringing voltage

Protection class


72 V

Ringing voltage frequency 50 Hz redundancy with PSL55;

25 Hz no redundancy with PSL55

1 (in accordance with VDE 0100)


Device input


Pprim

Iprim

Ibat

Device output


PS350A, Part number: 49.9807.6164

with battery charge

622 VA

2.7 A and 230 V

PS350A, Part number: 49.9807.6164

with battery operation

622 VA

13 A and 55.2 V

PS350A, Part number: 49.9807.6164

with battery charge

PS350A, Part number: 49.9807.6164

with battery operation

124 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

P

+ 5V

-5V

-28 / 48V

-60V

72 V

Ibat

435 W

23 A

1.5 A

5.0/5.0* A

2.5* A

0.18 A

1.8* A

* = Total power less/equal 300 W

435 W

23 A

1.5 A

5.0/5.0* A

2.5* A

0.18 A

6.6

ISPS (IMTU Supplementary Power Supply)

The supplementary power supply module ISPS is used for the direct feeding of the boards of the B3 module if more than 10 modules are connected.

The 2 DC/DC converters work parallel to the B3 module’s PS350A power pack. They convert the superfluous capacity of the -48 V rail to +5 V.

Maximum capacity 1 ISPS per B3 module

Technical data


Mains voltage

Mains frequency

Reduced voltage

ISPS, material number: 28.5630.1991

-48 V direct current voltage from PS280 or PS350

DC

+ 5 V

Device Input Side

Capacity and Currents

Pprim

Iprim


122 VA

2.55 A

Device Output Side

Capacity and Currents

P

+ 5V


100 W

20 A

6.6.1

Fuses

CSI55 LX 07/2006 125

6 Power supply

To protect against fire and energy hazards, fuses must only be replaced with fuses of the same type.

Remove cooling plate (four screws on conductor side) fuses F1 and F2 with G fuse link 6.3 x 32 mm, 20 A, 250 V, semi-lag fuses F3 and F4 with G fuse link 5 x 20 mm, 4 A, 250 V, time-lag

Board ISPS, location of fuses

6.7

Uninterrupted Power Supply

Stand-alone and built-in (19” technology) devices are available for the uniterrupted power supply (UPS).

The procedures that are relevant to assembly and commissioning are described in the manufacturer documents. These documents are enclosed with the products.

A distinction is made between online technology and line-interactive technology. The application fields of each type are partly different. While the line-interactive family is able to compensate

• Power failures

• Voltage oscillations

• Voltage peaks

• Undervoltage

• Overvoltage online USP systems are also capable of compensating

• Voltage surges

• Alternating voltages

• Voltage bursts

• High harmonic oscillations

126 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

.

Online USP systems must always be used for customers with increased safety requirements such as Hospitals, Police, Fire Brigade or energy supply companies. In addition to that, online UPS systems will continue to be used in cases where a poor quality of the mains supply must be expected, for example near railway lines, sawmills etc.

The selection criteria are shown below.

Time UPS solution Disturbances in the mains supply

1. Power failures

2. Voltage oscillations

3. Voltage peaks

4. Undervoltage

5. Overvoltage

6. Lightning strikes

7. Voltage surges

8. Frequency oscillations

9. Voltage bursts

10. High harmonic oscillations

>

<

10 ms

16 ms

4 - 16 ms continuous continuous sporadic

<

4 ms sporadic periodic continuous

EN 50091-3/

IEC 620403

VFD

Voltage+

Frequency

Dependent

VI

Voltage+

Interpendent

VFI

Voltage+

Frequency

Independent

Classification 3 passive standby operation

( offline)

Classification 2

line interactive

operation

Classification 1 double conversion operation

( online)

Discharge solution

———-

———-

———-

———-

———-

Lighting and over voltage protection

IEC (60364-5-534)

———-

———-

———-

———-

6.7.1

Online UPS systems

Off.-Pos.

#.218.310.100

#.218.310.101

Material number or

T-Mat. No.

4.999.085.468

4.999.085.469

#.218.310.104

#.218.310.105

#.218.310.102

4.999.085.472

4.999.085.473

4.999.085.470

Name MGE

Item number

Online

Pulsar Extreme

1000 C UPS

Pulsar Extreme

1000 C battery pack

Pulsar Extreme

1000 C Rack

Pulsar Extreme

1000 C Rack

Battery pack

Pulsar Extreme

1500 C UPS

66346

66349

66352

66355

66347

Material number

4.999.084.360

4.999.084.361

4.999.084.364

4.999.084.365

4.999.084.362

CSI55 LX 07/2006 127

6 Power supply

Off.-Pos.

Material number or

T-Mat. No.

4.999.085.471

4.999.085.474

4.999.085.475

4.999.085.476

4.999.085.477

4.999.085.485

4.999.085.489

4.999.085.490

4.999.085.491

4.999.085.486

4.999.085.487

4.999.085.488

4.999.085.492

4.999.085.493

4.999.085.494

4.999.085.495

4.999.085.496

4.999.085.497

#.218.310.103

#.218.310.106

#.218.310.107

#.218.310.108

#.218.310.109

#.218.310.110

#.218.310.114

#.218.310.115

#.218.310.116

#.218.310.111

#.218.310.112

#.218.310.113

#.218.310.117

#.218.310.118

#.218.310.119

#.218.310.120

#.218.310.121

#.218.310.122

Name MGE

Item number

Online

Pulsar Extreme

1500 C battery pack

Pulsar Extreme

1500 C Rack

Pulsar Extreme

1500 C Rack

Battery pack

Pulsar Extreme

2000

Pulsar Extreme

2000 Battery LA

Pulsar Extreme

2000 Battery XLA

Pulsar Extreme

2000 Rack

Pulsar Extreme

2000 Rack Battery

LA

Pulsar Extreme

2000 Rack Battery

XLA

Pulsar Extreme

3000

Pulsar Extreme

3000 Battery LA

Pulsar Extreme

3000 Battery XLA

Pulsar Extreme

3000 Rack

Pulsar Extreme

3000 Rack Battery

LA

Pulsar Extreme

3000 Rack Battery

XLA

Comet Extreme

4500

Comet Extreme

4500 battery pack

LA

Comet Extreme

4500 Rack

66350

66353

66356

67747

67960

67961

67767

67980

67981

67827

67964

67965

67847

67984

67985

67865

67970

67875

Material number

4.999.084.363

4.999.084.366

4.999.084.367

4.999.084.368

4.999.084.369

4.999.084.370

4.999.084.374

4.999.084.375

4.999.084.376

4.999.084.371

4.999.084.372

4.999.084.373

4.999.084.377

4.999.084.378

4.999.084.379

4.999.084.380

4.999.084.381

4.999.084.382

128 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

Off.-Pos.

#.218.310.123

Material number or

T-Mat. No.

4.999.085.498

Name MGE

Item number

Online

Comet Extreme

4500 Rack Battery

LA

67990

6.7.1.1

Technical Data

In the relevant documents:

Pulsar EXtreme C

Pulsar EXtreme and

Comet EXtreme you will find the technical specifications concerning the products from the firm MGE.

Material number

4.999.084.383

6.7.2

Line-Interactive UPS systems

Off.-Pos.

#.218.310.124

#.218.310.126

#.218.310.125

#.218.310.128

#.218.310.127

#.218.310.130

#.218.310.129

#.218.310.131

#.218.310.132

Material number or

T-Mat. No.

4.999.085.499

4.999.085.501

4.999.085.500

4.999.085.503

4.999.085.502

4.999.085.505

4.999.085.504

4.999.085.506

4.999.085.507

Name MGE

Item number

Interactive

Pulsar Evolution

500 Kombi

Pulsar Evolution

800 Rack

Pulsar Evolution

800 Tower

Pulsar Evolution

1100 Rack

Pulsar Evolution

1100 Tower

Pulsar Evolution

1500 Rack

Pulsar Evolution

1500 Tower

Pulsar Evolution

2200 Kombi

Pulsar Evolution battery pack 2200

66225

66227

66226

66229

66228

66231

66230

66232

66235

Material number

4.999.084.384

4.999.084.386

4.999.084.385

4.999.084.388

4.999.084.387

4.999.084.390

4.999.084.389

4.999.084.391

4.999.084.392

CSI55 LX 07/2006 129

6 Power supply

6.7.2.1

Technical Data

In the relevant document

Pulsar Evolution you will find the technical data concerning the product Pulsar Evolution from the firm MGE.

6.7.3

Supplementary components

Off.-Pos.

#.218.312.633

Material number or

T-Mat. No.

4.999.046.989

Name MGE

Item number

Material number

4.999.046.989

#.218.312.632

#.218.310.003

#.218.310.004

#.230.001.368

#.218.312.634

4.999.046.988

4.999.077.567

4.999.077.565

4.999.100.382

4.999.046.990

Accessories

Status information kit card Pulsar

Extreme C

Status information kit card

Pulsar/Comet

Extreme

WEB/SNMP card

10/100 BASET

(Extreme)

WEB/SNMP card

10/100 BASET

(ExtremeC)

Management Pac

2

Mains earthed

CEE input cable

Multiple socket

IEC 320-USE

Adapter cable

66246

66060

66074

66244

66923

Mains earthed

CEEADAPT

4.999.046.988

4.999.077.567

4.999.077.565

4.999.100.382

4.999.046.990

4.999.092.960

4.999.093.055

6.7.4

Explanations

Name

Pulsar Extreme 1000

C UPS

Material number

4.999.085.468

Pulsar Extreme 1000

C battery pack

4.999.085.469

Successor mat. no.

4.999.084.360

4.999.084.361

Parts list

4,999,084,360 Pulsar

Extreme 1000 C Rack

4.999.046.990 Mains earthed

CEE input cable

4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE adapter cable


4.999.084.361 Pulsar

Extreme 1000 C Battery Pack

130 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

Name

Pulsar Extreme 1500

C UPS

Material number

4.999.085.470

Pulsar Extreme 1500

C battery pack

4.999.085.471

Pulsar Extreme 1000

C Rack

4.999.085.472

Pulsar Extreme 1000

C Rack Battery pack

4.999.085.473

Pulsar Extreme 1500

C Rack

4.999.085.474

Pulsar Extreme 1500

C Rack Battery pack

Pulsar Extreme 2000

Battery LA

Pulsar Extreme 2000

Battery XLA

Pulsar Extreme 3000

Battery LA

Pulsar Extreme 3000

Battery XLA

Pulsar Extreme 2000

Rack

4.999.085.475

Pulsar Extreme 2000 4.999.085.476

4.999.085.477

4.999.085.485

Pulsar Extreme 3000 4.999.085.486

4.999.085.487

4.999.085.488

4.999.085.489

Successor mat. no.

4.999.084.362

4.999.084.363

4.999.084.364

4.999.084.365

4.999.084.366

4.999.084.367

4.999.084.368

4.999.084.369

4.999.084.370

4.999.084.371

4.999.084.372

4.999.084.373

4.999.084.374

Parts list

4,999,084,362 Pulsar

Extreme 1500 C Rack


CEE input cable



4.999.084.363 Pulsar

Extreme 1500 C UPS Battery

Pack

4,999,084,364 Pulsar

Extreme 1000 C Rack


CEE input cable



4,999,084,365 Pulsar

Extreme 1000 C Rack Battery pack

4.999.084.366 Pulsar

Extreme 1500 C Rack


CEE input cable



4.999.084.367 Pulsar

Extreme 1500 C Rack Battery pack

4,999,084,368 Pulsar

Extreme 2000


4,999,084,369 Pulsar

Extreme 2000 Battery LA

4,999,084,370 Pulsar

Extreme 2000 Battery XLA

4.999.084.371 Pulsar

Extreme 3000


4.999.084.372 Pulsar

Extreme 3000 Battery LA

4.999.084.373 Pulsar

Extreme 3000 Battery XLA

4.999.084.374 Pulsar

EXtreme 2000 Rack


CSI55 LX 07/2006 131

6 Power supply

Name

Pulsar Extreme 2000

Rack Battery LA

Material number

4.999.085.490

Pulsar Extreme 2000

Rack Battery XLA

4.999.085.491

Pulsar Extreme 3000

Rack

4.999.085.492

Pulsar Extreme 3000

Rack Battery LA

4.999.085.493

Pulsar Extreme 3000

Rack Battery XLA

4.999.085.494

Comet Extreme 4500 4.999.085.495

Comet Extreme 4500 battery pack LA

4.999.085.496

Comet Extreme 4500

Rack

4.999.085.497

Comet Extreme 4500

Rack Battery LA

4.999.085.498

Pulsar Evolution 500

Kombi

4.999.085.499


Tower

4.999.085.500

Successor mat. no.

4.999.084.375

4.999.084.376

4.999.084.377

4.999.084.378

4.999.084.379

4.999.084.380

4.999.084.381

4.999.084.382

4.999.084.383

4.999.084.384

4.999.084.385

Parts list

4,999,084,375 Pulsar

Extreme 2000 Rack Battery

LA

4,999,084,376 Pulsar


XLA

4.999.084.377 Pulsar

Extreme 3000 Rack


4.999.084.378 Pulsar


LA

4.999.084.379 Pulsar


XLA

4.999.100.502 Comet

EXtreme 4500 Basic device

4.999.084.381 Comet

Extreme 4500 Battery Pack

LA

4.999.084.381 Comet

Extreme 4500 Battery Pack

LA

4.999.100.503 Comet

Extreme 4500 Rack Basic device

4.999.084.383 Comet


LA

4.999.084.383 Comet


LA

4.999.084.384 Pulsar

Evolution 500 Kombi


CEE input cable



4.999.084.385 Pulsar

Evolution 800 Tower


CEE input cable



132 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

Name


Rack


Tower


Rack


Tower


Rack


Kombi

Material number

4.999.085.501

4.999.085.502

4.999.085.503

4.999.085.504

4.999.085.505

4.999.085.506

Successor mat. no.

4.999.084.386

4.999.084.387

4.999.084.388

4.999.084.389

4.999.084.390

4.999.084.391

Parts list

4.999.084.386 Pulsar

Evolution 800 Rack


CEE input cable



4,999,084,387 Pulsar

Evolution 1100 Tower


CEE input cable



4,999,084,388 Pulsar

Evolution 1100 Rack


CEE input cable



4,999,084,389 Pulsar

Evolution 1500 Tower


CEE input cable



4,999,084,390 Pulsar

Evolution 1500 Rack


CEE input cable



4,999,084,391 Pulsar

Evolution 2200 Kombi


CEE input cable



4.999.084.392 Pulsar

Evolution battery pack 2200

Pulsar Evolution battery pack 2200

4.999.085.507

4.999.084.392

6.7.5

Installation and service concept

Installation and service concept for the Uninterrupted Power Supply from MGE, see Installation and service concept Uninterrupted Power Supply from MGE.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 133

6 Power supply

6.7.6

Earthing measures

6.7.6.1

Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, standing casing

For Discharge currents >3.5 mA, see

Annex 5 → 140 you must connect an earthing wire to Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, standing casing.

Proceed as follows:

Extract Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, standing casing

1. Ground clamp

• Clamp the earthing wire to the ground clamp (1.).

6.7.6.2

Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, rack version


Annex 5 → 140 you must connect an earthing wire to Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, rack version.

Proceed as follows:

134 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

Extract Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, rack version

1. Ground clamp


6.7.6.3

Pulsar Extreme 1500 - 3000


Annex 6 → 141 you must connect an earthing wire to Pulsar Extreme 700C-3000.

Proceed as follows:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 135

6 Power supply

Extract Pulsar Extreme 1500 -3000

1. Cover

2. Opening for connecting cable

3. Connecting clamps

• Unscrew the cover (1).

• Insert the earthing wire through the designated opening (2.).


• Screw the cover back on to the device (1).

6.8

Earthing concept

Telecommunications systems generally required protective earthing (E) and often functional earthing (FE).

Both protective earthing (PE) and functional earthing (FE) can be implemented by means of a functional and protective earthing conductor (FPE).

Earthing of telecommunications systems is based on EN 60950 and DIN VDE 0800, Part 2, “Telecommunications Engineering - Earthing and Potential Equalization”.

136 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

The PE supplied via the earthing-pin plug can then also be used as FE, provided that the operating current flowing via functional earthing from the telecommunications system is no more than 9 mA alternating current and/or more than 100 mA direct current from a direct voltage source with 60 V or more than 50 mA from a direct voltage source with 120 V. If this limit is exceeded, a permanently connected functional earthing conductor, that can also be used as FPE, must be fitted.

The question of when, how and which devices are to be earthed (PE) for reasons of electrical safety, as well as device-specific information, is dealt with in the decision-making diagram in the sections titled “Earthing concept for devices / systems” and “Earthing concept for devices/systems operating via a UPS”.

If a device/system has leakage current of greater than 3.5 mA, the protective-conductor terminal must always be permanently connected to earth. The leakage currents exhibited by I55 systems, also in combination with various UPSs, are listed in the tables in Annex 4 to Annex 6.

Housings and cabinet solutions were defined to allow safe and easy handling of the earthing measures.

6.8.1

General Requirements and Explanations for the Decision-Making Diagram

• A permanently connected protective earthing (PE) conductor for several devices is to be implemented in such a way that removal of one device does not lead to the PE connection for one or several other devices being interrupted at any point. This can be achieved, for example, by star-shaped routing of the PE connection from a local earth terminal to the individual devices. (DIN VDE 0800 part 2 Section

6.2.2.5.2)

• The protective earthing (PE) conductor is insulated in green/yellow or is bare (DIN VDE 0100, Part 540,

Section 5.2).

• The minimum cross-section of the functional earthing (FE) conductor depends on the nominal current strength of the assigned safety device (e.g. automatic circuit breaker), but is at least 2.5 mm2. More detailed specifications can be found in Table 1 of DIN VDE 0800, Part 2, Section 6.2.2.5.5 (Annex 1).

• The absolute minimum cross-section of the separate earthing wire is: 2.5 mm2 if mechanical protection is provided (e.g. conductors sheathed in a cable, cable duct or conduit), 4 mm2 if this is not the case (see

DIN VDE 0100 Part 540 Section 5). It also specifies that the minimum cross-section is proportionate to the operating current of the safety device and its response time as well as to a material coefficient. By way of providing a guideline, the minimum cross-section of the protective conductor must be same as the cross-section of the external conductor (mains supply cable) of the system. If the protective conductor comprises a conductor in a multi-wire cable (see DIN VDE 0100, Part 540, Section 5.2.1), the minimum cross-section is the same as the cross-section of the external conductor (see DIN VDE 0100, Part 540,

Section 5.1.2). If the supply cable comprises a cable with flexible conductors, its minimum cross-section is 0.75mm2 (depending on the supply current) (see DIN VDE 0100, Part 520, Section 524.3, Table 52

J).

• The minimum cross-section of the functional and protective earthing conductor (FPE) is subjected to the same high requirements as for FE and E.

6.8.2

Explanations for the terms SELV, TNV1, TNV2 and TNV3:

In an SELV electric circuit, limited voltages only (max. 42.4 V peak value or 60 V direct voltage) may occur

(both in standard operation and after a single fault), with the exception of temporary exceptions in the event of faults. SELV voltages are regarded as contact-safe. (refer to EN 60950, Section 2.3 for more detailed specifications).

In a TNV2 electric circuit limited voltages only may occur in standard operation: Uac/70.7+Udc/120 V<1

(except for telephone ringing signals). Temporary exceptions in the event of single faults are permissible within defined boundaries. (refer to EN 60950, Section 6.2 for more detailed specifications).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 137

6 Power supply

TNV1 electric circuits are SELV circuits that are subjected to overvoltage surges of the telecommunications network.

TNV3 electric circuits are TNV2 circuits that are subjected to overvoltage surges of the telecommunications network.

6.8.3

Annex 1

Minimum cross-sections for sections of the functional earthing conductor (from DIN VDE 0800, Part 2, Section

6.2.2.5.5)

Nominal current strength of the assigned safety device 1) in A up to 25 up to 35 up to 50 up to 63 up to 125 up to 160 up to 224 up to 250 up to 630 up to 800 up to 1000

Minimum cross-section of the copper conductor in mm2

2,5

4

6

10

16

25

35

50

70

95

120

1) The safety device must not be located in the course of the earthing conductor.

6.8.4

Annex 2

Earthing concept for devices/systems of protective class I

Protective earthing (PE) required due to TNV/SELV #1 yes no

Discharge current >3.5 mA #3,5 yes no

Fixed access via:

Potential equalisation bar in the building

or

Oven connection socket

Fixed access via:


or


or

Lockable two-pole earth plug

Discharge current >3.5 mA #3,5 yes

Fixed access via:


or


no

PE via earthing-pin plug of device

Earthing concept for devices/systems in protective class II


138 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

Fixed access via:


or


or


No PE required

Explanations for the decision-making tables:

#1

If a device is connected to both TNV2 / TNV3 circuits (e.g. analog a/b connection or Uko interface) and also

SELV or TNV1 circuits (e.g. V24, S0, UPo, S2m) (DIN EN 60950, section TNV circuit)

6.8.5

Annex 3

Earthing concept for devices/systems in protective class I operating via a UPS system


Discharge current >3.5 mA #2 yes no

Fixed access for all devices and UPS via:


or




or


or

Lockable two-pole protection pin plug

Discharge current >3.5 mA #2 yes



or


no

E via earthing-pin plug of the UPS and devices

Earthing concept for devices/systems in protective class II operating via a UPS system

Protective earthing (PE) required due to TNV/SELV #1 yes



or


or


The PE for the UPS can be supplied via its earthing-pin plug if its leakage current is <3.5 mA.

A fixed access is necessary if the discharge current is >3.5 mA.

no

PE is not necessary for devices in protective class II.

The PE for the UPS can be supplied via its earthing-pin plug if its leakage current is <3.5

mA.

A fixed access is necessary if the discharge current is >3.5

mA.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 139

6 Power supply

Explanations for the decision-making tables:

#1

If a device is connected to both TNV2 / TNV3 circuits (e.g. analog a/b connection or Uko interface) and also

SELV or TNV1 circuits (e.g. V24, S0, UPo, S2m) (DIN EN 60950, section TNV circuit)

#2

Sum total of leakage currents from UPS and connected devices

6.8.6

Annex 4

Discharge currents of I55 systems

Module type

C1 (R1)

C2 (R1-R2)

C3 (R1-R3)

C4 (R1-R4)

Power supply unit

1 x PS350 49.9902.4902

2 x PS350 49.9902.4902

2 x PS350 49.9902.4902

4 x PS350 49.9902.4902

3 x PS350 49.9902.4902

6 x PS350 49.9902.4902

4 x PS350 49.9902.4902

8 x PS350 49.9902.4902

Leakage current

< 0.8 mA

< 0.8 mA

<

<

<

<

<

<

0.8 mA

0.8 mA

0.8 mA

0.8 mA

0.8 mA

0.8 mA

Input filter leakage current

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

Total leakage current

< 0.8 mA

< 1.6 mA

< 1.6 mA

<

3.2 mA

< 2.4 mA

<

4.8 mA

< 3.2 mA

<

6.4 mA

A fixed earth connection is certainly necessary for all extensions, as the lockable earth plugs are insufficient in this case to handle the high leakage current (>3.5 mA).

Module type Power supply unit

B3

PS leakage current

< 0.5 mA


< 0.3 mA


< 0.8 mA 1 x PS280A

49.9807.6163

1 x PS350A

49.9807.6164

2 x PS350A

49.9807.6164

<

<

0.7 mA

0.7 mA

<

<

1.0 mA

1.7 mA

6.8.7

Annex 5

Leakage currents of I55 systems with UPS Pulsar Extreme 700C, 1000C, 1500C

Power supply unit Leakage current Module type

C1 (R1) 1 x PS350

49.9902.4902

< 0.8 mA

UPS Pulsar Extreme

700C, 1000C, 1500C

< 0.4 mA

Leakage current total

< 1.2 mA

140 CSI55 LX 07/2006

6 Power supply

C2

(R1-R2)

C3

(R1-R3)

C4

(R1-R4)

2 x PS350

49.9902.4902

2 x PS350

49.9902.4902

4 x PS350

49.9902.4902

3 x PS350

49.9902.4902

6 x PS350

49.9902.4902

4 x PS350

49.9902.4902

8 x PS350

49.9902.4902

<

<

<

<

<

<

<

1.6 mA

1.6 mA

3.2 mA

0.8 mA

4.8 mA

3.2 mA

6.4 mA

<

<

<

0.4 mA

0.4 mA

0.4 mA

<

<

<

<

<

<

<

2.0 mA

2.0 mA

3.6 mA

2.8 mA

5.2 mA

3.6 mA

6.8 mA



B3

PS leakage current

< 0.5 mA


< 0.3 mA


< 0.8 mA 1 x PS280A

49.9807.6163

1 x PS350A

49.9807.6164

2 x PS350A

49.9807.6164

<

<

0.7 mA

0.7 mA

<

<

1.0 mA

1.7 mA

If an I55 is used in connection with a B3 module (IMTU), the values of the ”total leakage current” must be added to the values ”total leakage current” for the I55.

6.8.8

Annex 6

Leakage currents of I55 systems with UPS Pulsar Extreme 1500, 2000, 3000

Module type

C1 (R1)

Power supply unit Leakage current UPS Pulsar Extreme

1500, 2000, 3000

< 0.8 mA < 2.7 mA 1 x PS350

49.9902.4902

2 x PS350

49.9902.4902

< 1.6 mA


< 3.5 mA

<

4.3 mA

C2

(R1-R2)

2 x PS350

49.9902.4902

< 1.6 mA < 2.7 mA <

4.3 mA

CSI55 LX 07/2006 141

6 Power supply

C3

(R1-R3)

C4

(R1-R4)

4 x PS350

49.9902.4902

3 x PS350

49.9902.4902

6 x PS350

49.9902.4902

4 x PS350

49.9902.4902

8 x PS350

49.9902.4902

<

<

<

<

<

3.2 mA

2.4 mA

4.8 mA

3.2 mA

6.4 mA

<

<

2.7 mA

2.7 mA

<

<

<

<

<

5.9 mA

5.1 mA

7.5 mA

5.9 mA

9.1 mA



B3

PS leakage current

< 0.5 mA


< 0.3 mA


< 0.8 mA 1 x PS280A

49.9807.6163

1 x PS350A

49.9807.6164

2 x PS350A

49.9807.6164

<

<

0.7 mA

0.7 mA

<

<

1.0 mA

1.7 mA

If an I55 is used in connection with a B3 module (IMTU), the values of the ”total leakage current” must be added to the values ”total leakage current” for the I55.

6.9

Power consumption

-48 V Power consumption of the I55 when fully configured

Module/rack

R1 rack

1/2K rack (B3)

I (A)

1.5 A

14 A

Power supply parameteres for the connected terminals in the T13 families

Analogue terminals via ASCEU

Analogue terminals via ASC2

Digital terminals via S0 or UPN

DECT per base station Bosch

48 V/7 mA (350 mW)

28 V/9 mA (250 mW)

48 V/7 mA (350 mW)

48 V/70 mA (3.5 W)

142 CSI55 LX 07/2006

7 Doubling

7 Doubling

7.1

Doubling

There are two reasons for doubling:

• As an option, the central functions of the communication server Integral 55 may be doubled redundantly in order to increase the security against failure.

• In addition to the redundant doubling, it may be necessary within the system to double certain functions in order to enhance the performance (e.g. processor performance or electrical output)

Because these functions have been created with the aid HW units (boards, equipment), this means that if doubling occurs, a unit will be used not once, but several times in the system.

7.2

Single module

Up to four racks (standing casing, racks in 19” cabinets, racks in 19” frames or any combination thereof) can form a single module, spread over any area and connected by flexible cables.

Module types:

The following names have been defined for the various module types:

C1: Module with one rack (R1)

C2:

C3:

C4:

Module with 2 racks (R1+R2)

Module with 3 racks (R1+R2+R3)

Module with 4 racks (R1+R2+R3+R4)

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

CSI55 LX 07/2006 143

7 Doubling

7.2.1

doubling PS

Doubling of the PS within one module is possible for each individual rack (R1, R2, etc.)

The PSL55 occupies the right-hand slot in the rack. A PSL55 is also connected to the left-hand side of the rack in the event of PS doubling.


CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

C4 Module with PS doubling

The doubling of the PSL55 may be necessary for reasons of:

• Redundancy

• Performance increase

For projects an adaption set - see PS350 Adaption → 94

7.2.2

doubling CF*

Mixed operation CF22/CF2E in one module is not permitted.

CF doubling within one module is only possible in the R1 rack.

An additional CF22/CF2E board, which is normally operated by hot stand-by, can only be inserted there. In the event of trouble on the active CF22/CF2E side, a complete automatic switchover to the previously passive

CF22/CF2E takes place. Individual messages may be lost here.

The slot for the second CF22/CF2E board is reserved and must be set up during system configuration.

144 CSI55 LX 07/2006

7 Doubling


CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

R1 rack (C1 module) with CF doubling

The switching matrix facilities of a recently inserted CF22/CF2E are updated automatically by adopting the current information from the active CF22/CF2E, while at the same time entering all connections made since insertion.

CF doubling is possible in the R1 rack.


CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

C4 module with CF doubling

7.2.3

doubling *CB

Mixed operation ACB/HSCB in one module is not possible (different operating systems).

Although doubling of the ACB/HSCB board is possible, technical reasons dictate that it is not necessary in the single module.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 145

7 Doubling

7.3

Twin module

An I55 twin module is made up of any two I55 single modules (C1, C2, C3 or C4), which, connected to each other by a transmission channel (optical waveguide), form an I55 system. With regard to the central boards, the facilities of the connected, individual modules is the same as with a single module.

Each module has its own CF22/CF2E and ACB/HSCB.


CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E e.g. a twin module consisting of 2 C1 modules

7.3.1

doubling PS

The power supply (PS) can generally be doubled in any rack of any module that forms a so-called twin module together with an additional module.

The purpose of the PS doubling may be to establish redundancy or to increase performance.


CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E e.g. a twin module consisting of 2 C1 modules

For projects an adaption set - see PS350 Adaption → 94

7.3.2

doubling CF* (within a module)

146 CSI55 LX 07/2006

7 Doubling

Mixed operation CF22/CF2E in one module is not permitted. However, the other module

(twin) can be equipped with two other CF boards which have to be identical, e.g. two CF2E.

If the central functions of this board are to be doubled redundantly, the CF22/CF2E boards will then be doubled in the R1 racks of the connected, single modules. This also includes an additional transmission link. For a transmission link to be operable however, it must not only have an optical waveguide, but also the

CFIML

function unit on the CF22/CF2E board.

In principle, the active CF22/CF2E board transmits on both available optical waveguide lines. This means the

MTU functions operate respectively on the CF22/CF2E board which is active at that time. This also operates the optical waveguide line of the hot stand-by CF22/CF2E board however. In the event of a failure on the active side, a complete switchover to the hot stand-by CF22/CF2E side will take place.


CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

A twin module consisting of 2 C1 modules with CF22/CF2E doubling

If failure of a transmission link occurs without redundancy (double fault!), the two modules are separate and no longer form a joint unit, they each remain operable, if only in a limited sense.

The switching matrix facilities of a recently inserted CF22/CF2E are updated automatically by adopting the current information from the active CF22/CF2E, while at the same time entering all connections made since insertion.

7.3.3

doubling *CB

Mixed operation ACB/HSCB in one module is not possible (different operating systems).

Although doubling of the ACB/HSCB board is possible, technical reasons dictate that it is not necessary.

In the event of ACB/HSCB board failure in a twin module, the corresponding module will also fail. The second module will continue to operate without limitation. The second ACB/HSCB board, which is still intact, cannot take on the functions of the failed ACB/HSCB.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 147

7 Doubling


CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

Twin module consisting of 2 C1 modules

7.4

Multi-module

7.4.1

Interconnected systems

An I55 multi-module system is made up of several, varied I55 and I33 single modules (between 3 and 16 or between 17 and 32, depending on the configuration), which are connected to each other by a multi-module, which can be either an ICS (3 to 16 modules) or a B3 module (17 to 32 modules). The multi-module is accommodated in a separate module casing. If an ICS is used the casing is a 19” rack and can be installed in the same cabinet as the CSI55 modules. If more than 16 modules have to be interconnected it is necessary to use a B3 module with the IMTU function, which cannot be integrated in the 19” technology of the CSI55.

Multi-module without MTU/IMTU doubling with ICS

148 CSI55 LX 07/2006

7 Doubling


CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

Multi-module without MTU/IMTU doubling with B3 module

CSI55 LX 07/2006 149

7 Doubling


CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

PS = only PS350A

The following boards are used in the multi-module, among others:

• MLB Module Link Board

• ISMx IMTU Switching Matrix

• ICF IMTU Central Functions

The following chapters describe how operation with the multi-module can be carried out in various ways.

7.4.2

MLB (Module Link Board)

• Board for optical fibre connection; 8 modules can be connected by one 5ML. Up to 2 MLB boards can be used in one ICS (16 groups).

• Up to four MLB boards can be inserted in one B3 module (17 to 32-group system).

• The optical fibre connectors can be distributed as desired onto the MLB board.

• See also MLB Module Link Board → 209

Example:

4 required optical waveguide connections can be installed on one MLB, although they are distributed over 4

MLB boards.

150 CSI55 LX 07/2006

7 Doubling

7.4.3

ISMx

• Switching matrix with control

• See also ISMx Switching Matrix x → 206

Four of these boards are present in each multi-module. Should one of these board fail, the remaining connected modules continue working. Connections which have been made via the failed ISMx board will be disconnected.

When doubled, both multi-modules must contain ISMx boards which are the same type.

7.4.4

ICF

• Inter module manager, clock generation.

• An optical fibre pair can be connected to form a connection path between the IMTU’s during doubling.

• See also ICF IMTU Central Functions → 285

7.4.5

IVZ on *CB boards

The IVZ is always doubled and is placed onto the ACBs/HSCBs of 2 participating modules. This variant is suitable as long as the number of modules is not too high (normal limit is 8 modules).

The I1 package can be configured with a maximum of 20 groups.

IVZ on ACB/HSCB boards

CSI55 LX 07/2006 151

7 Doubling


CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

1. IVZ

7.4.6

IVZ on separate *CB boards

IVZ and RIVZ slots may be allocated as desired.

Installation of a ACB/HCSB (with IVZ function) in a B3/ICS module is generally

not possible for software reasons!

The I2. I3 or I4 package can be expanded with a maximum of 32 groups.

Other functional units of the I3 and I4 packages are assigned to separate ACB/HSCB boards.

IVZ on separate ACB/HSCB boards

152 CSI55 LX 07/2006

7 Doubling


CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

1. IVZ

7.4.7

Doubling of the PS in the B3 module

The failure of a non-doubled PS in a B3 module is synonymous with the failure of the entire multi-module. This means that communication between the individual, connected modules is no longer possible. Accordingly, all modules fail completely for communication between modules excepting the two modules with IVZ functions.

This risk can be reduced by doubling the PS (only PS350A) in the multi-module redundantly.

7.4.8

Complete doubling

Doubling of the transmission link

In a multi-module system, only one transmission link per module can ever be connected to a multi-module

(ICS or B3 module). Connecting two transmission links for one module to just one multi-module contradicts the redundancy concept and is therefore not technically possible - it would lead to erratic behaviour in the system.

Accordingly, transmission links can only be doubled in a fully doubled multi-module system.

Fully redundant system

In a complete double system, the CF22/CF2E board is present twice over in the individual connected modules for redundancy purposes, and likewise the multi-module (ICS or B3 module).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 153

7 Doubling

Depending on the slots, one of the two CF22/CF2E boards in each module is connected with one of the two multi-modules by transmission link.

In this, each of the two multi-modules forms one half of the system together with the CF22/CF2E boards they are connected to. One of these is the ”active” system half, in which all user data is processed, as for a nondoubled system. The other is the ”hot stand-by” half, which is activated in different ways in the event of the

”active” half failing.

1. Fibre-optic cable for linking the interconnection servers

2. Fibre-optic link to the ”hot standby” half of the system

3. Fibre-optic link to the ”active” half of the system

4. CF22/CF2E of the ”hot standby” half of the system

5. CF22/CF2E of the ”active” half of the system

154 CSI55 LX 07/2006

7 Doubling

Complete IMTU doubling

In the event of one of the functional units on one of the two CF22/CF2E or one optical waveguide connection failing, the missing information is brought over to the module in question from the inactive to the active side, and therefore is replaced. This alternative route will remain in existence for the duration of the failure.

Following repairs, the active CF22/CF2E in the ”default” active side should take over the information flow again. This is brought about by a manual service changeover on either one of the two CF22/CF2E boards of the affected module. This also automatically releases the alternative route between the two ICS/B3 modules, making it available for any new occurrence of an error in one of the connected modules.

If another error occurs in a different module on the active side while the first error is still in existence (failure on active CF22/CF2E or its transmission link), the system will react by completely switching over to the other system half, that is to say, all modules in the system switch to their ”hot standby” side.

The complete system half will also switch over in the event of failure of functional units within an active IMTU

(see above).

If the hot standby side fails, the flow of information is unaffected.

Message loss is to be expected in all cases where a switchover occurs.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 155

8 Boards

8 Boards

The board is a physical unit within the CSI55 system. It is made up of a multilayer, a socket connector, electronic components and a front panel with low force on/off connectors.

The board frame in the rack contains slots to accommodate various other boards.

Plug connectors are used to secure the boards to the board frame.

8.1

General Points

The boards may be removed and inserted during system operation.

Please note:

• ESD protective measures.

• All existing connections of the board are disconnected if it is removed.


More information about removing and inserting should be noted for the following boards

• ACB

• HSCB

• CF22

• CF2E

• ICF

• ISM

• CBT (see Measuring and Testing Tools)

• V24IA V24 Interface Adapter (see Measuring and Testing Tools)

. You will find the information in the subchapter ”Removing and Inserting Modules” for the boards mentioned above.

Removing and inserting

Using the latch fasteners on the front panel, boards can be inserted and then interlocked into the board frame, or be detached and removed from it.

156 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Board locking levers

1. Latch fasteners

2. Board

Bridges and Breakpoints

In some boards, it is possible to make hardware adjustments (e.g. for setting the current strength). This can be done by inserting or removing bridges and breakpoints.

The diagram opposite shows the coordinates which enable bridges and breakpoints to be located.

Board co-ordinates

1. Soldering side

CSI55 LX 07/2006 157

8 Boards

8.2

Configurations

Example of a configuration with ICS as multi-module

1. Single module

2. Twin module

3. Multi-module

4. Cable for backplane connection

5. FOC

6. ICS

158 CSI55 LX 07/2006

There is also an adaption module - see PS350 Adaption → 94

Example of a configuration with B3 module as multi-module

8 Boards

1. Single module

2. Twin module

3. Multi-module

4. Cable for backplane connection

5. FOC

CSI55 LX 07/2006 159

8 Boards

6. B3 module

Mixed operation of ISMx and ISM2x boards is not permissible.

8.3

Block diagram of R1 rack

1. Central Functions, Control and Power Supply

2. analogue

160 CSI55 LX 07/2006

3. digital

4. IP

Block diagram of R1 rack as of software IEE2

8 Boards

1. Central Functions, Control and Power Supply

2. analogue

3. digital

4. IP

8.4

Control, Central Functions and Transport

CSI55 LX 07/2006 161

8 Boards

Module/

Rack/

Backplane

Board

ACB/ACB1

→ 221

HSCB → 281

CF22 → 248

CF2E → 256

ICF → 285

Sub module

V24I → 219

V24NI → 219

V24I → 219

V24NI → 219

CBI1A3 → 172

CFIML → 187

CFIML Central

Functions Inter

Module Link

→ 187

CL2M → 401

Connecting circuit board

AEV24B → 230

AV24B → 238

ESBx → 276

ESBA → 276

ESBB → 276

EOCSM/MM

→ 195

EOCPF → 194

ESB → 276

ESBA → 276

ESBB → 276

EOCSM/MM

→ 195

EOCPF → 194

ESB → 276

ESBA → 276

ESBB → 276

CA3B cable adapter 3 for B modules → 393

CA3B → 393

EOCSM/MM

→ 195

EOCPF → 194

ISMx → 206

DSPF → 190

MLB → 209

R1RC → 213

CL2ME → 402

ASM3 → 171

MLBIML → 212

Special application

Sub module

V24M → 501

Board

UIP → 495

8.4.1

ACB/ACB1 Advanced Computer Board

Short description

The ACB board is the basic equipment in all modules. This computer board must be used to support the software IEEx (Linux operating sistem). As HGS it is used a 2.5” hard disc drive.

162 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

The ACB1 board is the follow-up board of the ACB and can be used starting with software version IEE2

(version L021V00 1 1.0). The difference to the ACB is the physical medium of the HGS. In the case of the

ACB1, the HGS is a Compact Flash Card with different capacity according to system size, the following sizes are recommended: for single and Twin system: for multi-module up to 4000 subscr.: for multi-module of more than 4000 subscr.:

Compact Flash Card with 1 GB with 2 GB with 4 GB

Handling, as well as switch and display functions of both boards are identical:

Features

ETX-PC

The ETX-Board is a complet PC-System. All functions the current PCs offer are realized on this

Board. Performance same as Pentium III/400MHz or higher.

512 MByte of main memory, (only one SO DIMM

Modul)

Boot flash PROM with Phoenix Bios

Voltage generation

Real-time clock (RTC)

Hardware watchdog

RTC battery (8 years buffer operation)

Ethernet interface 10/100 Base T two V.24 interfaces (see AEV24B Adapter Ethernet V24 B Modul)

Interface to the PCM highway (4 independent B channel accesses)

PCI Bus (5V tolerant) 32Bit/33MHz

Two CBus interfaces (ISA Bus) on for system control reasons one as SPY-remote Interface (SPY =System Protocoller and Analyser)

IDE interface for HGS

The hardware prerequisites for remote logging with SPY are contained on the board.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 163

8 Boards

ACB1 board, component side

164 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

ACB board, component side

1. Battery

2. ETX-PC

3. V24I/NI

4. Transformer 10/100 Base T

5. Boot Flash (Compact Flash Card)

6. PCM highway controller


8. CBI1A3 for SPY I55

9. EPLD

CSI55 LX 07/2006 165

8 Boards

10. CBI1A3

11. HDD

The ACB is equipped with one of the following V.24 submodules:

• V.24I Insulated

• V.24NI Non-Insulated (basic configuration)

The following signals are available for the V.24:

• RXD

• TXD

• DTR

• GND

• DSR

• RTS

• CTS

Other features

Power demand +5V 3.5A

The V24NI submodule is used as standard when connecting devices to the V.24 interfaces. If necessary, it is also possible to use the DC isolated V24I.

AEV24B adapter Ethernet / V24 B module → 230

8.4.1.1

LEDs and Switch Functions

166 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

ACB board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1

S2

S3

Neutral position

Left position

Left position

Switch Function

S1 Reset switch

Mean: links:

ATC board, front side

Operating status

Hardware Reset of the board, locking

CSI55 LX 07/2006 167

8 Boards

S2

S3

Right: ACB is been shut down (by operating system), pushing

Hard Disk Change Request (HDCHR)

links:

Right:

Operating status: IDE Hard Disk in operation

Service position: Pulling out the IDE hard disk and plugging it back in

Service entry

links:

Right:

The commissioning (OS, applications and customer’s data load) is executed without break

Before booting, the switch must be in the righthand position

(reboot, power restoration).

The boot phase is interrupted at a defined point. At this point an service access via ISM (WebMin) is possible. Changing of parameters as for example IP addresses or GCU slot address can be executed.

Then the switch is to be brought in the left position. The service access is closed and a reboot is executed.

Meanings of LEDs

LL

LD

L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7 - L10

On: off:

Ethernet connection status is OK

Ethernet connection status is interrupted

On: off:

On: off:

On: on or flashing: on or flashing:

On: off:

On: data transmission via Ethernet no data transmission via Ethernet

The Ethernet interface of this module is connected to the network

The Ethernet interface of this module is not connected to the network

Alle the voltages of the board are present

Data transfer via the C bus

Access to the inserted background memory

Indicates that the HGS can be unplugged

Operating system does not allow pulling out the HGSs

Fault in GCU (collective display) off: Operating status

These light-emitting diodes show the statuses from reset to operation. After switching on the power a function check is executed (short flashing).

If an error was recognized by SEM (System Error Management) which leads to a recovery (prozess restart or system shut down), the light-emitting diode L6 goes on (shines). The L7 to L10 remain unconsidered. If the recovery is finished, the L6 (red) is turned on for 5 sec. and afterwards is switched off. The status LEDs

L7-L10 show now the actual system status.

The commissioning status is divided into eight groups:

1. Loading ACB from the flash software

2. Loading ACB from HGS at operating system level

3. Loading ACB from HGS at application level

168 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

4. Loading ACB in special status (APS change) during operation.

13

12

11

8

7

10

9

6

5

4

2

1

0

No.

L7

15 1

14 1

L8

1

1

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

L9

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

L10 Gr.

Status

1 0 Commissioning starts

0

0

0

0

0

1 operating system takes over the funktion

Load operating system via CBI

Load operating system via

Ethernet

Load operating system via local bus

Phase name

BIOS is running; LED test.

Linux kernel is loaded.

GRUB finished and initialization RAM-Disc started.

ACB board without HGS is loaded as a slave via C bus.

Status 11 and 12 are skipped over.

ACB board without HGS is loaded as master via Ethernet.

Status 11 and skipped over.

ACB board with HGS is loaded as master directly.

Statuses 11 to 13 are not processed in the order.

Update flash SW Flashsoftware ACB under development.

PAL startet The pascal server is ready.

All known pascal tasken will be started.

0 1 Download Applikationfiles in progress.

1 3

Download the application

Start of the platform applications

Start of the platform applications such as

PFSP, PAL, L4AD.

3

3

3 ACB with IVL funktion prepares an APS change.

1

0

1

0

2

2

2

2

APS change in progress

(indication only at the IVL)

Customer data conversion

(display only at the IVL)

Load APS customer data

ICU commissioning

Normal operation

Customer data conversion (Started by

MML CKDT is not displayed.).

DMS of the module signalls the phase loading customer data.

All customer data loaded.

Start commissioning of the module(s).


1 = LED on

0 = LED off

CSI55 LX 07/2006 169

8 Boards

2 x

USB

There are 16 USB devices preconfigurated. Beeing 8 of them designed for only TTY operation.

Furthermore 4 are designed for the ACOM protocol and 4 as RAW, they are not used yet. By default all have the Host Index configured as group 1. But this can be changed by means of the

Webmin at any moment.

The USB devices are not connected normally with logical devices of the pascal applications.

This must still be done via the Webmin interface.

As soon as this is done, the pascal application (prolog task) will try to show its prompt (ˆC) on this new device. This activation can take up to one minute after the change of configuration data done by the Webmin.

In the same way all other interfaces can be also configured (commissioning and shut down).

Reference numbers, that are available in the Ebuyer Tool:

4.999.096.855

4.999.096.856

4.999.100.643

USB Hub

USB/V24 adapter

USB/USB Laplink gold cable

8.4.1.2

Fan replacement

Replacement of defective fans in I55 systems with ACB

The ACB for standard systems is characterized by its relatively low heat generation. For this reason, even if no fan is used the risk that the processor reaches or exceeds the maximum operating temperature only exists under unfavourable conditions. Unfavourable conditions are a high room temperature (over 35 degrees C (95 degrees F)) and permanent high load (over 70 percent).

In the event of failure of one of the two fans we recommend replacing it within one week.

In the event of failure of both fans the CPU temperature and CPU usage (total load) of the ACB in question should be checked first (Webmin: Performance Management). If the CPU temperature is clearly below the limit value of 100 degrees C (212 degrees F) the defective fans should be replaced within the following two days. For safety reasons the CPU temperature should controlled at regular intervals until then. If the CPU temperature is only slightly below or even above the limit value the defective fans must be replaced as soon as possible.

Projects

Up to four ACBs shall be allowed per module. However, only two per frame to provide sufficient heat dissipation. The software can handle this (a confirmation test will be provided later), four per module were mentioned as the upper limit for systems with HSCB during the workshops with system specialists.

8.4.1.3

Removing and Inserting the board

The ACB board may be removed or inserted during system operation, if the S1 switch handle has been moved to the left.

In single module systems, removing the ACB board during operation will result in a total breakdown.

In multi-module systems, removing the ACB board will result in the failure of this module or of the central functions depending on the BS Confi data packet.

170 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.4.1.4

Operation ACB

Refer to handling specification HSP to ACB, APS IEE2.1

8.4.2

ASM3 Announcement Module 3


The announcement module ASM3 is a submodule of the DSPF.

The ASM3 variant is used in the CSI55 for recording and playback of ACD spoken announcements and for hotel applications. The corresponding hotel messages are pre-programmed in the hotel application.

Samples and announcements

maximum number of samples recorded maximum total time recorded maximum number of simultaneous announcements

1000

32 minutes of announcements (PCM)

30

Samples in one announcement up to 10

A sample is a recording with varied contents (music or spoken text).

An announcement can be repeated several times, or even infinitely.

The 30 announcement channels are handled and managed as a digital port with 30 channels.

Each ASM3 also provides two additional channels for the recording of samples for ACD application. These samples are initially available as WAV files, and are loaded to the ASM3 by means of PC application (ACD user interface). The 2 recording channels are handled and managed as a digital port with 2 channels.

Other features

Power demand +5V 300 mA

Each ASM3 can occupy up to 32 channels.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 171

8 Boards

Location of the ASM3 on the DSPF module

1. ASM3 Module

2. DSPF Module

3. Connecting circuit slot

8.4.3

CBI1A3 CBus Interface 1 Adapter Version 3


The CBI receives a message (data packet) from the micro processor and stores it internally in a buffer memory.

Once the message has been completely entered from the micro processor (cyclic recording), the CBI sends the packet via the C-bus to the specified destination CBI. This CBI stores the packet internally and offers it to its micro processor (typ. per interrupt). The micro processor then receives the packet via cyclic readout from the CBI. The CBIs receiving and transmitting parts work independently of each other.

The CB1A3 is used on the HSCB board. Only one package for transmission and reception can be stored internally at any one time.

CBI1A3 submodule on the BG HSCB

1. BG HSCB module

2. CBI1A3 Module

3. HSCB slot

LED Denotations

L1

L2 on: flashing: flashing:

L3 flashing:

High data traffic

Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor

Packet loss in transmission buffer because of transmit time-out or reset, or synchronization fault in the micro processor

Packet loss in receiver buffer because of receive time-out or reset

172 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

L4 on: Abnormal operating status e.g.:

• CBI cannot be used to transmit and receive

• Reset status flashing weakly:

1 MBit of data has been transmitted on the C-bus.

8.4.4

CF22 Central Functions 22


The central board CF22 is the basic equipment in all modules. It replaces the CF2E board.

It supports:

• the dealer functions

• intermodule handover functions for DECT

and

• call number display for incoming calls to analogue terminals (”CLIP” Calling Line Identification Protocol).

As opposed to CF2E it only features one DSP system.

Features

Ports

B channels (time slots)

ILMx

DECT

Internal traffic flow

External traffic flow

544

1088

+

+

1088 Erl.

225 Erl.

Features

Clock Supply and Module Synchronization

External synchronization via network nodes (S0, S2M).

Master function in multi-module systems can be set up using software.

Master free-run clock mode (internal clocking)

Module Switching Matrix

Bit rate 4,096 MBit/s

Module internal non-blocking

11 DTMF receiver sets, 4 DTMF transmitters (only for dialling)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 173

8 Boards

Call Progress Tones

A maximum of 16 call progress tones can be generated as customer-specific or country-specific and can be cyclically repeated. At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.

In addition, a maximum of 3 tones with burst character can be supplied.

Short Voice Messages

Up to 8 voice messages or “music on holds” can be used. The total duration of all brief voice messages must be no longer than 64 sec.

Long Voice Messages

4 voice messages with unspecified time limits and confidata can be set up (connecting message devices via analogue subscriber line circuits). At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.

Tone Injection in Two-Party Conversations

Up to 3 various cyclic tones can be generated which may be fed into a maximum of 15 two-party conversations (e.g. call waiting tone, rolling tone etc.).

Conferences

The system software only allows three-party conferences.

Only dealer terminals support conferences with more participants.

Call number ID

8 DTMF transmitters for CLIP (call nummer indication on analogue terminals for incoming calls)

Other features


A high precision reference clock is required for the intermodule handover functions. This can be carried out through the use of the CL2M submodule on the UIP or ICF. See also Intermodule Handover section.

If fibre-optic links are used, the CF22 board is to be fitted with the submodule CFIML Central Function Inter

Module Link.

8.4.4.1

Jumper and DIL Switch Functions

Configuration switches are located on the component side of the board. The functions and positions of these switches are described below:

174 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

CF22 board, component side

1. DIL switch, 8-part


3. Fuse F2 for the power supply EOC, 500 mA replaceable

4. LED red:

Loadable hardware of the board out of service

Operation of the board is not possible

5. FPGA Boot/Load PROM

6. Fire protection fuse 7A

If the fire protection fuse is defective (burned out), the board must be replaced by a new one.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 175

8 Boards

7. LED green: R/T active on: High data traffic flashing: Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor

8. LED yellow: TFAIL flashing: Packet loss in transmission buffer because of transmit time-out or reset, or synchronization fault in the micro processor

9. LED red: RFAIL flashing: Packet loss in receiver buffer because of receive time-out or reset

10. CFIML submodule Central Function Inter Module Link

Functions of the DIL Switches, 8-part

System configuration for MMG

Single module system

Two module system, first module

Two module system, second module

Two module system, systems with more than two modules

Specification of highest scan address

35

55

87

126

(Default)

Switch

1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

2

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Battery status query (AIC)

Testing of -48 V battery is not possible

5

ON

(Default)

Testing of -48 V battery active OFF

When using PS350 with a connected battery (only Integral 33): Switching on the battery voltage monitoring

Error signalling unit

with ESU

6

ON without ESU OFF

4

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Switch

3

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

In order to get the correct signalling direction ATA with EE8B in a communication server Integral 55 with ESBA instead of ESB, switch 6 must be placed to ON (with ESU).

Download

Download inactive

Download possible

(default)

Switch

7

ON

OFF

Module Manager Watchdog

8

176 CSI55 LX 07/2006

Watchdog inactive

Watchdog active

(default)

ON

OFF


Intermodule handover

for twin and multi-module configuration: Intermodule handover active between modules for twin and B3 configuration: Intermodule handover not active between modules

Optical waveguide length compensation (only with doubled CF2E)

Activation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot

Deactivation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot

Switch still without function


Switch

1

ON

OFF

3

4

2

ON

OFF

8 Boards

CSI55 LX 07/2006 177

8 Boards

8.4.4.2


CF22 board, front side


S1

S2

Middle position

Middle position

Switch Function

S1

S2

Reset switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Service Switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Operating status

Reset of the board, locking

Reset board, keying

Operating status

No function, locking

With a doubled CF2x: Activate switchover, keying

178 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards


L1

L2

L3

ACTIVE on: flashing: off:

CLKUA on:

IMHOSYNC on: flashing: off:

L9

L10

L11

L12

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L13

MAFREI on: flashing:

AMEX1S on:

DSP-LED1 on: flashing: off:

TFAIL on or flashing: off:

MMG on: flashing: off:

CLKUSYN on:

MANK on:

IDR

ECLKU on: flashing:

DSP-LED2 on:

CSI55 LX 07/2006

MSMC active/inactive

MSMC (switching matrix processor unit) resetting/inactive

MSMC downloading or waiting for commissioning

MSMC active

Clock unit active

Normal operation: Active module clock unit

Module is synchronised for DECT operation

Resynchronization (flashes for 30 sec.)

Module is not synchronised for DECT operation

This operating status may also occur if switch 1 of DIL switch 2 is in the ON position (IMHO active) while LED L4 is on.

Master free-run clock mode (internal clocking) or external synchronization (if L10 is also on)

Internal free-run clock mode (internal clocking) after failure of synchronous clock via beam waveguide path

Alarm message ext. synchr. clock 1 sec.

Failure of synchronizing clock signal for more than 1 sec. (with master module: clock pulse from local exchange, network node; with slave module: clock pulse via fibre-optic cable)

Status - LED

Boot phase after board reset or DSP system permanently defective temporary synchronization fault on a DSP Highway

DSP system in operation

One or more C-bus transmit errors

C-bus in operation. CFIML submodule not inserted into the CF22.

MMG status

MMG not in operation (no board operation) or defective beam waveguide connection (after CF reset in multi-module system)

MMG in operation, but board logon not yet possible

MMG in operation

Clock unit synchronization

Module clock system is synchronized

Master network node

External synchronous clock switched on for synchronization by the system software

IDR fault from IMLA (e.g. beam waveguide not in order)

Error clock unit

Clock system error

After failure of synchronous clock via beam waveguide

Status - LED

Boot phase after board reset or DSP system permanently defective

179

8 Boards

L14 flashing: off:

RFAIL on or flashing: off: temporary synchronization fault on a DSP Highway


One or more C-bus receive errors


8.4.4.3

Doubling

It is possible to double the CF22 board in the R1 rack.

SeeDoubling → 143

8.4.4.4


ESD-measures must be accomplished when working with boards susceptible to electrostatic shock.

The CF22 board can be removed or inserted during system operation. However, the module will not operate if the CF22 is not doubled.

Removal of the board is followed by a restart without loading customer data.

When doubling, the CF22 board may only be removed when in passive status (LED 2 off). If

LED 2 is on, place switch S2 into the right position. LED 2 Off The board can now be removed.

8.4.5

CF2E Central Functions 2E


The central board CF2E is the basic equipment in all modules.

It supports the dealer and intermodule handover functions for DECT.

Features

Ports


ILMx

DECT



544

1088

+

+

1088 Erl.

225 Erl.

Features





180 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards




11 DTMF receiver sets, 4 DTMF transmitters










Conferences

The number of subscribers at a conference is 3.

Other features


The CF2E board is supported from the programme file MSC2P006 onwards.


In coupling via LWL, the CF2E module is to be fitted with the submodule CFIML central function inter module

Link.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 181

8 Boards

8.4.5.1



CF2E board, component side

1. DIL switch 3

2. DIL switch 2


4. LED red:

Fault indicator of the central functions

Hardware out of order

5. Fire protection fuse F3, 7 A

182 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards


6. LED green: R/T active on: High data traffic flashing: Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor.




Functions of the DIL Switch 3







35

55

87

126

(Default)

Switch

1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

2

ON

ON

OFF

OFF



(Default)

5

ON




with ESU without ESU

6

ON

OFF

4

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Switch

3

ON

OFF

ON

OFF


Download

Switch

7

CSI55 LX 07/2006 183

8 Boards

Download inactive

Download possible

(default)


Watchdog inactive

Watchdog active

(default)

ON

OFF

8

ON

OFF









3

4

Switch

1

ON

OFF

2

ON

OFF

184 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8.4.5.2


8 Boards

CF2E board, front side


S1

S2

Middle position

Middle position

Switch Function

S1

S2

Reset switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Service Switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Operating status


Reset board, keying

Operating status


With a doubled CF2x: activate switchover, keying

CSI55 LX 07/2006 185

8 Boards

L9

L10

L11

L12


L1

L2

ACTIVE on: flashing quickly: flashing slowly: off:

CLKUA on:

L3 IMHOSYNC on: flashing: off:

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8


AMEX1S on:

DSP

System 1 on: off:

TFAIL flashing:


CLKUSYN on:

MANK on:

IDR

ECLKU on: flashing:

186



MSMC downloading

MSMC waiting for startup

MSMC active

Clock unit active


Doubling: active CF2x




This operating status may also occur if switch 1 of DIL switch 2 is in the

ON position (IMHO active) while LED L4 is on.





Status - LED

Boot phase after board reset or DSP system 1 defective

DSP system 25.40 mm operation


MMG status



MMG in operation



Master network node



Error clock unit

Clock system error


CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

L13

L14

DSP

System 2 on: off:

RFAIL flashing:

Status - LED


DSP system 2 in operation


8.4.5.3

Doubling

It is possible to double the CF2E board in the R1 rack.

SeeDoubling → 143

8.4.5.4



The CF2E board can be removed or inserted during system operation. However, the module will not operate if the CF2E is not doubled.


When doubling, the CF2E board must only be removed when in passive status (LED 2 off). If


8.4.6

CFIML Central Functions Inter Module Link


The CFIML submodule is inserted in the CF22/CF2E board if this is connected via fibre-optic cable in twin or multi-module operation.

It is connected with the CF22/CF2E via two SMD pin strips.

CFIML board, soldering side

CSI55 LX 07/2006 187

8 Boards


L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9 on: flashing: flashing: flashing: on: flashing weakly: on: on: on: on: on:

High data traffic


Packet loss in transmission buffer during regulatory transmit time-out or reset.

Packet loss in receiver buffer during regulatory receive time-out or reset.

• CBI cannot be used to transmit and receive.

• Warm start or master reset.

• FIFO is full (100%) in transmission or receiver direction

Further data has been transmitted with 1 MByte/sec capacity.

IML path is frame synchronous.

IML path is ready to transmit C-bus data.

IML path is not ready to receive C-bus data in receiving direction.

IML path is not ready to receive C-bus data in transmitting direction.

ASICS loading procedure incomplete. CFIML out of operation

8.4.7

CL2M Clock 2 Module


The submodule CL2M on the UIP or ICF board implements an external clock supply for the PBX or a clock pulse output for external devices.

Use on

UIP

ICF receiver and transmitter 2048 kHz receiver 2048/1544 kHz

This is necessary if digital dial-up lines or permanent connections are not available as the clock source, or if the customer has made high demands in terms of the reliability of the clock supply.

Other features


If the CL2M is positioned on slot 1 or 2 of the UIP, the line can be connected via the CA1B board.

With slots 3 or 4 occupied and V24M (slot 1 or 2) being used, the line must be connected via the CA3B board.

188 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Location of CL2M on the UIP board


2. UIP module

3. CL2M module

8.4.8

CL2ME Clock 2 Module Extended


The CL2ME submodule is used to implement an external clock supply by means of a high precision reference clock (TAREF). This is needed if DECT Intermodule Handover is used in twin and multi-module configurations..

Use on

UIP/ICF Receiver 2048 kHz

Other features


If the CL2ME is positioned on slot 1 of the UIP, the line can be connected via the CA3B/T board.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 189

8 Boards

Location of CL2ME on the UIP board


2. UIP module

3. CL2ME board

8.4.9

DSPF Digital Signal Processing Function


The DSPF as the basic board accommodates the ASM3 announcement module. The announcement module serves for recording and playback of ACD spoken announcements and for hotel applications. Depending on the application the DSPF can be equipped with up to:

4 ASM3

2 ASM3 for access to 128 time slots for access to 64 time slots in I55 in I55C

Other features

Country of application

Power demand +5V

National and international

850 mA

For more detailed information about configuration with ASM3 please refer to the service manual.

8.4.9.1

Inserting the submodule

The used ASM3 modules are inserted in the submodule slots “submodule 1” - “submodule 4” of the DSPF.

190 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

DSPF board, component side

1. Submodule 1

2. Submodule 2

3. Submodule 3

4. Submodule 4

The position must correspond to the setting in the confidata. The following allocation must be observed:

Labelling Labelling on the DSPF board

1

2

3

“Submodule number” parameter in the ICU Editor

0 Submodule 1

Submodule 2

Submodule 3

Submodule 4

SUB1

SUB2

SUB3

SUB4

8.4.9.2

Time slot management

Each ASM3 submodule represents an ICU. This means that one DSPF board can implemented a maximum of 4 ICUs. The ICU of the physical slot of the board logs on with the ICU type DSFM (DSPF Master). The other (up to 3) ICUs are implemented on the same hardware by means of logical address entries in the CBI, and log on with the ICU type DSFS (DSPF Slave).

This means that the DSPF must have access to a total of 128 time slots. Because the slots in the Integral

55xE generally only have 32 time slots, access must be enabled as follows.

The DSPF uses:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 191

8 Boards

Time slots of the DSPF slot

Time slots of the Auxiliary Highway, Part 1 - AUX1

Time slots of the Auxiliary Highway, Part 2 - AUX2

Time slots of the slot to the right of the DSPF

ICU TYPE DSFM

ICU TYPE DSFS 1)

ICU TYPE DSFS 1)

ICU TYPE DSFS 2)

1) Access to AUX1 and AUX2 is possible in each module to the left of the CF board. The time slots of the

Auxiliary Highway are available only once per module.

2)In order to gain access to the time slots of the right slot, the DSPF must be configured on an odd slot.

These events provide the following framework conditions:

One DSPF with four submodules

• must use the AUX1 and AUX2

• can be configured only once in each module

• must be set up on an odd slot to the left of the CF circuit board

Every other DSPF (within the same module)

• has access to a maximum of 64 time slots (DSPF slot and slot to the right of the DSPF)

• can consequently supports two modules only

• must be set up on an odd slot (to the right of the CF also possible)

In accordance with the above conditions, each submodule slot and thus an ICU can be assigned an application

(ACD or HOTCOM). This means that it is also possible to operate different applications on a DSPF. For example, four submodules could be set up for ACD, three for ACD and one for HOTCOM or two for ACD and two for HOTCOM, as well as any other possible configuration.

Setting up of the DSFM and DSFS ICUs prior to operation of the PBX is implemented using the KAD/CAT application and during operation using the ICU Editor service and management programme.

A connection to the MDF is not implemented at present.

192 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.4.9.3


DSPF board, front panel

Meaning of the switch on the front panel of the DSPF board

Up to 4 ICUs (1* DSFM and 3 * DSFS) can be implemented on the DSPF board. The common status of the

ICUs can be controlled via the S1 front panel switch as follows:

S1 Reset and blocking switch

Middle position

Left position

Right position

Left position after board reset

All ICUs in operating status

All ICUs in preparatory disabling

All ICUs in reset

Master ICU DSMF (DSPF board) receives a forced ICU download. After commencing the loading process, the switch must be returned to the middle position.

Meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the DSPF board


ICUs is displayed via the two front panel LEDs L1 and L10 according to the following pattern:

The display appears according to priority, i.e., if several functions of the scheme are represented by one LED, the one with the highest priority is implemented. Prio 1 is the highest priority, and prio 5 the lowest. In the cases with priority 1, the board is still in the reset or download phase, whereby the additional ICUs (DSFS) are not yet active.

L1

flashing 5Hz At least 1 ICU is still in startup, waiting for “Switching On” message flashing 1

Hz

All ICUs are preparatory disabled, the board is removeable

Prio 2

Prio 3

CSI55 LX 07/2006 193

8 Boards

L2

an (in) At least 1 ICU has a seizure in terms of switching technology in at least one channel.

All ICUs (entire board) are in reset processing (if L10 is also on) off All ICUs are in a resting state with their ports, the board is not occupied flashing 5Hz At least 1 ICU is still waiting for commissioning

Master ICU DSFM (DSPF board) ICU Download in progress

/ flashing 1

Hz an (in) off

Master ICU DSFM (DSPF board) in reset processing (if L1 is also on)

Master ICU DSMF (DSPF board) Programming procedure in

ICU download

All ICUs in operation

Prio 4

Prio 1

Prio 5

Prio 2

Prio 1

Prio 3

Prio 1

Prio 1

Prio 4

8.4.10

EOCPF Electrical Optical Converter Plastic Fibre


EOCPF is an electrical optical interface for the connection of modules via PF conductors in both transmitting and receiving directions and can be installed onto the CF22, CF2E, MLB and ICF boards.

EOCPF submodule on the CF2E board

1. PF Connector

2. EOCPF Module

3. CF2E module

Fibre-optic cable length

EOCPF max. 40 m

194 CSI55 LX 07/2006

Other features


Power demand +5V


180 mA

EOCPF submodule, can be inserted on the front side of the boards mentioned above.

Max. transmission rate: aprox. 40 MBit/s

Observe the color coding when inserting the PF cable into the EOCPF submodule.

8 Boards

EOCPF, connectors for LWL

1. blue

2. grey

3. Transmitter

4. Receiver

8.4.11

EOCSM/MM Electrical Optical Converter


The two boards EOCSM (SM = Single Mode) and EOCMM (MM = multi-mode) are intended as interfaces for use in the twin module and in multi-module systems.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 195

8 Boards

EOCSM/MM module on the CF2E board

1. LWL connector

2. EOCSM or EOCMM Module

3. CF2E module

Fibre-optic cable length

EOCSM

EOCMM

15 km (single-mode graded-index fibre)

7 km (multi-mode graded-index fibre)

Other features


Power demand +5V


180 mA

When inserting the LWL cable into the EOCSM/MM submodules, it must be remembered that the “transmit” connector of one EOCSM/MM connects to the “receive” connector of another EOCSM/MM and vice versa.

196 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

EOCSM/MM, Connectors for the LWL

1. Sending

2. Receiving

3. FOC

8.4.12

HSCB High Speed Computer Board


HSCB is the basic equipment in all modules. It is a computer board with dynamic RAM.

Features

Optionally with parity

128 kByte ERROR flash-PROM

512 kByte Boot flash-PROM

Buffered real time clock

Two-level hardware watchdog

Hardware status register

C-bus interface

4 B channel accesses

2 V.24 interfaces

Downloadable

2x PC card/ATA interfaces for 1.8” PC card driver with ATA mode. Hard disk drives with 260 MB or 1 GB

(for large systems) are available for these interfaces.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 197

8 Boards

Other features

Application Basic equipment in all modules


2400 mA

2900 mA without HGS with 1 HGS (startup current) with 2 HGS (startup current)

The drives can be replaced during operation.

The V24NI submodule is used as standard when connecting circuits to the V.24 interfaces. If necessary, it is also possible to use the DC isolated V24I.

Additional Memory If additional memory submodules (PS2) are inserted into the HSCB, it should be taken into account that the first memory slot must always be occupied. The inserted PS2 memory modules must have an access time of 60 ns.

HSCB board, component side

1. Memory 4

2. Memory 3

3. Memory 2

4. Memory 1

5. HGS

6. Battery

The HSCB is equipped with one of the following V.24 submodules:

• V.24I Insulated



198 CSI55 LX 07/2006

• RXD

• TXD

• DTR

• GND

• DSR

• RTS

• CTS

8.4.12.1


8 Boards

CSI55 LX 07/2006 199

8 Boards

HSCB board, front side


S1

S2

S3

S4

Middle position

Left position

Left position

Left position

Switch Function

S1

S2

S3

S4

Reset switch and MI button

Middle: Operating status

Left: Reset board, locking (see S2)

Right:

Memory test switch

Left: (Standard)

Right:

Monitor interruption (TENOBUG start), keying

No memory test when resetting/restarting

Memory test when reseting/reloading the TC system

Hard Disk Change Request (HDCHR)

Left: Operating status: PC-CARD-ATA-interfaces in operation

Right: Service position: Removing and inserting the HGS(s)

System console connected (SCOCON)

Left: No device connected (Default), or printer or video terminal connected

Right: System terminal connected


L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7- L10

Fault indication from the control (group statement)

Indicates module data transfer via the C-bus (e.g. call at subcriber)

Indicates access to the inserted background memory

Indicates that the HGS(s) can be removed

Indicates that the S4 switch is in the “right” position, and that the system terminal can be connected to the first V.24 interface on the AV24B/W (service)

Unused

The LEDs flash to indicate the status from reset to operation. The display remains lit for about 5 seconds if a fault is found in the loading phases 15 to 7 (see following table). If a fatal fault occurs, the reset process is repeated from the beginning (loading phase 15).

13

12

11

No.

L7

15 1

14 1

1

1

1

1

1

0

L8

1

1

0

0

1

L9

1

1

1

0

1

L10

1

0

Phase name

Start reset phase

Test flash-PROM

Test QUICC



200 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

4

3

6

5

2

1

8

7

10

9

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0


Test dynamic RAM


End reset phase








1 = LED on

0 = LED off

8.4.12.2

Changing the HGSs

The HGS may be removed or inserted during system operation without the prior removal of the HSCB.

The following procedure must be adhered to:

• Remove static charge from the module frame

• Move S3 switch to the right

• Wait for L4 to light up

• Remove the appropriate HGS

Do not touch the components!

Take hold of the drive from above and below.

• Insert the new HDD

• Move S3 switch to the left

• L4 will go out in a short time

8.4.12.3


The HSCB board may be removed or inserted during system operation, if the S1 switch handle has been moved to the left.

In single module systems, removing the HSCB board will result in a total breakdown.

In multi-module systems, removing the HSCB board will result in the failure of this module.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 201

8 Boards

8.4.13

ICF IMTU Central Functions


The central board of the B3 module or ICS is the ICF.

Features

Clock Supply and

Synchronization

Clock frequency precision for DECT.

Remote synchronizable by high precision reference clock and master module

(with CL2M or CL2ME)

Master function for multi-module systems, adjustable using software.

External interfaces

128 receive/transmit highway

Outputs for ext. signalling

Remote control for power supply

LWL connector

Ref. clock supply (CL2M)

Clocks

Micro processor bus

Interface to Other Modules

Through MLB, with possible MLBIML

Transfer of C-bus data.

256 PCM channels.

Inter Module Manager (IMMG)

Fault Management using Inter Module Manager

Other features

Application Basic equipment in B3/ICS


Battery status query

Memory Doubling e.g. for Downloading

Fire Protection Fuse

Difference between ICF .1321 and .1331

In .1331, CBI and IMLA are on the board.

The ICF with material number 49.9905.9146 can be used in the B3 module and in the ICS.

202 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.4.13.1


ICF board, component side

1. DIL switch

2. Jumper

3. Fire Protection Fuse

Jumper Functions

Total breakdown (system not in operation) via ESB

1 - 2 Normally closed contact for message

2 - 3 Normally open contact for message


4 - 5

5 - 6

Testing of -48 V battery not possible

(default)

Testing of -48 V battery active

When using PS350 with connected battery: Switch on the battery voltage monitoring option

Fire Protection Fuse


Functions of the DIL Switches

S1 Error signalling unit

CSI55 LX 07/2006 203

8 Boards

S2

S3

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

S5

S6

S7

S8

ON:

OFF:

ON:

OFF:

S4

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON:

OFF:

ON:

OFF:

ON:

OFF:

ON:

OFF: with ESU without ESU

System configuration for IMMG

IMMG passive

IMMG active

Specification of highest scan address

16

32

64

128 (default)

Inter module manager watchdog

Watchdog inactive

Watchdog active (default)

CBI master mode switching

Test mode

CBI master (default)

For testing and servicing purposes. Do not change

Non-maskable interruption

Enable NMI

NMI disable (default)


CBI speed

2 MHz

4 MHz (default)

8.4.13.2


204 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

ICF board for B3 module, front side ICF board for ICS and B3 module, front side

Switch Functions

S1

S2

Reset

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Service Switch

Left:

Middle:

Right:


Operating status

Reset board, keying


Operating status

With redundant star coupler: Activate switchover, keying


L1 No function

L2

L3

L4

Clock unit active on:

When doubling, IMTU status on: off: flashing quickly: flashing slowly:

IMMG status

Active module clock unit

IMTU active

IMTU hot stand-by

IMTU active and alternate path switched

IMTU hot-standby and alternate path switched

CSI55 LX 07/2006 205

8 Boards

L5

L6 on: flashing:

IMMG not in operation (no board operation)

IMMG in operation, but board logon not yet possible

With doubled multi-module, also failure of the fibre-optic link

ICF <–> ICF.

IMMG in operation off:

Clock unit synchronization on: Module’s clock system is synchronized

Master/free-run clock mode on: Module prepared by system software for master operation or module in master free-run clock mode

8.4.13.3


The board may be removed and inserted during system operation.

All existing connections are disconnected if the board is removed. Exception when doubling.

If the active ICF board of a doubled pair is to be removed, the service switch must be used to change it over to the hot stand-by side. After the ICF has been reinserted, the service switch must be switched back again.

8.4.13.4

Doubling

Only one ICF board can be inserted for each B3 module.

A doubling of the system can only be implemented by using a second ICS or B3 module.

SeeComplete doubling → 153

8.4.13.5

External clock pulse input

First V.24 interface of the CA3B (Cable Adapter 3 for B modules)

PIN 1

PIN6

A1

B1

External clock pulse input 2.048 MHz (high precision reference clock / TAREF)

8.4.14

ISMx Switching Matrix x


The board ISMx is used in the basic configuration in the ICS and B3 module. Its task is to switch inter-module connections with a bit rate of 4 MBit/s.

206 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

In order to ensure the total availability of the IMTU switching matrix function, 4 ISMx boards of the same variant are required. Mixed operation of ISMx and ISM2x boards is not permissible.

Variants for the B3 module

ISMA

IMTU Switching Matrix variant A, material number: 28.5630.1512

4x per B3 module, up to 8 modules in conjunction with one MLB in slot 1

ISMB

ISMC

ISM2A

IMTU Switching Matrix variant B, material number: 28.5630.1522

4x per B3 module, up to 16 modules in conjunction with two MLBs in slots 1 and 2

IMTU Switching Matrix variant C, material number: 28.5630.1532

4x per B3 module, up to 32 modules in conjunction with three or four MLBs in slots 1, 2 and 8 or 1, 2, 8 and 9

IMTU Switching Matrix variant 2 A, material number: 49.9805.5675

4x per B3 module, up to 8 modules in conjunction with one MLB in slot 1, supersedes ISMA 28.5630.1512

ISM2B

IMTU Switching Matrix variant 2 B, material number: 49.9805.5676

4x per B3 module, up to 16 modules in conjunction with two MLBs in slots 1 and 2, supersedes ISMB 28.5630.1522

ISM2C

IMTU Switching Matrix variant 2 C, material number: 49.9805.5677

4x per B3 module, up to 32 modules in conjunction with three or four MLBs in slots 1, 2 and 8 or 1, 2, 8 and 9, supersedes ISMC 28.5630.1532

Variants for the ICS

ISM2A

IMTU Switching Matrix variant 2 A, material number: 49.9905.9147

4x per rack ICS, up to 8 system modules in conjunction with one MLB in slot 1, supersedes ISM2A 49.9805.5675

ISM2B

IMTU Switching Matrix variant 2 B, material number: 49.9905.9148

4x per rack ICS, up to 16 modules in conjunction with two MLBs in slots 1 and 2, supersedes ISM2B 49.9805.5676

B3 module slot

Board

ISMA It No: 28.5630.1512

or

ISM2A It No: 49.9805.5675

ISMB It No: 28.5630.1522

or

ISM2B It No: 49.9805.5676

ISMC It No: 28.5630.1532

or

ISM2C It No: 49.9805.5677

1 2

MLB MLB x x x

3 o x o x o

4 o

5

ICF

+

6 o

7 o o + o o

8 9

MLB MLB o + o o x x

ICS slot

Board

ISM2A It No: 49.9905.9147

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

MLB MLB ISM2 ISM2 ICF ISM2 ISM2 x o o + o o

CSI55 LX 07/2006 207

8 Boards

ISM2B It No: 49.9905.9148

x x o o

/td>

+ o o

For each switching matrix, four switching matrix modules of the same type must be inserted (e.g. four ISMAs).

With doubled IMTU, all eight switching matrix modules (2 x 4) must be of the same type.

o = inserted switching matrix module x = supported by switching matrix modules

+ = fixed assignment

Other features

Power demand +5V ISMA

ISMB

ISMC

Download board software

Board identification using board passport

Maintenance function

840 mA

980 mA

1460 mA

8.4.14.1


ISMx board, front side

Switch Function

208

ISM2x board, front

CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:


L1

L2 on: flashing quickly: flashing slowly: off:


Operating status

Reset board, keying

Switching matrix processor unit

Resetting or inactive

Download

Waiting for startup active

No function

8.4.14.2

Doubling

Redundancy of the boards for the system’s switching matrix function is enabled by doubling the multi-module.

The ISMx board variants must be the same for both IMTUs. Mixed operation of ISMx and

ISM2x boards is not permissible.

8.4.14.3



All existing connections are disconnected if the board is removed.

In doubled systems, a service switchover (service switch S2 on ICF) should be carried out before removing an ISMx from the active multi-module. On completion of repairs, the service switch must be switched back in order to resume operation of the default active side.

8.4.15

MLB Module Link Board


The board MLB is used to connect modules to the multi-module. It can be equipped with the MLBIML submodule and is designed for a maximum of 8 modules.

In standard configuration, the module is equipped with components for a max. of 3 modules. The MLBIML is used from the fourth module onward.

The module connection is managed using the boards EOCMM, EOCSM or EOCPF.

Features

Adaptation to C-bus and coupler interface.

Multiplexes and demultiplexes of the various types of data to be transmitted (C-bus data and Highway).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 209

8 Boards

Line coding/decoding.

Clock generation.

Optical transmitting and receiving.

Test and maintenance function.

The following notes must be observed when using the MLB board:

• IMLE3 submodules with IML software 28.7637.8533 or IMLASB must be inserted in the connected CFx boards.

• A maximum of 13 modules can be connected (on two MLBs) to the B3 module without the ISPS board.

No CBT must be inserted under these circumstances. These may only be inserted if only a single MLB board is fitted.

The ISPS board is generally required from the 14th module on. In this case, the CBT may be inserted without restriction.

Other features

Power demand +5V 1830 mA 3 MLBIML on the board and 330 mA for

MLB logic and 0 EOC

8.4.15.1


Switch Function

MLB board, front side

S1* Middle:

Left:

Right:

210

Operating status

No function

Board RESET

CSI55 LX 07/2006

* Depending on the configuration, adjusting the switch can result in a restart of the entire system.

S2

S3

S4

S5

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Operating status, Link 7/8

RESET Link 7

RESET Link 8


RESET Link 5

RESET Link 6


RESET Link 3

RESET Link 4


RESET Link 1

RESET Link 2

LED Denotations

8 Boards

MLB board, component side

L1

L2 on: flashing: flashing:

L3 flashing:

CSI55 LX 07/2006

High data traffic


Packet loss in transmission buffer during regulatory receive time-out or reset, or synchronization fault in the micro processor.

Packet loss in receiver buffer during regulatory transmit time-out or reset.

211

8 Boards

L4 on:

L5

L6

L7

L8 flashing weakly: on: on: on: on:









8.4.16

MLBIML Module Link Board, Inter Module Link


The board MLBIML a sub-board which is plugged into the MLB board from the fourth module onwards. It can optionally take an EOC.

Variants

EOCMM

EOCSM

EOCPF

Other features


212 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.4.16.1


L5

L6

L7

L8

MLBIML board, component side

L1

L2

L3

L4 on: flashing: flashing: flashing: on: flashing weakly: on: on: on: on:

High data traffic


Packet loss in transmission buffer during regulatory receive time-out or reset, or synchronization fault in the micro processor.

Packet loss in receiver buffer during regulatory transmit time-out or reset.









8.4.17

R1RC Rack Connector for I55


CSI55 LX 07/2006 213

8 Boards

Up to 3 expansion racks can be connected to the basic rack in a star-shaped pattern, which are then called the C2-C4 modules. You will require an R1RC/R1RC2 adapter for the connection between the backplanes.

Variants

R1RG (part no: 49.9903.5498) / R1RG2(part no:

49.9907.9213)

R1RE (part no: 49.9903.5500) / R1RE2 (part no:

49.9907.9214) for use in the basic rack (R1 rack) for the expansion racks R2, R3 and R4.

The adapters are connected to each other using cables. This connection transmits CBus information, highway information, status signals and I2C bus data, so that the connected modules act as a single module (B2 of the

I33).

The adapters R1RG/R1RG2 and R1RE/R1RE2 are attached to the board frame from the rear.

The R1RG/R1RG2 and R1RE/R1RE2 variants do not have to be identical. Mixed operation of the boards is possible.

Other features

Application

Power demand +5V for the expansion racks R2, R3 and R4.

400 mA

8.4.17.1

Connection of the expansion racks to the basic rack

The connection to the next board frame is made using a double-screened Ethernet cable ”category 6” (8-pin).

The maximum length is 30 metres. Connection is implemented via a Western socket RJ45 (8-pin). A cable is required between each basic and expansion rack in order to transmit the system data. The connection is made to the Western socket 1 (see under Function of the Switches and LEDs).

The following diagram depicts the principal connections.

214 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Connection of the expansion racks to the basic rack

1. View from the rear

2. Basic rack

3. Expansion rack 1

4. Expansion rack 2

5. Expansion rack 3

CSI55 LX 07/2006 215

8 Boards

8.4.17.2


LED

L5

L6

L7

L1

L2

L3

L4

R1RC (R1RG/R1RG2, R1RE/R1RE2) front side with LEDs and switches

1. Fan plug 1

2. Fan plug 2

3. Western socket RJ45 1

S1 Switch 1

Left:

Middle:

Right:

No function

Operating status

Reset

Name

Status

RTActive

RFail

TFail

TMFail

IDR

TXTC on: on: on: on: on: on: on:

Description

SMALRES CBI

Send and receive active

Receive error

Send fault

Transmission is not synchronous

Data transfer possible

Greater traffic from the rack

216 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

L8

RXTC on: Greater traffic into the rack

Fault signaling

The following fault monitoring is implemented:

1. There are two equipment variations for the modules, one for the basic rack (R1RG/R1RG2) and one for the expansion rack (R1RE/R1RE2). A check is carried out whether the module is inserted in the correct rack. If this is not the case, the LEDs TMFail, IDR, RXTC and TXTC will blink.

2. The transmitted FP8K is checked on the receiver side. Further, the FP160ms is also checked. The LED

TMFail then switches to inactive. If a FP8K or a FP160ms then fails, the LED TMFail switches to active and the checking procedure starts once more.

3. The IDR LED displays that data transfer is possible. In the event of a fault, it remains inactive for at least

127 ms.

4. As soon as the CBI is unable to receive and data from the transmission link (PWR inactive), this is displayed by the RXTC LED.

5. As soon as the CBI is unable to receive and data from the transmission link (PWR inactive), this is displayed by the RXTC LED.

6. The TMFail LED is activated as soon as the reception frequency of 49.152 MHz is no longer correct.

Western plug

The Western plug RJ45 is used to transmit system data (frame pulse, highway data, CBus data, status lines and I2C bus data) and the transmission pulses.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 217

8 Boards

8.4.17.3

C-bus address distribution

C-bus address distribution and slot numbers

1. Slot number


218 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8.4.17.4

Fuses on the board

8 Boards

Component side of the R1Rc board

1. Fan plug

2. Fan plug

3. Switch

4. Light Emitting Diodes

5. Western plug 1

6. Fuses 48V (T SIC, 500 mA)

• R1RG/R1RE: on the rear of the board

• R1RG2/R1RE2: on the component side of the board

7. 5V fuse soldered in

If the fire 5V fuse is defective (burned out), the board must be replaced by a new one.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 219

8 Boards

8.4.18

V24I/NI Insulated/Non-Insulated


Both submodules are inserted on to the ACB/HSCB board and have the following features:

• V24I, is for the DC decoupling of all signals and of the logic ground.

• V24NI, is for the direct connection of all signals and of the logic ground.

V24I/V24NI modules on the HSCB board

8.4.19

V24M Module


V24M is a sub-board for the UIP board. It comprises the layer 1 functions for a V.24 interface.

A maximum of two V24 modules can be inserted on slots 1 and 2 of the UIP board. This requires the connection of the connecting circuit line to be implemented via the CA3B board.

Other features

Application

Power demand +5V for further V.24 ports on the system

100 mA

8.5

Connector technology and signaling

Connection board

CA → 240

of the connection board

General description

220 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards


AEV24B → 230

AV24B → 238

CA1B → 391

CA2B → 392

CA3B → 393

CA3B/T → 394

CA4B → 395

CA5B → 395

CA6B → 396

CAIB → 247

CARUB → 248

EES1B → 275

EES8B → 275

EES0B → 436

EESS0 → 440EESS0

ESBx → 276

ESBA → 276

ESBB → 276

OFA2B → 491

OFAS → 491

TER → 292


ACB → 221, VoIP → 513

HSCB → 281, CBT → 580

ASCEU → 324, ASCF → 324, ASCGB → 324, ATA → 330, ATA2

→ 333 ATB → 336, ATC → 338, CAS → 397, DDID → 354,

DCON → 403, DUP03 → 430, MULI → 487, DECT21 → 415, DT0

→ 423, DT21 → 427, UIP without V.24M → 495

ASC2 → 310, ASC21 → 314, ATLC → 341, DS02 → 418, DS03

→ 421, DUPN → 432, JPAT → 357, ADM → 301

UIP with V24 → 495, ICF with CL2M/CL2ME → 285

UIP with CL2ME → 495

DT21 → 427, CAS → 397, DCON → 403

IMUX → 458

MAC → 475, HAMUX → 447

IPGW → 502

ASCEU → 324, ASC2 → 310, ASC21 → 314, ATLC → 341, JPAT

→ 357

ATA → 330, ATA2 → 333, ATB → 336, ATC → 338

ATA → 330, ATA2 → 333, ATB → 336, ATC → 338

DT0 → 423

DT0 → 423, ADM → 301

CF2E → 256, CF22 → 248, ICF → 285

CF2E → 256, CF22 → 248, ICF → 285

CF2E → 256, CF22 → 248, ICF → 285

DT21 → 427

DT21 → 427

On backplane (only B3 module)


EDU → 263


ESB → 276

8.5.1

ACB/ACB1 Advanced Computer Board


The ACB board is the basic equipment in all modules. This computer board must be used to support the software IEEx (Linux operating sistem). As HGS it is used a 2.5” hard disc drive.

The ACB1 board is the follow-up board of the ACB and can be used starting with software version IEE2

(version L021V00 1 1.0). The difference to the ACB is the physical medium of the HGS. In the case of the

ACB1, the HGS is a Compact Flash Card with different capacity according to system size, the following sizes are recommended:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 221

8 Boards

for single and Twin system: for multi-module up to 4000 subscr.: for multi-module of more than 4000 subscr.:

Compact Flash Card with 1 GB with 2 GB with 4 GB

Handling, as well as switch and display functions of both boards are identical:

Features

ETX-PC




Modul)


Voltage generation


Hardware watchdog


Ethernet interface 10/100 Base T two V.24 interfaces (see AEV24B Adapter Ethernet V24 B Modul)



Two CBus interfaces (ISA Bus) on for system control reasons one as SPY-remote Interface (SPY =System Protocoller and Analyser)

IDE interface for HGS


222 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

ACB1 board, component side

CSI55 LX 07/2006 223

8 Boards

ACB board, component side

1. Battery

2. ETX-PC

3. V24I/NI


5. Boot Flash (Compact Flash Card)



8. CBI1A3 for SPY I55

9. EPLD

224 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

10. CBI1A3

11. HDD

The ACB is equipped with one of the following V.24 submodules:

• V.24I Insulated



• RXD

• TXD

• DTR

• GND

• DSR

• RTS

• CTS

Other features

Power demand +5V 3.5A

The V24NI submodule is used as standard when connecting devices to the V.24 interfaces. If necessary, it is also possible to use the DC isolated V24I.

AEV24B adapter Ethernet / V24 B module → 230

8.5.1.1


CSI55 LX 07/2006 225

8 Boards

ACB board, front side


S1

S2

S3

Neutral position

Left position

Left position

Switch Function

S1 Reset switch

Mean: links:


Operating status

Hardware Reset of the board, locking

226 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

S2

S3

Right: ACB is been shut down (by operating system), pushing


links:

Right:


Service position: Pulling out the IDE hard disk and plugging it back in

Service entry

links:

Right:

The commissioning (OS, applications and customer’s data load) is executed without break

Before booting, the switch must be in the righthand position

(reboot, power restoration).

The boot phase is interrupted at a defined point. At this point an service access via ISM (WebMin) is possible. Changing of parameters as for example IP addresses or GCU slot address can be executed.

Then the switch is to be brought in the left position. The service access is closed and a reboot is executed.


LL

LD

L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7 - L10

On: off:

Ethernet connection status is OK

Ethernet connection status is interrupted

On: off:

On: off:

On: on or flashing: on or flashing:

On: off:

On: data transmission via Ethernet no data transmission via Ethernet

The Ethernet interface of this module is connected to the network

The Ethernet interface of this module is not connected to the network

Alle the voltages of the board are present

Data transfer via the C bus

Access to the inserted background memory

Indicates that the HGS can be unplugged

Operating system does not allow pulling out the HGSs

Fault in GCU (collective display) off: Operating status

These light-emitting diodes show the statuses from reset to operation. After switching on the power a function check is executed (short flashing).

If an error was recognized by SEM (System Error Management) which leads to a recovery (prozess restart or system shut down), the light-emitting diode L6 goes on (shines). The L7 to L10 remain unconsidered. If the recovery is finished, the L6 (red) is turned on for 5 sec. and afterwards is switched off. The status LEDs

L7-L10 show now the actual system status.

The commissioning status is divided into eight groups:

1. Loading ACB from the flash software

2. Loading ACB from HGS at operating system level

3. Loading ACB from HGS at application level

CSI55 LX 07/2006 227

8 Boards

4. Loading ACB in special status (APS change) during operation.

13

12

11

8

7

10

9

3

2

1

0

6

5

4

No.

L7

15 1

14 1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

L8

1

1

L9

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

L10 Gr.

Status

1 0 Commissioning starts

0

0

0

0

0

1 operating system takes over the funktion

Load operating system via CBI


Ethernet


Phase name


Linux kernel is loaded.

GRUB finished and initialization RAM-Disc started.

ACB board without HGS is loaded as a slave via C bus.

Status 11 and 12 are skipped over.

ACB board without HGS is loaded as master via Ethernet.

Status 11 and skipped over.


Statuses 11 to 13 are not processed in the order.

Update flash SW Flashsoftware ACB under development.

PAL startet The pascal server is ready.

All known pascal tasken will be started.

0 1 Download Applikationfiles in progress.

1 3

Download the application


Start of the platform applications such as

PFSP, PAL, L4AD.

3

3

3 ACB with IVL funktion prepares an APS change.

1

0

1

0

2

2

2

2

APS change in progress

(indication only at the IVL)

Customer data conversion

(display only at the IVL)


ICU commissioning

Normal operation

Customer data conversion (Started by

MML CKDT is not displayed.).

DMS of the module signalls the phase loading customer data.


Start commissioning of the module(s).


1 = LED on

0 = LED off

228 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

2 x

USB

There are 16 USB devices preconfigurated. Beeing 8 of them designed for only TTY operation.

Furthermore 4 are designed for the ACOM protocol and 4 as RAW, they are not used yet. By default all have the Host Index configured as group 1. But this can be changed by means of the

Webmin at any moment.

The USB devices are not connected normally with logical devices of the pascal applications.

This must still be done via the Webmin interface.

As soon as this is done, the pascal application (prolog task) will try to show its prompt (ˆC) on this new device. This activation can take up to one minute after the change of configuration data done by the Webmin.

In the same way all other interfaces can be also configured (commissioning and shut down).

Reference numbers, that are available in the Ebuyer Tool:

4.999.096.855

4.999.096.856

4.999.100.643

USB Hub

USB/V24 adapter

USB/USB Laplink gold cable

8.5.1.2

Fan replacement

Replacement of defective fans in I55 systems with ACB

The ACB for standard systems is characterized by its relatively low heat generation. For this reason, even if no fan is used the risk that the processor reaches or exceeds the maximum operating temperature only exists under unfavourable conditions. Unfavourable conditions are a high room temperature (over 35 degrees C (95 degrees F)) and permanent high load (over 70 percent).

In the event of failure of one of the two fans we recommend replacing it within one week.

In the event of failure of both fans the CPU temperature and CPU usage (total load) of the ACB in question should be checked first (Webmin: Performance Management). If the CPU temperature is clearly below the limit value of 100 degrees C (212 degrees F) the defective fans should be replaced within the following two days. For safety reasons the CPU temperature should controlled at regular intervals until then. If the CPU temperature is only slightly below or even above the limit value the defective fans must be replaced as soon as possible.

Projects

Up to four ACBs shall be allowed per module. However, only two per frame to provide sufficient heat dissipation. The software can handle this (a confirmation test will be provided later), four per module were mentioned as the upper limit for systems with HSCB during the workshops with system specialists.

8.5.1.3


The ACB board may be removed or inserted during system operation, if the S1 switch handle has been moved to the left.

In single module systems, removing the ACB board during operation will result in a total breakdown.

In multi-module systems, removing the ACB board will result in the failure of this module or of the central functions depending on the BS Confi data packet.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 229

8 Boards

8.5.1.4

Operation ACB

Refer to handling specification HSP to ACB, APS IEE2.1

8.5.2

AEV24B adapter Ethernet / V24 B module


The adapter board Ethernet / V24 B module (AEV24B) is fitted in the R1 racks only behind the ACB or VOIP boards.

The use of the AEV24B in conjunction with HSCB or CBT boards is not permitted!

AVE24B board

1. RJ45 socket (8 pins), 1st V24

2. RJ45 socket (8 pins), 1st V24 (not for VOIP)

3. 15-pin D socket for 6-pair cable to the MDF (not for VOIP)

4. 26-pin connection strip as output for SCA 28.7640.385x using pre-assembled cable (only for use in I33 with the ACB Advanced Computer Board)

230 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

5. RJ45 socket for the Ethernet connection for the hub (data network connection, LAN switch)

6. RJ45 socket for the Ethernet connection for a PC (direct connection to PC)

7. Plug for backplane

8. Fixation

It is not permitted for the Ethernet connections for the hub (5) and the PC (6) to be active concurrently.

Applications for V24 ports

First V24 port with ACB Linux system console with VOIP System console for the VOIP board second V24 port with ACB MML system console with VOIP none

8.5.2.1

MDF Connections

The connections described hereafter are only relevant for connection in the I33.

On the MDF the 6-pair (16-pin D plug) cable should be connected as follows.

MDF

Colours

RD/BU

AEV24B

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

A1/B1 (T) S0 connection for service PC (*)

C1/D1 (R) S0 connection for service PC (*)

A1/B1 (T) S0 test subscriber (*)

UP0 test subscriber (*) a1/b1, analog test participants (*)

C1/D1 (R) S0 test subscriber (*) free free/GND (plug screen)

* Connect the S0-, UP0 and a/b test connections from the MDF to the PBX.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 231

8 Boards

8.5.2.2

V.24 Interfaces

see also interface configuration

PIN assignment of the V24 ports

Assignment of the V.24 interfaces

PIN1=free;

PIN2=TXDx;

PIN3=RXDx;

PIN4=DSRx;

PIN5=GNDx;

PIN6=DTRx;

PIN7=CTSx

PIN8=RTSx

Plug screen=GND

8.5.2.3

Ethernet ports

PIN assignment of the Ethernet ports

PIN assignment of the RJ45 connection socket for the hub

6

7

4

5

2

3

Pin

1

8

Plug screen

Signal identification

TXD P

TXD M

RXD P

Z1

Z1

RXD M

Z2

Z2

GND

Z = matching resistor (symmetry)

PIN assignment of the RJ45 connection socket for the service PC

232 CSI55 LX 07/2006

Pin

1

2

5

6

3

4

7

8

Plug screen

Signal identification

RXD P

RXD M

TXD P

Z1

Z1

TXD M

Z2

Z2

GND

Z = matching resistor (symmetry)

The cable connections for the hub are not crossed; those for the PC are crossed.

8 Boards

8.5.3

ASCxx Analogue Subscriber Circuit


The ASC board is available in the following variants:

ASC EU: Europe with the following characteristics:

Country-specific variants are configurable using board software for the following countries:

Germany, Spain, Netherlands, Switzerland, Italy, Belgium, Austria, Greece, Mexico and Venezuela


Interfaces 16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with country-specific guidelines)

Constant current supply

24 mA, switchable to 30 mA (mounting of a 0 ohm resistance)

Line resistance

Range

2 x 475 Ohm

4 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0.4 mm



Line lengths for Message waiting → 325

DTMF/pulse dialling, flash and earth button detection, Telecom-specific (dependent on terminals)

Short and long flash time, Telecom-specific (dependent on terminals)

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

Board software download

Board identification using board pass


CSI55 LX 07/2006 233

8 Boards

Polarity reversion for “message waiting” signalling

Connection of external announcement devices

ASC F: France with the following characteristics:


Interfaces 16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with French guidelines and voice terminals)

Resistance feed

(const. voltage)

2 x 400 Ohm

DTMF/pulse dialling, polarity reversal and button detection





Symmetric call supply



ASC GB: Great Britain


Interfaces 16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with British guidelines)


30 mA

Loop range 900 ohms

DTMF/pulse dialling, flash and earth button detection






8.5.3.1

Line lengths for Message waiting

The range for Message waiting signaling for analogue subscribers of the ASCEU board with the ICU programme ASCEU018.ICP in connection with the various apparatus types and seizure (pick up on call) and outgoing seizure (pick up) with the installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,4 mm is:

Apparatus types

Tel. T40

Tel. TE51

Tel. TE91

Outgoing seizure (pick up)

Line length [m] Line length [W ]

1400

1000

1000

379

272

272

Incoming seizure (pick up in call)

Line length [m]

1400

1000

1000

Line length [W ]

379

272

272

234 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Tel. TC91

Tel. TB510LED

DE

Tel. TB519D

Tel. TK40-20-2

1100

1100

900

300

298

298

245

83

1100

600

900

300

298

163

245

83

Recommendation

The line length with which the performance feature Message waiting is to be operated with conventional signaling (permanently illuminated LED signal), should not exceed

600 m

1.3 km

2.4 km

(Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0.4 mm)


(Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,8 mm)

Malfunctions may occur when establishing a connection if the lines are any longer.

The tel. TK40-20-2 should only be operated with a 300 m (83W ) line length.

Deviations from the recommended line length are possible.

If the lines are any longer, a different Message waiting signal (signal LED blinks) should be selected. Signalling is implemented in the ICU programme ASCEU019.ICP for the ASCEU board.

8.5.3.2


ASCxx board, front side

CSI55 LX 07/2006 235

8 Boards

1. LED red

2. LED green


S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:


L1 on: flashing:

L2 off: on: flashing: off:

Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Neutral/release/ operating status

Reset board

Forced board download

Board is busy with switching functions

Module can be removed after preparatory disabling (VSP) or blocked in terms of software

Board is not busy

Board reset in progress

Download in progress

Board in operation

8.5.3.3

Bridge positions

The power supply can be increased from 24 mA (standard) to 30 mA per line in this board: The increase in the supply current is implemented by inserted 0 Ohm resistors or bridges at the following coordinate points:

AO1

AO2

AO3

AO4

AO5

AO6

AO7

AO8

AO9

AO10

AO11

AO12

AO13

AO14

AO15

197 077

199 128

173 069

179 116

155 077

157 128

131 069

137 116

113 077

115 128

089 069

095 116

071 077

073 128

047 069

236 CSI55 LX 07/2006

AO16 053 116

8 Boards

CSI55 LX 07/2006 237

8 Boards

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

8.5.3.4

MDF Connections

MDF

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

8.5.4

AV24B Adapter V24 B Module


Cable Adapter

CA1B/CARUB from ASCxx

a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 a9/b9 a10/b10 a11/b11 a12/b12 a13/b13 a14/b14 a15/b15 a16/b16

238 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

The adapter board V24 / B module (AV24B) is fitted in the R1 racks only behind the HSCB board or with the

CBT service board.

AV24 B board

1. BG AV24B, soldering side

2. 26-pin strip connector to the SCA 28.7640.385x board (only for use in I33)

3. 15-pin D plug for the six-pair cable to the HVT for a tester, service PC or DuWa test jack (only for use in

I33)

4. 9-pin D plug, 2nd V24

5. 9-pin D plug, 1st V24

6. HSCB slot

7. BG HSCB module

First V24 port second V24 port

Used to connect the PC for CBT applications, such as logging etc.

can be configured in the IVL (HSCB with HGS) as a connecting interface of the

DCF77 receiver.

8.5.4.1

MDF Connections

The connections described hereafter are only relevant for connection in the I33.

MDF

Colours

RD/BU

WH/YE

AV24B

A1/B1 (T) S0 connection for service PC (*)

C1/D1 (R) S0 connection for service PC (*)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 239

8 Boards

WH/GN

WH/BN

WHBK

WH/BU

A1/B1 (T) S0 test subscriber (*)

UP0 test subscriber (*) a1/b1, analog test participants (*)

C1/D1 (R) S0 test subscriber (*) a11/b11 (DID test device) (*) a12/b12 (DID test device) (*)

* Connect the S0-, UP0 and a/b test connections from the MDF to the PBX.

8.5.4.2

V.24 Interfaces

seeInterface Configuration → 525

PIN assignment of the V24 ports

Assignment of the V.24 interfaces

PIN1=free;

PIN2=RXD;

PIN3=TXD;

PIN4=DTR (only supported for HSCB);

PIN5=GND;

PIN6=DSR (only supported for HSCB);

PIN7=RTS (only supported for HSCB);

PIN8=CTS (only supported for HSCB);

PIN9=free

Connections from the first V24 port of the CA3B in the B3 module

PIN1/PIN6 A1/B1 (R, external clock 2048/1544 kHz)

8.5.5

CA Cable Adapter


The CA Cable Adapters are fitted in the rack (only I55) and allow connecting circuit board connections to be switched through to the MDF.

8.5.5.1

CA Assignment

Cable Adapters for Digital connecting device boards

240 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Board

CAS

DCON

DECT21

DS02

DT0

DT21

DUP03

DUPN

IMUX

MAC

HAMUX

MULI

ADM

UIP without V.24M

UIP with V.24M

CA4B

OFA2B

CA1B

CA2B

CA5B

CA6B

CA6B

CA1B

CA2B

CA1B

CA3B

Cable adapter

CA1B

CA4B

CA1B

CA4B

CA1B

CA2B

CA1B

CA1B

Cable Adapters for Analog connecting device boards

Board

ASC2.

ASC . .

ATA/B/C

ATLC

DDID

JPAT

Cable adapter

CA2B

CARUB

CA1B

CARUB

CA1B

CA2B

CARUB

CA1B

CA2B

CARUB

Cable adapters for IP telephoning Gateways

Board

IPGW

VoIP

Cable Adapters for Other Connectors

Board

Cable adapter

CAIB

AEV24B

Cable adapter

CSI55 LX 07/2006 241

8 Boards

CF22/CF2E

ACB

HSCB

ICF + CL2M

ESBx

AEV24B

AV24B

CA3B (B3 module and ICS)

8.5.6

CA1B cable adapter 1 for B modules


Cable adapter for 16, 4 or 2-pair analog or digital connecting circuit line for boards ASCEU, ASCF, ASCGB,

ATAx, ATB, ATC, DDID, DUP03, DT0, DT21, CAS, DCON, UIP without V24M, MULI and DECT21 with

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• Overcurrent breakpoint (230 V contact)

1. 16, 4 or 2-pair to the MDF/NT

1. Release the lock by pressing the bracket

2. Do not turn the screw!

242 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.5.7



Cable adapter for 2 to 8-wire analog or 4-wire digital connection device line for the ASC2, ASC21, ATLC,

DS02, DUPN, JPAT and ADM boards with



1. Cable 1 (16x2) to the MDF


8.5.8



Cable adapter for the UIP board, provided that the V24M submodules are also inserted here. The board is also required for external synchronization when using the CL2M/CL2MEM on ICF (B3 module or ICS).


• 2x 9-pin D plugs for V24 interfaces or connection of high precision reference clock


If the first slot of a UIP board is equipped with a CL2ME for the clock supply of TAREF it is necessary to use the CA3B/T cable adapter.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 243

8 Boards

1. Cable 16X2 to MDF

1. Cable for connecting an external clock source plugged on the first V.24

8.5.9

CA3B/T cable adapter 3 for B modules TAREF


Cable adapter for UIP board if the clock supply from TAREF is implemented via the CL2ME inserted on the first slot of the UIP.

The V24M submodules can also be inserted here.

244 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

1. Cable for connecting the TAREF (material number: 27.5630.0531) inserted in the first V.24

8.5.10



Cable adapter for the connection of coax lines when using boards DT21, CAS and DCON, provided that these modules are set on unsymmetrical interfaces.

• 2 BNC Coax sockets as output to NT or MUX.

1. Coax cable to NT or MUX

8.5.11



Cable adapters for the connection of V.24 and X.21 connectors to the IMUX board.

• Cable to the TA of the network operator or MDF (X1 and X5)

• 1x 15-pin Sub-D female Connector for X.21 data terminals (X4)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 245

8 Boards

• 1x 25-pin Sub-D female Connector for V.24 data terminals (X3)


• Ground breakpoints (see IMUX board)

1. Cable Adapter 5B, rear component side, breakpoints

8.5.12



Cable adapter for connecting UP0 and S2M connections to MAC and HAMUX boards.


• 8-pin WE plugs

246 CSI55 LX 07/2006


2. 8-pin WE plugs

8.5.13

CAIB Cable Adapter I for B Modules


Cable adapters for the connection of the connections to the IPGW board.

8 Boards

CAIB cable adapter

1. Connection cable CAIB - MDF

Cable adapter CAIB, component side

1. Cable 6x2 to the main distribution frame

2. RJ45 socket for the Ethernet connection

3. V.24 connection

CSI55 LX 07/2006 247

8 Boards


5. Fixation

8.5.14

CARUB Cable Adapter Russia B modules


The cable adaptor CARUB are used in Russia and the USA for the connection of ASCEU, ASC2, ASC21,

JPAT and ATLC boards.



• Protective elements for contact with outside voltage



8.5.15

CF22 Central Functions 22


The central board CF22 is the basic equipment in all modules. It replaces the CF2E board.

It supports:

• the dealer functions

• intermodule handover functions for DECT

and

• call number display for incoming calls to analogue terminals (”CLIP” Calling Line Identification Protocol).

As opposed to CF2E it only features one DSP system.

248 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Features

Ports


ILMx

DECT



+

+

544

1088

1088 Erl.

225 Erl.

Features


















Conferences


Only dealer terminals support conferences with more participants.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 249

8 Boards

Call number ID

8 DTMF transmitters for CLIP (call nummer indication on analogue terminals for incoming calls)

Other features



If fibre-optic links are used, the CF22 board is to be fitted with the submodule CFIML Central Function Inter

Module Link.

8.5.15.1



250 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

CF22 board, component side




4. LED red:

Loadable hardware of the board out of service

Operation of the board is not possible

5. FPGA Boot/Load PROM

6. Fire protection fuse 7A


CSI55 LX 07/2006 251

8 Boards

7. LED green: R/T active on: High data traffic flashing: Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor











35

55

87

126

(Default)

Switch

1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

2

ON

ON

OFF

OFF



5

ON

(Default)




with ESU

6

ON without ESU OFF

4

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Switch

3

ON

OFF

ON

OFF


Download

Download inactive

Download possible

(default)

Switch

7

ON

OFF


8

252 CSI55 LX 07/2006

Watchdog inactive

Watchdog active

(default)

ON

OFF









Switch

1

ON

OFF

3

4

2

ON

OFF

8 Boards

CSI55 LX 07/2006 253

8 Boards

8.5.15.2


CF22 board, front side


S1

S2

Middle position

Middle position

Switch Function

S1

S2

Reset switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Service Switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Operating status


Reset board, keying

Operating status


With a doubled CF2x: Activate switchover, keying

254 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards


L1

L2

L3

ACTIVE on: flashing: off:

CLKUA on:

IMHOSYNC on: flashing: off:

L9

L10

L11

L12

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L13


AMEX1S on:

DSP-LED1 on: flashing: off:

TFAIL on or flashing: off:


CLKUSYN on:

MANK on:

IDR

ECLKU on: flashing:

DSP-LED2 on:

CSI55 LX 07/2006




MSMC active

Clock unit active





This operating status may also occur if switch 1 of DIL switch 2 is in the ON position (IMHO active) while LED L4 is on.





Status - LED

Boot phase after board reset or DSP system permanently defective temporary synchronization fault on a DSP Highway


One or more C-bus transmit errors


MMG status



MMG in operation



Master network node



Error clock unit

Clock system error


Status - LED

Boot phase after board reset or DSP system permanently defective

255

8 Boards

L14 flashing: off:

RFAIL on or flashing: off: temporary synchronization fault on a DSP Highway


One or more C-bus receive errors


8.5.15.3

Doubling

It is possible to double the CF22 board in the R1 rack.

SeeDoubling → 143

8.5.15.4



The CF22 board can be removed or inserted during system operation. However, the module will not operate if the CF22 is not doubled.


When doubling, the CF22 board may only be removed when in passive status (LED 2 off). If


8.5.16

CF2E Central Functions 2E


The central board CF2E is the basic equipment in all modules.

It supports the dealer and intermodule handover functions for DECT.

Features

Ports


ILMx

DECT



544

1088

+

+

1088 Erl.

225 Erl.

Features





256 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards




11 DTMF receiver sets, 4 DTMF transmitters










Conferences

The number of subscribers at a conference is 3.

Other features


The CF2E board is supported from the programme file MSC2P006 onwards.


In coupling via LWL, the CF2E module is to be fitted with the submodule CFIML central function inter module

Link.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 257

8 Boards

8.5.16.1



CF2E board, component side

1. DIL switch 3

2. DIL switch 2


4. LED red:

Fault indicator of the central functions

Hardware out of order

5. Fire protection fuse F3, 7 A

258 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards


6. LED green: R/T active on: High data traffic flashing: Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor.











35

55

87

126

(Default)

Switch

1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

2

ON

ON

OFF

OFF



(Default)

5

ON




with ESU without ESU

6

ON

OFF

4

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Switch

3

ON

OFF

ON

OFF


Download

Switch

7

CSI55 LX 07/2006 259

8 Boards

Download inactive

Download possible

(default)


Watchdog inactive

Watchdog active

(default)

ON

OFF

8

ON

OFF









3

4

Switch

1

ON

OFF

2

ON

OFF

260 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8.5.16.2


8 Boards

CF2E board, front side


S1

S2

Middle position

Middle position

Switch Function

S1

S2

Reset switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Service Switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Operating status


Reset board, keying

Operating status


With a doubled CF2x: activate switchover, keying

CSI55 LX 07/2006 261

8 Boards

L9

L10

L11

L12


L1

L2

ACTIVE on: flashing quickly: flashing slowly: off:

CLKUA on:

L3 IMHOSYNC on: flashing: off:

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8


AMEX1S on:

DSP

System 1 on: off:

TFAIL flashing:


CLKUSYN on:

MANK on:

IDR

ECLKU on: flashing:

262



MSMC downloading

MSMC waiting for startup

MSMC active

Clock unit active


Doubling: active CF2x




This operating status may also occur if switch 1 of DIL switch 2 is in the

ON position (IMHO active) while LED L4 is on.





Status - LED


DSP system 25.40 mm operation


MMG status



MMG in operation



Master network node



Error clock unit

Clock system error


CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

L13

L14

DSP

System 2 on: off:

RFAIL flashing:

Status - LED


DSP system 2 in operation


8.5.16.3

Doubling

It is possible to double the CF2E board in the R1 rack.

SeeDoubling → 143

8.5.16.4



The CF2E board can be removed or inserted during system operation. However, the module will not operate if the CF2E is not doubled.


When doubling, the CF2E board must only be removed when in passive status (LED 2 off). If


8.5.17

EDU Error Display Unit


The EDU boards are used either optionally in the service panel or in the multi-module (1/2 k rack) as fault displays.

Features

18 red LEDs for indicating fault statuses.

1 green LED for display of operational readiness

26-pin pin strip for control cable connection

CSI55 LX 07/2006 263

8 Boards

EDU board on the ESB board

1. BG ICF (only in the B3 module)

2. Ribbon cable

3. Board ESB

4. 26-pin plug

5. 10x2 LEDs

6. EDU board (located on the service panel or on the front of the1/2 K racks)

8.5.17.1


EDU board

LED

L0

L1


(lockstoe)

Description

System in operation

SMDT/automatic information call malfunction

S01 switch on text code

233

599, 604

S01 switch off text code

-

600

264 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

L11

L12

L13

L14

(hgsausf)

(zgdeaus)

(ivgstoe)

(rivzaus)

(schnstoe)

(lueausf)

(ltgdef)

(amtalrm)

(stvstoe)

(einzstoe)

(redver)

(synausf)

(ausfext)

HGS failure*

ZGDE failure

Module malfunction

Reserve CPU failure

Interface malfunction

Fan failure

Analog/digital line fault

System ready for operation

Power supply fault

Individual Fault

Loss of redundancy

Synchronization failure

External facility failure

-

126, 127, 297

98

-

262, 264, 265,

266, 267, 535

611, 613

77, 555

664

605, 607, 609

14, 81, 225,

575

227, 228, 361,

362, 363, 364,

401

649

530, 615, 617,

619, 621, 694,

696

643, 644

Switch off using MML after fault elimination.

565

665




650


645


128, 558, 564

139



L15 (imtustoe) IMTU malfunction

* LED2 is activated via the HGS driver.

A LED stays activated until the required switch off text code is output or until it is switched off by means of the

SSUP MML program (submenu MANI; command FSSM).

It is not possible to freely configure the LEDs that are not occupied. The assignment of LED and S01 text code is a fixed part of the S01 program.

The S01 does not distinguish between the different system types; this has to be done by the user of the S01 task.

For a description of the S01 texts for the E070V06 version, see E070V06 S01

CSI55 LX 07/2006 265

8 Boards

8.5.18

EES0B Emergency Extension Switch S0 B Module


For special services, such as the police force, fire brigade or Red Cross, whose answering facilities must always be available, the Emergency Extension Switch S0 for CSI55 is available. In the event of a power failure or other malfunctions, this modules enables a switchover from the connecting line coming from the ISDN network to sets that are powered by the ISDN network.

EES0B board

1. Cable 1 + 2, each 24-pair to external MDF

2. Champ plug

3. EES0B

4. Pl.1

5. Pl.2

Instructions

Connection to a DT0, i.e. 2 DAs are to be switched per port.

Switchover is implemented to a set that is only used when the switchover is active.

For this purpose, a switchover with 1 WP each for the analog voice documentation.

Two 50-pin plugs are available as external connectors.

Switch-over criteria

General power failure

PC Board DT0 removed

Manual actuation of an external potential-free switch

The number of ports is determined by the limited number of plug positions.

The port 1..6 contains the switchover option. Port 7 and 8 are directly switched through.

The switchover is implemented with 4 wires.

For each port, an additional 2 switchover contacts are brought out, via which, for example, lines to voice recording devices are switched.

266 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

The power supply to the board is implemented with GND from the DT0. -48 V is fed via the connecting cable.

One wire is fed for the forced switchover via the connecting cable.

Connection cables required: 2 cables 24x2 I55-HVT (MDF) 29.9030.56xx (xx = cable length)

Block Diagram

Emergency switchover facility for S0 lines

1. ISDN line

2. Answering with emergency set

3. Answering without emergency set

4. Answering

5. Emergency set

6. ZN

7. manual emergency switching

8. Documentation

8.5.18.1

Further Information

An NTBA with emergency supply is used as the NT, and the exchange dialling can be loaded with up to 380 mW in this case.

In normal operation, the emergency set has no function and therefore nothing appears in the display.

Facilities of this type are normally only to be handled by trained personnel. It can then be assumed that no unqualified actions shall be initiated by the users.

Each cable adapter is provided with 125 mA semi-lag fuse protection.

8.5.18.2

MDF Connections

CSI55 LX 07/2006 267

8 Boards

MDF Cable 1

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

TA1/TB1

TC1/TD1

TA2/TB2

TC2/TD2

TA3/TB3

TC3/TD3

TA4/TB4

TC4/TD4

TA5/TB5

TC5/TD5

TA6/TB6

TC6/TD6

TA7/TB7

TC7/TD7

TA8/TB8

TC8/TD8

EA1/EB1

EC1/ED1

EA2/EB2

EC2/ED2

EA3/EB3

EC3/ED3

EA4/EB4

EC4/ED4

Emergency Extension Switch S0 with DT0

ISDN lines with emergency switching

ISDN lines without emergency switching

Emergency sets

MDF Cable 2

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

EA5/EB5

EC5/ED5

EA6/EB6

EC6/ED6

RA1/RB1

ERA1/ERB1

EOA1/EOB1

RA2/RB2

ERA2ERB2

EOA2/EOB2

RA3/RB3

ERA3ERB3

EOA3/EOB3

Emergency Extension Switch S0with DT0

Emergency sets

To analog voice recording from handset of emergency set

From handset of answering facility





268 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

RA4/RB4

ERA4/ERB4

EOA4/EOB4

RA5/RB5

ERA5/ERB5

EOA5/EOB5

RA6/RB6

ERA6/ERB6

EOA6/EOB6

-48 V/-48 V

ZN/GND







From power supply

For the contingency of an emergency change-over

8.5.19

EESS0 Emergency Extension Switch S0


For special services, such as the police force, fire brigade or Red Cross, whose answering facilities must always be available, the adapter board Emergency Extension Switch S0 for CSI55 is available. In the event of a power failure or other malfunctions, this modules enables a switchover from the connecting line coming from the ISDN network to S0 sets that are powered by the ISDN network.

EESS0 board


2. Champ plug

3. EESS0

4. Pl.1

5. Pl.2

Instructions

Connection to a DT0 or ADM, i.e. 2 wire paris are to be switched per port.




CSI55 LX 07/2006 269

8 Boards



DT0/ADM board removed


Other features

Power demand -48V = 108mA


The port 1..6 contains the switchover option. Port 7 and 8 are directly switched through. Ports 9 to 16 cannot be used (only applies to ADM).



The detection ”Board removed” is implemented with GND from the DT0 or ADM.

-48 V is fed via the connecting cable.



The X8 connector of the ADM board requires the EEADM submodule.

The EESS0 board differs from the EES0B board only in as far as in the EESS0 it is possible to prevent emergency switching of individual ports by means of jumpers.

Block Diagram

270 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards


1. ISDN line

2. Answering station

3. Manual emergency switching

4. Documentation

5. Emergency answer

8.5.19.1

Additional measures with ADM

If the ADM board is used with emergency switching (EESS0 cable adapter) submodule 3 is not required. On the X8 connector (normally for submodule 4) you

must insert the EEADM submodule instead of submodule 4.

ADM board, location of EEADM on X8

If the EEADM board is inserted in the wrong place on the ADM board this will cause a defect in the ADM board.

8.5.19.2

Jumper

The EESS0 features switching contacts with jumpers to prevent emergency switching of individual ports.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 271

8 Boards

EESS0 cable adapter, component side

Upon first delivery emergency switching is active for ports 0 to 5, i.e. the jumpers are on 2-3 and 5-6. For special applications it is possible to exclude individual ports from emergency switching.

View of connectors X7, X8 and X9

Connector X7 Jumpers 1-2

272

Emergency switching for port 0 inactive

CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Connector X8

Connector X9

Jumpers 2-3

Jumpers 4-5

Jumpers 5-6

Jumpers 1-2

Jumpers 2-3

Jumpers 4-5

Jumpers 5-6

Jumpers 1-2

Jumpers 2-3

Jumpers 4-5

Jumpers 5-6

Emergency switching for port 0 active











8.5.19.3


The feedlines of the -48V should not be connected to the same fuse as those of the PBX because of the current difference between them.

The failure criteria such as fuse failure, board removed or manual switchover trigger a message on the system console so that monitoring from there is guaranteed.




8.5.19.4

MDF Connections

MDF Cable 1

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

TA1/TB1

TC1/TD1

TA2/TB2


ISDN line 0

ISDN line 0

ISDN line 1

CSI55 LX 07/2006 273

8 Boards

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

Complementary wire: GND

MDF Cable 2

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

EA5/EB5

EC5/ED5

EA6/EB6

EC6/ED6

RA1/RB1

ERA1/ERB1

EOA1/EOB1

RA2/RB2

ERA2ERB2

EOA2/EOB2

RA3/RB3

ERA3ERB3

EOA3/EOB3

RA4/RB4

ERA4/ERB4

EOA4/EOB4

RA5/RB5

ERA5/ERB5

TC2/TD2

TA3/TB3

TC3/TD3

TA4/TB4

TC4/TD4

TA5/TB5

TC5/TD5

TA6/TB6

TC6/TD6

TA7/TB7

TC7/TD7

TA8/TB8

TC8/TD8

EA1/EB1

EC1/ED1

EA2/EB2

EC2/ED2

EA3/EB3

EC3/ED3

EA4/EB4

EC4/ED4

274

ISDN line 1

ISDN line 2

ISDN line 2

ISDN line 3

ISDN line 3

ISDN line 4

ISDN line 4

ISDN line 5

ISDN line 5

ISDN line 6

ISDN line 6

ISDN line 7

ISDN line 7

Emergency set 0

Emergency set 0

Emergency set 1

Emergency set 1

Emergency set 2

Emergency set 2

Emergency set 3

Emergency set 3


Emergency set 4

Emergency set 4

Emergency set 5

Emergency set 5 to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set

CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

EOA5/EOB5

RA6/RB6

ERA6/ERB6

EOA6/EOB6

-48 V/-48 V

ZN/GND from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility

-48V from power supply

Contact of forced emergency switching / to contact of forced emergency switching


8.5.20

EESxB emergency extension switch B module


The board EESxB is used to connect the a/b interfaces of the ATA, ATB, ATC and ATA2 modules to the lines leading to the MDF.

The board EES1B serves the direct connection of an analog exchange line to a terminal in the event of a network failure. It provides connections for one analog exchange line, one line with analog terminal and one subscriber line circuit.

The EES8B enables an emergency switchover of eight analog subscriber sets to the network. The board also contains an overvoltage breakpoint (230 V contact).

EESxB Adapter module with connection

1. 50-pin Champ plug

2. Cable, 16 or 24-pair to external MDF

3. EESxB Adapter module

8.5.20.1

MDF Connections

MDF

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

CSI55 LX 07/2006

via EES1B or EES8B from ATx

a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4b4

275

8 Boards

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

RD/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8

NST a1/b1

NST a2/b2 (8x only)

NST a3/b3 (8x only)

NST a4/b4 (8x only)

TLN-S a1/b1

TLN-S a2/b2 (8x only)



NST a5/b5 (8x only)

NST a6/b6 (8x only)

NST a7/b7 (8x only)

NST a8/b8 (8x only)





8.5.21

ESBx External Signalling B Module


The ESBx board is an adapter board which is inserted behind the CF2E, CF22 or ICF board.

Features

50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF.

18 relays for fault indication, one changeover contact per relay.

26-pin pin strip for connection of the EDU board

Total breakdown indication for single or doubled control (adjustable using jumper).

4 inputs used for external status queries, DC decoupled via optocoupler.

These may be messages from a UPS for example, that are signalled via the PBX and activate a validation call.

4 fused -48 V electric circuits for the operator sets or NT

4 potential connections for fans with failure supervision.

Other features

Power demand +5V 20-400 mA (depending on the number of relays to be activated)

Apart from the fully equipped variant of the ESB there are two variants with reduced equipment: variant

276 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

ESBA

ESBB without external fault signalling, only power supplies for fan, VA and NT, with no

EDU without external fault signalling, only power supplies for fan, VA and NT, with no

EDU, all optocouplers equipped.

The characteristics of the boards can be found in the following table:

Characteristics of the ESBx board family

Feature ESB

Champ plug

Relays for fault signalling

Champ plug

48V power supply circuit assured

Optocoupler inputs for interrogating external conditions

Connection facilities for a fan

26-pin connector

1

4

1

18

4

4

1

0

4

0

ESBA

0

4

1

0

ESBB

0

4

1

0

4

4

0

Notes to MDF one changeover contact per relay

Fault signalling by the relay contacts

Operator set or NT e.g messages from a UPS for example, that are signalled via the

PBX and activate a validation call.

with drop-out monitoring for EDU connection via ribbon cable

Schematic representation of the optocoupler interface

Possible opposite stations for the optocoupler

1. ESB

2. Possible Opposite Station

CSI55 LX 07/2006 277

8 Boards

3. Optocoupler

4. Jumper to deactivate the interface

5. ESD

6. Optocoupler

7. or relay contact

8. or jumper

8.5.21.1

Pin strip on the ESBx

• If overload current points of division on the ESBx board are burnt out, the board must be replaced with a new one.

• Never attempt to repair the breakpoints!

• The system may carry out a reset when the board is inserted!

Assignment of pins to Pin strips on ESB and ESBB boards

S1/1

S1/2

S2/1

S2/2

S3/1

Optoc.

1 inactive

2 inactive

3 inactive

Bridge

1 - 2

4 - 5

1 - 2

4 inactive 4 - 5

Module with 1 CFx 1 - 2

S3/2 Default setting 4 - 5

Optoc.

1 active

2 active

3 active

4 active

Module with 2

CFx’s

Parking position

Bridge

2 - 3

5 - 6

2 - 3

5 - 6

2 - 3

5 - 6

For use in B3 module (IMTU)

S3/1 Module with 1 ICF 1 - 2 not permissible 2 - 3

Insert the jumpers as required.

To protect against fire and energy hazards, fuses must only be replaced with fuses of the same type. Fuses S1 to S5 Wickmann type TR5-630 mA, 250 V time-lag.

278 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

ESBx adapter board, pin strip location

1. Cable 1, 4, 16 or 24-pair to external MDF

2. Fuse 5 for fan in housing

3. Cable 2, 16 or 24-pair to external MDF

4. Connector for EDU circuit board

5. Fan connectors

6. Fire protection device; Will require servicing if defective!

Si = Fuse

8.5.21.2

MDF Connections

Colours

4x2

Colours

16x2

BK/BN

BK/RD

BK/OR

BK/YE

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

Patch panel for the two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

Colours

24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

Cable 1

GND/-48 V (fuse 1, 630 mA, M) for VA or NT

(all variants)


(all variants)


(all variants)


(all variants)

Total failure contact (only ESB)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 279

8 Boards

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

RD/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN free / SMDT automatic information call malfunction contact, A (only ESB)

SMDT automatic information call malfunction contact, M/R (only ESB) free / HGS failure contact, A (only ESB)

HGS failure contact, M/R (only ESB) free / module malfunction contact, A (only

ESB)

Module malfunction contact, M/R (only ESB) free / individual malfunction contact, A (only

ESB)

Individual malfunction contact, M/R (only ESB) free / interface malfunction contact, A (only

ESB)

Interface malfunction contact, M/R (only ESB)

Free contact (only ESB) free / IMTU malfunction contact, A (only ESB)

IMTU malfunction contact, M/R (only ESB) free / reserve controls failure contact, A (only

ESB)

Reserve controls failure contact, M/R (only

ESB)

Ok. 1 external device malfunction (+/-, loop I

2.8 mA) (only ESB and ESBB)







Ok = optocoupler

Colours

16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

Patch panel for the two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

Colours

24x2

Cable 2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK free / power supply malfunction contact, A (only ESB)

Power supply malfunction contact, M/R (only ESB) free / fan failure contact, A (only ESB)

Fan failure contact, M/R (only ESB) free / synchronisation failure contact, A (only ESB)

Synchronisation failure contact, M/R (only ESB) free / ZGDE failure contact, A (only ESB)

ZGDE failure contact, M/R (only ESB) free / system readiness contact, A (only ESB)

System readiness contact, M/R (only ESB)

280 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

RD/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN free / line malfunction contact, A (only ESB)

Analog/digital line fault contact, M/R (only ESB) free / loss of redundancy contact, A (only ESB)

Loss of redundancy contact, M/R (only ESB)

Free/contact malfunction external Facility, A (only ESB)

Contact malfunction external Facility, M/R (only ESB)

Free / contact not currently used, A (only ESB)

Contact not currently used, M/R (only ESB)


Contact not currently used, M/R (only ESB)


Contact not currently used, M/R (only ESB) free/free free/free

8.5.22

HSCB High Speed Computer Board


HSCB is the basic equipment in all modules. It is a computer board with dynamic RAM.

Features







C-bus interface


2 V.24 interfaces

Downloadable

2x PC card/ATA interfaces for 1.8” PC card driver with ATA mode. Hard disk drives with 260 MB or 1 GB

(for large systems) are available for these interfaces.

Other features

Application Basic equipment in all modules


2400 mA without HGS with 1 HGS (startup current)

2900 mA

The drives can be replaced during operation.

with 2 HGS (startup current)

The V24NI submodule is used as standard when connecting circuits to the V.24 interfaces. If necessary, it is also possible to use the DC isolated V24I.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 281

8 Boards

Additional Memory If additional memory submodules (PS2) are inserted into the HSCB, it should be taken into account that the first memory slot must always be occupied. The inserted PS2 memory modules must have an access time of 60 ns.

HSCB board, component side

1. Memory 4

2. Memory 3

3. Memory 2

4. Memory 1

5. HGS

6. Battery

The HSCB is equipped with one of the following V.24 submodules:

• V.24I Insulated



• RXD

• TXD

• DTR

• GND

• DSR

• RTS

• CTS

282 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8.5.22.1


8 Boards

HSCB board, front side


S1

S2

S3

S4

Middle position

Left position

Left position

Left position

Switch Function

CSI55 LX 07/2006 283

8 Boards

S1

S2

S3

S4


Middle: Operating status

Left:

Right:

Reset board, locking (see S2)

Monitor interruption (TENOBUG start), keying

Memory test switch

Left: (Standard)

Right:

No memory test when resetting/restarting

Memory test when reseting/reloading the TC system

Hard Disk Change Request (HDCHR)

Left: Operating status: PC-CARD-ATA-interfaces in operation

Right: Service position: Removing and inserting the HGS(s)

System console connected (SCOCON)

Left:

Right:

No device connected (Default), or printer or video terminal connected

System terminal connected


L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7- L10

Fault indication from the control (group statement)




Indicates that the S4 switch is in the “right” position, and that the system terminal can be connected to the first V.24 interface on the AV24B/W (service)

Unused


5

4

7

6

3

2

12

11

10

9

8

No.

L7

15 1

14

13

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

L8

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

L9

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

L10

1

Phase name

Start reset phase

Test flash-PROM

Test QUICC




Test dynamic RAM


End reset phase






284 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0



1 = LED on

0 = LED off

8.5.22.2

Changing the HGSs

The HGS may be removed or inserted during system operation without the prior removal of the HSCB.

The following procedure must be adhered to:

• Remove static charge from the module frame

• Move S3 switch to the right

• Wait for L4 to light up

• Remove the appropriate HGS

Do not touch the components!

Take hold of the drive from above and below.

• Insert the new HDD

• Move S3 switch to the left

• L4 will go out in a short time

8.5.22.3


The HSCB board may be removed or inserted during system operation, if the S1 switch handle has been moved to the left.

In single module systems, removing the HSCB board will result in a total breakdown.

In multi-module systems, removing the HSCB board will result in the failure of this module.

8.5.23

ICF IMTU Central Functions


The central board of the B3 module or ICS is the ICF.

Features

Clock Supply and

Synchronization

Clock frequency precision for DECT.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 285

8 Boards

Remote synchronizable by high precision reference clock and master module

(with CL2M or CL2ME)

Master function for multi-module systems, adjustable using software.

External interfaces

128 receive/transmit highway

Outputs for ext. signalling

Remote control for power supply

LWL connector

Ref. clock supply (CL2M)

Clocks

Micro processor bus

Interface to Other Modules

Through MLB, with possible MLBIML

Transfer of C-bus data.

256 PCM channels.

Inter Module Manager (IMMG)

Fault Management using Inter Module Manager

Other features

Application Basic equipment in B3/ICS



Memory Doubling e.g. for Downloading

Fire Protection Fuse

Difference between ICF .1321 and .1331

In .1331, CBI and IMLA are on the board.

The ICF with material number 49.9905.9146 can be used in the B3 module and in the ICS.

286 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.5.23.1


ICF board, component side

1. DIL switch

2. Jumper

3. Fire Protection Fuse

Jumper Functions

Total breakdown (system not in operation) via ESB

1 - 2 Normally closed contact for message

2 - 3 Normally open contact for message


4 - 5

5 - 6

Testing of -48 V battery not possible

(default)

Testing of -48 V battery active

When using PS350 with connected battery: Switch on the battery voltage monitoring option

Fire Protection Fuse


Functions of the DIL Switches

S1 Error signalling unit

CSI55 LX 07/2006 287

8 Boards

S2

S3

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

S5

S6

S7

S8

ON:

OFF:

ON:

OFF:

S4

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON:

OFF:

ON:

OFF:

ON:

OFF:

ON:

OFF: with ESU without ESU

System configuration for IMMG

IMMG passive

IMMG active

Specification of highest scan address

16

32

64

128 (default)

Inter module manager watchdog

Watchdog inactive

Watchdog active (default)

CBI master mode switching

Test mode

CBI master (default)


Non-maskable interruption

Enable NMI

NMI disable (default)


CBI speed

2 MHz

4 MHz (default)

8.5.23.2


288 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

ICF board for B3 module, front side ICF board for ICS and B3 module, front side


S1

S2

Reset

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Service Switch

Left:

Middle:

Right:


Operating status

Reset board, keying


Operating status

With redundant star coupler: Activate switchover, keying


L1 No function

L2

L3

L4

Clock unit active on:

When doubling, IMTU status on: off: flashing quickly: flashing slowly:

IMMG status

Active module clock unit

IMTU active

IMTU hot stand-by

IMTU active and alternate path switched

IMTU hot-standby and alternate path switched

CSI55 LX 07/2006 289

8 Boards

L5

L6 on: flashing:

IMMG not in operation (no board operation)

IMMG in operation, but board logon not yet possible

With doubled multi-module, also failure of the fibre-optic link

ICF <–> ICF.

IMMG in operation off:

Clock unit synchronization on: Module’s clock system is synchronized

Master/free-run clock mode on: Module prepared by system software for master operation or module in master free-run clock mode

8.5.23.3



All existing connections are disconnected if the board is removed. Exception when doubling.

If the active ICF board of a doubled pair is to be removed, the service switch must be used to change it over to the hot stand-by side. After the ICF has been reinserted, the service switch must be switched back again.

8.5.23.4

Doubling

Only one ICF board can be inserted for each B3 module.

A doubling of the system can only be implemented by using a second ICS or B3 module.

SeeComplete doubling → 153

8.5.23.5

External clock pulse input

First V.24 interface of the CA3B (Cable Adapter 3 for B modules)

PIN 1

PIN6

A1

B1

External clock pulse input 2.048 MHz (high precision reference clock / TAREF)

8.5.24

OFA2B/OFAS Optical Fibre Adapter


The OFA2B Optical Fibre Adapter 2 B modules and OFAS Optical Fibre Adapter single mode are for connecting the optical waveguides when DT21 boards are used and the optical interfaces are employed.

290 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

The boards are used for various optical fibre types:

OFA2B

Graded-index fibres

Ready-made cable types

29.9030.6101-6199*

CoreØµm

62,5

OFAS

Mono-mode fibres


29.9030.6201-6299*

CoreØµm

9,5

*The last two characters of the material number indicate the length of the pre-prepared cable in metres.

Cable lengths >99m are handled by the project division.

Common data for OFA2B and OFAS boards

Interfaces

Optical transmitters

Optical receivers

Number and form

1 SC socket

1 SC socket

Wavelength

1300nm

1300nm electrical values

Supply voltage

Supply current

Power consumption typical

Depending on the optical fibre used and cross-section area of the optical cable, different maximum cable lengths can be achieved:

Maximum distances

Type of fibre

Graded-index fibre

Mono mode

Optical fibre core Øµm

62,5

50

9,5 maximum length km

10

6,2

15

Basic construction of OFA2B and OFAS

5V

250mA

1.25W

CSI55 LX 07/2006 291

8 Boards

OFA2B and OFAS boards are designed for connecting to SC plugs. Neither board is thus compatible with the previous OFA1B board type, which was designed for mono-mode fibre and ST connectors.

8.5.25

TER Termination


The TER boards are used for line terminations (terminating resistor) of the backplane. Depending on the application, the following TER boards are available:

Submodules

TER2

TER3

Power demand +5V

Power demand +5V

110 mA

90 mA

When using TER boards, check that they are properly connected.

1. TER slot on the B3 backplane

8.6

Analog interfaces

Board

Board/

Rack/

Backplane

ASCxx → 324

ASC2 → 310

ASC21 → 314

ATA → 330

292

Submodule

SIGA → 361

SIGB → 362


CA1B → 391,

CARUB → 248

CA2B → 392,

CARUB → 248

CA2B → 392,

CARUB → 248

CA1B → 391,

EESxB → 275

CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Board

ATA2 → 333

ATB → 336

ATC → 338

ATLC → 341

DDID → 354

JPAT → 357

ADM → 301

AUP

Submodule Connection board

SIGC → 362

SIGD → 363

SIGE → 364

SIGF → 365

SIGG → 365

SIGH → 366

SUPA → 371

SUPB → 372

SSBA → 367

SSBB → 368

SSBC → 368

CA1B → 391,

EESxB → 275

CA1B → 391,

EESxB → 275

CA1B → 391,

EESxB → 275

SSBD → 369

SSSM → 370

PLSM → 359

ALSM → 307

ALSMF → 308

ALSMH → 309

ACSM → 298

CA2B → 392,

CARUB → 248

SUTC → 373

CA1B → 391

CARUB → 248

SUTD → 379

ABSM → 293 CA2B → 392

ABSM1 → 294

see Service and installation manual Analog Universal

Platform AUP with submodule on I33

8.6.1

ABSM Analog Subscriber Submodule


The ABSM submodule is plugged into the ADM board. It makes available four a/b connection for analog end devices, according to country specific requirements with the following features:


Germany, Austria, Switzerland, Netherlands, Great Britain, Italy, Spain, Belgium,

Venezuela, Hungary, Czech Republic, Slovakian Republic, Mexico, Hong Kong,

USA, Russia and France


Interfaces 4 × a/b


24 mA convertible to 30 mA

Line resistance 2 x 475 Ohm

CSI55 LX 07/2006 293

8 Boards

range: 4 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,4 mm

9 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm


DTMF/pulse dialling

50 Hz ringing current (only with PS350A switchable to 25 Hz)

Short and long flash time (end device dependent)







The connection on the MDF is carried out via the CA2B or CARUB boards.

Changing the Supply Current

The power supply per connecting circuit can be increased from 24 mA (standard) to 30 mA in this board.

The following actions are to be carried out per connecting circuit:

• Equip with 0 Ohm resistance (see illustration)

ABSM board, component side

1. Connecting circuit 1




5. Plug connector to the ADM (internal ADM interface)

6. Plug connector to the ADM (line interface)

8.6.2

ABSM1 Analog Subscriber Submodule 1


The ABSM1 submodule is plugged into the ADM board. It replaces the ABSM submodule and provides four a/ b connections for analogue terminals, according to country-specific requirements, with the following features:

294 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards






Interfaces 4 × a/b



Line resistance range:

2 x 475 Ohm




DTMF/pulse dialling

50 Hz ringing current (only with PS350A switchable to 25 Hz)









Setting of the supply current 30mA per port

The ABSM1 board implements a subscriber interface with continuous current supply. This means that the switching regulator of each port component provides the supply voltage to the terminal (analogue telephone) in order for the supply current to flow (within the limits of the supply range). A continuous current of 24mA is adjusted by default.

The supply current can be increased to 30mA by inserting bridges or 0 ohm resistances. Each of the 4 ports can be adapted individually. A maximum of 4 ports must be changed individually.

Only one of the following setting options should be used for the ABSM1 submodule. Mixing the variants does not make sense!

Increase of the supply current to 30mA by inserting bridges on the component side

The following picture shows the component side of the ABSM1. The positions of the soldering spots for the resistances (or bridges) are highlighted and shown in detail next to the board.

Simple wire bridges must be soldered on the component side. Short-circuits as a result of contact with neighbouring components and signalling lines at all costs must be avoided!

CSI55 LX 07/2006 295

8 Boards

ABSM1 submodule, component side

Increase of the supply current to 30mA by inserting bridges on the solder side

Since the components are in close proximity to each other and since it is not possible to immediately find the modified current setting of an ABSM1 plugged onto the ADM, there is another possibility of setting the current. By soldering wire bridge onto the solder side of the ABSM1 it is possible to obtain the same effect as by soldering bridges onto the component side. The soldering points located between the *1 marks (very small) must be connected by means of a wire bridge. The following figure shows the soldering side of the

ABSM1. The port-specific areas are outlined and shown in detail.

296 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

CSI55 LX 07/2006 297

8 Boards

ABSM1 submodule, conductor side

There are no components on the soldering side. This simplifies the soldering process and the optical recognition of a chosen current increase. A very exact orientation must be ensured with this variant! We recommend the use of a magnifying glass to make sure that the correct soldering points are connected to each other.

8.6.3

ACSM Alternating Current Signalling Submodule


The Alternating Current Signalling submodule (ACSM) performs the signal exchange with the remote connecting circuit by transmitting 50Hz AC impulses back and forwards on the speech lines.

Other features


Power demand +5V

Interface to the remote connecting circuit


5 mA an a/b (two-core line)

The signalling current must be measured.

Combinations with other submodules on an ATLC board are possible.

8.6.3.1

Setting up the ACSM

In exceptional application cases, a separate alternating current signal for signalling to the remote connecting circuit can be supplied instead of the alternating current from the power supply of the I55. At the MDF, the supply is implemented via the (in this case unused) wires of the incoming Ka/Kb speech path. To switch the alternating current signal, two bridges must be disconnected and two bridges inserted on the ACSM submodule.

Section of the soldering side on the ACSM submodule

1. Disconnect two bridges here

2. Insert two bridges here

Note

The supply must be implemented separately for each port via the associated Ka/Kb wires.

8.6.3.2

Calibrating the Signalling Current

The signal current comprises the base for signalling between the ACSM and the remote connecting circuit.

Because the strength of the current depends on the connecting line between ACSM and the remote connecting

298 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

circuit, commissioning or alteration of the connecting line must be followed by individual adjustment of the signal current to and from the remote side.

If the signalling current is too weak, the individual criteria may not be identified. If the current is too strong, this may lead to signal distortion, and subsequent misrepresentation of the individual criteria.

The ACSM submodule is equipped with two potentiometers for adjustment of the signal current to the remote connecting circuit and two measuring points for identification of the signal current from the remote connecting circuit.

For the calibrating procedure, the ATLC board and the corresponding ACSM sub-board should be inserted into the TC system via the Board Adapter (BA) module, material number: 28.5630.590x. This provides access to the potentiometers and measuring points.

The a.c signalling voltage is located on the sleeve strip lines to the ATLC basic board.

Contact with these parts as well as the component connections is to be avoided.

Soldering side of the ACSM submodule

1. Potentiometers

8.6.3.3

Measuring the Transmitted Alternating Current from the remote connecting circuit

In order to do this, the remote connecting circuit must transmit a continuous alternating current. The intensity of the current is measured by a voltmeter, which is to be set as follows:

Measurement range: 1V -2V, DC

The required measuring points, PP1 (-) and PP2 (+), are illustrated.

Soldering side of the ACSM submodule

1. Potentiometers

CSI55 LX 07/2006 299

8 Boards

The signalling current must be adjusted at the remote connecting circuit until the test points read 0.7 V DC voltage.

Once this process has been completed, the continuous alternating current from the remote connecting circuit is switched off.

8.6.3.4

Setting the Transmission Current to the remote connecting circuit

In order to carry out this process, the ACSM must send a continuous alternating current to the remote connecting circuit. To do this, the appropriate testing and blocking switches on the ATLC board must be switched into the right position. The associated LED will flicker slowly, the connecting circuit is now blocked and will transmit continuous alternating current to the remote connecting circuit.

The alternating current transmitted by the ACSM is now measured at the remote connecting circuit, and, by turning the potentiometers alternately, the ACSM adjusts the current to correspond with the remote connecting circuit’s requirements. Turning the meters clockwise results in an increase of the transmission current. Turning anti-clockwise results in a decrease of the transmission current.

Subsequently, the testing and blocking switches on the corresponding port of the ATLC must be brought back into the middle (resting) position. The continuous alternating current is switched off, the accompanying LED goes out, and the connecting circuit is ready for operation.

The calibrating procedure is completed.

The ATLC board can now be removed from the BA module and inserted in its place in the PBX.

The corresponding adjustments must be made in the configuration data.

8.6.3.5

Adjusting the Configuration Data

• Physical line interface

Set to “AC signalling active”.

• Signalling plan

Set the signalling plan so that is identical to that of (coordinated with) the remote connecting circuit.

• Speech path design and relative level

Set one of the following combinations according to the requirement of the interface to the remote connecting circuit.

If your country of application is not listed, select the required level setting for D. Your application then corresponds to German transmission technology.

Speech path design Relative level

(PrE/PrA)

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

-3/-4 dBr

-3/-4 dBr

-4/-3 dBr

Application in countries

A, D, E, GR

B, L

F

I

NL

D, GR

(default setting)

F

B, L

300 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

-4/-3 dBr

-5/-2 dBr

-6/-1 dBr

-6/-1 dBr

A

F

NL

D

• Modifications of the signal times may only be made in exceptional circumstances on site.

• Some signalling plans require adjustments to be made to the “digits”. The permissible settings can be found in the respective signalling plan.

• Settings for the connecting circuit type must not be changed.

8.6.4

ADM Analog Digital Mixboard


The ADM board is a basic board which accomodates up to five submodules. The following submodules are available:

Submodule

STSM

UPSM

ABSM

UKSM

EEADM

Features four S0/T0 interfaces as exchange, permanent connection or subscriber connection four UPN interfaces as subscriber connections or permanent connections four analogue subscriber ports (a/b) twoi UK0 master interfaces for use of the ADM with S0 emergency sets via cable adapter EESS0

CSI55 LX 07/2006 301

8 Boards

ADM board, component side

Observe numbering of the submodules

2

4

1

3

AO 1-4

AO 9-12

AO 5-8

AO 13-16

If the ADM board is used with emergency switching (EESS0 cable adapter) submodule 3 is not required. On the X8 connector (normally for submodule 4) you must insert the EEADM submodule instead of submodule 4.

302 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards


For the ADM board the ”Call Reference Length - (CRL)” can be set to a length of one or two bytes for the whole board by means of the ICU editor. The call reference length of 2 bytes is required for QSIG network connection with some third-party PBX. If this setting is used all ports have CRL=2 bytes no matter which protocol is selected. For this reason it was not possible to connect any system terminals with TN1R6 protocol to this ADM board.

As of software version ADM0900.ICL / ADM00009.ICP of the ICU, the behaviour of the ADM board and of the Integral 55 Compact-ADM port has changed. The CRL setting is only adopted for the ports of the board which use the ”QSIG” protocol. For all other protocolos the call reference length will always be CRL=1.

This makes it possible to configure QSIG ports with CRL=2 for networks with third-party systems while it is possible to use system terminals and permanent circuit lines with CRL=1 for other ports with TN1R6 protocol.

Other features

Countries of application

Power demand +5V

Application in all countries

230 mA

Interfaces




16 times 2/4-wire


In conjunction with V24IA module debugging interface on the board front

Debugger

CSI55 LX 07/2006 303

8 Boards

8.6.4.1


DECT board, front side

1. RJ45 connector with PIN assignment


S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:


Operating status/release

Reset board



L1

L2 on: flashing: off: on: flashing:


Board removable after preparatory disabling

Board is not busy



304 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7- L19

L20 off: on: on: on: on:

Board in operation free free

Layer 1 of the digital connecting circuit 1 active or analog connecting circuit 1 busy


Layer 1 of the digital connecting circuit 3...15 active or analog connecting circuit 3...15 busy


8.6.4.2

MDF Connections

MDF, Cable 1

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for the two wire connection

RD/BU WE 1

Patch panel for the four-wire connection

WE 1

WH/YE

WH/GN

WE 2

WE 3 WE 2

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 3

WE 4

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 5

WE 6

1st slot

2nd slot

ADM with

STSM

A3/B3

(T)

C3/D3

(R)

A4/B4

(T)

C4/D4

(R)

A1/B1

(T)

C1/D1

(R)

A2/B2

(T)

C2/D2

(R)

A5/B5

(T)

C5/D5

(R)

A6/B6

(T)

C6/D6

(R)

A4/B4 free

A5/B5 free

A6/B6 free

via CA2B from

ADM with

UPSM

ADM with

UKSM

A1/B1 free

A1/B1 free

A2/B2 free

A3/B3 free

A2/B2 free free free free free

A3/B3 free

A4/B4 free a4/b4 free a5/b5 free a6/b6 free

ADM with

ABSM/

ABSM1 a1/b1 free a2/b2 free a3/b3 free

CSI55 LX 07/2006 305

8 Boards

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

WE 7

WE 8

A7/B7

(T)

C7/D7

(R)

A8/B8

(T)

C8/D8

(R)

A7/B7 free

A8/B8 free free free free free a7/b7 free a8/b8 free

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF Cable 2


RD/BU WE 1


WE 1

WH/YE

WH/GN

WE 2

WE 3 WE 2

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5 WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

ADM with

STSM

3rd slot

4th slot

A9/B9

(T)

C9/D9

(R)

A10/

B10 (T)

C10/

D10 (R)

A11/

B11 (T)

C11/

D11 (R)

A12/

B12 (T)

C12/

D12 (R)

A13/

B13 (T)

C13/

D13 (R)

A14/

B14 (T)

C14/

D14 (R)

A15/

B15 (T)

C15/

D15 (R)

A16/

B16 (T)

C16/

D16 (R)

A13/

B13 free

A14/

B14 free

A15/

B15 free

A16/

B16 free

A10/

B10 free

A11/

B11 free

A12/

B12 free

via CA2B from

ADM with

UPSM

ADM with

UKSM

A9/B9 free

A5/B5 free

A6/B6 free free free free free free free free free

A7/B7 free

A8/B8 free a13/b13 free a14/b14 free a15/b15 free a16/b16 free

ADM with

ABSM/

ABSM1 a9/b9 free a10/b10 free a11/b11 free a12/b12 free

306 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.6.5

ALSM Active Loop Submodule


The ALSM module is a submodule for the ATLC. It provides an extension to the signalling variants via a two-wire speech path (a/b line). The ALSM submodule is an interface featuring:

Options for use National and international

Power demand +5V 30 mA interface a/b

Supply/loop recognition (subscriber line circuit)

Ringing current signalling

Flash key recognition

Pulse and DTMF dial recognition

Possible combination with other submodules in an ATLC board

8.6.5.1

Setting up the ALSM

The Active Loop Submodule (ALSM) implements signal exchange with the remote connecting circuit by means of active loop signals (supply and ringing current) on the speech wires.

The ALSM submodule is used for the connection of special facilities (e.g. speech memory). It is also possible to connect analog CB sets or connecting lines which require this type of signalling.

Connection is implemented via a 2-wire line (a/b).

With the ALSM submodule, the supply current on the a/b line comprises 24 mA (standard). Current changeover to supply current of 30 mA is achieved by disconnecting one conductor path and inserting one bridge (see following illustration).

Section of the soldering side on the ALSM submodule

1. Material number: 28.7640.6961 or .6962

2. Insert bridge here

3. Disconnect bridge here



Set to ”loop signalling active”.

• Signalling plan


CSI55 LX 07/2006 307

8 Boards



Speech path design

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

Relative level (PrE/PrA)

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-6.5 dBr

+3/-5 dBr

Special application 1


A, D, E, GR

(def.)

B, L

F (with ALSMF)

NL

I

CH

UK


In the case of ALSM submodules with material number: 28.7640.6961 which do not show any wire changes, only a setting of “2-wire, special application 1” is permissible.

In the case of ALSM submodules with material number: 28.7640.6962 and ASLM submodules with reference no. 28.7640.6961 which were changed by inserting wire bridges, all settings except “2-wire, special application 1” are permissible.

• Adjustments to times must not be made.

• Adjustments to the digits may be made if required.

These settings depend on the application case and the selected signalling plan. The required setting measures are found in the respective signalling plan.

• Settings for the connecting circuit type

The only other permissible setting in addition to connecting circuit type ”QUe” is ”TS”. This setting is used if the ATLC port is to be operated as a ”normal” subscriber line circuit. More detailed information can be found in the respective signal plan.

8.6.6

ALSMF Active Loop Submodule France


The ALSMF board is a submodule for the ATLC and is used in France. It provides an extension to the signalling variants via a two-wire speech path (a/b line). The ALSMF submodule is an interface featuring:


Power demand +5V 30 mA interface a/b

Supply/loop recognition (subscriber line circuit)

Ringing current signalling

Flash key recognition

Pulse and DTMF dial recognition

Possible combination with other submodules in an ATLC board

308 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.6.6.1

Setting up the ALSMF

The Active Loop Submodule France (ALSMF) implements signal exchange with the remote connecting circuit by means of active loop signals (supply and ringing current) on the speech wires.

In terms of its functions, the ALSMF is identical to the ALSM submodule. However, additional components mean that it is coordinated especially for French transmission technology.


A switchover via a point of division is not possible with the ALSMF submodule.



Set to ”loop signalling active”.

• Signal code





Speech path design

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire


0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-6.5 dBr

+3/-5 dBr

Special application 1

I

NL

CH

UK


A, D, E, GR

(def.)

B, L

F (with ALSMF)


• Adjustments to the digits may be made if required.

These settings depend on the application case and the selected signalling plan. The required setting measures are found in the respective signalling plan.

• Settings for the connecting circuit type

The only other permissible setting in addition to connecting circuit type ”QUe” is ”TS”. This setting is used if the ATLC port is to be operated as a ”normal” subscriber line circuit. More detailed information can be found in the respective signal plan.

8.6.7

ALSMH Active Loop Submodule Hong Kong


The ALSMH module is a submodule of the ATLC and is used for direct inward dialling in Hong Kong.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 309

8 Boards

Once the ALSMH has been installed, it must be set up by the ICU editor in terms of software for Hong Kong (deviating loadlist (.ICL) / Program (.ICP)).


Setting up the ALSMH

Refer to the descriptions in the following documents:

• Setting up features

• ICU Editor User Manual

Other features:


Power demand +5V 30mA

8.6.8

ASC2 Analog Subscriber Circuit 2


The ASC2 board makes available 32 a/b connections for analog end devices, according to country specific requirements with the following features:






Interfaces 32 × a/b



Line resistance 2 x 235 Ohm range: 1.7 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,4 mm

4.0 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm


DTMF/pulse dialling

25/50 Hz ringing current (convertible)








310 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

In conjunction with V24IA board debugging interface on board front

Debugger = program that helps to track down errors


8.6.8.1


The power supply per connecting circuit can be increased from 22 mA (standard) to 30 mA in this board.

The following steps must be taken:

• Each connecting circuit is fitted with its number on the conductor side or component side of the board.

• The code digit *3 is found in this connecting circuit area.

• Four soldering points are arranged at the position labelled *3. The two soldering points in the middle are connected by a conductor path.

• Connect the right and left soldering point with the two soldering points in the middle. A supply current setting of 30 mA is thereby achieved.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 311

8 Boards

ASC2 board

1. Connecting circuit e.g. 31

2. common for four connecting circuits

312 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8.6.8.2


8 Boards

ASC2 board, front side with RJ45 connector and PIN assignment


S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Preparatory disabling (VSP) for all connecting circuits


Reset board



L1

L2 on: flashing: off: on:



Board is not busy


CSI55 LX 07/2006 313

8 Boards

flashing: off:


Module has gone into operation

8.6.8.3

MDF Connections

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF


WE 1

Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB for ASC2

Cable 1 a1/b1

Cable 2 a17/b17

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 a9/b9 a10/b10 a11/b11 a12/b12 a13/b13 a14/b14 a15/b15 a16/b16 a18/b18 a19/b19 a20/b20 a21/b21 a22/b22 a23/b23 a24/b24 a25/b25 a26/b26 a27/b27 a28/b28 a29/b29 a30/b30 a31/b31 a32/b32

8.6.9



The ASC21 board provides 32 a/b connections for analog terminals, according to country-specific requirements with the following features:









314 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards


2 x 235 Ohm




DTMF/pulse dialling










8.6.9.1

Changing the Supply Current until F Revision

The supply current on the board can be set between 22mA (standard) and 30mA per connecting circuit.

Until the F Revision of the ASC21 (shown on the front panel: 49.9906.7719 F) the ASC21 is manufactured with power supply components in a 28-lead SO (SO = Small Outline Package). The housing can be distinguished by the plug-in connections (14) on each of the two longer sides.


The number of the AO for which the current changeover can be made is stated on the conductor path side and on the component side.

Example:

The power supply component for AO 01 is located on the component side. The soldering points for setting the higher loop current are located on the conductor path side. For this reason the 01 marking is also located on the conductor path side.

The marking *3 is to be found in each AO area, close to which are four mounting spots for two not equipped resistors (0 ohm).

These mounting spots must be connected in pairs by wire jumpers. It is important to solder two wire jumpers per AO.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 315

8 Boards

ASC21 board

1. Power supply component per AO

2. jointly for four AOs

3. Connector to backplane of I55

For better orientation, please turn the board so that the connector (3) is facing you and the numbers of the

AOs are legible.

The following is a section from the component side on which you can see the position of the mounting spots to be bridged.

316 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

1 on component or soldering side, depending on port

The mounting spots must be vertically connected to each other.

The marking *3 relates to the mounting spots marked with an arrow.

The current increase can be set on the component side for the following AOs:

AO number

CSI55 LX 07/2006 317

8 Boards

Number for xx

02

05

10

13

18

21

26

29

Number for yy

04

07

12

15

20

23

28

31

The components are arranged in the same way in all AOs marked with xx or yy.

The following is an section from the conductor side on which you can see the position of the mounting spots to be bridged.

A different arrangement applies to AO 01 and the remaining AOs. First of all, the component arrangement for

AOs 01 and 03:

318 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards


In AO 01 the two bridges to be vertically soldered lie side by side.


The components arrangement is the same for the remaining AOs on which the current increase can be set on the conductor side:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 319

8 Boards



The current increase can be set on the conductor side for the following AOs:

AO number

Number for xx Number for yy

320 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

01

#1

06

09

14

17

22

25

30

19

24

27

32

03

08

11

16

#1 The component arrangement is different on AO 01.


Please connect (vertically) only the mounting spots which are marked accordingly!

Bridges which are soldered differently may result in serious malfunctioning.

8.6.9.2

Conversion of supply current from G revision onwards


From the G revision onwards (designation on front panel: 49.9906.7719 G) the ASC21 will be manufactured with power supply components in a 32-pole PLCC housing (PLCC = plastic leaded chip carrier) by modifying the shape of the housing. The housing can be distinguished by the plug-in connections distributed over all four sides.


• The number of the AO for which the current changeover can be carried out is stated on the conductor path and on the component side.

Example:


• The marking *3 is to be found in each AO area, close to which are four mounting spots for two not equipped resistors (0 ohm).

• These mounting spots must be connected in pairs by wire jumpers. It is important to solder two wire jumpers per AO.

For better orientation, please turn the board so that the connector (3) to the backplane is facing you and the numbers of the AOs are legible.

Since the component arrangement for the board from G revision onwards differs slightly from its predecessor, a section from the component side is shown, on which you will see the location of the mounting spots to be bridged.


CSI55 LX 07/2006 321

8 Boards


The mounting spots to be connected are now always located side by side. A short-circuit between the two bridges to be inserted does not create a problem, provided the four points are connected to each other. A contact to adjoining components must be avoided.

Please connect (vertically) only the mounting spots which are marked accordingly!

Bridges soldered at other points may result in serious malfunctioning.

The following is an section from the conductor side from the board from G revision onwards, on which you can see the position of the mounting spots to be bridged.

Here the pattern for all affected ports is the same. Ports 01 and 03 are not shown separately.


The mounting spots to be connected are now always located side by side. A short-circuit between the two bridges to be inserted does not create a problem, provided the four points are connected to each other. A contact to adjoining components must be avoided.

Please connect (vertically) only the mounting spots which are marked accordingly!

322 CSI55 LX 07/2006

Bridges soldered at other points may result in serious malfunctioning.

8.6.9.3


8 Boards

ASC21 board, front side


S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:


L1

L2 on: flashing: off: on: flashing: off:



Reset board




Board is not busy




CSI55 LX 07/2006 323

8 Boards

8.6.9.4

MDF Connections

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Colours 16x2

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB for

ASC21

Cable 2 Patch panel for two-wire connection

Cable 1

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5 a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a17/b17 a18/b18 a19/b19 a20/b20 a21/b21

WE 15

WE 16 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 a9/b9 a10/b10 a11/b11 a12/b12 a13/b13 a14/b14 a15/b15 a16/b16 a22/b22 a23/b23 a24/b24 a25/b25 a26/b26 a27/b27 a28/b28 a29/b29 a30/b30 a31/b31 a32/b32

8.6.10




ASC EU: Europe with the following characteristics:


Germany, Spain, Netherlands, Switzerland, Italy, Belgium, Austria, Greece, Mexico and Venezuela


Interfaces 16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with country-specific guidelines)


24 mA, switchable to 30 mA (mounting of a 0 ohm resistance)


324 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Range 4 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0.4 mm



Line lengths for Message waiting → 325












Resistance feed

(const. voltage)

2 x 400 Ohm











Interfaces 16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with British guidelines)


30 mA

Loop range 900 ohms







CSI55 LX 07/2006 325

8 Boards

8.6.10.1



Apparatus types

Tel. T40

Tel. TE51

Tel. TE91

Tel. TC91

Tel. TB510LED

DE

Tel. TB519D

Tel. TK40-20-2



1400

1000

379

272

1000

1100

272

298

1100 298

900

300

245

83



1400

1000

1000

1100

600

900

300

379

272

272

298

163

245

83

Recommendation


600 m

1.3 km

2.4 km








326 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8.6.10.2


8 Boards


1. LED red

2. LED green


S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:


L1 on: flashing:

L2 off: on: flashing:



Reset board




Board is not busy



CSI55 LX 07/2006 327

8 Boards

off: Board in operation

8.6.10.3



AO1

AO2

AO3

AO4

AO5

AO6

AO7

AO8

AO9

AO10

AO11

AO12

AO13

AO14

AO15

AO16

197 077

199 128

173 069

179 116

155 077

157 128

131 069

137 116

113 077

115 128

089 069

095 116

071 077

073 128

047 069

053 116

328 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.6.10.4

MDF Connections

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

Patch panel for two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

Cable Adapter


a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7

CSI55 LX 07/2006 329

8 Boards

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16 a8/b8 a9/b9 a10/b10 a11/b11 a12/b12 a13/b13 a14/b14 a15/b15 a16/b16

8.6.11

ATA Analog Trunk Interface A


The ATA board provides the interface for up to 8 analog exchange accesses (PSTN) in accordance with country-specific guidelines. It is a universal Euro-based trunk module and can be adapted to individual countries by means of the corresponding submodule and software (level, impedances etc.).

Submodule

SIG A Signalling Unit A

SIG B Signalling Unit B

SIG C Signalling Unit C

SIG D Signalling Unit D:

SIG E Signalling Unit E

SIG F Signalling Unit F

SIG G Signalling Unit G


Germany, Russia

Switzerland

Luxemburg

Austria

Austria

Belgium

Hungary

A mixed combination of ATA boards and submodules is not possible.

The board can accommodate a maximum of 4 two-part submodules.

330 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

ATA board, slots

Other features

Power demand +5V 530 mA with eight occupied connecting circuits

Interfaces 8 × a/b

DTMF/pulse dialling


Dial tone identification, charge count




In the Integral55, an emergency operation switchover can be set up by inserting an EES1B (EES8B) board behind the ATA board; this is not possible in the Integral55 Compact.

8.6.11.1


ATA board, front side


S1

S2-S9

Middle position

Left position

Switch Function

CSI55 LX 07/2006 331

8 Boards

S1

S2

S3-S8

S9


L1

L6

L2

L3, L4, L5,

L7, L8, L9

L10 on: flashing: on: off: on: off: on: off: on: flashing: off: off:

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:



Reset board


AO1 preparatory disabling

Approve, operation status

AOx preparatory disabling;






Board is not busy


Download in progress or blocked by software

Board in operation

AO1 busy

AO1 not busy

AOx busy

AOx not busy

AO8 busy

AO8 not busy

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

8.6.11.2

MDF Connections

MDF


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

Cable Adapter

CA1B for ATA

a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 free free free

332 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16 free free free free free

8.6.12

ATA2 Analog Trunk Interface A2


The ATA2 board provides the interface for up to 8 analog exchange accesses (PSTN). It is a universal basic exchange line board for Europe. By

Submodule

SIG H Signalling Unit H


Czech/Slovak Republic and software (level, impedance, etc.) it is adapted to the specific requirements of each country.

The difference between this module and the ATA board is the lower DC loop resistance.

A mixed combination of ATA2 modules and submodules is not possible.


ATA2 board, slots

Other features


Interfaces 8 × a/b





CSI55 LX 07/2006 333

8 Boards


An emergency operation switchover can be set up by inserting an EES1B (EES8B) board behind the ATA2 board.

8.6.12.1


ATA2 board, slots


S1

S2-S9

Middle position

Left position

Switch Function

S1

S2

S3-S8

S9

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:


Reset board







334 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Left:


L1

L6

L2

L3, L4, L5,

L7, L8, L9 on: flashing: off: on: flashing: off: on: off: on:

L10 off: on: off:




Board is not busy



Board in operation

AO1 busy

AO1 not busy

AOx busy

AOx not busy

AO8 busy

AO8 not busy

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

8.6.12.2

MDF Connections

MDF


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter

CA1B from ATA2

a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 free free free free free free free free

CSI55 LX 07/2006 335

8 Boards

8.6.13

ATB Analog Trunk Interface B


The ATB board provides the interface for up to 8 analog network accesses (PSTN) in accordance with British

Telecom guidelines. It is a universal basic exchange line board for Europe. By

Submodule

SUP A Loop Calling/Earth Calling

SUP B Loop Calling/Earth Calling


GB,HK

USA and software (level, impedance, etc.) it is adapted to the specific requirements of each country.

ATB board, slots

Other features

Power demand +5V

Interfaces

595 mA with eight occupied connecting circuits

8 × a/b

Levels, impendances, etc. adjustable via confidata

Signalling method selectable via software download Loop calling guarded clearing

Earth calling signalling system

Simple call routing mode

DTMF/pulse dialling


Dial tone recognition, charge metering (350-440 Hz, 1111 Hz/50 Hz)




Access to private MCL network via British Telecom lines.

An emergency operation switchover can be set up by inserting an EES1B (EES8B) module behind the ATB

336 CSI55 LX 07/2006

board.

8.6.13.1


8 Boards

ATB board, front side


S1

S2-S9

Middle position

Left position

Switch Function

S1

S2

S3-S8

S9

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:



Neutral/release

Reset board



AO1 release

AOx preparatory disabling

AOx release


AO8 release

CSI55 LX 07/2006 337

8 Boards

L1

L6

L2

L3, L4, L5,

L7, L8, L9

L10 on: flashing: off: on: flashing: off: on: off: on: off: on: off:



Board is not busy



Board in operation

AO1 busy

AO1 not busy

AOx busy

AOx not busy

AO8 busy

AO8 not busy

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

8.6.13.2

MDF Connections


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter

CA1B from ATB


8.6.14

ATC Analog Trunk Interface C


The ATC board provides the interfaces for up to 8 analog network accesses (PSTN) in accordance with country-specific guidelines. It is a universal basic exchange line board for Europe and can be adapted by

338 CSI55 LX 07/2006

Submodule

SSB

A Signalling Sub Board Type A

SSB B Signalling Sub Board Type B

SSB C Signalling Sub Board Type C

SSB D Signalling Sub Board Type D


France

Spain

Italy

Netherlands and software (level, impedance, etc.) to meet the specific requirements of each country.


8 Boards

ATC board, slots

A mixed combination of ATC modules and submodules is not possible.

Other features


Interfaces

DTMF/pulse dialling

8 × a/b






Direct current loop control

An emergency operation switchover can be set up by inserting an EES1B (EES8B) module behind the ATC board.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 339

8 Boards

8.6.14.1

LED and Switch Functions



S1

S2-S9

Middle position

Left position

Switch Function

S1

S2

S3-S8

S9

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:


L1 on: flashing: off:


Neutral/release

Reset board



AO1 release

AOx preparatory disabling

AOx release


AO8 release



Board is not busy

340 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

L6

L2

L3, L4, L5,

L7, L8, L9

L10 on: flashing: off: on: off: on: off: on: off:



Board in operation

AO1 busy

AO1 not busy

AOx busy

AOx not busy

AO8 busy

AO8 not busy

8.6.14.2

MDF Connections

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter

CA1B from ATC


8.6.15

ATLC Analog TIE Line Circuit


The Analog TIE Line Circuit board (ATLC) is used for

• Networking of the CSI55 with identical or different telecommunication systems via analogue connecting lines,

• connection of special facilities (e.g. speech memory, door handsfree device).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 341

8 Boards

The module can be used inland or abroad, e.g. in special police networks, power supply companies, etc.

The ATLC board contains 8 connecting circuits. These connecting circuits do not have submodules in their basic configuration. The exchange of signals with the remote connecting circuit can take place via separate signal wires depending on the signalling plan (San (in)/Sab (out) forr connection setup and realease and additionally S3an (in)/S3ab (out) for monitoring functions). The speech path can be executed as a two or four-wire path.

Speech wire designation:

• a/b two-wire speech path or outgoing speech path of the four-wire speech path,

• Ka/Kb incoming speech path of the four-wire speech path

The following signalling procedures can be used with these designs:

• Static signals on the Sin (E) and Sout (M) signal wires

• Time-assessed signals on the Sin (E) and Sout (M) signal wires

• Time-assessed signals on the signal wires San (in) (E) and Sab (out)(M) and monitoring functions via the signal wires S3an and S3ab.

Dialling information signalling, which controls the connection setup, may appear as:

• Pulses on signal wires San (E) and Sab(M)

• DTMF signals via the speech wires

• Pulse signalling procedure using speech wires (simultaneous transmission). Alternating current transmission

The individual connecting circuits can also be equipped with submodules according to application. One terminating set is occupied in each submodule.

The following submodules are available:

• Alternating Current Signalling Submodule (ACSM), alternating current transmission

• Simplex Signalling Submodule (SSSM), simultaneous transmission

• Active Loop Submodule (ALSM/ALSMF/ALSMH), subscriber

• Passive Loop Submodule (PLSM), loop transmission

Signal exchange for these applications takes place via the speech path. An exception to this rule is the PLSM submodule in certain applications.

The function of the ATLC board is assigned by means of the configuration data at the corresponding slot in the CSI55. The configuration data can be entered or changed using the ICU editor.

The following adaptations and adjustments must be made to the ATLC boards’s configuration data for each connecting circuit:

• Physical interface condition must be adapted

• Signal exchange and speech path version must be adjusted

342 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

• Signalling function

The signalling function for the ATLC and it’s submodules is documented in signalling plans. These indicate the physical version (direct current, alternating current, etc.) and also the nature and duration of individual signals (seizure, selection, etc.) corresponding to the exchange connection status.

• Changing the connecting circuit type.

This function type is used to log on the port of the ATLC to the CSI55’s control. This connecting circuit type must coincide with the customer data set up in the CSI55! The basic setting of the connecting circuit type for all applications is ”QUE”. Exceptions to this are stated in the respective signalling plan.

The appropriate interface for the remote connecting circuit with regard to:

• physical realization and

• signal exchange can be identified with the aid of the ATLC signalling plans:

Numbering scheme

Alternating current signalling, ACSM

Simplex signalling a/b earth, SSSM

No submodule, 2 signal lines

No submodule, 4 signal lines

Passive loop signal, PLSM

Active loop signal, ALSM

Special applications

Examples for the connection of door handsfree devices

A signalling plan is set up for each signalling process.

Other features




Interfaces 8 times 2/4-wire speech path with 2/4 signal wires each



Download of configuration data



8.6.15.1

ATLC board Without Submodule

Each connecting circuit of the ATLC board that is being operated without a submodule can exchange signals with the remote connecting circuit using:

• static signals on the signal wires Sin (E) and Sout (M)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 343

8 Boards

• time-assessed signals on the signal wires Sin (E) and Sout (M)

• time-assessed signals on the signal wires San (E) und Sab (M) and monitoring functions via the signal wires S3an und S3ab

Signalling of the dialling information in order to control the connection setup can be implemented using:

• Pulses on signal wires San (E) and Sab(M) or

• DTMF signals via the speech wires


Signalling on the outgoing signal wires Sab (out)(M) and S3ab (out)is performed applying a 0V potential during the active signal. When resting or pausing from signalling, the signal wires are unconnected.

The signal wire Sab (out) (M) can be changed to signalling with a negative potential (-48V) for ATLC boards as of material number: 28.5630.4003. These different signalling methods are internationally designated as type 1 and type 4.

Signalling on signal wires Sout and Sin

1. ATLC (first delivery)

2. User

3. ATLC (altered)

The outgoing signal wire S3ab is not switchable.

In order to change the signal potential of the Sout signal wire, a breakpoint must be opened for each port and a wire bridge must be soldered in. The following illustration shows the location of the breakpoints and the bridging points.

The ATLC board is a multilayer circuit board. The connector must be removed at a flat angle, so that the conductor tracks located below are not damaged.

344 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Soldering side of the ATLC board. Example of switching the signal potential on port 1 (port 0)

1. Disconnect

2. Connect

With an active Sout (M) line, the minimum current is monitored in static signalling. This recognizes the ”presence” of the connected remote side. In order to ensure the error-free operation of the board, the following conditions for the signal wires must be observed.

Input conditions:

Principle of the San signal wire

1. Remote side and connecting cable

2. Indicator

3. Control

With HW version .4001 or

.4003

IIN min:

IIN max:

RL max:

CSI55 LX 07/2006

3mA

15 mA

12 kOhm

(RL = 0 Ohm)

(resistive load)

345

8 Boards

Principle of the S3an (in) signal wire


2. Indicator

3. Control


.4003

IIN min:

IIN max:

RL max:

3mA

8.6 mA

10 kOhm

Output power:

(RL = 0 Ohm)

(resistive load)

Principle of the Sab (out) signal wire (condition when delivered)

1. Control

2. Indicator


4. Counter-potential type: -48V

IOUT P max:

IOUT C max:

RON typ:

IOUT min: at UGP = -48V

With HW version 0.4001

With HW version .4003

400 mA 400 mA

100 mA

700 Ohm

2.5 mA

100 mA

135 Ohm

1mA

(RLD = 16,4 kOhm) (RLD = 46.5 kOhm)

For max. 10 ms

Continuous load

IOUT=10 mA

346 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Principle of the Sab (out) signal wire (switched to -48 V)

1. Control

2. Indicator


4. Counter-potential

IOUT P max:

IOUT C max:

RON typ:

IOUT min:

With HW version 0.4001

With HW version .4003

Not switchable

—–//—–

—–//—–

—–//—–

400 mA

65 mA

800 Ohm

1mA at RLD = 47 kOhm

For max. 10 ms

RLD = 0 Ohm

IOUT=10 mA

Principle of the S3ab (out) signal wire


2. Counter-potential type: -48V


.4003

IOUT P max:

IOUT C max:

RON typ:

400 mA

100 mA

14 Ohm

For max. 10 ms

Continuous load

IOUT=10 mA



Make a selected setting according to the requirement of the interface to the remote connecting circuit:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 347

8 Boards

”No submodule, 2 signal lines” (default setting)

”No submodule, 4 signal lines”

• Signalling plan



• Set one of the following combinations according to the requirement of the interface to the remote connecting circuit. If your country of application is not listed, select the required level setting for D. Your application then corresponds to German transmission technology.

Speech path design

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

4-wire

4-wire

4-wire

4-wire

4-wire

Relative level (PrE/PrA) Application in countries

0/-7 dBr A, D, E, GR

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

B, L

F

NL

0/-7 dBr

-3/-4 dBr

-3/-4 dBr

-4/-3 dBr

-4/-3 dBr

-5/-2 dBr

-6/-1 dBr

-6/-1 dBr

0/0 dBr

-2.5/-4.5 dBr

-3.5/-3.5 dBr

+4/-14 dBr

+9/-17 dBr

I

D, GR

F

B, L

NL

D

A

F

(default setting)

• Modifications of the signal times may only be made in exceptional circumstances on site.

• Some signalling plans require adjustments to be made to the “digits”. The permissible settings can be found in the respective signalling plan.

• The only other permissible setting in addition to connecting circuit type “QUe” is “DUe”. This connecting circuit type is to be set if special facilities for line adaptation are to be connected to the ATLC board.

348 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.6.15.2

Inserting the Submodules

ATLC board, component side









Remove the ATLC board from the I55 slot.

The board may be removed and inserted during system operation. The switch functions and

LED displays on the front panel must be taken into consideration however.

Remove the strapping plug of the corresponding connecting circuit (1-8) from the three pin strips.

Insert the submodule into the prepared location.

Insert the ATLC board into the I55 slot.

Once a submodule has been installed, the configuration data must be set up or changed in the I55 (line interface, signalling plan and speech path version/level). This is necessary for the ATLC board to work properly with the submodule.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 349

8 Boards

8.6.15.3

Removing the Submodules

When removing a submodule, reinsert the bridge plug. Make sure it is in the correct position.

Installation which does not correspond with the diagram can lead to malfunctions in the whole board or Communication Server Integral 55.

8.6.15.4

Connection to the MDF

The connectors of the ATLC board are picked up by two 16-pair cables on the CA2B adapter modules, and fed to the MD.

Insert the CA2B adapter module in the respective alignment section.

Insert the Champ plug of the connecting cable into the plug socket of the adapter module.

Attach the connecting cable to the designated fastening grooves.

CA2B adapter module with ATLC board


2. Cable 1, 16-pair to MDF


4. Cable 2, 16-pair to MDF

350 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8.6.15.5


8 Boards

Switch Function

S1

S2-S9

S10 *

Reset switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Right, then left:

AO1-AO8

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Test

Middle:

Left:

* from .4003!

Right:


L1


CSI55 LX 07/2006

Operating status

Preparatory disabling of board (VSP of all connecting circuits)

Reset board


Operating status

Test AO1-AO8 (e.g. simulate an S3in signal)

AO1-AO8 preparatory disabling (VSP)

Operating status

Extend DTMF signalling to approx. 20 sec. (for testing purposes only)

Not used at present

Board is busy in terms of exchange functions

Board removable (all connecting circuits blocked or defective)

Board not busy

Board reset in progress. Programming break in download

351

8 Boards

L7

L8

L9

L3

L4

L5

L6

L10 flashing: off:


Board in operation

AO1 status display

AO2 status display

AO3 status display

AO4 status display

AO5 status display

AO6 status display

AO7 status display

AO8 status display

Connecting Circuit (AO) status display

L..

L11*

L12* on: flashing quickly: flashing slowly: off: on: off: on: off:

Flickering to the rhythm of the dial pulse:

AO.. is busy in terms of exchange functions

AO.. is defective

AO.. is blocked (in terms of software or by preparatory disabling)

AO.. dials by pulse dialling to the remote connecting circuit, or

AO.. receives pulse dialling dial pulses from the remote connecting circuit.

AO.. not busy

Data exchange with I55 control

No data exchange

Error while throughputting data with I55 control

Faultless data exchange with I55 control

* from .4003!

8.6.15.6

MDF Connections

Main distributor

If necessary, connect the sheath wires of the connecting cable (open end and WP plug) with the ground clamps.

Connect the connectors of the connecting cable from the I55 with the line network (wiring blocks).

Mark the cable at both ends using the supplied labels.

Connections from the ATLC

Variants

ATLC without submodules


Port

8 (1 per line)

8 (1 per line)

Interfaces/procedures

2-wire speech path,

E+M signalling

4-wire speech path,

E+M signalling

Connections a/b

Sin/Sout a/b

Ka/Kb

Sin/Sout

352 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards


ATLC with SSSM submodules

ATLC with ACSM submodules

ATLC with ALSM/ALSMF submodules or ALSMH

ATLC with PLSM submodules

8 (1 per line)

8 (1 per SSSM)

8 (1 per ACSM)

8 (1 per

ALSM/ALSMF)

(1 per ALSMH)

8 (1 per PLSM)

4-wire speech path,

E+M and S3an/S3absignalling a/b

Ka/Kb

Sin/Sout

S3in/S3out a/b earth

50 Hz alternating current a/b a/b

Special facility (e.g. speech memory)

Analog DID Hong Kong a/b a/b

Special facility (e.g. door handsfree device) a/b c/d e/f

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC board without submodules

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB

Cable 1 Cable 2

1a/1b

1Ka/1Kb

2a/2b

2Ka/2Kb

3a/3b

3Ka/3Kb

4a/4b

4Ka/4Kb

5a/5b

5Ka/5Kb

6a/6b

6Ka/6Kb

7a/7b

7Ka/7Kb

8a/8b

8Ka/8Kb

1Sin/1Sout

1S3in/1S3out

2Sin/2Sout

2S3in/2S3out

3Sin/3Sout

3S3in/3S3out

4Sin/4Sout

4S3in/4S3out

5Sin/5Sout

5S3in/5S3out

6Sin/6Sout

6S3in/6S3out

7Sin/7Sout

7S3in/7S3out

8Sin/8Sout

8S3in/8S3out

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC board with ACSM or ALSM/ALSMF/ALSMH or

SSSM submodules

MDF Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB

CSI55 LX 07/2006 353

8 Boards

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable 1

1a/1b free/free

2a/2b free/free

3a/3b free/free

4a/4b free/free

5a/5b free/free

6a/6b free/free

7a/7b free/free

8a/8b free/free

Cable 2 free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC board with PLSM submodules

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16


Cable 1 Cable 2

1a/1b free/free

2a/2b free/free

3a/3b free/free

4a/4b free/free

5a/5b free/free

6a/6b free/free

7a/7b free/free

8a/8b free/free

1c/1d

1f/1e

2c/2d

2f/2e

3c/3d

3f/3e

4c/4d

4f/4e

5c/5d

5f/5e

6c/6d

6f/6e

7c/7d

7f/7e

8c/8d

8f/8e

354 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.6.16

DDID Direct Dialling Inward Circuit


The DDID board is the interface for 8 analogue network accesses for direct dial in accordance with countryspecific guidelines.

Other features


Interfaces 8 × a/b

16 kHz meter pulse count





8.6.16.1


DDID board, front side


S1

S2-S9

Middle position

Middle position

Switch Function

CSI55 LX 07/2006 355

8 Boards

S1

S2

S3-S8

S9


L1

L6

L2

L3, L4, L5,

L7, L8, L9

L10 on: flashing: off: on: flashing: off: on: on: on:

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Left:

Middle:

Left:

Middle:

Left:

Middle:

Preparatory disabling (VSP)

Neutral/release

Reset board


DID 1 preparatory disabling

DID 1 release

DID x preparatory disabling

DID x release

DID 8 preparatory disabling

DID 8 release



Board is not busy



Board in operation

DID 1 is busy

DID x is busy

DID 8 is busy

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

8.6.16.2

MDF Connections


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

Cable Adapter

CA1B from DDID

a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 free free free free free free

356 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 15

WE 16 free free

8.6.17

JPAT JISCOS Public Analog Trunk


The board JPAT board provides a maximum of eight 3-wire, analogue connectors for the connection of exchange lines to the CSI55 in the public network.

In order to operate the JPAT module, it must be equipped with a least one of the following submodules:

Submodule

SUTC Signaling Unit Trunk C

SUTD Signaling Unit Trunk D


Russia

Russia

Mixed combination with both submodules on the JPAT is possible.

JPAT board, component side

Other features

Interfaces 8 times 3-wire (2-wire speech path which is also used for signalling together with the c-wire)

Pulse dialling (DEC)

MF-PS register signalling

Transmission and receipt of ANI

The JPAT is connected using the CARUB cable adapter.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 357

8 Boards

8.6.17.1


S1

S2-S9

S10 *


L1 on: flashing:

L2 off: on: flashing: off:

L3

L4

L5

Reset switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

AO1-AO8

Left:

Right:

RS2323 Interface

Left:

Right:

358

Operating status

Preparatory disabling of board (VSP of all connecting circuits)

Reset board

AO1-AO8 Normal status (operating status)

AO1-AO8 preparatory disabling (VSP)

On

Off

Board is busy in terms of exchange functions

Board removable

(all connecting circuits blocked or defective)

Board not busy

Board reset in progress. Programming break in download


Board in operation

AO1 status display

AO2 status display

AO3 status display

CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

L11

L12

AO4 status display

AO5 status display

AO6 status display

AO7 status display

AO8 status display

Message from or to the C-bus

C-bus fault

8.6.17.2

MDF Connections

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter CARUB from JPAT

Cable 1 a1/b1 free/free a2/b2 free/free a3/b3 free/free a4/b4 free/free a5/b5 free/free a6/b6 free/free a7/b7 free/free a8/b8 free/free

Cable 2 c1/free free/free c2/free free/free c3/free free/free c4/free free/free c5/free free/free c6/free free/free c7/free free/free c8/free free/free

8.6.18

PLSM Passive Loop Sub Modul


The submodule Passive Loop Sub Module (PLSM) performs the signal exchange with the remote connecting circuit by means of passive loop signals on the speech wires.

The PLSM submodule is used for the connection of special facilities, e.g.:

Door handsfree facilities

Paging systems

Dictation facilities

CSI55 LX 07/2006 359

8 Boards

.

For certain special facilities (e.g. door opener), further signals can be fed via additional speech wires.

Other features


Power demand +5V 5 mA interface six wires (a/b/c/d/e/f)

8.6.18.1

Functions of the Wires a/b wire

The seizure of special facilities is implemented by the closing of the a/b loop. The loop current must be supplied from the special facility (remote side). If the remote side cannot provide this supply, the ”ATLC without submodule” version is to be applied.

c wire

The c wire serves to check the operational readiness of the special facility. Here, a -48 V voltage is offered by the PLSM via a resistor. The operational readiness is signalled by the 0V potential from the special facility.

d wire

The d wire serves to switch on the special facility. The PLSM switches 0 V potential onto the line.

e wire

The e wire is used to implement, for example, the door opening function via the transmitted 0 V potential.

f wire

The f wire serves to block the respective connecting circuit from the paging system so as to prevent an outgoing seizure by the subscriber (0 V potential). When connecting to a door handsfree facility, the f wire can be connected to the door bell.

The functions of the e and f wires described above can be changed to the following functions in some signalling plans:

Loop monitoring in place of the f wire

Earth button function in place of the e wire

To do this, conductor paths must be disconnected and bridges inserted on the PLSM submodule.


Section of the soldering side on the PLSM submodule

1. For the evaluation of loop current monitoring in place of the f wire disconnect the bridge here

360 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

2. For the evaluation of loop current monitoring in place of the f wire insert the bridge here

3. Insert bridge here for the earth button function in place of the e wire

8.6.18.2



Set to ”loop signalling passive”.

• Signalling plan




Speech path design

2-wire

2-wire


0/-7 dBr

-7/0 dBr


A, D, E, GR


D

• Changes to the signal times must not be made.

• Adjustments to digits are to be made according to the application of the PLSM (door handsfree facility, paging system, etc.), for example, to provide a code to activate the door opening function. The code can be set once the number of digits in the code has been specified. The functions of the codes depend on the set signalling plan. They are explained in the respective signalling plan.


8.6.19

SIGA Signalling Unit A


The submodule SIGA contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be used as analog trunk module (non direct inward).

Location of the SIGA on the ATA module

CSI55 LX 07/2006 361

8 Boards

1. ATA module

2. Submodule SIGA


Other features


Call recognition (25/50 Hz)

Charge recognition (16 kHz)

Germany, Russia

8.6.20

SIGB Signalling Unit B


The submodule SIGB contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be used as analog trunk modules without direct inward dialling.

Location of the SIGB on the ATA module

1. ATA module

2. Submodule SIGB


Other features


Call recognition (20/55 Hz)

Charge recognition (12 kHz)

Switzerland

362 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.6.21

SIGC Signalling Unit C


The submodule SIGC contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be connected as trunk modules.

Location of the SIGC on the ATA module

1. ATA module

2. Submodule SIGC


Other features

Country of application Luxemburg

Call recognition (25 Hz)

Charge recognition (16 kHz or 50 Hz earth symmetric).

The switchover is made using the ATA board software.

8.6.22

SIGD Signalling Unit D


The submodule SIGD contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be used for the direct inward dialling circuits with monitoring frequency.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 363

8 Boards

Location of the SIGD on the ATA module

1. ATA module

2. Submodule SIGD


Other features

Country of application Austria

12 kHz identifier for supervisory frequency and charges

8.6.23

SIGE Signalling Unit E


The submodule SIGE contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be used for DC direct inward dialling (GSD).

Location of the SIGE on the ATA module

1. ATA module

364 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

2. Submodule SIGE


Other features


Charge identifier (12 kHz)

Austria

Call identifier (40-60 Hz)

Potential switch and direct current identifier for GSD signalling process.

8.6.24

SIGF Signalling Unit F


The submodule SIGF contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be connected as trunk modules.

Location of the SIGF on the ATA module

1. ATA module

2. Submodule SIGF


Other features



Call identifier (25 Hz)

Belgium

Dial tone identifier (f1 = 420-460 Hz, f2 = 1140 Hz)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 365

8 Boards

8.6.25

SIGG Signalling Unit G


The submodule SIGG contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be used as analog trunk modules without direct inward dialling.

Location of the SIGG on the ATA module

1. ATA module

2. Submodule SIGG


Other features




Hungary

8.6.26

SIGH Signalling Unit H


The submodule SIGH contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA2 board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be used as analog trunk modules without direct inward dialling.

366 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Location of the SIGH on the ATA module

1. ATA module

2. Submodule SIGH


Other features




Czech/Slovak Republic

8.6.27

SSBA Signalling Sub Board A


The submodule SSBA contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATC board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

Location of the SSBA on the ATC module

CSI55 LX 07/2006 367

8 Boards

1. ATC module

2. Submodule SSBA


Other features




Direct loop current limit: 60 mA

Polarity reversal detection

France

8.6.28

SSBB Signalling Sub Board B


The submodule SSBB contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATC board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

Location of the SSBB on the ATC module

1. ATC module

2. Submodule SSBB


Other features


Call recognition (20-30 Hz)

Charge identifier (50 Hz and 12 kHz)

Spain

368 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.6.29

SSBC Signalling Sub Board C


The submodule SSBC contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATC board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

Location of the SSBC on the ATC module

1. ATC module

2. Submodule SSBC


Other features


Call recognition (25-50 Hz)


Italy

Blocking of incoming seizure in case of malfunctions or during shutdown


Switchable loop impedance (high, low)

8.6.30

SSBD Signalling Sub Board D


The submodule SSBD contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATC board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 369

8 Boards

Location of the SSBD on the ATC module

1. ATC module

2. Submodule SSBD


Other features



Charge identifier (50 Hz)


Switchable loop impendance

Netherlands

8.6.31

SSSM Simplex Signaling Sub Modul


The submodule Simplex Signalling Sub Module (SSSM) performs the signal exchange with the remote connecting circuit by means of continuous current signals on the speech wires.

Other features


Power demand +5V

Interface to the remote connecting circuit


45 mA a/b earth signalling method (two-wire line)

No calibrations are required for the signal exchange with the remote connecting circuit.

Combinations with other submodules on an ATLC board are possible.


370 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.6.31.1



Set ”Simplex signalling a/b earth”.

• Signalling plan




Speech path design

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire

2-wire


0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

0/-7 dBr

-3/-4 dBr

-4/-3 dBr

-4/-3 dBr

-5/-2 dBr

-6/-1 dBr


A, D, E, GR

B, L

NL

D, GR


B, L

NL

D

A



• Adjustments to digits must not be made.


8.6.32

SUPA Supplement A


The submodule SUPA contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATB board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 371

8 Boards

Location of the SUPA on the ATB module

1. ATB module

2. Submodule SUPA


Other features

Countries of application Great Britain/Hong Kong

Call recognition/charge detector (14-26 Hz/50 Hz)

Switch to turn on earth calling signalling systems (ECS)

Highly resistant tape loop for loop calling guarded clearing (LGC)

Auxiliary voltage switch for testing PSTN off-line condition in ECS.

8.6.33

SUPB Supplement B


The submodule SUPB contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATB board. A maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

372 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Location of the SUPB on the ATB module

1. ATB module

2. Submodule SUPB


Other features


Call recognition (14-26 Hz/50 Hz)

Ground Start

USA

Loop Start

Auxiliary voltage switch for testing PSTN off-line condition in ECS.

8.6.34

SUTC Signaling Unit Trunk C


The SUTC is a submodule of the JPAT. It is used for analog exchange lines (direct inward dialling) with 3-wire signalling.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 373

8 Boards

Location of the SUTC on the JPAT module

1. JPAT module

2. Submodule SUTC


Other features


Variants

Russia

Incoming traffic, local

Incoming traffic, long-distance

Two ports are implemented on each submodule. Using the ICU Editor, the two ports can be configured for incoming local, incoming long-distance or mixed traffic.

The transmission of signals is implemented in decimal dialling (DEC) via DC signalling only and using various resistance values. Only the transmission of ANI is implemented in the voiceband by means of frequency signalling.

The following tables indicate the correlation between the signal, transmission direction and associated resistance value.

8.6.34.1

Incoming Traffic, Local

Signal

Idle condition control

Direction

/ wire

C

Incoming end of connection

a b c

+

Operation with CO coordinates

c

Operation with CO

HDW

-

<

——1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm 1)

Notes

The input resistance of the c-wire depends on the associated central office (CO coordinates or HDW) and on the line resistance of the c-wire at the HDW system.

374 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Seizure C

——->

C

< ——-

Call number reception

(DEC or

MF-PS) a

——-> b

+

1040 Ohm

+ greater/ equal R

-

Rin + greater/ equal R

-

A seizure is recognised in the I55 via a current in the c-wire ( 13 mA).

Once recognized, the current in the c-wire is limited to 30 mA.

(seizure acknowledgement)

DEC: Pulse/pause via a/b-wire, or pulse/pause via a-wire only.

MF-PS Dial information in voiceband with frequency signaling

(multi-frequency pulse shuttle).

1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm

+ greater/ equal R


-

+ greater/ : equal

R

1) :

:

: - 60 V

GND

The size of greater/equal R depends on the line resistance of the c-wire and the associated supply voltage

Line resistance of the c-wire between 0 Ohm - > 500 Ohm = input resistance SUTC 1040

Ohm - 350 Ohm

Signal

Reply or

ANI prompt from the

I55

Withdraw

ANI prompt

< ——a, b

< ——-

Subscriber

B disconnects first

Direction

/ wire

a, b


a b c


+ c

Operation with CO

HDW

Notes

a, b

CSI55 LX 07/2006

1000 Ohm

-

200 kOhm

+ -

1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm

+ greater/ equal R

+ 1040 Ohm

+ greater/ equal R

-



Subscriber B (subsc. in

I55) disconnects first after a call.


I55) is busy.

No free connection paths in the I55.

375

8 Boards

< ——200 kOhm 1000 Ohm

Subscriber

A disconnects a

——->

+ -

1000 Ohm 200 kOhm

1040 Ohm

+ greater/ equal R


The signal is transmitted on two paths. The signal receiver stops working when the current is 6.5

mA. There is no detection if the current in the a-wire is smaller than 6.5 mA. The reception on the c-wire is interrupted when the control resistance circuit has reached 8000 Ohm and voltage of 74 V.

-

+ greater/ : equal

R

:

: - 60 V

GND


Signal

in every status

Transition to idle status

Blocking

Direction

/ wire

——-> c

< ——c

< ——-


a b c


1040 Ohm

+ greater/ equal R c

Operation with CO

HDW


Depends on technical switching status

+ -

1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm 1)

+

1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm Insulation Insulation

Notes

The connection in the

I55 is disconnected at current of I <10 mA.

The I55 informs the opposite station that it cannot be seized

(blocking status).

-

+

1)

:

:

:

- 60 V

GND


Ohm - 350 Ohm

376 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.6.34.2

Incoming Traffic, Long-distance

Signal


Seizure

Call number reception

(DEC or

MF-PS)

Direction

/ wire

C


a b c

+


c

Operation with CO

HDW

-

<

C

——->

C

<

——-

——-

1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm 1)

Notes

The input resistance of the c-wire depends on the associated central office (CO coordinates or HDW) and on the line resistance of the c-wire at the HDW system.

A seizure is recognized in the I55 via a current in the c-wire ( 13 mA).

Once recognized, the current in the c-wire is limited to 30 mA.

(seizure acknowledgement) a +

1040 Ohm

+ greater/ equal R

-


-

——-> b 1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm

+ greater/ equal R


DEC: Pulse/pause via a/b-wire, or pulse/pause via a-wire only.

MF-PS Dial information in voiceband with frequency signaling

(multi-frequency pulse shuttle).

-

+ greater/ equal

R

:

1)

:

:

: - 60 V

GND



Ohm - 350 Ohm

Signal Direction

/ wire


a b c

Operation with CO coordinates c

Operation with CO

HDW

Notes

CSI55 LX 07/2006 377

8 Boards

Subscriber

B free a, b

< ——-

Ringing a or b

——->

Subscriber busy or no free connection a, b

< ——-

Reply a, b

< ——-

Subscriber

B disconnects a, b

< ——-

+ -

1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm

-

+ -

-

-

1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm

+ greater/ equal R

+ -


200 kOhm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm

+ -

+ greater/ equal R

-


200 kOhm 200 kOhm 1040 Ohm

+ greater/ equal R

+ -

1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm > = 1300

Ohm



I55) is free once the subscriber B call number is received.

The remote side switches the a or b-wire to a lower resistance in order to display the call signalling.

The I55 informs the remote side about the status of the subscriber or I55.


I55) is busy no free connection path in the I55.

The I55 informs the remote side when the subscriber has lifted the handset and changes the resistance on the a, b-wire (conversation status).


I55) disconnects first after a call.

-

+ greater/ equal

R

:

:

: - 60 V

GND


Signal

at every stage

Blocking

Direction

/ wire

——-> c

< ——-


a b c


Depends on technical switching status

+

1040 Ohm

+ greater/ equal R c

Operation with CO

HDW


1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm Insulation Insulation

Notes

The connection in the

I55 is disconnected at current of I <10 mA.

The I55 informs the opposite station that it cannot be seized

(blocking status).

378 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

-

+ :

: - 60 V

GND

8.6.35

SUTD Signalling Unit Trunk D


The SUTD is a submodule of the JPAT. It is used for analog exchange lines with 3-wire signalling (direct inward dialling).

Location of the SUTD on the JPAT module

1. JPAT module

2. Submodule SUTD


Other features

Country of application variant

Russia

Outgoing local and long-distance traffic

The transmission of signals is implemented in decimal dialling (DEC) via DC signalling only and using various resistance values. Only the transmission of ANI is implemented in the voiceband by means of frequency signalling. The following tables indicate the correlation between the signal, transmission direction and associated resistance value.

Two ports are implemented on each submodule.

8.6.35.1

Outgoing traffic, local and long-distance


/ wire

Outgoing end of connection

a b c

Notes

CSI55 LX 07/2006 379

8 Boards


Seizure

Dec.

dialling

(pulse)

Subscriber busy b

< ——-

Reply or

ANI a

<

——prompt

Withdraw a

ANI prompt

< ——-

Disconnection a, b by called subscriber

B

< ——c

< ——c

——-> a, b

——->

+ + insulated insulated + 22 kOhm

- 42 kOhm + 1 kOhm + 22 kOhm

+ 500

Ohm insulated

- 500 Ohm insulated

>

= 65

Ohm

-42 kOhm + 1 kOhm > = 65

Ohm

-42 Ohm + 1 kOhm > = 65

Ohm

-42 Ohm

-42 Ohm

+ 1 kOhm > = 65

Ohm

+ 1 kOhm > = 65

Ohm

Ringing current monitoring (I 2 mA) to see if the central office (CO) is ready to be seized.

Pause: - 42 kOhm on a-wire

Pause: + 1 kOhm on b-wire

Checks whether current is flowing in the b-wire (I 13 - 20 mA)

Checks whether current is flowing in the a-wire (I 1 mA)

No current in the a or b-wire

Checks whether current is flowing in the b-wire (I 13 - 20 mA)

-

+


/ wire

Disconnection a by called subscriber

——->

A

Disconnection c at any stage

Blocking/

——-> c idle condition control

< ——-

Outgoing end of connection

a

- 1 kOhm b c

+ 1 kOhm < + 65

Ohm

Insulation

Insulation

Insulation

Insulation

> + 22 kOhm

> + 22 kOhm

:

:

- 60 V

GND

Notes

Current in the a-wire increases from

I 1 mA to I 13 - 20 mA

Checks whether c wire ext. = open

(no current from I 2 mA)

8.7

Digital interfaces

380 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Board/

Rack/

Backplane

Board

DUP03 → 430

DUPN → 432

DT0 Digital

Linecard T0

→ 423

DS02 → 418

DS03 → 421

DT21 → 427

DCON → 403

CAS → 397

IPN → 473

MAC → 475>

DECT21 → 415

IMUX → 458

UIP → 495

HAMUX → 447

BVT2 → 387

MULI → 487

ADM → 381

Submodule Connection board

CA1B → 391

CA2B → 392

CA1B → 391,

EES0B → 436,

EESS0 → 440

CA2B → 392

CA2B → 392

CA1B → 391

CA4B → 395

OFA2B → 491

OFAS → 491

CA1B → 391

CA4B → 395

CA1B → 391

CA4B → 395

EMAC → 447 CA6B → 396

CA1B → 391

CA5B → 395 SPCU

S64LI

S64LI

V24M → 501

CL2M → 401

CA3B → 393

CA1B

→ 391/ CA3B

→ 393

CL2ME → 402

UPSM → 500

STSM → 494

CA3B/T → 394

CA6B → 396

Mirror card to HAMUX in the PC

CA1B → 391

CA2B → 392,

EESS0 → 440

UKSM → 499

EEADM → 435

8.7.1

ADM Analog Digital Mixboard


The ADM board is a basic board which accomodates up to five submodules. The following submodules are available:

Submodule

STSM

Features four S0/T0 interfaces as exchange, permanent connection or subscriber connection

CSI55 LX 07/2006 381

8 Boards

UPSM

ABSM

UKSM

EEADM four UPN interfaces as subscriber connections or permanent connections four analogue subscriber ports (a/b) twoi UK0 master interfaces for use of the ADM with S0 emergency sets via cable adapter EESS0


Observe numbering of the submodules

2

4

1

3

382

AO 1-4

AO 9-12

AO 5-8

AO 13-16

CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards



For the ADM board the ”Call Reference Length - (CRL)” can be set to a length of one or two bytes for the whole board by means of the ICU editor. The call reference length of 2 bytes is required for QSIG network connection with some third-party PBX. If this setting is used all ports have CRL=2 bytes no matter which protocol is selected. For this reason it was not possible to connect any system terminals with TN1R6 protocol to this ADM board.

As of software version ADM0900.ICL / ADM00009.ICP of the ICU, the behaviour of the ADM board and of the Integral 55 Compact-ADM port has changed. The CRL setting is only adopted for the ports of the board which use the ”QSIG” protocol. For all other protocolos the call reference length will always be CRL=1.

This makes it possible to configure QSIG ports with CRL=2 for networks with third-party systems while it is possible to use system terminals and permanent circuit lines with CRL=1 for other ports with TN1R6 protocol.

Other features


Power demand +5V


230 mA

Interfaces




16 times 2/4-wire


In conjunction with V24IA module debugging interface on the board front

Debugger

CSI55 LX 07/2006 383

8 Boards

8.7.1.1


DECT board, front side



S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:



Reset board



L1

L2 on: flashing: off: on: flashing:



Board is not busy



384 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7- L19

L20 off: on: on: on: on:




Layer 1 of the digital connecting circuit 3...15 active or analog connecting circuit 3...15 busy


8.7.1.2

MDF Connections

MDF, Cable 1


RD/BU WE 1


WE 1

WH/YE

WH/GN

WE 2

WE 3 WE 2

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 3

WE 4

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 5

WE 6

1st slot

2nd slot

ADM with

STSM

A3/B3

(T)

C3/D3

(R)

A4/B4

(T)

C4/D4

(R)

A1/B1

(T)

C1/D1

(R)

A2/B2

(T)

C2/D2

(R)

A5/B5

(T)

C5/D5

(R)

A6/B6

(T)

C6/D6

(R)

A4/B4 free

A5/B5 free

A6/B6 free

via CA2B from

ADM with

UPSM

ADM with

UKSM

A1/B1 free

A1/B1 free

A2/B2 free

A3/B3 free


A3/B3 free

A4/B4 free a4/b4 free a5/b5 free a6/b6 free

ADM with

ABSM/

ABSM1 a1/b1 free a2/b2 free a3/b3 free

CSI55 LX 07/2006 385

8 Boards

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

WE 7

WE 8

A7/B7

(T)

C7/D7

(R)

A8/B8

(T)

C8/D8

(R)

A7/B7 free

A8/B8 free free free free free a7/b7 free a8/b8 free

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF Cable 2


RD/BU WE 1


WE 1

WH/YE

WH/GN

WE 2

WE 3 WE 2

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5 WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

ADM with

STSM

3rd slot

4th slot

A9/B9

(T)

C9/D9

(R)

A10/

B10 (T)

C10/

D10 (R)

A11/

B11 (T)

C11/

D11 (R)

A12/

B12 (T)

C12/

D12 (R)

A13/

B13 (T)

C13/

D13 (R)

A14/

B14 (T)

C14/

D14 (R)

A15/

B15 (T)

C15/

D15 (R)

A16/

B16 (T)

C16/

D16 (R)

A13/

B13 free

A14/

B14 free

A15/

B15 free

A16/

B16 free

A10/

B10 free

A11/

B11 free

A12/

B12 free

via CA2B from

ADM with

UPSM

ADM with

UKSM

A9/B9 free

A5/B5 free

A6/B6 free free free free free free free free free

A7/B7 free

A8/B8 free a13/b13 free a14/b14 free a15/b15 free a16/b16 free

ADM with

ABSM/

ABSM1 a9/b9 free a10/b10 free a11/b11 free a12/b12 free

386 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.7.2

BVT2 Motherboard, Voice Transmitting Module 2


The board BVT2 is used to provide access to an I55 for PC supported applications. A UP0connector on the

BVT2 module connects the PC to the I55.

BVT2 board with CC telephone

1. PC

2. HAB with BVT2

3. CC telephone

4. Cable with UP0 connection

5. for I55

Application options

ACD-UI application.

ACD system with CSI55.

CC telephone aplication.

Can only be used in conjunction with a call centre and the CSI55. Up to 15 IPN connections are possible per board.

8.7.2.1

BVT2 Module

CSI55 LX 07/2006 387

8 Boards

BVT2 board

The BVT2 board features the following connector options:

1. UP0 connection

2. AEI interface

3. Loudspeaker and microphone connector

4. Handset and headset connector

5. Hook switch connector

8.7.2.2

Pin Assignment

Assignment of the WE sockets

1. Hook switch

2. Handset

3. Loudspeaker and microphone

4. AEI

5. UP0

388 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Hook switch

The pin configuration of GND and GU allows a hook switch function to be assigned. The make contact 1 is intended for the application of a tape recorder controller, and make contact 2 for the application of a door opener, for example.

Connector Hook switch

Pin 1

Seizure GND

2

GU

3

K1

4

K1

5

K2

6

> K2

GND

GU

K1, K2

=

=

=

Ground

Hook switch

Make contact 1, 2

Handset or headset

Either a T1 handset or a headset can be connected to the 4-pin WE socket. Connecting a switchover module enables switchover between the handset and headset.

Connector

Pin

Seizure

Handset or headset

1

SK-

2

HK+

3

HK-

4

SK+

SC

HK

=

=

Transmitter inset (microphone)

Receiver inset

Loudspeaker and microphone

A loudspeaker and a microphone can be connected to this interface for handsfree operation or open listening.

Connector

Pin

Seizure

Loudspeaker and microphone

1 2

MICMIC+

3

LS-

4

LS+

LS

MIC

=

=

Loudspeaker

Microphone

AEI interface

The AEI (Additional Equipment Interface) pursuant to ETSI features an analog X port and digital Y port. A tape recorder or headset can be connected to the AEI interface.

Connection is implemented via a 6-pin WE socket.

A connection cable must not exceed the total length of 6 m.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 389

8 Boards

Connector AEI interface

Pin 1

Seizure XTE

OUT

2

XTE

IN

3

GND

A

4

YTE

IN

5

GND

D

6

YTE

OUT

UP0 Interface

The UP0 interface is in two-wire design. Both wires transmit the user data and signalling data between the PC and the I55 using the time separation technique, also known as the ping-pong technique.

Connector UP0 Interface

Pin 1

Seizure free

2 free

3

A

4

B

5 free

6 free

UP0 Interface Range

When planning the cable network, it is necessary to take into account that the range of the UP0 interface concerning the cables used is different:

• 0.6 mm diameter for 3.5 km outdoor cable; 1.7 km for installation cable

• 0.4 mm diameter for 2.1 km outdoor cable

The use of different cable types and the number of distributors in the network reduces the range of the UP0 interface.

When connecting the line network, the following instructions must be adhered to:

• The lines for the UP0 interface must be installed as a twisted wire pair.

• The shields of the cables must be connected to the earth potential on both sides.

The supply of the UP0 interface to a terminal is implemented via so-called Universal Connector Units (UAEs).

8.7.2.3

Tape recorder

Connector

A tape recorder can be connected to the AEI interface. The input line of the tape recorder must be DC isolated and highly resistant (>10 kOhm).

The tape recorder is controlled via make contacts 1. See “AEI interface” table for pin assignment.

Control

The diagram illustrates the control connections on a tape recorder.

390 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Tape recorder connection

1. AEI interface

2. Tape recorder NF input

3. BVT2

4. Relay contact

5. Interface for hook switch

I max

Umax

P max

AC

2

250

62,5

DC

2

220

30

Unit

A

V

W

8.7.3



Cable adapter for 16, 4 or 2-pair analog or digital connecting circuit line for boards ASCEU, ASCF, ASCGB,

ATAx, ATB, ATC, DDID, DUP03, DT0, DT21, CAS, DCON, UIP without V24M, MULI and DECT21 with



CSI55 LX 07/2006 391

8 Boards

1. 16, 4 or 2-pair to the MDF/NT

1. Release the lock by pressing the bracket

2. Do not turn the screw!

8.7.4



Cable adapter for 2 to 8-wire analog or 4-wire digital connection device line for the ASC2, ASC21, ATLC,

DS02, DUPN, JPAT and ADM boards with



392 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards



8.7.5



Cable adapter for the UIP board, provided that the V24M submodules are also inserted here. The board is also required for external synchronization when using the CL2M/CL2MEM on ICF (B3 module or ICS).


• 2x 9-pin D plugs for V24 interfaces or connection of high precision reference clock


If the first slot of a UIP board is equipped with a CL2ME for the clock supply of TAREF it is necessary to use the CA3B/T cable adapter.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 393

8 Boards


1. Cable for connecting an external clock source plugged on the first V.24

8.7.6

CA3B/T cable adapter 3 for B modules TAREF


Cable adapter for UIP board if the clock supply from TAREF is implemented via the CL2ME inserted on the first slot of the UIP.

The V24M submodules can also be inserted here.

394 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

1. Cable for connecting the TAREF (material number: 27.5630.0531) inserted in the first V.24

8.7.7



Cable adapter for the connection of coax lines when using boards DT21, CAS and DCON, provided that these modules are set on unsymmetrical interfaces.

• 2 BNC Coax sockets as output to NT or MUX.

1. Coax cable to NT or MUX

8.7.8



Cable adapters for the connection of V.24 and X.21 connectors to the IMUX board.

• Cable to the TA of the network operator or MDF (X1 and X5)

• 1x 15-pin Sub-D female Connector for X.21 data terminals (X4)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 395

8 Boards

• 1x 25-pin Sub-D female Connector for V.24 data terminals (X3)


• Ground breakpoints (see IMUX board)

1. Cable Adapter 5B, rear component side, breakpoints

8.7.9



Cable adapter for connecting UP0 and S2M connections to MAC and HAMUX boards.


• 8-pin WE plugs

396 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards


2. 8-pin WE plugs

8.7.10

CAS Channel Associated Signalling


The CAS board is a PCM30 interface for up to 30 B channels in accordance with CCITT. The board contains the following features:

Other features




Line signalling in channel 16 (CAS) in accordance with CCITT or country/customer specifications.

Register signalling in 30 B channels (inband) in accordance with CCITT or country/customer specifications.

Can be used as an exchange interface, connection line or special interface.

Incoming, outgoing and bothway traffic direction, can also be mixed as required


Board software download.

PCM30 interface configuration via board software.


Maintenance functions

8.7.10.1

CAS-TIELINE User Program

Introduction

The CAS-TIELINE user program was developed for the I55 system on the CAS hardware platform, and is a tie-line transmission program. The 16 different tie-line transmission variants are designated E1 to E10/2.

The user data is adapted to individual requirements by means of the ICU mask.

Hardware

The CAS board (channel associated signalling) is used here. Depending on the application, the 2 MBit/s interface can be configured using the confidata (see Section “ICU mask and confidata”) with impedance of 75

W (unsymmetrical) or 120 W (symmetrical).

Depending on that, for the line connection one of the following adapter boards (only Integral 55) is then required:

• CA1B for 75 W

• CA4B for 120 W

Further general information about the CAS board, in particular about the controls and denotations of the front panel, can be gathered from the appropriate paragraphs.

SoftWare

CSI55 LX 07/2006 397

8 Boards

The CAS board is set up with KAD (customer specific user data) for TIELINE application. This requires the corresponding load list name for the accompanying slot address to be entered.

The necessary parameters (confidata) are then set up using the ICU editor. The corresponding ICP files and the confidata subsequently end up on the CAS board by means of a download.

Short description of Applications

The TIELINE user program supports inband signalling (DTMF dial codes, call progress tones) and line signalling (signalling channel bit a). The following applies to line bits b, c and d: bcd = 101. Only changes to bit

’a’ will be processed by the user program. Changes to the bcd bits will be ignored.

16 different signalling plans are produced from the available signal stock. These plans can be selected using the confidata and always apply to all 30 connecting circuits (AO).

In principle all the AOs are set up for both-way throughput.

Line signalling will not be carried out if all the signals appear as pulsed signals.

DTMF (dual tone multi-frequency dialling) and pulse dialling are suitable dialling systems.

The suffix dialling facility is guaranteed for the entire duration of an outgoing call, and for a predefined period of an incoming call.

If the criterion “message” is identified, an active call will be cancelled and the digits memory will be deleted.

The elegibility or inelegibility of a line can be set up by the confidata seperately for incoming and outgoing

AOs.

In the same way, a 425 Hz continuous tone can be connected to the switching matrix as a proceed-to-select signal for outgoing traffic, or a 425 Hz busy tone to the line for incoming traffic according to configuration.

Up to 10 digits can be programmed for a destination number in outgoing traffic. The destination number will be chosen automatically according to the preset timeout when “elegible” or “inelegible” in the absence of the

“dialling” message.

If “elegible”; incoming “dialling” messages are ignored once the timeout has ended. If “inelegible”; they will always be ignored. The suffix dialling facility is also guaranteed for the previous destination number when in call status.

Outgoing DTMF signals which are “called through” will be identified, and incoming “dialling” messages are subsequently ignored.

An area code may be programmed, which will be relayed to the GCU global control unit during incoming seizure once the proceed-to-select criterion (signal, time) has been met.

Where ”dial” or ”message” information is absent, the release which has been initialized by the user program’s watchdog exists neither for incoming nor for outgoing traffic.

If a fault occurs, trouble signalling to the opposite side can be activated using confidata.

In the same way, an unblocking function can be set up for each connecting circuit: When active (blocking-n = on), and with the front panel switches TBS (total blocking switch) and TBS-N (total blocking switch minus n) switched on, the corresponding connecting circuit will not be blocked.

Specification of Inband Signals

The available DTMF transmitters and receivers are set out in accordance with CEPT recommendation T/CS

46-02.

The tone identifier will certainly operate in the range of 350 to 500 Hz with -30 dBm0.

The tone generator supplies a 425 Hz frequency with a transmission level of -3 dBm0. In outgoing traffic, it can be sent to the switching matrix as a proceed-to-select signal (continuous tone). In incoming traffic, it can be connected to the line as a busy tone (German rhythm).

398 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Synchronization

The CAS board can generally be used as the synchronous clock supplier for synchronization purposes. In the

TIELINE application, however, this is only meaningful if no digital exchange interfaces or tie lines are present.

. This is the reason for the default setting of “No synchronous clock”. This setting can be changed via the configuration data.

8.7.10.2

Identifying the Operation Phase

As described above, the boot software controls

• initialization,

• test and download procedures after a reset and

• indicates various statuses and possible faults by means of the LED’s on the front panel.

If no faults are found and all GCU messages (test messages, “startup ready” etc) have been received, L1 will flash eleven times and L9, L7, L8, L15 and L16 will go out, indicating that the operation phase has been reached.

8.7.10.3


The functions of the switches and LED’s on the front panel differ in boot phase from those in operation phase.

Following a reset, the boot software carries out initialization, test and download procedures, and indicates various statuses as well as possible faults via the LEDs on the front panel.

If no faults are found and all necessary GCU messages (test messages, “ready for startup” etc.) have been received, the CAS board will reach the operation phase, where user software is put into effect.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 399

8 Boards


S1

S2

S3

Middle position

Middle position

Middle position

Switch Function

S1

S2

S3

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Preparatory disabling (TBS) *

Neutral/release

Reset board


Preparatory disabling (TBS-N) *

Neutral

No function

No function

No function

No function

* With S1 (TBS) in the left position and S2 (TBS-N) in the middle position, all 30 ports will be blocked.

With S1 (TBS) and S2 (TBS-N) in the left position, all ports outlined in the configuration data will not be blocked.

If S1 (TBS) is in the middle position, all 30 ports will not be blocked, irrespective of the position of S2

(TBS-N).


L9

L10

L11

L12

L13

L14

L15

L16

L5

L6

L7

L8

L1

L2

L3

L4

RDL

MSG

AIS

LMF

BIT

RMF

ISU2

ISU4

TSL

ESY

LOS

LOF

CRC

RFR

ISU1

ISU3

Total status LED

External synchronization

No signal

Frame failure

CRC4 test fault

Frame failure at remote side

**

**

LED reset/download

C-bus message

Alarm identification signal

Superframe failure

Increased bit error ratio

Superframe failure at remote side

**

**

400 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

** The denotation of the LEDs depends on the application (display of R2 register, DTMF receiver/transmitter, tone transmitter/receiver)

8.7.10.4

MDF Connections

MDF Connection via CA1B from the CAS Module

Cable end

Colours

BK/BN

BK/RD

CA1B

CAS

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

MDF Connection via CA4B from the CAS Module

Coax

Coax

1

2

A1/B1

C1/D1

Transmit

Receive

8.7.11

CL2M Clock 2 Module


The submodule CL2M on the UIP or ICF board implements an external clock supply for the PBX or a clock pulse output for external devices.

Use on

UIP

ICF receiver and transmitter 2048 kHz receiver 2048/1544 kHz

This is necessary if digital dial-up lines or permanent connections are not available as the clock source, or if the customer has made high demands in terms of the reliability of the clock supply.

Other features


If the CL2M is positioned on slot 1 or 2 of the UIP, the line can be connected via the CA1B board.

With slots 3 or 4 occupied and V24M (slot 1 or 2) being used, the line must be connected via the CA3B board.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 401

8 Boards

Location of CL2M on the UIP board


2. UIP module

3. CL2M module

8.7.12

CL2ME Clock 2 Module Extended


The CL2ME submodule is used to implement an external clock supply by means of a high precision reference clock (TAREF). This is needed if DECT Intermodule Handover is used in twin and multi-module configurations..

Use on

UIP/ICF Receiver 2048 kHz

Other features


If the CL2ME is positioned on slot 1 of the UIP, the line can be connected via the CA3B/T board.

402 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Location of CL2ME on the UIP board


2. UIP module

3. CL2ME board

8.7.13

DCON Digital Protocol Converter


The DCON board network connects the systems from various manufacturers, in which signalling between the systems takes place via the DPNSS protocol.

It provides this protocol by converting the TNet Bosch Network Protocol.

Other features


Power demand +5V

Interfaces


800 mA

A module contains one port (30B+D or

23B+D).





The CS155 SW and tools will treat the DCON like a DT2 with TNET protocol.

The board should generally be set up as a SLAVE type via the ICU data.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 403

8 Boards

8.7.13.1



S1

S2

S3

S4

Middle position

Middle position

Middle position

Middle position

Switch Function

S1

S2

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Left:

Middle:

Right:

S3

S4

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Preparatory disabling


Reset DT2 part


No function

Normal mode

Report (fault statistic message to the system console) The switch must be moved back to the middle position after use.

Trace mode

Normal mode

Reset converter part

No function

Normal mode

Non-maskable interruption request

404 CSI55 LX 07/2006

L14

L15

L16

L17

L18

L19

L20

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

L11

L12

L13


L1 on: flashing: off: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: flashing: off: on:

L21

L22

L23

L24 on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: off:

8 Boards

Module is busy in terms of exchange functions (active layer 3 connection)


Board is not busy

Module is clock supplier

Unused

Remote Alarm Indication RAI (remote side reporting fault status)

Alarm Indication Signal AIS (remote side reporting

Out of

Order)

Loss of Signal LOS (no receiving signal)

RES1 (reserve)

Trace mode (Test operation for fault tracking)

TNET LOS (loss of signal in TNET)

TNET L1 alarm (layer 1 failure in TNET)

TNET L2 alarm (layer 2 failure in TNET)

TNET in operation



Board in operation

Normal operation (layer 1 active, no alarm)

Unused

Fault count> E-6 (bit error rate > 10-6)

Fault count> E-3 (bit error rate > 10-3)

Loss of Frame LOF (loss of frame synchronization)

RES2 (not busy at present)

Reset of converter part in progress

Converter part in operation

DPNSS LOS (loss of signal in DPNSS network)

DPNSS L1 alarm (layer 1 failure in DPNSS network)

DPNSS L2 alarm (layer 2 failure in DPNSS network)

DPNSS network in operation (layer 2 is o.k.)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 405

8 Boards

8.7.13.2

Jumper Position

DCON board, component side

X32-X36 Line Impedance Selection

The line impedance is set using five-fold jumpers.

Connection

X32-X33

X33-X34

X34-X35

X35-X36

X31

not equipped

Impedance

75 Ohm

100 Ohm

100 Ohm

120 Ohm

8.7.13.3

DIL Switch Position

S4 Pulse Shape Selection

The shape of the transmission pulse can be adapted for 1.544 MHz applications using S4. For E1, the switch position is ignored and the pulse shape is set according to the specified line impedance. For DSX-1 applications, the pulse shape can be set according to the line length. S4/4 is not used.

S4/1

OFF

ON

S4/2

OFF

OFF

S4/3

OFF

OFF

Application

DSX-1 (163-200 m)

DSX-1 (122-163 m)

406 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

X

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

DSX-1 (81-122 m)

DSX-1 (41-81 m)

DSX-1 (0-41 m)

CSU ECSA T1 C1.2

CSU FCC Part 68A

CSU FCC Part 68A

S5

This is used by the ZAP monitor (interactive module control). S5/6 and S5/7 determine the baud rate for the serial ZAP RS232 port.

S5/7

Off

Off

On

S5/6

Off

On

X

Baud rate

38400

19200

9600

X = Insignificant position

S5/1 is used to select the ”DT2 Transparent Mode” ( ON position) The DCON acts as a normal DT2 in this mode. The board transfers all D channel messages transparently.

In the OFF position, the user program is booted and the board starts to operate automatically.

S5/2 determines whether the user program or the ZAP monitor program is loaded. In the ON position, the board will boot the ZAP monitor program, and is then ready for testing and debugging.

S6

Only S6/6 is used at present. This selects the clock source for the transmission port.

In the OFF position, the system’s internal clock is used.

In the ON position, the clock is derived from the receiver port.

8.7.13.4

DCON Configuration

General Points

This chapter describes the user interface and the configuration parameters which are required for the TNet/

DPNSS board.

Each paragraph consists of a configuration menu, which appears to the user, and a description of the available options.

The user interface consists of a list of menus. Each menu option is selected by entering the number to the left of the option.

In order to commence a user interface session, the user must press any button within the first five seconds of system initialization. The user then selects the required option by entering the number to the left of the option.

Connecting the Terminal

The socket on the front side of the board is 9-pin (D Sub). 3 connectors are needed to connect the terminal.

The connected terminal can be 9-pin or 25-pin.

A VT 100 compatible terminal or a VT 100 emulation on a PC can be used.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 407

8 Boards

9-pin to 9-pin connection

RXD 2

TXD 3

GND 5

————–

————–

————–

Terminal

3 TXD

2 RXD

5 GND

9-pin to 25-pin connection

RXD 2

TXD 3

GND 5

————–

————–

————–

Terminal

3 TXD

2 RXD

7 GND

System Initialization

The following text will appear on the screen during initialization:

BOSCH TELECOM TNet/DPNSS Conversation

Version x.xx

DCON Initialising

Press Any Key for MMI: 3

In order to commence configuration, the user must press any key within the first five seconds of initialization.

If no button is pressed during this time, the configuration menu will only become available again after a reset.

The following text will appear on the screen after initialization:


Version x.xx

Initialisation Complete

Reset DCON for MMI

Main menu

The configuration main menu is displayed.


Version x.xx

1. TNET Configuration

2. DPNS Configuration

3. System Clock Source

4. Software Download

5. Exit

Enter Option [1..5]:

The user selects an option by entering a number (1..5) and pressing the return button.

The following paragraphs describe the available options.

TNet Configuration

The TNet configuration main menu is displayed.

TNet Configuration

——————

1. Orignation Adress

2. Timeslots

3. Timers

408 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

4. Write Settings

5. Exit


The following options are available:

Default origination address (during call setup) in the TNet, if no line identity is supported by DPNSS.

Incoming time slots can be configured individually.

Signal timer configuration

New settings are written in the flash-PROM, and the board is reset.

Return to main menu.

Origination Address


TNet Origination Adress

———————–

1. Default Origination Adress: 0525371393

2. Write Settings

3. Exit


1.

2.

3.

The user will be prompted to enter a new default origination address. Only digits between 0 and 9 are accepted. A maximum of 30 digits can be entered. Pressing the return button without entering any digits will result in the default origination address being erased.

New settings are written in the flash-PROM, and the board is reset.

Return to previous menu.

Time slots


TNet Timeslot Configuration

—————————

[01] D [17] B

[02] D [18] B

[03] D [19] B

[04] D [20] B

[05] D [21] B

[06] D [22] B

[07] D [23] B

[08] D [24] B

[09] D [25] B

[10] D [26] B

[11] D [27] B

[12] D [28] B

[13] D [29] B

[14] D [30] B

[15] D [31] B

1. Edit

2. Exit

1.

Edit time slot configuration (as shown in next diagram).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 409

8 Boards

2.


B

I

O

D

W

E

All time slots are bidirectional in terms of default.

The time slots are selected using the numeric keypad. The user can select the following options:

TNet Timeslot Configuration

[01] D [17] B Use Numeric

[02] D [18] B keypad to

[03] D [19] B select timeslot -

8:up

2:down

4:left

6:right

[04] D [20] B

[05] D [21] B

[06] D [22] B

[07] D [23] B

[08] D [24] B Timeslot Settings:

[09] D [25] B

[10] D [26] B B:Bidirektional

[11] D [27] B I:Incomming

[12] D [28] B O:Outgoing

[13] D [29] B D:Disabled

[14] D [30] B

[15] D [31] B

W. Write Settings

E. Exit

Enter Option [B,I,O,D,W,E]:

Configure bidirectional time slot.

Configure incoming time slot.

Configure outgoing time slot.

Disable time slot for incoming and outgoing conversations.

Write new settings in the flash-PROM and reset the board


Timer Configuration

The given values are default settings.

TNet Timer Configuration

————————

Time (Seconds)

————-

1. T302 15

2. T303 4

3. T304 60

4. T305 30

5. T308 3

6. T310 60

7. T313 30

8. T3AA 120

410 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

6

7

8

9. Edit

10. Exit


This menu allows the user to configure the TNet signalling software timer.

List of configurable timers:

1

Timer

T302

2

3

4

5

T303

T304

T305

T308

Start condition

Send SETUP ACK, restart if INFO received

Send SETUP

Receive SETUP ACK, restart when INFO sent

Send DISC

Send REL

Stop condition

Receive ALERT, CONN,

CALL, SENT

Receive ALERT, CONN,

CALL, SENT

Receive CALL SENT,

ALERT, CONN or INFO

Receive REL

Receive REL ACK

T310

T313

T3AA

CALL SENT, receive INFO Receive ALERT, CONN

Send CONN

Send ALERT

Receive CONN ACK

Send CONN

Release with DISC

Release with DISC

Release with DISC

Release with REL

Repeat REL and restart from T308

Release with DISC

Release with DISC

Release with DISC

All timers can be configured from 0 to 255 seconds. Other available options:

9

10

Write new settings in the flash-PROM and reset the board. Return to previous menu.


1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

DPNSS Configuration


DPNSS Configuration

——————-

1. Timeslots

2. Timers

3. Layer 2/layer 3 Configuration

4. Layer 1 Stats

5. Write Settings

6. Exit


Individual time slots can be configured as incoming, outgoing, bidirectional and disabled.

Signalling timer configuration.

DPNSS A/B and X/Y configuration

Time interval between layer 1 statistic reports, which are sent via the V.24 interface.

Write new settings and reset board.


Time slots


CSI55 LX 07/2006 411

8 Boards

1.

2.

Edit time slot configuration (as shown in next diagram).


DPNSS Timeslot Configuration

—————————-

[01] B [17] B [33] B [49] B

[02] B [18] B [34] B [50] B

[03] B [19] B [35] B [51] B

[04] B [20] B [36] B [52] B

[05] B [21] B [37] B [53] B

[06] B [22] B [38] B [54] B

[07] B [23] B [39] B [55] B

[08] B [24] B [40] B [56] B

[09] B [25] B [41] B [57] B

[10] B [26] B [42] B [58] B

[11] B [27] B [43] B [59] B

[12] B [28] B [44] B [60] B

[13] B [29] B [45] B [61] B

[14] B [30] B [46] B [62] B

[15] B [31] B [47] B [63] B

1. Edit

2. Exit


All time slots are bidirectional set in terms of default.

Channels 1 to 31 are real channels. They are used as speech channels.

Channels 33 to 63 are virtual channels. They are required for features which do not need a speech channel

(e.g. callback at a free subscriber).

The time slots are selected using the numeric keypad. The user can select the following options:

DPNSS Timeslot Configuration

—————————-

[01] B [17] B [33] B [49] B Use Numeric

[02] B [18] B [34] B [50] B keypad to

[03] B [19] B [35] B [51] B select

[04] B [20] B [36] B [52] B timeslot-8:up

[05] B [21] B [37] B [53] B 2:down

[06] B [22] B [38] B [54] B 4:left

[07] B [23] B [39] B [55] B 6:right

[08] B [24] B [40] B [56] B

[09] B [25] B [41] B [57] B Timeslot Settings:

[10] B [26] B [42] B [58] B

[11] B [27] B [43] B [59] B B:Bidirectional

[12] B [28] B [44] B [60] B I:Incoming

[13] B [29] B [45] B [61] B O:Outgoing

[14] B [30] B [46] B [62] B D:Disabled

[15] B [31] B [47] B [63] B

W. Write Setting

E. Exit

Enter Option [B,I,O,D,W.E]:

B Configure bidirectional time slot.

412 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

I

O

D

W

E

Configure incoming time slot.

Configure outgoing time slot.

Disable time slot for incoming and outgoing conversations.

Write new settings in the flash-PROM and reset the board.


1.

2.

3.

4.

Timer Configuration


DPNSS Timer Configuration

————————-

Time (Seconds)

————-

1. ISRM/SSRM Timer 60

2. CRM Timer 10

3. Write Settings

4. Exit


Configure ISRM/SSRM timer (0 to 255 seconds)

Configure CRM timer (0 to 255 seconds)



1.

2.

3.

4.

The above values are default settings.

Layer 2/Layer 3 Configuration


DPNSS Timer Layer2/Layer3 Configuration

————————————

Config.

——-

1. L2 Config A

2. L3 Config X

3. Write Settings

4. Exit


Configure layer 2 A/B end

Configure layer 3 X/Y end



Configuration of layer 3 X/Y is necessary to eliminate call collisions. If a call collision occurs, the “Y” conversation is reset and the “X” conversation continues.

Configuration of layer 2 A/B is necessary for layer 2 signalling. One end of the DPNSS connection must be

CSI55 LX 07/2006 413

8 Boards

specified as the A end and the other as the B end. If A/B end configuration is implemented incorrectly, layer 2 will not be initialized.

Layer 1 Statistics

DPNSS Layer 1 Stats. Configuration

————————————

Time (Seconds)

————-

1. Layer 1 Stats: Interval 120

2. Write Settings

3. Exit



1.

2.

3.

Time interval between DPNSS layer 1 statistic reports, which are sent via the V.24 interface (0 to

255 seconds). The layer 1 statistic reports are disabled, if the time interval is set to 0.



Clock Source

The clock source is given as DPNSS or TNET. This parameter cannot be configured by the user interface.

Conversion System Clock

———————–

System Clock Source: DPNSS

Press Any Key To Continue:

software download

This option is used to download the board.

The user will be asked to connect a PC to the board. This connection is made using the same interface which is being used for the user interface. If a PC with VT 100 emulation is already connected, this emulation can be ended in order to arrive at MS-DOS.

The user can leave this status by resetting the board.

The following paragraph describes the software download.

Software Download

—————–

Connect PC and run download utility.

Software Download Program

The download program is used to load a new software version for the board. It will operate on every PC (IBM compatible). It can use either the COM1 or COM2 interface. Connection is made as already described for the user interface.

The download program is called up by the DOWNLOAD instruction. The program requires a default from

COM1. If the COM2 is also required, the DOWNLOAD COM2 instruction is entered. The baud rate is set to

19200.

The following display will appear when the program is called up:

– BOSCH Telecom TNet/DPNSS Conversation Download Utility Vx.xx

– Opening COMx: at 19k2 baud

414 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

The following display will appear if the board is detected:

– DCON Card Detected

If the board is not detected, an error message will appear and the program is ended:

– DCON COM PORT NOT DETECTED

The flash-PROM will be erased once the board has been detected. The following display will appear:

– Erasing Flash PROM

– Erase Complete

The user can choose whether to preserve the existing parameter:

– Preserve existing configuration? (Y/N):

The user must enter

Y or N. No other keys will be accepted.

The filename is then entered:

– Enter filename ()...

The following display will appear if the file is not found:

– Cannot open file, retry, or <ret> to quit

– Enter filename ()...

The following display will appear when download commences:

– Download started

The following display will appear after a download:

– Download complete

The program returns to MS-DOS.

8.7.13.5

MDF Connections via CA1B from the DCON module

Cable end

Colours

BK/BN

BK/RD

CA1B

DCON

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

via CA4B from the DCON module

Coax

Coax

1

2

A1/B1

C1/D1

Transmit

Receive

8.7.14

DECT21 ICU for DECT-Applications 21


The DECT21 board is used to connect the Radio Base Station RM 588, material number 4.998.001.296, to the CSI55.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 415

8 Boards

It carries out an automatic run time measurement. The manual measurement of the individual routes up to 1 km is not applicable as long as no repeater is connected between.

Other features

Country of application National and international

Power demand +5V

Interfaces

1100 mA

8 UPD interface for RBS

One UPD interface physically corresponds to 2 UPN interfaces.

The ADPCM (Adaptive-Differential-Pulse-Code-Modulation, 32 kbit/s) conversion is carried out on the board.

One of the two D channels is used for the transmission of synchronization information between the

DECT21 board and the RBS.





DECT21 board, component side

Line lengths

Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm

Outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø0,6 mm

Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm and UPN repeater

1.0 km

2.8 km

2.0 km

416 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8.7.14.1


8 Boards

DECT21 board, front side

Switch Function

S1

S2

Right:

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Middle:

Left:


L1 off: on: on: L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

L11 flashing:

CSI55 LX 07/2006

Reset board

Normal position

No function

Yet to be defined

Normal position

Yet to be defined

Board is not busy

Module is busy in terms of exchange functions

Synch. Master

Layer 1, active port 0








FP download active

417

8 Boards

L12

L13

L14

L15

L16

L17

L18

L19

L20

L21

L22

L23

L24 off: on: flashing: flashing:

Yet to be defined

Board in operation



All 30 B-channels are busy









SW IDM in ICU activated

Yet to be defined

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

8.7.14.2

MDF Connections

MDF

Colours 16x2

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

Patch panel for four-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

8.7.15

DS02 Digital Linecard S0 Variant 2

Short description via CA1B from the DECT21

1st Station

2nd Station

3rd Station

4th Station

5th Station

6th Station

7th station

8th Station

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

418 CSI55 LX 07/2006

The DS02 board provides 16 supplied digital S0 subscriber ports.

Other features




Power supply 48 V/100 mA short-circuit-proof

Interfaces 16 supplied, digital S0 subscriber ports four-wire







8.7.15.1


8 Boards

DS02 board, front side

CSI55 LX 07/2006 419

8 Boards

1. RJ45 connector


S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:


L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6- L19

L20 on: off: on: off: free free on: off: on: flashing: off: on: flashing: off:



Reset board




Board is not busy




Layer 1 of connecting circuit 0 active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 0 inactive

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1/14 active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1/14 inactive



8.7.15.2

MDF Connections

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

MDF


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

420

via CA2B from DS02/3

Cable 1

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

A2/B2 (T)

C2/D2 (R)

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R)

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R)

Cable 2

A9/B9 (T)

C9/D9 (R)

A10/B10 (T)

C10/D10 (R)

A11/B11 (T)

C11/D11 (R)

A12/B12 (T)

C12/D12 (R)

CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

A5/B5 (T)

C5/D5 (R)

A6/B6 (T)

C6/D6 (R)

A7/B7 (T)

C7/D7 (R)

A8/B8 (T)

C8/D8 (R)

A13/B13 (T)

C13/D13 (R)

A14/B14 (T)

C14/D14 (R)

A15/B15 (T)

C15/D15 (R)

A16/B16 (T)

C16/D16 (R)

8.7.16

DS03 Digital Linecard S0 Variant 3


The DS03 board replaces the DS02 board and provides also 16 supplied, digitale S0 subscriber ports.

Other features

Country of application range:


Power demand +5V 445 mA, no terminal connected

Power supply 48V/100mA, short-circuit-proof

Interfaces 16 supplied, digital S0 subscriber ports four-wire

150m

500m

1km

Bus S0 (four-wire), short bus, installation cable Ø0,6 mm J-Y(ST)Y

Bus S0 (four-wire), extended bus, installation cable Ø0,6 mm

J-Y(ST)Y

S0 PTP (four-wire), installation cable Ø0,6 mm J-Y(ST)







CSI55 LX 07/2006 421

8 Boards

8.7.16.1


DS03 board, front side

1. RJ45 connector


S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:




Reset board


422 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6- L19

L20 off: on: off: on: off: on: flashing: off: on: flashing: off: free free on:

8.7.16.2

MDF Connections

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

8.7.17

DT0 Digital Linecard T0




Board is not busy



Board has gone into operation



Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1/14 active

Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1/14 inactive




Cable 1

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

A2/B2 (T)

C2/D2 (R)

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R)

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R)

A5/B5 (T)

C5/D5 (R)

A6/B6 (T)

C6/D6 (R)

A7/B7 (T)

C7/D7 (R)

A8/B8 (T)

C8/D8 (R)

Cable 2

A9/B9 (T)

C9/D9 (R)

A10/B10 (T)

C10/D10 (R)

A11/B11 (T)

C11/D11 (R)

A12/B12 (T)

C12/D12 (R)

A13/B13 (T)

C13/D13 (R)

A14/B14 (T)

C14/D14 (R)

A15/B15 (T)

C15/D15 (R)

A16/B16 (T)

C16/D16 (R)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 423

8 Boards

This component is no longer manufactured (February 2002). It has been replaced by the

ADM Analog Digital Mixboard module. Please only use the ADM with the CS155.

The DT0 board provides 8-digit connections.

Other features




Interfaces 8 digital T0 interfaces (exchange line ports)

8 digital S0 interfaces (locally-fed terminals, e.g. VA93D, PC)

8 digital S0FV interfaces for permanent circuits (clock master or clock slave) in private connections

Switchable digital attenuation for calls





The board contains the following additional features:

DT0 board, component side

424 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8.7.17.1


8 Boards

DT0 board, front side


S1

S2-S10

Middle position

Middle position

Switch Function

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S7

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Not used

Right:

Middle:

Right:

Middle:

Right:

Middle:

Right:

Middle:

Right:

Middle:



Reset board


AO 1 preparatory disabling

AO 1 release/operating status









CSI55 LX 07/2006 425

8 Boards

S8

S9

S10

Right:

Middle:

Right:

Middle:

Right:

Middle:


L1

L2

L7

L8

L3

L4, L5, L6, L9,

L10, L11

L12 on: on: on: on: flashing: off: on: on: flashing: off:

8.7.17.2

MDF connections DTD

Colours 16x2

MDF


WE 1 RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

426









Board is not busy

Module is synchronous clock supplier



Board in operation

Unused


Layer 1 of connecting circuit X active


via CA1x from the DT0

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

A2/B2 (T)

C2/D2 (R)

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R)

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R)

A5/B5 (T)

C6/D5 (R)

A6/B6 (T)

C6/D6 (R)

A7/B7 (T)

C7/D7 (R)

A8/B8 (T)

CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

WH/BU C8/D8 (R)

8.7.18

DT21 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 1


The DT21 board provides one configurable S2Minterface.

Other features


Power demand +5V

Interfaces


400 mA a S2Minterface (CO (T2) - or Tie (TIE)), 120 Ohm symmetric or

75 Ohm asymmetric.

( not intended for use in I55C)

Driver for optical interface


Switchable digital attenuation for speech connections (B-channels), adjustable via the ICU Editor

2.048MHz pulse output


V.24 Test interface (front panel)





Cable adapter

if used in I55 if used in I55C

Ranges

if used in I55

37 dB attenuation range

Wire interfaces (CA1B or CA4B)

120 Ohm symmetric

75 Ohm coax

Optical interface (OFA1B)

Possible adapter boards: CA1B, CA4B, OFA2B, OFAS

Power supply NT via ESBx none, direct connection on front side

Power supply NT via external plug power supply (material number

27.4402.1056).

0.9 km

1.8 km

1.5 km

Installation cable

TF cable monomode cable 9/125 micrometer, 11 dB max. attenuation for entire optical path (e.g. max. 20 km at 0.4 dB/km and 7 plug connections 0.4 dB/plug) if used in I55C


CSI55 LX 07/2006 427

8 Boards

if used in I55C

Wire interfaces (direct connection on the front side)

120 Ohm symmetric 0.9 km

1.8 km

8.7.18.1


Installation cable

TF cable


1. V.24 Test plug

1 = not assigned

2 = TXD

3 = RXD

4 = not assigned

5 = GND

6 = D channel data upstream

7 = D channel data downstream

428 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8 = Clock burst 2.048 MHz

9 = +5V


S1

S2

Neutral position

Neutral position

Switch Function

S1

S2 links:

Mean:

Right:

Right, then left:

Left, then right:

Mean:

Right:



Reset board


Report (fault statistic message to the system console) The switch must be moved back to the middle position after use (2

MHz clock output off) or to the right (2 MHz clock output on).

Normal operating mode / 2 MHz clock output off

2 MHz clock output on

L4

L5

L6

L7


L1

L2

L3

On:

Flashing: off:

On:

On:

L8

L9

L10

L11

L12

On:

On:

On:

On:

Flashing: off:

On:

On:

On:

On:

On:



Board is not busy


Remote Alarm Indication RAI (opposite side reporting fault status)

Alarm Indication Signal AIS (opposite side reporting ”Out of

Order”)


Rx E bit errors



Board in operation


Bit error rate > 10-6


Loss of Framing LOF (loss of frame synchronization)

The LED signals an activated debug monitoring. LED 12 is used as indicator as this debugging applies to the real time function of the module. It is possible to activate the debugging with a connected terminal and finally removing the terminal then the debugging remains on and unaffected.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 429

8 Boards

In order to connect an IDM to the front panel, an optional component must be inserted on the

DT21, reference number: 49.9801.4247.

8.7.18.2

MDF connections DT21

MDF Connection via CA1B from the DT21 Module

via CA1B from the DT21 Cable end

Colours

BK/BN

BK/RD

BK/OR

BK/YE

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

A2/B2 (2 MHz pulse to NT) free

MDF Connection via CA4B or OFA1B from the DT21 Module

Coax

Coax

1

2

A1/B1

C1/D1

Transmit

Receive

8.7.19

DUP03 Digital Subscriber UP0 HW Variant 3


The DUP03 board provides 16 UPNinterface.

Other features




Interfaces 16 UPN ports for digital UPNterminals e.g. terminals likeTK93 etc. as well as the terminals of the T3 family two-wire; transmission rate: 384 kbit/s

Two 64 kbit/s B channels and one 16 kbit/s D channel

Power supply


-48 V/max. 60 mA short-circuit-proof for increased power consumption, e.g. T3 terminals







Line lengths 1 km Installation cable (I-Y(ST)Y Ø0.6 mm

430 CSI55 LX 07/2006

2.8 km

1.8 km


Outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø0.4 mm

Using a UPN repeater enables the range of the UPN interface to be extended.

8.7.19.1


8 Boards

DUP03 board, front side


1 = not seized

2 = +5 V (via 68 Ohm)

3 = DEB IN

4 = RXD

5 = TXD

6 = GND

7 = GND

8 = not seized


S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:



Reset board


CSI55 LX 07/2006 431

8 Boards


L1


L3

L4

L5

L6

L7- L19

L20 on: on: on: on:



Board is not busy






Layer 1 of connecting circuit .. or .. active


RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

8.7.19.2

MDF Connections

Colours 16x2

MDF

Patch panel for the two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

8.7.20

DUPN Digital Subscriber UPN


The DUPN board provides 32 UPNinterfaces for digital terminals.

via CA1B from the DUP03

A1/B1

A2/B2

A3/B3

A4/B4

A5/B5

A6/B6

A7/B7

A8/B8

A9/b9

A10/B10

A11/B11

A12/B12

A13/B13

A14/B14

A15/B15

A16/B16

432 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Other features




Interfaces 32 UPN ports for digital UPNterminals e.g. terminals likeTK93 etc. as well as the terminals of the T3 family

Mode one B channel per interface two B channels per interface two-wire; transmission rate: 384 kbit/s one or two 64 kbit/s B channels and one 16 kbit/s D channel

Power supply


-48 V/max. 60 mA short-circuit-proof for increased power consumption, e.g. T3 terminals







Line lengths 1 km

2.8 km

Installation cable (I-Y(ST)Y Ø0.6 mm


Using a UPN repeater enables the range of the UPN interface to be extended.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 433

8 Boards

8.7.20.1


DUPN board, front side


1 = not seized

2 = +5 V (via 68 Ohm)

3 = DEB IN

4 = RXD

5 = TXD

6 = GND

7 = GND

8 = not seized


S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:



Reset board


S2 Left or middle:

Right:

Status display of layer 1 of the AOs 1..0.16 activated

Status display of layer 1 of the AOs 17...32 activated


L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

434 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7- L19

L20 flashing: off: on: flashing: off: on: on: on: on:


Board is not busy




Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1 or 17 active


Layer 1 of connecting circuit .. or .. active


8.7.20.2

MDF connections DUPN

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

Patch panel for the two wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

via CA2B from DUPN

Cable 1

A9/B9

A10/B10

A11/B11

A12/B12

A13/B13

A14/B14

A15/B15

A16/B16

A1/B1

A2/B2

A3/B3

A4/B4

A5/B5

A6/B5

A7/B7

A8/B8

Cable 2

A1/B17

A18/B18

A19/B19

A20/B20

A21/B21

A22/B22

A23/B23

A24/B24

A25/B25

A26/B26

A27/B27

A28/B28

A29/B29

A30/B30

A31/B31

A32/B32

8.7.21

EEADM Emergency Extension Analog Digital Mixboard


On the ADM board the EEADM subboard is plugged on the X8 connector together with the STSM subboard, if it is used with emergency switching (cable adapter EESS0). It serves to detect if the ADM is present.

Insert the EEADM subboard if required, see the following figure,

CSI55 LX 07/2006 435

8 Boards

onto the X8 connector of the ADM board.


In this case slot 3 (X5/X6) remains free.

8.7.22

EES0B Emergency Extension Switch S0 B Module


For special services, such as the police force, fire brigade or Red Cross, whose answering facilities must always be available, the Emergency Extension Switch S0 for CSI55 is available. In the event of a power failure or other malfunctions, this modules enables a switchover from the connecting line coming from the ISDN network to sets that are powered by the ISDN network.

436 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

EES0B board


2. Champ plug

3. EES0B

4. Pl.1

5. Pl.2

Instructions

Connection to a DT0, i.e. 2 DAs are to be switched per port.






PC Board DT0 removed



The port 1..6 contains the switchover option. Port 7 and 8 are directly switched through.



The power supply to the board is implemented with GND from the DT0. -48 V is fed via the connecting cable.



Block Diagram

CSI55 LX 07/2006 437

8 Boards


1. ISDN line

2. Answering with emergency set

3. Answering without emergency set

4. Answering

5. Emergency set

6. ZN

7. manual emergency switching

8. Documentation

8.7.22.1





Each cable adapter is provided with 125 mA semi-lag fuse protection.

8.7.22.2

MDF Connections

MDF Cable 1

Colours 24x2

RD/BU TA1/TB1

Emergency Extension Switch S0 with DT0

ISDN lines with emergency switching

438 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

TC1/TD1

TA2/TB2

TC2/TD2

TA3/TB3

TC3/TD3

TA4/TB4

TC4/TD4

TA5/TB5

TC5/TD5

TA6/TB6

TC6/TD6

TA7/TB7

TC7/TD7

TA8/TB8

TC8/TD8

EA1/EB1

EC1/ED1

EA2/EB2

EC2/ED2

EA3/EB3

EC3/ED3

EA4/EB4

EC4/ED4

ISDN lines without emergency switching

Emergency sets

MDF Cable 2

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

EA5/EB5

EC5/ED5

EA6/EB6

EC6/ED6

RA1/RB1

ERA1/ERB1

EOA1/EOB1

RA2/RB2

ERA2ERB2

EOA2/EOB2

RA3/RB3

ERA3ERB3

EOA3/EOB3

RA4/RB4

ERA4/ERB4

EOA4/EOB4


Emergency sets









CSI55 LX 07/2006 439

8 Boards

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

RA5/RB5

ERA5/ERB5

EOA5/EOB5

RA6/RB6

ERA6/ERB6

EOA6/EOB6

-48 V/-48 V

ZN/GND





From power supply

For the contingency of an emergency change-over

8.7.23

EESS0 Emergency Extension Switch S0


For special services, such as the police force, fire brigade or Red Cross, whose answering facilities must always be available, the adapter board Emergency Extension Switch S0 for CSI55 is available. In the event of a power failure or other malfunctions, this modules enables a switchover from the connecting line coming from the ISDN network to S0 sets that are powered by the ISDN network.

EESS0 board


2. Champ plug

3. EESS0

4. Pl.1

5. Pl.2

Instructions

Connection to a DT0 or ADM, i.e. 2 wire paris are to be switched per port.




440 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards



DT0/ADM board removed


Other features

Power demand -48V = 108mA


The port 1..6 contains the switchover option. Port 7 and 8 are directly switched through. Ports 9 to 16 cannot be used (only applies to ADM).



The detection ”Board removed” is implemented with GND from the DT0 or ADM.

-48 V is fed via the connecting cable.



The X8 connector of the ADM board requires the EEADM submodule.

The EESS0 board differs from the EES0B board only in as far as in the EESS0 it is possible to prevent emergency switching of individual ports by means of jumpers.

Block Diagram

CSI55 LX 07/2006 441

8 Boards


1. ISDN line

2. Answering station

3. Manual emergency switching

4. Documentation

5. Emergency answer

8.7.23.1

Additional measures with ADM


442 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

ADM board, location of EEADM on X8


8.7.23.2

Jumper

The EESS0 features switching contacts with jumpers to prevent emergency switching of individual ports.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 443

8 Boards

EESS0 cable adapter, component side

Upon first delivery emergency switching is active for ports 0 to 5, i.e. the jumpers are on 2-3 and 5-6. For special applications it is possible to exclude individual ports from emergency switching.

View of connectors X7, X8 and X9

Connector X7 Jumpers 1-2

444


CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Connector X8

Connector X9

Jumpers 2-3

Jumpers 4-5

Jumpers 5-6

Jumpers 1-2

Jumpers 2-3

Jumpers 4-5

Jumpers 5-6

Jumpers 1-2

Jumpers 2-3

Jumpers 4-5

Jumpers 5-6












8.7.23.3


The feedlines of the -48V should not be connected to the same fuse as those of the PBX because of the current difference between them.

The failure criteria such as fuse failure, board removed or manual switchover trigger a message on the system console so that monitoring from there is guaranteed.




8.7.23.4

MDF Connections

MDF Cable 1

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

TA1/TB1

TC1/TD1

TA2/TB2


ISDN line 0

ISDN line 0

ISDN line 1

CSI55 LX 07/2006 445

8 Boards

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN


MDF Cable 2

Colours 24x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

EA5/EB5

EC5/ED5

EA6/EB6

EC6/ED6

RA1/RB1

ERA1/ERB1

EOA1/EOB1

RA2/RB2

ERA2ERB2

EOA2/EOB2

RA3/RB3

ERA3ERB3

EOA3/EOB3

RA4/RB4

ERA4/ERB4

EOA4/EOB4

RA5/RB5

ERA5/ERB5

TC2/TD2

TA3/TB3

TC3/TD3

TA4/TB4

TC4/TD4

TA5/TB5

TC5/TD5

TA6/TB6

TC6/TD6

TA7/TB7

TC7/TD7

TA8/TB8

TC8/TD8

EA1/EB1

EC1/ED1

EA2/EB2

EC2/ED2

EA3/EB3

EC3/ED3

EA4/EB4

EC4/ED4

446

ISDN line 1

ISDN line 2

ISDN line 2

ISDN line 3

ISDN line 3

ISDN line 4

ISDN line 4

ISDN line 5

ISDN line 5

ISDN line 6

ISDN line 6

ISDN line 7

ISDN line 7

Emergency set 0

Emergency set 0

Emergency set 1

Emergency set 1

Emergency set 2

Emergency set 2

Emergency set 3

Emergency set 3


Emergency set 4

Emergency set 4

Emergency set 5

Emergency set 5 to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set

CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

RD/GN

WH/BN

EOA5/EOB5

RA6/RB6

ERA6/ERB6

EOA6/EOB6

-48 V/-48 V

ZN/GND from handset of answering facility to analogue voice recording from handset of emergency set from handset of answering facility

-48V from power supply

Contact of forced emergency switching / to contact of forced emergency switching


8.7.24

EMAC Extended Multi Access Circuit Board


The board EMAC module is a submodule of the MAC and is used for the extension of 2x2 MBit interfaces.

EMAC board, component side

8.7.25

HAMUX Home Agent Multiplexer


The following description provides a basic outline of the board HAMUX More detailed information about module features, installation and configuration can be found in a separate manual entitled HAMUX Home Agent Multiplexer.

The HAMUX board with the associated SPCU submodules is used for the integration of up to 8 “Home Agents” in the Call Center and operates with software versions from E04.1 on.

It is a central board with line interfaces, but with a virtual short-circuit between the two connecting circuits, and enables the simultaneous transmission of compressed speech, data and signalling to a home agent via a

B channel.

Included in shipment

ISDN exchange access (to home agent) via CS155 standard boards

Purchasable passive ISDN card for S0 bus interface with D-channel protocols

CSI55 LX 07/2006 447

8 Boards

Cable adapter with 2x 2 MBit interfaces

ISDN dial-up connection via S0interface with a B-channel and D-channel

Multiplexing of the B channel

Communication protocol of the data application/transmission

Speech compression

Within the CSI55xE connection of the HAMUX to the DP world is implemented via a 2 Mbit/s multiport server

Principal overview of a Call Center with home agent

1. Customer

2. HOME Agent

3. Network analog or digital

4. ISDN

5. Home agent PC board

6. Digital or analog connector board

7. Database

8. Agent/Supervisor

9. PC Agent/Supervisor

10. BCC Server

11. Router

12. LAN

448 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

13. HOST

In order to implement the 8 home agents, the board must be logged in with 16 connecting circuits. Connecting circuits AO0 - AO7 are responsible for the setup of the carrier connections to the home agents.

Connecting circuits AO8 - AO15 are subjected to tunnelled transmission and represent the actual agent connecting circuits.

Data transmission is implemented to a router via a 2 MBit/s data interface independently of startup and switching software. To enable better exploitation of the router capacity, it is possible to operate the data interfaces of the HAMUX board in cascades.

HAMUX board

8.7.25.1



CSI55 LX 07/2006 449

8 Boards

HAMUX board, front side

L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

Port 8 on: off: flashing:



Total status of LEDs on: flashing: off:

Total status of LEDs on: flashing: off:


450

1 or more L3 ports active

All ports are blocked or not active

All ports are in idle condition

Reset

Failure of the configuration data received

Normal operation of ICU

L3 active

Idle state

Barred

L2 and L3 active

Idle state

Barred

L3 active

Idle state

Barred

L2 and L3 active

Idle state

Barred

CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

L7

L8

L9

L10

L11

L12

L13

L14

L15

L16

L17





Port 13



Port 3 on: off: flashing: on: off: flashing:




CSI55 LX 07/2006

L3 active

Idle state

Barred

L2 and L3 active

Idle state

Barred

L3 active

Idle state

Barred

L2 and L3 active

Idle state

Barred

L3 active

Idle state

Barred

L2 and L3 active

Idle state

Barred

L3 active

Idle state

Barred

L2 and L3 active

Idle state

Barred

L3 active

Idle state

Barred

L2 and L3 active

Idle state

Barred

L3 active

Idle state

Barred

451

8 Boards

L18

L19

L20


Message flashing:

TEST LED1 on: off:


L2 and L3 active

Idle state

Barred

Message from C-bus

Fault in Direct Data Interface

Normal operation

HAMUX board, front side

S1

S2

Total block

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Test

Links

Right:

Hardware block of all 16 ports

Normal position

Reset of ICU

Test procedure

Normal position

452 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.7.25.2

Interfacing

Upgrading of the HAMUX module

1. to Router/Server

2. Cable

3. CA6B Cable Adapter

4. 50-pin Champ

The HAMUX board is connected to the I55 via cable adapter CA6B. At the same time, the interface to the router/server is implemented via WE socket 1 of the cable adapter.

In the event that several HAMUX boards are to be integrated into the system, a cascading of the modules is implemented via WE socket 2 of the respective cable adapter.

PIN assignment, socket 1

PIN 3

Function 1a (Rx)

6

1b (Rx)

4

2a (Tx)

5

2b (Tx)

PIN assignment, socket 2

PIN 3

Function 2a (Tx)

6

2b (Tx)

4

1a (Rx)

5

1b (Rx)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 453

8 Boards

8.7.25.3

Configuration of the Connecting Circuits

Carrier Connections AO0-A07

Connecting circuits 0-7 are responsible for the setup and release of the carrier connections to the home agents. They each provide a transparent B channel between the HAMUX board and a home agent.

On the HAMUX board, this is implemented by the simulation of a digital subscriber.

The connecting circuit is designated the

digital subscriber type. The second B channel is blocked and assigned to the

Data service function only.

A carrier connection connecting circuit is not able to setup a connection itself, but simply to seize the connection.

Agents AO8-AO15

Connecting circuits 8-15 are set up as agents in the Call Center. They are designated the

digital position

type. The second B channel is blocked.

The telephony service function only is set up for the agent connecting circuit.

Virtual short-circuit

On the HAMUX board, a virtual short-circuit is created by each carrier connection connecting circuit and an agent connecting circuit. The D channel of the agent connecting circuit is packed.

The status of a carrier connection connecting circuit (carrier connection present/not present) corresponds to the status of the agent connecting circuit (active/deactive).

Configuration Overview

AO

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

AO-type

Digital subscriber

Digital subscriber

Digital subscriber

Digital subscriber

Digital subscriber

Digital subscriber

Digital subscriber

Digital subscriber

Digital position

Digital position

Digital position

Log file

EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0)








TN1R6 (Version 0)

TN1R6 (Version 0)

TN1R6 (Version 0)

Service B Channel

No.

Data only 1

2

Data only 1

2

Data only 1

2

Data only 1

2

Data only 1

2

Data only 1

2

Data only 1

2

Data only 1

2

TLP only 1

2

TLP only 1

2

TLP only 1

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

B Channel

Status free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

454 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

13

14

11

12

15

Digital position

Digital position

Digital position

Digital position

Digital position

TN1R6 (Version 0)

TN1R6 (Version 0)

TN1R6 (Version 0)

TN1R6 (Version 0)

TN1R6 (Version 0)

2

TLP only 1

2

TLP only 1

2

TLP only 1

2

TLP only 1

2

TLP only 1

2

8.7.25.4

Configuration example for a carrier connection conn. circ.

Connecting circuit

Call number

Slot/HWA

AO-type

20.11.97 07:51:19

:3300

:01-01-05-00

:DITN

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred free

Barred

General ADS data

Name

Accounting section

Log files

Overload priority

SPWKGR. Public exchange access

SPWKGR. COLISEE

DISA group

Dealer group

CN alloc. HKZ & tie

Category

Waiting field max.

Reserved

Connection memory

Service memory

AO state

Service block

:

:0000

:

Log file

ETSI

:2

:0

:0

:0

:

:0

:-1

:0

:

:0

:1

:In operation

:sv-free

Version

0 defective

OFF busy2

OFF error

OFF

CSI55 LX 07/2006 455

8 Boards

Service data

Status

Dialling group

Traffic group

Switchover group

Code dialling group

LCR group

Dial retrieval

Backward rel.

DAT

Free

30

0

0

1

0

DEACTIVE

DEACTIVE

B channel data

Allocation code

Deliberation code

: -

: -

B ch no.

1

Bund no.

-

Dir.

-

Acc.

-

State

F

B ch no.

2

Bund no.

-

Dir.

-

Acc.

-

State

S

Number of seizable B channels: 1

Seizure direction

G -

K

W

-

-

Outgoing

Incoming

Bothway

Access Authorization

M with

O without

S

T

Status

B

D

EB

ER

F

G

R

V

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

8.7.25.5

Configuration example for an agent conn. circ.

BUSY

DEFECTIVE

EDSS1 BUSY

EDSS1 RESERVED

FREE

FAULTY

RESERVED

BLOCKED

DEFECTIVE/BLOCKED

BUSY/BLOCKED

456 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

20.11.97 07:51:19

Connecting circuit

Call number

Slot/HWA

AO-type

:3700

:01-01-05-08

:DIPL

DAT

Free

30

1

0

0

0

DEACTIVE

DEACTIVE

-log. position no.: 61

General ADS data

Name

Accounting section

Log files

Overload priority


SPWKGR. COLISEE

DISA group

Dealer group

CN alloc. HKZ & tie

Category

Waiting field max.

Reserved

Connection memory

Service memory

AO state

Service block

:

:0000

:

Log file

TN1R6

:2

:0

:0

:0

:

:0

:-1

:0

:

:0

:1

:HW blocked

:sv-free

Version

0 defective

OFF busy2

OFF error

OFF

Service data

Status

Dialling group

Traffic group

Switchover group

Code dialling group

LCR group

Dial retrieval

Backward rel.

B channel data

CSI55 LX 07/2006 457

8 Boards

Allocation code

Deliberation code

: -

: -

B ch no.

1

Bund no.

-

Dir.

-

Acc.

-

State

F

B ch no.

2

Bund no.

-

Dir.

-

Acc.

-

State

S

Number of seizable B channels: 1

Seizure direction

G -

K

W

-

-

Outgoing

Incoming

Bothway

T

V

R

S

Status

B

D

EB

ER

F

G

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

BUSY

DEFECTIVE

EDSS1 BUSY

EDSS1 RESERVED

FREE

FAULTY

RESERVED

BLOCKED

DEFECTIVE/BLOCKED

BUSY/BLOCKED

Access Authorization

M with

O without

8.7.26

IMUX Integrated Multiplexer


IMUX board is used to link CSI55 systems via permanent connections (FV).

Type

D64S (S interface with 1 x 64 KBit/s B channel)

DS01/DTS01 (S interface with 1 x 64 KBit/s B channel and 1 x 16 KBit/s D channel)

DS02/DTS02 (S interface with 2 x 64 KBit/s B channel and 1 x 16 KBit/s D channel)

International leased line as per X.21 (X.21 interface with a transmission rate of 64 KBit/s)

458 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

I55 with the IMUX board

Functions of the IMUX board:

• The IMUX board permits the transmission of several compressed speech channels in one B channel of the permanent circuit. In the process, the band width per speech channel is reduced/compressed to 16

Kbit/s in accordance with G.728 LD-CELP. This process ensures very high speech quality despite the compression of 4:1, and is better than ADPCM coding with the same band width, for example. They are better, for example, than a ADPCM coding with the same band width.

Speech compression in the IMUX board

1. I55 with IMUX

2. Line

3. IMUX

4. Bandwidth

• Every speech channel is provided with identification and processing functions for fax group 3. Identification of a group 3 fax is necessary, as fax connections must not be subjected to the speech compression.

The transmission is implemented at max. 9.6 KBit/s.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 459

8 Boards

• The line may also be used for data transmission via the direct data interface as per V.24/X.21.

The data is multiplexed from the direct data interface on the line separately from the speech channels, demultiplexed at the remote side on the second IMUX of the line, and fed to the direct data interface.

This means that the data is fed neither via the decompression/compression units of the IMUX boards nor via the switching matrixes of the systems.

• The data service is not supported by the IMUX, as data transport is not possible via compressed channels of IMUX. The Integral 55 uses the service identification function to automatically check whether it is dealing with the service type (DAT). If this is the case, the connection is not fed via the IMUX board, but by means of alternate routing to another bundle. If the alternate routing is not activated, ”occupied” is signaled. This procedure functions for a 3 call number plan types: common, hidden, open.

• Transit functions: If a connection is fed via several I55 systems, compression is performed in the originating node and decompression in the destination node. This ensures that repeated compression/ decompression is avoided.

The prerequisite for this is that all routes between the participating nodes are equipped with IMUX boards and that the connection is fed via IMUX routes without exception.

The transit functions also apply when two compressed connections arriving at a transit node from a system need to be routed in different directions.

Transit functions of the IMUX board

1. I55 with IMUX

2. Line

3. IMUX

4. Bandwidth

Data connections via the direct data interface cannot be set up via several transit nodes, but only as point-to-point connections between 2 systems.

Other features






460 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards



Hardware Requirements

• The number of IMUX boards used per module is not limited. Each IMUX board occupies one connecting circuit slot.

Restrictions

• If a permanent circuit with 8 speech channels (DS02/DTS02) or two permanent circuits each with 4 speech channels (DS01/DTS01) is set up, the application of four SPCU speech compression units is required. IMUX boards that are equipped in this way must not be installed in directly neighbouring slots.

In this case, one slot must remain free or be occupied by a board with low dissipated power (ASCEU,

DS0, DT0, DT2....).

Software Requirements

Software from E03.2 is required for operation of the IMUX boards.

8.7.26.1

Components and Cables

Components of the IMUX board:

The IMUX board is made up of one basic board and submodules:

IMUX

SPCU

S64LI

X64LI

CA5B

This board is the basic board and requires a connecting circuit slot.

Submodule of the IMUX for speech compression. Each SPCU can process two (speech) channels. A maximum of 4 SPCUs can be inserted onto the basic board.

Submodule of the IMUX for the implementation of the D64S (1xB),

DS01/DTS01 (1xB+D) and DS02/DTS02 (2xB+D) line interfaces. One submodule is required for each of the mentioned interfaces.

Submodule of the IMUX, implements the line interface: International leased line X.21 with a transmission rate of 64Kbit/s. One line interface is implemented per submodule.

Max. 2 S64LI, 2 X64LI, or 1 S64LI and 1 X64LI can be inserted on the basic board at any one time.

Adapter module for B modules

Material number

28.5630.318x

28.7640.517x

28.7640.516x

28.7640.515x

28.7640.366x

Cable:

• 6x2 Sub-D/open ext. Connection cable TC-MDF (material number 29.9030.5101 for 1 m up to 29.9030.5199

for 99 m).

• 1x15-pin D-sub (male)/D-sub (female) for X64LI (material numbers 27.5630.0541 to .0543) in lengths of

5, 20 and 50 m. This cable can also be used for connection between the direct X.21 data interface and a data terminal.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 461

8 Boards

For the direct V.24 async./sync. interface, a conventional 25-pin D-sub (male)/D-sub (female) cable can be used. The number of wires depends on the data terminal (HW handshake). For sync. transmission, the clock lines must always be switched.

• The following line interfaces can be served:

Line interface type

D64S

DS01/DTS01

DS02/DTS02

International leased line as per X.21

Structure

1xB

1xB+D

2xB+D

64 KBit/s

8

3

3

4

maximum number of speech channels

number 3 for lines without dedicated D channel ensues due to the fact that D channel signalling also needs to be transmitted inband within the B channel. This is why not the entire band width is available for user data.

The data transmission as per X.21 allows a point-to-point data transmission only. Each line interface requires its own D channel (one D channel for two identical line interfaces is not possible. The

8.7.26.2

Inserting the Submodules

Remove the IMUX board from the I55 slot.

Note


Insert the S64LI and/or X64LI submodule onto Line-Interface A and/or Line-Interface B. One or more speech compression units (SPCUs) can be inserted at random on one or more free SPCU1-SPCU4 slots.

462 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

IMUX board, component side

1. SPCU Speech Compression Unit 2*G728/G.711 Speech Compression/Decompression

2. Line-Interface A Either: S64LI (Structured 64 KBit/s Line Interface) or X64LI (X.21 64 KBit/s Line Interface)

3. Line-Interface B Either: S64LI (Structured 64 KBit/s Line Interface) or X64LI (X.21 64 KBit/s Line Interface)

In order to guarantee the error-free operation of the board, the type and number (max. 2) of inserted line interfaces (S64LI and/or X64LI), as well as the number of speech compression units (2 speech compression units per SPCU board –> max. 8 speech compression units), must be adapted to the customer application.

The configuration data must always be entered accordingly using the ICU Editor.

Insert the IMUX board into the I55 slot.

An installation that does not correspond to the diagram can lead to malfunctions in the board. For better orientation, the material number (*) must be located on the left side of the SPCUs to ensure that they are installed the right way around.

8.7.26.3

Synchronization

When networking I55 systems via the IMUX, it is unavoidable that the systems run synchronously, because:

• The speech compression algorithm reacts very sensitively to transmission faults through transmutation processes.

• Error-free operation cannot be guaranteed for the data interface without synchronization.

When networking systems via the permanent circuit of the public network, the IMUX line interfaces are configured as the “slave” on both sides of the permanent circuit (normal case). With direct connection, one side is set as the “master” and the other side as the “slave”. This means that the same rules must be followed as, for example, with a permanent circuit operated with the DT0 board.

For synchronization purposes, I55 systems exchange information via the networking permanent circuit. This is carried out via the signalling channels of the logical ports. This means that synchronization can only be present via IMUX lines to which ports are assigned (i.e. that are set up for transportation of one or more B channels).

The IMUX board software will reject a configuration (configuration error) that results in a port number = 0 for the entire board.

However, a port number = 0 (entire band width for data transmission) is possible for one of the individual IMUX lines (A, B). These represent special cases that are to be observed with regard to synchronization.

Special case 1: 2 I55 systems network connected via two permanent circuits (FV) operated with IMUX

Special case 1 for synchronization

CSI55 LX 07/2006 463

8 Boards

1. FV1: only data

2. FV2: only B channels

Because no ports (no B channels) are configured for permanent circuit FV1, synchronization of the two I55xE systems is only possible via FV2 (or via further permanent circuit lines that can be operated with IMUX or other boards such as DT0 or DT2, for example).

Note:

With the appropriate configuration of the line interfaces, the permanent circuit (FV) lines in the above example can also be connected to the line interfaces of the IMUX in a “crossed” pattern.

Special case 2: 3 I55 systems network connected via two permanent circuits (FV) operated with IMUX

Special case 2 for synchronization

1. FV1: only data

2. FV2: only B channels

3. FV3

4. FV4

5. FV5

6. FV6

7. Access to public network

The I55-1 and I55-2 cannot be synchronized via FV1 (no ports)! However, because synchronization must be ensured (data transmission), it is necessary to provide further synchronization paths:

• Via further permanent circuits between I55-1 and I55-2 and operated with IMUX, e.g. FV3.

• Via further permanent circuits (operated with IMUX, DT0, DT2...) e.g. FV5.

• Via permanent circuits between I55-2 and I55-3, e.g. FV6.

• Via access of systems to the public network.

464 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

8.7.26.4

Configuration

ICU Editor

The module possesses 2 physical ports, the line interfaces A (upper line submodule) and B (lower line submodule).

The ICU Editor is used to select the interface type and a band width distribution for each line interface (A,

B). The distribution is made up of a B channel number (compressed speech channels of 16 KBit/s each) and band width reservation for the transmission of data (see table below). The number of B channels provides the quantity, numbering and type of logical ports (connecting circuits). This means that with the IMUX, the number of logical ports represented for the switching software (MSU1 task) depends entirely on the configuration.

1. Example: Line A 3B chanels, slave (e.g. DS01)

Line B 5B channels, master (DS02) results:

3

4

1

2

Port (AO) no.

0

Port type

BAVLN-2B-Slave

BAVLN-1B-Slave

BAVLN-2B-Master

BAVLN-2B-Master

BAVLN-1B-Master

B

B

A

B

Transmitted on physical line

A

2. Example: Line A not installed

Line B 4B channels, slave results:

Port (AO) no.

0

1

Port type

BAVLN-2B-Slave

BAVLN-2B-Slave

Transmitted on physical line

B

B

The ICU Editor checks whether the number of B channels on an IMUX board is greater/equal 8 and, if required, returns an error message. If this does not occur, the ICU Editor provides information about the number of speech compression units to be inserted (half the number = number of SPCUs).

When the IMUX module is started, the available band width of a physical line (e.g. 64 Kbit/s with type D64S) is divided into subwidths by means of a “Mapping” algorithm. The input information for this process is as follows:

• The number of required B channels (ICU Editor).

• The reserved band width for transmission of the data channel (ICU Editor), see data interfaces.

• In some cases, the required band width for the D signalling channel (permanently set, [8 KBit/s] e.g. with

D64S) if the inteface type does not provide a separate D channel.

It must be ensured that the ’Mapping’ algorithm provides the same results on both sides of a permanent circuit operated with IMUX (this means that the subbands have the same position throughout the entire band)! To this end, the line interfaces on both sides of the FV must

on all accounts have the same configuration

concerning B-channel numbers and reserved capacity for the data channel.

This requirement must be met for each line interface. This means, for example, that if line A of an IMUX in an

I55 system 1 is connected with line B of an IMUX in system 2 via a permanent circuit, the two line interfaces

A (system 1) and B (system 2) must be configured in the same way.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 465

8 Boards

Configuration checks

The ICU Editor carries out configuration checks for the IMUX board. This virtually rules out incorrect settings being made:

• Check of whether the total number of B channels is 8 (max. possible number of speech compression units).

• Check of whether the reserved band width on the line selected for transmission of the data channel is sufficient for the current configuration of the ’direct data interface’.

• In addition, the number of required speech compression units is output (half the number = number of

SPCU submodules).

The above points are checked by the ICU software of the board. The hardware configuration data is also checked. In the event of inconsistencies in the configuration, the IMUX will not be started and indicates a configuration data error. This indication involves the top two LEDs flashing red and green on the front panel and a message to MCOM.

An error occurs if:

• The configuration data structure is unknown. (Always switch off the “Type name from ICU.TAB” option in the ICU Editor.)

• The total number of B channels is greater than 8.

• The reserved capacity for transmitting the data channel is insufficient.

• One or both inserted line submodules is not compatible with the type of the selected line interface.

• No B channel has been configured for the entire module (port number = 0).

If an insufficient number of SPCU submodules is inserted, some ports on the IMUX will not start up (traffic restriction!). This status is indicated by a continuously flashing LED (see “LEDs and Switches”).

Customer data

When setting up the customer data, it must be ensured that enough ports of the BAV type are set up with port addresses 0, 1, 2...

Because one speech compression unit must be present on the board for each B channel, and the maximum number of speech compression units that can be inserted is 8 (2 per SPCU submodule), the maximum number of ports is 5. This means that when setting up customer data for 5 ports of the BAV type with the addresses 0 to 4 on the IMUX slot, all configuration cases of the board are covered.

Networking via the TNET protocol

The switching control regards the channels of the IMUX board as channels to “link line networks” (

basic

access vln) using the TNET protocol. The IMX feature must be enabled in order to implement switching of the connecting circuits of the IMUX board, which are also set up with a “basic access vln” connecting circuit type.

All other customer data is subjected to the known regulations for basic access vln (TNET).

Prevention of ’non speech connections’

In ’non-speech connections’, e.g. in the data service, the switching controller recognizes, with the aid of the customer data, during the connection setup that the desired service is not set up. The response to this is either disconnection or alternate routing. In networks with open numbering plans (exchange line code for each node), it is possible via the customer data to set up the exchange line code for IMUX connections only in dial groups for the speech service.

466 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8.7.26.5


8 Boards

IMUX board, front side

Switch Function

S1

S2

S3

S4

Right:

Middle:

Left:

Left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Reset board

Normal position

Service disabling (preparatory) for all log. ports (AO) of the board

Normal position

Service disabling (preparatory) for line A

Normal position

Service disabling (preparatory) for line B

No function


L1

L2

L3

Summation display via all ports off: No active layer 3 connections, all ports free on: flashing: off:

At least 1 layer 3 connection

All available ports have ’blocked’ status

Normal on: flashing: off: on:

Board reset status

Startup or download in progress

Layer 1 on line A active

Layer 1 on line A inactive (alarm)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 467

8 Boards

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

L11

L12 off: on:

Layer 1 on line B active

Layer 1 on line B inactive (alarm)

Summation display via all ports allocated to line A off: No active layer 3 connections on line A, all allocated ports free

Summation display via all ports allocated to line B off: No active layer 3 connections on line B, all allocated ports free on: flashing:

At least 1 layer 3 connection on line B

All ports allocated to the line have ’blocked’ status on: flashing: off:

At least 1 layer 3 connection on line A

All ports allocated to the line have ’blocked’ status

Board is not supplying synchronous clock to I55xE central clock supply on: Board supplying synchronous clock

Only valid if SYN LED (L7) is “on”!

off: on: off: flashing:

Synchronous clock is being fed from line B

Synchronous clock is being fed from line A

Normal

Insufficient number of compression units (too few SPCU’s)

No function

The LED lights up briefly when C-bus messages are received

One-off fault states (IMUX internal buffer overflows) when transmitting data from the ”direct data interface” result in the LED lighting up for 30 seconds. Such faults may occur if,

• The network connected I33 systems are not in sync with each other or with the public network.

• Asynchronous data interfaces transmit data from the IMUX and the data terminal at adversely differing rates. (IMUX corrects this fault automatically by slightly increasing the data output rate to the data interface.)

During startup, the LEDs indicate various board statuses. The phase is indicated by LED 12 being continuously ON. When LED 12 has been switched off once, the LEDs resume their normal functions. The simultaneous flashing of LEDs 1 and 7 indicates a

configuration

fault (board will not operate).

8.7.26.6

Data Interfaces

Onedata interface exists for each IMUX which can be configured as an asynchronous type (V.24/V.28) or synchronous type (V.24/V.28 or X.21/V.11) with various data rates.

These data connections are fed directly to the board via the switching matrix.

The data connections cannot be set up via transit nodes. The respective plug is on the cable adapter CA5B that belongs to the board.

468 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

I55 with the IMUX board

The data is transported via one (configurable) of the permanent circuit (FV) lines. For this purpose, sufficient capacity for the data channel must be reserved on the selected line.

The ICU Editor checks whether the reserved band width on the selected transmission line is sufficient for the desired transmission rate. All data rates which fall below the reserved capacity are permissible but not necessarily sensible, as band width may be left unused.

Example:

Data interface 1200 baud asynchronous, transmission on line A, 32 KBit/s reserved on line A. Because band width can be reserved in increments of 8 KBit/s a capacity of 24 KBit/s remains unused, meaning that at least

1 other B channel could be set up.

Transmission rate (Bit/s) asynch.

-

-

< 9600

19200

-

38400

synch.

< 8000

16000

24000

32000

48000

64000

Line bandwidth to be reserved (KBit/s)

8

16

24

32

48

64

As only one data channel can be transmitted, band width also only needs to be provided on one permanent circuit line. Any additional capacity reserved on the second line would remain unused.

The data interfaces operate protocol-transparent in all operating modes.

An end-to-end data backup should generally be implemented through the connected data terminals.

For all synchronous operating modes, the data interface is the

clock master for the data terminal.

The V.24 data interface involves unsymmetrical dual power lines that perform the following tasks:

Direction

CSI55 LX 07/2006 469

8 Boards

TxD (CT103):

RxD (CT104):

CTS (CT106):

DSR (CT107):

GND (CT102):

DCD (CT109):

Transmit data

Receive data

Transmit stand-by

Operational readiness

Operational earth

Receive signal level

DEE –>

< –

< –

< –

< –

In a synchronous transmission, the two lines below supply the DEE with pulse timing information (no function in asynchronous transmission):

TxC2 (CT114):

RxC2 (CT115):

Transmitting pulse

Receiving pulse

<

<

–

–

Subsequent to the activation of the interface, the CTS, DSR and DCD lines are permanently set to “ON” and remain at this signal until the board is reset (the data interface of the IMUX signals permanent stand-by).

Signal on the lines

Data lines

Control and clock lines

V1 < -3 Volt

Binary 1

OFF

V1 > +3 Volt

Binary 0

ON

The

X.21 data interface involves symmetrical dual power lines that perform the following tasks:

T:

R:

C:

I:

S:

G:

Sending

Receiving

Control

Report

Clock pulse

Earth or return conductor

Direction

DEE –>

< –

–>

< –

< –

Subsequent to the activation of the interface, the I line is permanently set to “ON” and remains at this signal until the board is reset (the data interface of the IMUX signals permanent stand-by). Line C is not evaluated.

The ’Gnd1’ line can be set to ground irrespective of the country of application. The CA5B cable adapters feature a breakpoint which can be used to disconnect this line from ground.

Breakpoints on the cable adapter

1. Breakpoints

Signal on the lines

470

VA...VB

VA...VB

CSI55 LX 07/2006

Data lines

Control and clock lines

< -0.3 Volt

Binary 1

OFF

> +0.3 Volt

Binary 0

ON

The following bit rates are supported which can be configured using ISM or the ICU Editor:

V.24 synch.

X.21 synch.

1000 Bit/s

2000 Bit/s

4000 Bit/s

8000 Bit/s

16000 Bit/s

24000 Bit/s

32000 Bit/s

V.24 asynch. (1 start bit, 1 stop bit, parity bit is possible)

300 Bit/s

600 Bit/s

1200 Bit/s

2400 Bit/s

4800 Bit/s

9600 Bit/s

19200 Bit/s

38400 Bit/s

1000 Bit/s

2000 Bit/s

4000 Bit/s

8000 Bit/s

16000 Bit/s

24000 Bit/s

32000 Bit/s

48000 Bit/s

64000 Bit/s

8 Boards

Assignment of the X3 plug

1. Assignment for V.24

2. Signal names on the backplane

3. female 25-pin Sub-D (ISO 2110)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 471

8 Boards

Assignment of the X4 plug

1. Assignment for X.21

2. Signal names on the backplane

3. female 15-pin Sub-D (ISO 4903)

4. 0 Ohm

8.7.26.7

MDF Connections

The connectors of the IMUX board are picked off with the corresponding cables on the adapter modules CA5B and fed to the MDF, terminal adapter or data terminal.

When using S64LI as the line interface, the cable with material number 29.9030.51xx is used, whereby xx represents the length of the cable in m (1 to 99).

The 15-pin Sub-D plug is connected to the X1 plug (line interface A) or X5 plug (line interface B) of the CA5B.

The open end of this cable is connected with 4 lines in the MDF (2 twisted pairs plus earth wire to ground).

Lines used:

Colours

YE/WH

GN/WH

Pin on the

Sub-D

4/3

6/5

Name

TDa/TDb

RDa/RDb

Function

Transmit Data

Receive Data

When using X64LI as the line interface, the cable with material number 27.5630.054x is used, whereby x represents the length of the cable in m: (x=1 for 5 m, x=2 for 20 m, x=3 for 50 m). This cable is connected directly to a TA of the network operator.

Pinning of the X1 and X5 plugs (Sub-D 15 male)

Pin

Name

Pin

Name

1 2

Gndb Ta

11

Rb

12

Ib

3

Ca

13

Sb

4

Ra

14

Xb

5

Ia

15

NC

6

Sa

7

Xa

8 9

Gnda Tb

10

Cb

472 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

The X3 plug comprises a 25-pin Sub-D female plug that serves the connection of an external data terminal with V.24 (synchronous/asynchronous) interface.

Pinning of the X3 plug

Pin

Name

2

TxD

3

RxD

5

CTS

6

DSR

7

GND

8

DCD

15

TxC2

17

RxC2

Rest

NC

The X4 plug comprises a 15-pin Sub-D female plug that serves the connection of an external data terminal with X.21 (synchronous) interface.

Pinning of the X4 plug

Pin

Name

Pin

Name

1 2

Gnd1 Ta

11

Rb

12

Ib

3

NC

13

Sb

4

Ra

14

NC

5

Ia

15

NC

6

Sa

7

NC

8

Gnd

9

Tb

10

NC

CA5B with plugs

8.7.27

IPN Intelligent Private Network


The board IPN module enables the operation of intelligent private networks between systems (CSI55, I33) by means of data transmission in the speech channel of a digital dial-up line.

Other features


Up to 15 IPN connections are possible per board.




The board must operate in conjunction with an ISDN exchange board.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 473

8 Boards

8.7.27.1

Function of Switches and LEDs

S3

S4

S5

S6

IPN board, front side

Switch Position

S1

S2

Left:

Right:

Left:

Left:

Left:

Left:



L2

L3 flashing:

1x

2x

3x

4x

474


Reset board

Board status display not possible at a terminal for testing purposes, as Sub-D plug is not equipped

Test

Further status display of the board is not possible at a terminal for testing purposes, as Sub-D plug is not equipped

Protocol output ’on’

No function

At least 1 connecting circuit is occupied

All connecting circuits are blocked

Operating status

No function defective DSPA test

Reserved

Checksum failure

X-RAM defect

Y-RAM defect

CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

9x

10x

11x

13x

14x

5x

6x

7x

8x off: on: off: on: flashing: off: on: flashing: off:

12x on: flashing: off:

SSI defect

Illegal instruction

Receive SSI with overflow

Transmit SSI with underrun

Stack overflow

Illegal host message received

Field 2 info has been received before

External RAM error

External ROM error

Operating status

No function

At least one occupancy is active (occupancy summation display)

Operating status

Reset status


Operating status

Logging switched on

See L3 function

Operating status

No function

Main program runtime > 125 µs

At least one channel

blocked


defective

Operating status

8.7.28

MAC Multi Access Circuit Board


The MAC board is required for the application of the I55 system as a dealer, special network, railway or master terminal system. It is the connecting circuit module for the digital terminals (e.g. TH93M) and peripheral devices (e.g. speech recording unit). It is also provides switching matrix and mixer functions for the application of special dealer functions.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 475

8 Boards

Overview

1. 2 MB Interface

2. 2 MB Module Loop

3. Databus

4. Power supply

5. UP0 Interface

6. MAC module with submodule EMAC

The board is always required if multi connections (monitoring, OLD, extra handset, speech recording) are to be used in conjunction with the dealer terminals. Without these multi connections, a dealer terminal may also be connected to the UIP or DUP0 board.

Features

8 UP0 interfaces for the connection of TH93x terminals.

2 x 2 MBit interfaces for the connection TH93Zx modules or speech recording devices.

Expansion of the module by means of the EMAC submodule provides an additional two 2 MBit interfaces for the connection of TH93Z modules and speech recording devices.

The 2 MBit interface of a MAC can only be assigned to the terminals and Z modules that are located on the same MAC.

476 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Other features








System requirements

The MAC board can only be used in the R1 rack in each module. It can be connected with any of the eight slots.

8.7.28.1

System Requirements

The MAC board can only be used in the R1 rack in each module. It can be connected with any of the eight slots.

8.7.28.2

CA6B for mains connection

Cable adapter for connecting UP0 and S2M connections to the MAC board.


• 8-pin WE plugs

CA6B with connections

1. 16-paired cable to external MDF, AO 1-8

2. 8-pin WE plug for the 2MBit interfaces

Ranges

UP0 Interface

The interface ranges are comparable to those of other UP0 interfaces within the CSI55:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 477

8 Boards

Line length

3.5 km

2.1 km

1.8 km

Earth cable Ø0.6 mm

Earth cable Ø0.4 mm

Installation cable Ø0.6 mm

2 MBit Interface

The interface range varies according to the cable attenuation.

When at 1 MHz, the wave attenuation must be no more than 6 dB.

Example 1:

The J-2Y (SST)Y 2x2x0.6 III Bd (28.9802.0151) installation cable has wave attenuation of 28 dB/1 km (2,8 dB/100 m) when at 1 MHz, resulting in a maximum range of 6 dB: 2,8 dB = 214 m.

Example 2:

The ECONET cable (category 5) has wave attenuation of 16 dB/ 1km (1,6 dB/100 m) when at 1 MHz, resulting from a maximum range of 6 dB : 1,6 dB = 375 m.

8.7.28.3

Connections

Connection of the 2 MBit Interface

Connection of 2 MBit interface using WE6-WE4 module connecting cord

1. Patch cable:

0.8 m 27.9798.0231

2.0 m 27.9798.0232

3.0 m 27.9798.0233

to

10 m 27.9798.0230

478 CSI55 LX 07/2006

2. ECONET Cable 4x2 27.9798.0016

3. 4-wire connecting cord WE4/WE6 (junction box 17.8761.1598)

4. MDF cable:

1m 29.9030.5301

2m 29.9030.5302

to

99m 29.9030.5399

5. Junction boxes

6. Z modules

7. Patch panel:

16-part 27.9798.2353

24-part 27.9798.2354

48-part 27.9798.2357

Connection of 2 MBit Interface, ECONET Standard

8 Boards

Connection of 2 MBit interface using WE8-WE4 module connecting cord in accordance with ECONET standard

1. Patch cable:

0.8 m 27.9798.0231

2.0 m 27.9798.0232

3.0 m 27.9798.0233

to

10 m 27.9798.0230

2. ECONET Cable 4x2 27.9798.0016

3. 4-wire connecting cord WE4/WE8 (junction box 17.8761.1598)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 479

8 Boards

4. MDF cable:

1m 29.9030.5301

2m 29.9030.5302

to

99m 29.9030.5399

5. Junction boxes

6. Z modules

7. Patch panel:

16-part 27.9798.2353

24-part 27.9798.2354

48-part 27.9798.2357

To be able to meet the requirements of the ECONET cabling standard (featuring standardized configuration of connections), the extension modules now come supplied with a different connecting cord. Further information about cabling can be found in the Installation Manual of the respective extension modules.

Connector Configuration

1. Old Connecting Cord (17.8761.1589)

2. New Connecting Cord (17.XXXX.XXXX)

3. Offering side

4. Z module side

This connecting cord is identifiable via the plug design (WE8 on the offering side).

480 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8.7.28.4

Board

MAC board, component side

8 Boards

CSI55 LX 07/2006 481

8 Boards

8.7.28.5


MAC board, front side

1. V.24 plug

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN

8

5

3

4

4

Switch Function

S1

S2

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Middle:

482

TXD

RXD

CTS

GND

+5V

Idle position

ICU data requires preparatory disabling after reset

Reset

Idle position

CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Left:

Right:

L11

L12

L13

L14

L15

L16

L17

L18

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

L19

L20

L21

L22


L1


Yet to be defined

Yet to be defined

Busy

Preparatory disabling execution

Normal

Reset

Downloading

Normal

Yet to be defined

Yet to be defined

UP0 port 1, layer 1 active








2 MB interface 1 active




DSP1

DSP1

DSP2

DSP2

CBI LED RXTX active

CBI LED FAIL or PCANCEL

8.7.28.6

Commissioning

When starting up the MAC, the individual stages of the initialization are indicated by means of the LEDs on the front panel. LEDs 1 - 16 provide the following signalling:

1.

2.

3.

RESET of module On pre init interrupt adresses

Init. of hardware register, end of module

RESET

4.

Initialization Interrupt Disable counter

5.

Network initialization

LED 5-12 On

LED 5 Off

LED 6 Off

UP0 7 LED Off LED 13-16 On

CSI55 LX 07/2006 483

8 Boards

a.

Initialization of switching modules (mtsl init) b.

Initialization of mixer module (musac init) c.

Initialization of mixer with level setting

(musac a init) d.

S2M Initialization (falc init) e.

Initialization of switching components between UP0 and highways (epic init)

6.

init interrupt addresses

7.

initialize heap

8.

Initialization of layer 2 timer

9.

V24 Initialization

LED 13 Off

LED 14 Off

LED 15 Off

LED 16 Off

LED 8 Off

LED 9 Off

LED 10 Off

LED 11 Off

All LEDs Off

The initialization of the MAC board is now complete.

Setting up the board using the ICU Configuration Editor

MAC board

X

X

Card

Gen.

S2M UP0

Field designation

Country setting

EMAC present

X

X

DSP present

Protocol version active Effect or function

Selection of country

EMAC expansion level inserted, yes/no

DSM expansion level inserted, yes/no

Specification of which protocol the terminal is using

The installation of the MAC board requires the presence of CF2x modules and W1D, W2D or B1D modules. Setting up the MAC also requires a MACS to be set up on slots 90 and 91.

Correlations

When using the DSPF board, the AUX-HYs can no longer be used. This means that the DSPF board can now only be used for a maximum of 60 announcement channels and for this purpose uses only the bus bar which is available for the module slot itself and the free slot located below.

MACS board

Card

Gen.

S2M UP0

Field designation active Effect or function

X

X

X

Country setting

EMAC present

DSP present

The pseudo module MACS

(MAC Slave) must always be set up on slot 90 and 91 if at least one MAC is present within the module.

The MACS enables the reservation of time slots, through which the call progress tones are connected to the MAC.

484 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

X

X Protocol version

8.7.28.7

Configuration Example for a Dealer Position on the MAC

20.11.97 07:51:19

Connecting circuit

Call number

Slot/HWA

AO-type

:520

:01-01-03-00

:DIPL -log. position no.: 73

General ADS data

Name

Accounting section

Log files

Overload priority


SPWKGR. COLISEE

DISA group

Dealer group

CN alloc. HKZ & tie

Category

Waiting field max.

Reserved

Connection memory

Service memory

AO state

Service block

:MAC position 00

:0000

:

Protocol

TN1R6

:2

Version

0

:1

:0

:0

:0

:

:-1

:

:10

:0

:2

:IN OPERAT.

:sv-free defective

OFF busy2

OFF error

OFF

Service data

Status

Dialling group

Traffic group

Switchover group

CSI55 LX 07/2006

TLP

Free

2

1

0

DAT

FREE

3

1

0

485

8 Boards

Code dialling group

LCR group

Dial retrieval

Backward rel.

B channel data

Allocation code

Deliberation code

0

0

DEACTIVE

DEACTIVE

: -

: -

Serves the signalling of extra handsets

Serves the signalling of the seized monitor channels, max. 16 channels

24

25

26

27

28

29

19

20

21

22

23

B ch no.

16

17

18

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

2

3

B ch no.

1

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Bund no.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Bund no.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Dir.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Dir.

-

486

0

0

DEACTIVE

DEACTIVE

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Acc.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Acc.

-

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

Status

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

Status

F

CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

30

Number of seizable channels: 30

-

8.7.28.8

MDF Connections

The cable adapter CA6B must be used for the integration of the MAC into the I55 modules.

MDF

Colours

via CA6B of the MAC

UP0

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BK


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1 free free free free free free free free

F

8.7.29

MULI Multi-line


The following description provides a basic outline of the board MULI. More detailed information about module features, installation and configuration can be found in a separate manual entitled MULI Multi-Line.

The MULI board is used for digital subscribers who have convenience features and who work together in a team or department.

The principle of the multi-line function is a pool containing call numbers that are assigned to the multi-line board. Each connected terminal is assigned call numbers which correspond to a B channel from this pool.

Features

Each subscriber has access to each line.

Access is gained directly via the keys of the terminal.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 487

8 Boards

Holding calls (for consultation).

Each subscriber may retrieve a call in hold status at his terminal and continue conversation.

Definition of individual multi-line group per subscriber.

Line display to the terminal

Own call number (Primary Directory Number –> PDN)

Call number of other subscribers (Secondary Directory Number –> SDN)

Virtual call number (Phantom Directory Number –> PhDN)

Other features







8.7.29.1

Functionality

MULI board

The MULI board serves to provide the multi-line functions.

There exist three different configuration options:

• Single multi-line:

488 CSI55 LX 07/2006

Board with 16 HWAs.

16 ports, each port with a maximum of two call numbers.

Multi-line pool with a maximum of 32 call numbers.

• Single multi-line:

Boards with 32 HWAs with a neighbouring slot for a replacement board.



• Twin multi-line: (for step 2)

Boards, each with 16 HWA



The entire process of signalling and message exchange is implemented by the MULI board.

8.7.29.2


8 Boards

MULI board, front side

LED Functions

CSI55 LX 07/2006 489

8 Boards

on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: on: flashing: off: on: flashing: off: on: on: on:

L1

L2

L14

L15

L16

L17

L18

L19

L20

L21

L22

L23

L24

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

L11

L12

L13

Busy

Preparatory disabling execution

Idle position

Reset

Download

Idle position

Yet to be defined

Yet to be defined

MULI Port 0 (16) layer active
















Yet to be defined

Yet to be defined

Yet to be defined

Yet to be defined boards.

The numbers in brackets apply to the multi-line group for step 2, which can be implemented using two


S1

S2

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Links

Middle:

Right:

Preparatory disabling call from ICU data after a reset

Idle position

Reset

Not used

Idle position

Not used

8.7.29.3

MDF Connections

490 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

MDF

Colours 16x2

via CA1B from

MULI (UP0)

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

A1/B1

A2/B2

A3/B3

A4/B4

A5/B5

A6/B6

A7/B7

A8/B8

A9/B9

A10/B10

A11/B11

A12/B12

A13/B13

A14/B14

A15/B15

A16/B16

8.7.30

OFA2B/OFAS Optical Fibre Adapter


The OFA2B Optical Fibre Adapter 2 B modules and OFAS Optical Fibre Adapter single mode are for connecting the optical waveguides when DT21 boards are used and the optical interfaces are employed.

The boards are used for various optical fibre types:

OFA2B

Graded-index fibres


29.9030.6101-6199*

CoreØµm

62,5

OFAS

Mono-mode fibres


29.9030.6201-6299*

CoreØµm

9,5

*The last two characters of the material number indicate the length of the pre-prepared cable in metres.

Cable lengths >99m are handled by the project division.

Common data for OFA2B and OFAS boards

Interfaces

Optical transmitters

Optical receivers

Number and form

1 SC socket

1 SC socket

Wavelength

1300nm

1300nm electrical values

Supply voltage 5V

CSI55 LX 07/2006 491

8 Boards

Supply current

Power consumption typical

Depending on the optical fibre used and cross-section area of the optical cable, different maximum cable lengths can be achieved:

Maximum distances

Type of fibre

Graded-index fibre

Mono mode

Optical fibre core Øµm

62,5

50

9,5 maximum length km

10

6,2

15

Basic construction of OFA2B and OFAS

250mA

1.25W

OFA2B and OFAS boards are designed for connecting to SC plugs. Neither board is thus compatible with the previous OFA1B board type, which was designed for mono-mode fibre and ST connectors.

8.7.31

S64LI Structured 64 KBit Line Interface


The S64LI is a submodule of the IMUX for connection to digital permanent connections. The maximum transmission rate is 64 kBit/s.

492 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

S64LI submodule on the IMUX board

1. S64LI submodule


3. IMUX board

Other features




Configurable for standard digital permanent connections.

PCM coupling and layer 1 function

Can be combined with the X64LI submodule on the IMUX board

8.7.32

SPCU Speech Compression Unit


SPCU is an submodule of the IMUX which aids compression of the bit rate from 64 kBit/s to 16 kBit/s on rapid signal processors with digital speech signals.

Implementation occurs here of the

CSI55 LX 07/2006 493

8 Boards

SPCU submodule on the IMUX board

1. SPCU Submodule


3. IMUX board

Other features




Transmission of FAX signals with 9,6 kBit/s

8.7.33

STSM S0/T0 Submodule


The submodule STSM is plugged into the ADM board. It provides four S0- or T0interface. It contains layer 1 and layer 2 HW ports.

Configurable interfaces

Subscriber connection (S0 powered); Layer 1 master (standard) or layer 1 slave (outlying extension)

Exchange line (T0, unpowered)

Exchange line simulation (T0, unpowered)

Permanent connection (T0, unpowered, master clock or clock slave, layer 2 master or slave)

494 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

STSM submodule, component side



Other features




Selection free configuration of each individual connection





8.7.34

UIP Universal Interface Platform


The UIP board is a basic board which accomodates up to 4 submodules.

Submodules

V24M with a V.24 interface.

CL2M for the reception and transmission of external synchronous clock signals.

CL2ME for receiving an external high-precision reference clock by means of a clock normal (TAREF).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 495

8 Boards

UIP board, component side

1. Slot 1

2. Slot 2

3. Slot 3

4. Slot 4


RXD

TXD

DTR

GND

DSR

RTS

CTS

(unsupported)

(unsupported)

(unsupported)

(unsupported)

The V24M submodule may only be inserted in the first two (upper) slots. The others are freely configurable.

When using the CL2ME in the first slot the cable adapter CA3B/T must be used for connecting the TAREF.

Other features


496


CSI55 LX 07/2006

Power demand +5V


500 mA




8.7.34.1


8 Boards

UIP board, front side


S1-S10 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

S2

S3 Right:

Middle:

Left:

Preparatory disabling of all connecting circuits

Normal mode

Reset board


Not used

Connecting circuit 1 preparatory disabling

Connecting circuit 1 release

No function

CSI55 LX 07/2006 497

8 Boards

S4

S5

S6

S7

S8

S9

S10


L1

L7

L2, L8

L3

L4, L5, L6,

L9, L10, L11


Not busy on: on: on:

Right:

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Middle:

Right:

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Middle:

Left:

Left:

Right:

Middle:

Left:

8.7.34.2

MDF Connections

MDF



No function



No function



No function



No function



No function



No function



No function



Board is not busy



Board in operation


Layer 1 of connecting circuit x active


498

UIP slot via

CA1B/3B from the

UIP with four CL2M via


UIP with four

CL2ME

CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

1

2

3

4

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R) free free

A2/B2 (T)

C2/D2 (R) free free

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R) free free

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R) free free

A1/B1 (R) free free free




MDF Connection via CA3B from UIP

The V24M submodules used on slots 1 and 2 can be connected directly to the Sub-D plug of the cable adapter.

In the case of mixed combination, slots 1 and 2 with CL2M, CL2ME and V24M, see table above.

8.7.35

UKSM UK0 Submodule


The UKSM submodule is inserted on the ADM board. It provides two UK0master interfaces. It contains layer

1 and layer 2 HW ports.

UKSM submodule, component side



CSI55 LX 07/2006 499

8 Boards

Other features




Interface description UK0interface; two-wire; transmission rate: 384 kbit/s

Line lengths

Coding 2B1Q

4,5 km installation cable (I-Y(ST)Y Ø0.6 mm

8 km outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø0.6 mm





8.7.36

UPSM UPN submodule


The UPSM submodule is inserted on the ADM board. It provides four UPNinterfaces for digital terminals or permanent connection.

UPSM submodule, component side



Other features




Interface description four UPN interfaces; two-wire

Transmission rate: 384 kbit/s


-48 V/max. 60 mA short-circuit-proof supply for increased power consumption, e.g. T3 terminals

Line lengths 1 km installation cable (I-Y(ST)Y Ø0.6 mm

2.8 km outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø0.6 mm



500 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards



Using a UPN-Repeater the range of the UPNinterface can be extended.

8.7.37

V24M Module


V24M is a sub-board for the UIP board. It comprises the layer 1 functions for a V.24 interface.

A maximum of two V24 modules can be inserted on slots 1 and 2 of the UIP board. This requires the connection of the connecting circuit line to be implemented via the CA3B board.

Other features

Application

Power demand +5V for further V.24 ports on the system

100 mA

8.7.38

X64LI kBit Line Interface


The S64LI is a submodule of the IMUX for connection to international digital leased lines.

X64LI submodule on the IMUX board

1. X64LI submodule


3. IMUX board

Other features

CSI55 LX 07/2006 501

8 Boards




Maximum transmission rate

64 kBit/s

Use only as permanent connection or leased line

PCM coupling and layer 1 function

Can be combined with the S64LI submodule on the IMUX board.

8.8

IP Telephoning Gateways

Board

Board/

Rack/

Backplane

IPGW → 502

VoIP → 513

Submodule

DSP → 506

S0 → 506

SOM-2 → 576


CAIB → 247

AEV24B → 230

8.8.1

IPGW Internet Protocol Gateway

This board is no longer available. It has been replaced by VOIP board, see VoIP Voice over IP Board → 513


Besides excellent conformance to the relevant standards, the IPGW board offers a variety of new features.

Features

High voice quality

Up to 30 parallel calls per device

All relevant speech codings (G.711, G.723.1, G.726, G.729A)

Full telephone convenience with single-digit and block dialling, local and remote dialling tone, local noise generation in call intervals.

Flexible voice routing options IP-IP, ISDN-ISDN and IP-ISDN (any to any dialling)

Flexible configuration options, connection as a subscriber or exchange to the PABX, ISDN network or by looping into the existing exchange line.

Remote maintenance capability

Preconfiguration option

Built-in gatekeeper

Interoperability with other VoIP products

It consists of a gateway with integrated gatekeeper and two S2M interfaces (QSIG or DSS1 protocol) for connection to the CSI55.

The gateway can be coupled with the CSI55 and an existing S2M exchange line via the two S2M interfaces.

An additional DT2 board is not required for the purpose. Calls from the public port are then transferred transparently through the gateway. Connection to the IP network is via an Ethernet interface.

502 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

The IP interface offers the H.323 Media Stream protocol for speech and enables IP telephony on up to 30 channels (equippment option: 10, 20, 30 channels). Either H.323 terminals or other gateways for IP networking of PABXs can be connected.

Support with tools (KAD, CAT, ISM) is not currently possible.

Until our own IP phone is available, the IP phone manufactured by Tiptel will be used as a terminal for direct connection to the IP world.

H.323 environment

1. IP network (IP Network H.323 LM)

2. IP phone (NTP IP phone; H.323)

3. H.323 terminal

8.8.1.1

Configurations

Exchange line

Own DT2 board for each IPGW

CSI55 LX 07/2006 503

8 Boards

1. Public network

Exchange line

IPGW looped in

1. Public network

504 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Permanent connection

Own DT2 board for each IPGW

Permanent connection

IPGW looped in

CSI55 LX 07/2006 505

8 Boards

Example of a connection

1. Public network

2. MDF

8.8.1.2

Submodules on IPGW

The IPGW board is equipped with a S0submodule and a Digital Signal Processor (DSP) submodule. Depending on the configuration of IP channels on the IPGW, the board is additionaly equipped with a maximum of two additional DSP submodules.

506 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Component side of the IPGW board

1. Slot for submodule S0

2. submodule slot for submodule DSP for the following equipment option: 10 channels (IP network connections)

3. submodule slot for submodule DSP for the following equipment option: 20 channels

4. submodule slot for submodule DSP for the following equipment option: 30 channels

5. free (currently not used)

6. LEDs and switches

7. PRI1

8. PRI2

9. S0

CSI55 LX 07/2006 507

8 Boards

10. 10/100 Base T

11. V.24 interface

12. V.24

8.8.1.3


IPGW board, front side


S1 center

S2 left

Middle position

Switch Function

S1

Left:

Middle:

Right:

* Reset duration

No function


Reset board *

508 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

greater

5s smaller

5s

Standard configuration and special reset mode

Normal operating status with activated DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server mode

S2

Left:

Middle:

Prepare the board for the connection to a hub

Configure the board for the connection to a PC


L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

5V on: off: on: PRI1

TE

S/T on:

ACT on: off:

Ready on:

Flashing 1 time, then 1s pause. The process starts once more from the beginning.

Flashing 2 times, aprox. 0.5s pauses, then

1s pause. The process starts once more from the beginning.


1s pause. The process starts once more from the beginning


1s pause. The process starts once more from the beginning

PRI2

NT

LINK on: off:

Speed on:


1s pause. The process starts once more from the beginning off: on: off:

5V present/available

5V not present/available

Layer 1 of transmission path is established


Ethernet receives or sends data

Idle state

Board in operation, configuration in order

DSP error

S0 error

S2M error

Enet error (Enet = Ethernet)

Uart error (Uart = V.24)

Board not ready


Ethernet connection is running

Ethernet connection is not running

100 Mbps

10 Mbps

Assignment of the V.24 interface (male DSub 9) on the front panel

Signal name Description DSub 9 pin

CSI55 LX 07/2006 509

8 Boards

TXD

RXD

RTS

CTS

DTR

DSR

GND

DCD

Transmit Data (send data)

Receive Data (reception data)

Request To Send (switch on the transmitter)

Clear To Send (readiness for sending)

Data Terminal Ready (terminal ready for operation)

Data Set Ready (operational readiness)

Data Carrier Detect (receive signal level)

The V.24 interface (console port) can be used for the first configuration of the IPGW.

Set the RS232 interface of your PC as follows:

Adjustments of the console port

Bits per second

Data bits

Parity

Stop bits

Protocol / flow control

9600

8

None

1

None

4

6

5

NC

7

8

3

2

8.8.1.4

MDF Connections

The CAIB cable adapter serves for the connection of the cable network.

CAIB cable adapter

1. Connection cable CAIB - MDF

510 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Cable adapter CAIB, component side

1. Cable 6x2 to the main distribution frame

2. RJ45 socket for the Ethernet connection

3. V.24 connection (free)


5. Fixation

Two cables are available for the connection to the main distributor:

• ext. connection cable IPGW, 10m: 49.9903.4483

• ext. connection cable IPGW, 40m: 49.9903.4485

Through these cables the:

• Exchange line or permanent connections (S2M)

• Service, synchronization (S0) are connected.

MDF

Colours 6x2

WH (white) / BN (brown)

GN (green) / YE (yellow)

GY (grey) / PK (pink)

BU (blue) / RD (red)

BK (black) / VT (violet)

GY PK (grey/pink) / RD BU

(red/blue)

IPWG

PRI1

PRI2

BRI

Cable Adapter CAIB

A1/B1 (TX+/TX-)

A2/B2 (RX+/RX-)

A1/B1 (TX+/TX-)

A2/B2 (RX+/RX-)

A1/B1 (TX+/TX-)

A2/B2 (RX+/RX-)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 511

8 Boards

PRI=Primary Rate Interface (S2M)

BRI=Basic Rate Interface (S0 /T0)

PRI1=TE

PRI2=NT

BRI=S0 (service, synchronization input)

8.8.1.5

Connection of the Ethernet Interface

The Ethernet connection located on thecable adapter is connected to the Ethernet 10/100 base T-connection using a CAt5 structure cable with RJ45 plug.

The total length of the connection to the switch must not exceed 100 m.

Seizure of the Ethernet connection (RJ45)

Signal name

TX+

TX-

RX+

RX-

Description

Transmit

Transmit

Receive

Receive

RJ45 pin

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

8.8.1.6

Administration

The board mentioned above cannot be managed in CSI55 and in the tools. In order to avoid mistakes when altering or retrofitting communication servers Integral 55 in the field due to the lack of tool administration to the greatest possible extent, please proceed as follows:

1.

• In the event of supply via KSPA, set up a ”T1CCS” as a pseudo-module (digital AO, country selection USA) in the KAD/CAT on the IPGW slot. The corresponding lines belonging to the DT2 board are to be labelled Fxx01 - Fxx30 and named VoIP line

• When retrofitting in the field, set up a ”T1CCS” as a pseudo-module (digital AO, country selection

USA) in the KAD/CAT on the IPGW slot. The corresponding lines belonging to the DT2 board are to be labelled

Fxx01 - Fxx30 and named VoIP line

2. The register the system with ZOLS or change with the ”Comment”: Please register in the customer data:

Attention! IPGW board on the T1CSS slot (pseudo-board)

8.8.1.7

Technical Data

Log files

Internet: IP, TCP, UDP, RTP, DHCP, TFTP, ICMP

512 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

Configuration:

ISDN:

Voice-over-IP:

Voice:

Special Features

Telnet, HTTP, Java

ETSI DSS1, Q.SIG

H.323, H.225, H.245, RTP, RTCP, RAS

Speech pause recognition (VAD)

Comfort noise generation (CNG), dynamic jitter buffer,

G.711 A-law

G.711 µ-law

G.723.1 5.3 and 6.3 kbps

G.729A

G0.165

”Overlapped” und ”non-overlapped sending”

Direct dialing-in (DDI)

Display caller and called number (CLI, CPN)

Generate dial tones

Integrated gatekeeper

Optional operation to external gatekeeper

(RAS protocol)

Optional looping in the TC system

Public exchange

Upgradable for a greater number of ports

8.8.1.8

Description of software functions

The enclosed descriptionHBIP400 refers to IP400. All procedures correspond with those of the IPGW board.

8.8.2

VOIP Voice over IP Board


For the VOIP board and all additional information for setup, dimensioning etc. you can find a detailed description under Notes concerning VoIP.

It is shown once again in the figure below.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 513

8 Boards

VOIP board, component side

1. Speech compression / packetizing

2. Echo cancellation

The basic board VOIP (material number: 49.9903.7976) has 6 slots for SOM-2 submodules, with two DSP chips each(Digital Signal Processing Small Outline Module 2, material number: 49.9903.7980) in order to increase the number of DSP chips used in the system. These DSP chips have two functions:

• Voice compression, in order to pack voice information from the highway into data packets and thus to compress the speech data when desired (from G.711 64 kbit/s to G.729A 8kbit/s)

• Echo cancellation for the voice connection from the IP terminal to the ISDN/analog terminals

The upper three slots (in the centre of the board) are used for voice compression and packetizing, while the lower three slots are used for echo cancellation.

Due to the very high cost of DSP chips, the number of SOM-2 submodules must be selected in accordance with the customer configuration (see calculation of the number of SOM-2 submodules).

514 CSI55 LX 07/2006

8 Boards

In addition, 4 DSP chips are soldered on the VoIP board. These are responsible for central functions such as announcements, mixers, and tone input, and support a fixed number of channels for voice compression and echo cancellation.

The VOIP board connection to the peripherals is done via the AEV24B cable adapter.

Other features

Application Integration of the CSI55 extensions into the existing IP-based data network environment of the customer (LAN, WAN, Corporate Network)

Power demand +5V 1800 mA additionally per SOM-2: 240 mA

Notes to VolP → 576

8.8.2.1


In the figure below the view of the front panel and the funktions of the switches and LEDs.

View of the front panel


S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:


CSI55 LX 07/2006



Reset


515

8 Boards

L1 on: flashing: off: on: L2 POWER

GOOD)

L3 (ETH Link) on:

L4 (ETH

10/100) on: flashing: L5 (ETH active)

L6 on: flashing:

L7

L8 off: on: on:

L9

L10 on: on:

Module is busy in terms of exchange functions (active layer

3 connection)


Board is not busy

All voltages (5V, 3.3V, DSP on-board VCC 1.8V and

PQUICC Vcore currently 2.5V) are within their permitted ranges of tolerance

Ethernet Link has been established

100Mbit transmission is in process (SPEED)

Activity on the Ethernet (transmitting and receiving ends)



Board in operation

Status LED 2/3

Status LED 2/2

Status LED 2/1

Status LED 2/0

516 CSI55 LX 07/2006

9 BS Confidata:

9 BS Confidata:

Operating System – Configuration Data from E050

The distribution of software components and / or tasks in the 9030 system among the single GCU controls is determined by the operating system configuration data. Like the 8030 system, each customer system is not separately configured, instead certain configurations are specified by means of package-formation, which each cover an area of the system. The slot allocation of the GCU is an exception, this occurs in the 9030 individually as per customer data.

From version E06 onwards, the OMSF task in the packages S2, I1...I4 is doubled (no primary function).

9.1

Packages

A configuration data package determines the operating system configuration data for a specific system extension. The packages are produced in the operating system development.

For the 9030 there are currently six packages.

• Package S1 for a single module

• package S2 for a twin-module and

• Packages I1,I2,I3 and I4 for various multi-module configurations.

9.2

GCU configuration

Each package defines the minimum and maximum number of GCUs in a system. The minimum number is dependent on the imperative functions (e.g. central switching functions), the maximum number is dependent on the GCUs defined in the package. The package defines which software (operating system/tasks) are loaded on each GCU.

Each GCU is assigned to a logical group number (LGN - logical group number) The LGN must be defined for a physical slot address on the module by TIP/PC-KAD. The LGNs, a function name (abbreviation of the control function, e.g. CSF) and a ”mandatory/optional” code are supplied into TIP/PC-KAD/CAT in a data file.

9.2.1

Package S1

For single modules

LGN mandatory/ optional

1 m

MSF1

MSF

CSF

LCF

MML

CSI55 LX 07/2006 517

9 BS Confidata:

PRST

CCC

AIC

O+M

CCU

ACT

TKOM

HOKO

FHS

9.2.1.1

Abbreviations

MML

MSF

PRST

UIP

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

TKOM

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’

CSF

CSF’

FHS

GCU

ICU

LCF

Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

Access Control Task

Automatic Information Call

Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU

Central Switching Functions

Standby CSF

File Handling System

Generic Control Unit

Interface Control Unit

Loading Central Function (IVL)

Man Machine Language (management)

Module Switching Functions (IVG)

Protocol stack


Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions

Standby OMSF

Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions

Operation and Maintenance Access Data

Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal

Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)

Server task (Hotel communication)

Server task (text communication)

9.2.2

Package S2

For twin-modules

LGN 1 2

518 CSI55 LX 07/2006

9 BS Confidata:

mandatory/ optional m

MSF1

MSF

CSF

LCF

MML

AIC

O+M

CCU

ACT

TKOM

HOKO

PRST

FHS m

MSF2

MSF

CSF’

CCC

CCU’

OMSF’

PRST

FHS

9.2.2.1

Abbreviations

PRST

UIP

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’

CSF

CSF’

FHS

GCU

ICU

LCF

MML

MSF


Access Control Task


Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU


Standby CSF







Protocol stack



Standby OMSF






CSI55 LX 07/2006 519

9 BS Confidata:

TKOM


9.2.3

Package I1

for systems with up to 20 boards (use of 5ML board in the IMTU). In the first 3 modules of this package, central and module-specific functions (CSF, LCF and MSF) are mixed.


1 m

2 m

3 o

4 o

5 o

6-20 o

MSF1 MSF2 MSF3 MSF4 MSF5 MSF6-20

MSF

LCF

CCC

MML

AIC

TKOM

HOKO

PRST

FHS

ACT

MSF

CSF

CCU

O+M

PRST

FHS

MSF

CSF’

CCU’

OMSF’

FHS

MSF

FHS

MFS

FHS

MSF

Remark:

If central functions are made available on separate GCU controls, it is possible to distribute these controls freely in the system 1 (slots are alloted by TIP or KAD/CAT), but no slots are possible in the IMTU module.

1 GCU slots must be situated under a fan within the framework of the slots defined by the

GCU control.

9.2.3.1

Abbreviations

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’

CSF

CSF’

FHS

GCU


Access Control Task


Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU


Standby CSF



520 CSI55 LX 07/2006

9 BS Confidata:

ICU

LCF

MML

MSF

PRST

UIP

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

TKOM





Protocol stack



Standby OMSF







9.2.4

I2 Package

for customers, who want to see central functions in the hardware, and for large systems due to load. 2 additional controls are made available for the central switching functions (CSF and CSF’).


81 m

82 m

1 m

2 o

3 o

4 o

5 o

6-32 o

LCFA CSFP MSF1 MSF2 MSF3 MSF4 MSF5 MSF6-

32

MSF MSF MSF MSF MFS MSF CFS

LCF

MML

AIC

ACT

O+M

CCU

TKOM

HOKO

PRST

FHS

CFS’

CCC

CCU’

OMSF’

PRST

FHS FHS FHS FHS

Remark:



GCU control.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 521

9 BS Confidata:

9.2.4.1

Abbreviations

PRST

UIP

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

TKOM

CSF

CSF’

FHS

GCU

ICU

LCF

MML

MSF

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’


Access Control Task


Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU


Standby CSF







Protocol stack



Standby OMSF







9.2.5

I3 Package

for customers, who want to see central functions in the hardware, and for large systems due to load. 2 additional controls are made available for the central switching functions (CSF and CSF’). Furthermore, the

LCF and CCC functions are evacuated.


81 m

82 o

91 m

92 m

1 m

2 o

3 o

4-32 o

CSFA CSFP LCFA CCC MSF1 MSF2 MSF3 MSF4-

32

CFS

CCU

CFS’

CCU’

MSF MSF MFS MSF LCF

MML

AIC

ACT

O+M

TKOM

HOKO

CCC

OSMF’

522 CSI55 LX 07/2006

9 BS Confidata:

FHS FHS

PRST

FHS

PRST

FHS FHS

Remark:



GCU control.

9.2.5.1

Abbreviations

FHS

GCU

ICU

LCF

MML

MSF

PRST

UIP

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’

CSF

CSF’

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

TKOM


Access Control Task


Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU


Standby CSF







Protocol stack



Standby OMSF







9.2.6

Package I4

for customers, who want to see central functions in the hardware, and for large systems due to load. 2 additional controls are made available for the central switching functions (CSF and CSF’), 2 controls for the

CSI55 LX 07/2006 523

9 BS Confidata:

CCU functions and 2 controls for the LCF and CCC functions. .


81 m

82 m

91 m

92 m

CSFA CSFP LCFA CCC

71 m

CCUA

72 o

CCUP

CFS CFS’ CCU CCU’

1 m

MSF1

MFS

2-32 o

MSF2-

32

MSF LCF

MML

AIC

ACT

O+M

TKOM

HOKO

CCC

OSMF’

PRST

FHS

PRST

FHS

PRST

FHS

PRST

FHS FHS

Remark:



GCU control.

9.2.6.1

Abbreviations

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’

CSF

CSF’

FHS

GCU

ICU

LCF

MML

MSF

PRST


Access Control Task


Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU


Standby CSF







Protocol stack

524 CSI55 LX 07/2006

9 BS Confidata:

UIP

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

TKOM



Standby OMSF







9.3

Interface Configuration

Each package also determines, among other things, the number and designation of hard disks and V.24

interfaces in the system. In this context, a distinction should be made between V.24 interfaces on GCU and

V.24 interfaces on UIP.

Each GCU is equipped with two V.24 interfaces, which are configured in the configuration data of the operating system. The interfaces are addressed via the device name. The device names are allocated to a certain interface by the physical device numbers (PDN = physical device number). The device names, PDN, the interface type (console, ACOM) and the physical parameters can be changed within the system by operating system configuration task.

Two V.24 interfaces can be connected to one UIP board. Configuration data and device names are preconfigured in each package for V.24 interfaces on UIP. The allocation between an interface and a device name is once more managed by PDN. The PDN must be allocated to an interface by ICU configuration data.

In each package there are currently 2 possible UIPs with V.24 in the system, each of which is partly operated by the LCF.

Each configuration package contains

• a default configuration for the devices on GCU (online devices)

• an alternative configuration for the devices on GCU (offline devices)

• a predefined configuration for the devices on UIP

The main console (CO-01) is normally not connected to the system. The main console and console 2 (CO-02) are configured on the same interface; when necessary, the main console is activated by a switch (only applies to LCFs).

The following must be taken into account concerning the use of the consoles by the text output task S01:

In view of the fact that the S01 issues an extremely sizeable volume of reports on the console, a LCF console should always be used for output. This means it is not necessary for these reports to be rerouted from the

S01 to the LCF via the CBus system, thus generating a longer processing time.

The following interfaces are currently defined in the operating system configuration data:

9.3.1

Single Modules S1

Single Module - Configuration Package S1

CSI55 LX 07/2006 525

9 BS Confidata:

1

2

3

173

173

173

173

173

171

171

173

173

173

173

173

183

184

173

181

182

173

LGN

173

173

173

Device name

CO-01

CO-02

CO-03

CO-04

CO-05

ZG-01

VC-01

HS-01

HS-02

TC-01-

01

TC-01-

02

TC-01-

03

TC-02-

01

TC-02-

02

TC-02-

03

TC-03-

01

TC-03-

02

TC-03-

03

ZG-02

VC-02

DC-01

29

30

31

32

14

16

17

28

33

34

35

36

13

25

38

Device number

1/2/3

PDN

101

4/5/6

7/8/9

19/20/

21

22/23/

24

12

102

103

105

106

104

700

700

700

700

108

301

302

700

700

700

700

700

109

10A

10B

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

2

2

OFF

2

2

ON

State

ON1

ON1

OFF

GCU

GCU

GCU

GCU

GCU

GCU

GCU

GCU

GCU

GCU

GCU

GCU

ICU

ICU

GCU

GCU/

ICU

GCU

GCU

GCU

ICU

ICU

GCU

-

-

-

-

-

-

ICZT

ICZT

DVZT/

DHZT

-

-

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZH/

DHZP

DVZH/

DHZP

-

Device driver

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

ICZT

ICZT

Harddisk

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

ACOM

ACOM

DCF77

Type Inter face

System console ASS2

Port A

Console ASS2

Port A

Console

Console

ASS2

Port B

Port 03

Port 23 Console

ACOM

ACOM

Harddisk

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

SCS0

SCS0

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

Port 03

Port 23

ASS2

Port B dependent on the ”System Console Connected” switch on the computer board (GCU) dependent on the ICU customer data

The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given values are only suggestions.

526 CSI55 LX 07/2006

9 BS Confidata:

9.3.1.1

Abbreviations

PRST

UIP

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

TKOM

CSF

CSF’

FHS

GCU

ICU

LCF

MML

MSF

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’


Access Control Task


Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU


Standby CSF







Protocol stack



Standby OMSF







9.3.2

Twin module S2

Twin-Module - Configuration Package S2

LGN Device name

CO-01 173

Device number

1/2/3

PDN

101

State

ON1

CO-02

CO-03

173

173

4/5/6

7/8/9

102

103

ON1

ON

CO-04

CO-05

ZG-01

181

182

173

19/20/

21

22/23/

24

12

105

106

104

2

2

OFF

GCU/

ICU

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

ICU

ICU

GCU1

Device driver

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

ICZT

ICZT

DVZA/

DHZA

Type Inter face

System console ASS2

Port A

Console ASS2

Port A

Console

Console

Console

ACOM

ASS2

Port B

2

2

ASS2

Port B

CSI55 LX 07/2006 527

9 BS Confidata:

Device name

VC-01

HS-01

HS-02

TC-01-

01

TC-01-

02

TC-01-

03

TC-02-

01

TC-02-

02

TC-02-

03

TC-03-

01

TC-03-

02

TC-03-

03

ZG-02

VC-02

DC-01

CO-12

CO-13

ZG-11

VC-11

ZG-12

VC-12

173

173

173

LGN

173

171

171

176

176

176

176

176

176

173

173

173

173

173

173

173

173

173

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

35

36

13

25

38

31

32

33

34

28

29

30

Device number

14

PDN

108

16

17

301

302

700

700

700

102

103

104

108

109

10A

700

700

109

10A

10B

700

700

700

700

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

2

2

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

State

OFF

ON

OFF

-

-

-

-

-

-

ICZT

ICZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

-

-

Device driver

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZH/

DHZP

DVZH/

DHZP

-

Type

ACOM

Harddisk

Harddisk

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

ACOM

ACOM

DCF77

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

GCU2

GCU2

GCU2

GCU2

GCU2

GCU2

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

ICU

ICU

GCU1

GCU/

ICU

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

2

2

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

Inter face

ASS2

Port B

SCS0

SCS0

S0

S0

S0

1

2

3

528 dependent on the ”System Console Connected” switch on the computer board (GCU) dependent on the ICU customer data


CSI55 LX 07/2006

9 BS Confidata:

9.3.2.1

Abbreviations

PRST

UIP

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

TKOM

CSF

CSF’

FHS

GCU

ICU

LCF

MML

MSF

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’


Access Control Task


Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU


Standby CSF







Protocol stack



Standby OMSF







9.3.3

Multi-Module I1

Multi-Module (up to 20 Modules) - Configuration Package I1

LGN State Device name

CO-01 173

Device number

1/2/3

PDN

101 ON1

GCU/

ICU

GCU1

CO-02

CO-03

173

173

4/5/6

7/8/9

102

103

ON1

OFF

GCU1

GCU1

CO-04

CO-05

ZG-01

181

182

173

19/20/

21

22/23/

24

12

105

106

104

2

2

ON

ICU

ICU

GCU1

Device driver

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

ICZT

ICZT

DVZA/

DHZA

Type Inter face

System console ASS2

Port A

Console ASS2

Port A

Console

Console

ASS2

Port B

2

Console

ACOM

2

ASS2

Port B

CSI55 LX 07/2006 529

9 BS Confidata:

Device name

VC-01

HS-01

HS-02

TC-01-

01

TC-01-

02

TC-01-

03

TC-02-

01

TC-02-

02

TC-02-

03

TC-03-

01

TC-03-

02

TC-03-

03

ZG-02

VC-02

DC-01

CO-12

CO-13

ZG-11

VC-11

ZG-12

VC-12

173

173

173

LGN

173

171

171

176

176

176

176

176

176

173

173

183

184

173

173

173

173

173

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

35

36

13

25

38

31

32

33

34

28

29

30

Device number

14

PDN

108

16

17

301

302

700

700

700

102

103

104

108

109

10A

700

700

109

10A

10B

700

700

700

700

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

2

2

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

State

OFF

ON

OFF

-

-

-

-

-

-

ICZT

ICZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

-

-

Device driver

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZH/

DHZP

DVZH/

DHZP

-

Type

ACOM

Harddisk

Harddisk

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

ACOM

ACOM

DCF77

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

GCU2

GCU2

GCU2

GCU2

GCU2

GCU2

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

ICU

ICU

GCU1

GCU/

ICU

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

2

2

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

Inter face

ASS2

Port B

SCS0

SCS0

S0

S0

S0

1

2

3



CSI55 LX 07/2006

9 BS Confidata:

9.3.3.1

Abbreviations

PRST

UIP

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

TKOM

CSF

CSF’

FHS

GCU

ICU

LCF

MML

MSF

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’


Access Control Task


Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU


Standby CSF







Protocol stack



Standby OMSF







9.3.4

Multi-Module I1 (continued)

Multi-Module (up to 20 Modules) - Configuration Package I1 ... continued


CO-22

CO-23

ZG-21

VC-21

ZG-22

VC-22

177

177

177

177

177

177

Device number

4/5/6

PDN

102

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

103

104

108

109

10A

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

GCU/

ICU

GCU3

GCU3

GCU3

GCU3

GCU3

GCU3

Device driver

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

Type

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

Interface

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

CSI55 LX 07/2006 531

9 BS Confidata:

179

179

179

179

179

179

178

178

178

LGN

178

178

178

CO-42

CO-43

ZG-41

VC-41

ZG-42

VC-42

Device name

CO-32

CO-33

ZG-31

VC-31

ZG-32

VC-32

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

14

13

25

Device number

4/5/6

PDN

102

7/8/9

12

103

104

108

109

10A

102

103

104

108

109

10A

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

State

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

GCU5

GCU5

GCU5

GCU5

GCU5

GCU5

GCU/

ICU

GCU4

GCU4

GCU4

GCU4

GCU4

GCU4

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

Type

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

Device driver

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

1

2



9.3.4.1

Abbreviations

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’

CSF

CSF’

FHS

GCU


Access Control Task


Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU


Standby CSF



532 CSI55 LX 07/2006

Interface

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

9 BS Confidata:

ICU

LCF

MML

MSF

PRST

UIP

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

TKOM





Protocol stack



Standby OMSF







9.3.5

Multi-Modules I2



CO-01

CO-02

CO-03

CO-04

173

173

173

181

Device number

1/2/3

PDN

101

4/5/6

7/8/9

102

103

105

ON1

ON1

OFF

2

GCU/

ICU

Device driver

GCU81 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU81 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU81 DVZT/

DHZT

ICU ICZT

CO-05

ZG-01

182

173

19/20/

21

22/23/

24

12

106

104

2

ON

ICU ICZT

VC-01

HS-01

HS-02

173

171

171

173

14

16

17

28

108

301

302

700

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

GCU81 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU81 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU81 DVZH/

DHZP

GCU81 DVZH/

DHZP

GCU81 TC-01-

01

TC-01-

02

TC-01-

03

TC-02-

01

173

173

173

29

30

31

700

700

700

ON

ON

ON

GCU81

GCU81

GCU81

-

-

-

Type Interface

System console ASS2

Port A

Console ASS2

Port A

Console

Console

ASS2

Port B

2

Console

ACOM

ACOM

Harddisk

Harddisk

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

S01 output to

ISM

S0

S0

S0

2

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

SCS0

SCS0

S0

CSI55 LX 07/2006 533

9 BS Confidata:

Device name

TC-02-

02

TC-02-

03

TC-03-

01

TC-03-

02

TC-03-

03

ZG-02

VC-02

DC-01

CO-12

CO-13

ZG-11

LGN

173

173

173

173

173

183

184

173

174

174

174

VC-11

ZG-12

VC-12

174

174

174

14

13

25

35

36

13

25

38

Device number

32

PDN

700

33

34

700

700

700

700

109

10A

10B

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

102

103

104

108

109

10A

State

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

2

2

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

GCU/

ICU

GCU81 -

Device driver

GCU81 -

GCU81 -

GCU81 -

GCU81 -

ICU

ICU

ICZT

ICZT

GCU81 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU82 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU82 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU82 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU82 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU82 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU82 DVZA/

DHZA

Type

Transparent console

Transparent console

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

ACOM

ACOM

DCF77

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

Interface

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

2

2

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

1

2



9.3.5.1

Abbreviations

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’

CSF

CSF’


Access Control Task


Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU


Standby CSF

534 CSI55 LX 07/2006

9 BS Confidata:

FHS

GCU

ICU

LCF

MML

MSF

PRST

UIP

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

TKOM







Protocol stack



Standby OMSF







9.3.6



Device name

CO-22

CO-23

ZG-21

VC-21

ZG-22

VC-22

CO-32

CO-33

ZG-31

VC-31

ZG-32

VC-32

LGN

177

177

177

177

177

177

178

178

178

178

178

178

Device number

4/5/6

PDN

102

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

103

104

108

109

10A

102

103

104

108

109

10A

State

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

GCU/

ICU

GCU3

GCU3

GCU3

GCU3

GCU3

GCU3

GCU4

GCU4

GCU4

GCU4

GCU4

GCU4

Device driver

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

Type

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

Interface

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

CSI55 LX 07/2006 535

9 BS Confidata:

Device name

CO-42

CO-43

ZG-41

VC-41

ZG-42

VC-42

LGN

179

179

179

179

179

179

14

13

25

Device number

4/5/6

PDN

102

7/8/9

12

103

104

108

109

10A

State

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

GCU/

ICU

GCU5

GCU5

GCU5

GCU5

GCU5

GCU5

Device driver

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

Type

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

1

2



9.3.6.1

Abbreviations

ICU

LCF

MML

MSF

PRST

UIP

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’

CSF

CSF’

FHS

GCU


Access Control Task


Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU


Standby CSF







Protocol stack



Standby OMSF




536 CSI55 LX 07/2006

Interface

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

9 BS Confidata:

O+M

HOKO

TKOM




9.3.7


TC-01-

01

TC-01-

02

TC-01-

03

TC-02-

01

TC-02-

02

TC-02-

03

TC-03-

01

TC-03-

02

TC-03-

03

ZG-02

VC-02



CO-01

CO-02

CO-03

CO-04

173

173

173

181

Device number

1/2/3

PDN

101

4/5/6

7/8/9

102

103

105

ON1

ON1

OFF

2

GCU/

ICU

Device driver

GCU91 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU91 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU91 DVZT/

DHZT

ICU ICZT

CO-05

ZG-01

182

173

19/20/

21

22/23/

24

12

106

104

2

OFF

ICU ICZT

VC-01

HS-01

HS-02

173

171

171

173

14

16

17

28

108

301

302

700

ON

ON

OFF

ON

GCU91 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU91 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU91 DVZH/

DHZP

GCU91 DVZH/

DHZP

GCU91 -

173

173

173

173

173

173

173

173

183

184

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

13

25

700

700

700

700

700

700

700

700

109

10A

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

2

2

GCU91

GCU91

GCU91

GCU91

GCU91

GCU91

GCU91

GCU91

ICU

ICU

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ICZT

ICZT

Harddisk

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

ACOM

ACOM

Type Interface

System console ASS2

Port A

Console ASS2

Port A

Console

Console

ASS2

Port B

2

Console

ACOM

ACOM

Harddisk

2

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

SCS0

S0

S0

2

2

S0

S0

S0

S0

SCS0

S0

S0

S0

CSI55 LX 07/2006 537

9 BS Confidata:

Device name

DC-01

CO-12

CO-13

ZG-11

VC-11

ZG-12

VC-12

LGN

174

174

174

173

174

174

174 12

14

13

25

Device number

38

PDN

10B

4/5/6

7/8/9

102

103

104

108

109

10A

State

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

GCU/

ICU

Device driver

GCU91 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU92 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU92 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU92 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU92 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU92 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU92 DVZA/

DHZA

Type

DCF77

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

1

2



9.3.7.1

Abbreviations

ICU

LCF

MML

MSF

PRST

UIP

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’

CSF

CSF’

FHS

GCU


Access Control Task


Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU


Standby CSF







Protocol stack



Standby OMSF


538 CSI55 LX 07/2006

Interface

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

9 BS Confidata:

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

TKOM






9.3.8




CO-22

CO-23

ZG-21

VC-21

ZG-22

VC-22

CO-32

CO-33

ZG-31

VC-31

ZG-32

VC-32

CO-42

CO-43

ZG-41

VC-41

ZG-42

VC-42

177

177

177

177

177

177

178

178

178

178

178

178

179

179

179

179

179

179

Device number

4/5/6

PDN

102

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

13

25

103

104

108

109

10A

102

103

104

108

109

10A

102

103

104

108

109

10A

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

GCU/

ICU

Device driver

GCU81 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU81 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU81 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU81 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU81 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU81 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU82 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU82 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU82 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU82 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU82 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU82 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

Type

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

Interface

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

CSI55 LX 07/2006 539

9 BS Confidata:

1

2



9.3.8.1

Abbreviations

PRST

UIP

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

TKOM

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’

CSF

CSF’

FHS

GCU

ICU

LCF

MML

MSF


Access Control Task


Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU


Standby CSF







Protocol stack



Standby OMSF







9.3.9




CO-01

CO-02

173

173

Device number

1/2/3

PDN

101

4/5/6 102

ON1

ON1

GCU/

ICU

Device driver

GCU91 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU91 DVZT/

DHZT

Type Interface

System console ASS2

Port A

Console ASS2

Port A

540 CSI55 LX 07/2006

9 BS Confidata:

174

174

174

174

173

173

183

184

173

173

173

173

173

171

173

173

173

173

173

171

LGN

173

181

182

174

HS-02

TC-01-

01

TC-01-

02

TC-01-

03

TC-02-

01

TC-02-

02

TC-02-

03

TC-03-

01

TC-03-

02

TC-03-

03

ZG-02

VC-02

DC-01

CO-12

CO-13

ZG-11

VC-11

Device name

CO-03

CO-04

CO-05

ZG-01

VC-01

HS-01

ZG-12

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

35

36

13

25

38

31

32

33

34

17

28

29

30

Device number

7/8/9

PDN

103

19/20/

21

22/23/

24

12

105

106

104

108 14

16 301

13 109

102

103

104

108

700

700

109

10A

10B

700

700

700

700

302

700

700

700

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

2

2

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

2

2

State

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

Type

Console

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

Harddisk

Harddisk

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

S01 output to

ISM

Transparent console

Transparent console

ACOM

ACOM

DCF77

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

ICU

ICU

ICZT

ICZT

GCU91 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU92 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU92 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU92 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU92 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU92 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU/

ICU

Device driver

GCU91 DVZT/

DHZT

ICU ICZT

ICU ICZT

GCU91 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU91 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU91 DVZH/

DHZP

GCU91 DVZH/

DHZP

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

GCU91 -

S0

S0

S0

S0

SCS0

S0

S0

S0

S0

S0

2

2

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

Interface

ASS2

Port B

2

2

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

SCS0

CSI55 LX 07/2006 541

9 BS Confidata:

Device name

VC-12

LGN

174

Device number

25

PDN

10A

State

OFF

GCU/

ICU

Device driver

GCU92 DVZA/

DHZA

Type

ACOM

Interface

ASS2

Port A

1

2



9.3.9.1

Abbreviations

GCU

ICU

LCF

MML

MSF

PRST

UIP

OMSF

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’

CSF

CSF’

FHS

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

TKOM


Access Control Task


Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU


Standby CSF







Protocol stack



Standby OMSF







9.3.10


Mult-Module (up to 32 Modules) - Configuration Package I2 ... continued

542 CSI55 LX 07/2006

9 BS Confidata:

178

178

179

179

178

178

178

178

179

179

179

179

177

177

177

LGN

177

177

177

CO-32

CO-33

ZG-31

VC-31

ZG-32

VC-32

CO-42

CO-43

ZG-41

VC-41

ZG-42

VC-42

Device name

CO-22

CO-23

ZG-21

VC-21

ZG-22

VC-22

13

25

4/5/6

7/8/9

4/5/6

7/8/9

12

14

12

14

13

25

14

13

25

Device number

4/5/6

PDN

102

7/8/9

12

103

104

108

109

10A

109

10A

102

103

102

103

104

108

104

108

109

10A

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

State

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

Type

Console

Console

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

ACOM

GCU/

ICU

Device driver

GCU81 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU81 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU81 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU81 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU81 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU81 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU82 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU82 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU82 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU82 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU82 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU82 DVZA/

DHZA

GCU1 DVZT/

DHZT

GCU1

GCU1

DVZT/

DHZT

DVZA/

DHZA

GCU1

GCU1

GCU1

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

DVZA/

DHZA

Interface

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port B

ASS2

Port A

ASS2

Port A

1

2



For consoles (CO-xx), three devices have been mapped onto each interface:

• CO-xx-1 Fault output level

CSI55 LX 07/2006 543

9 BS Confidata:

• CO-xx-2 Control level (for prologue)

• CO-xx-3 Input/Output level (for dialogue)

MSF

PRST

UIP

OMSF

OMSF’

OMCF

OMAD

OMBT

O+M

HOKO

TKOM

ACOM

ACT

AIC

CCC

CCU

CCU’

CSF

CSF’

FHS

GCU

ICU

LCF

MML

9.3.10.1

Abbreviations


Access Control Task


Central Call Charge

CSTA Control Unit

Standby CCU


Standby CSF







Protocol stack



Standby OMSF







544 CSI55 LX 07/2006

10 Cable network


10.1

Connections from CSI

The connections of the connecting circuit boards and test connections are conducted through prefabricated cables in

• Main distributor

• Network Termination

• Service panel

10.1.1

Main Distribution Frame or Network Termination

The cables running from the cable adapters to the main distributor can be supplied in two variants:

• Open end on the main distributor frame

• With champ connector for the patch panel

Cable with open end

Connect the sheath wires of the connecting cables with the open end to the ground clamps.

Cable for patch panels

The following patch panel variants can be mounted in the cabinets:

Patch panel 24 part (3x8 WE,

4-wire)

Material number: 4.999.046.814

CSI55 LX 07/2006 545


5

6

3

4

7

1

2

Champ-PIN

WE-PIN

8

1. Champ 1

2. Champ 2

3. Champ 3

4. WE1

WE 1

2

1

26

27

WE 2

4

3

28

29

WE 3 WE 4

6

5

30

31

8

7

32

33

WE 5 WE 6 WE 7

10

9

34

35

12

11

36

37

14

13

38

39

WE 8

16

15

40

41

This patch panel is designed for the four-wire connection. These may be the connections for the following boards:

ADM → 551

DECT21 → 552

DS02/3 → 553

DT0 → 553

UIP → 554

Patch panel 48 ports (3x16 WE,

2-wire)

Material number: 4.999.046.813

546 CSI55 LX 07/2006


3

4

1

2

5

6

7

8

Champ-PIN

WE-PIN WE

1

WE

2

WE

3

WE

4

WE

5

WE

6

WE

7

WE

8

WE

9

WE

10

WE

11

WE

12

WE

13

WE

14

WE

15

WE

16

1

26

2

27

3

28

4

29

5

30

6

31

7

32

8

33

9

34

10

35

11

36

12

37

13

38

14

39

15

40

16

41

1. Champ 1

2. Champ 2

3. Champ 3

4. WE1

5. WE2

This patch panel is designed for the two-wire connection. These may be the connections for the following boards:

ADM → 551

ASC2 → 554

ASC21 → 550

ASCEU → 555

ATA → 556

ATA2 → 556

ATB → 557

ATC → 557

ATLC → 558

DDID → 561

JPAT → 560

DUP03 → 548

DUPN → 548

MAC → 549

MULI → 549

UIP → 554

CSI55 LX 07/2006 547


Take note that if appropriate you may have to use two cables for each connecting circuit board.

For the service the

Service patch panel → 562 is available.

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

10.1.1.1

MDF connections of DUP03

Colours 16x2

MDF

Patch panel for the two-wire connection

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

10.1.1.2

MDF connections DUPN

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

Material number: 49.9904.8477

A1/B1

A2/B2

A3/B3

A4/B4

A5/B5

A6/B6

A7/B7

A8/B8

via CA1B from the DUP03

A9/b9

A10/B10

A11/B11

A12/B12

A13/B13

A14/B14

A15/B15

A16/B16

via CA2B from DUPN

Cable 1

A1/B1

A2/B2

A3/B3

A4/B4

Cable 2

A1/B17

A18/B18

A19/B19

A20/B20

548 CSI55 LX 07/2006


WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

A5/B5

A6/B5

A7/B7

A8/B8

A9/B9

A10/B10

A11/B11

A12/B12

A13/B13

A14/B14

A15/B15

A16/B16

10.1.1.3

MDF connections MAC

The cable adapter CA6B must be used for the integration of the MAC into the I55 modules.

MDF

Colours

via CA6B of the MAC

UP0

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BK

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 15

WE 16

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1

A1/B1 free free free free free free free free

A21/B21

A22/B22

A23/B23

A24/B24

A25/B25

A26/B26

A27/B27

A28/B28

A29/B29

A30/B30

A31/B31

A32/B32

10.1.1.4

MDF connections of MULI

MDF via CA1B from

MULI (UP0)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 549


Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

A1/B1

A2/B2

A3/B3

A4/B4

A5/B5

A6/B6

A7/B7

A8/B8

A9/B9

A10/B10

A11/B11

A12/B12

A13/B13

A14/B14

A15/B15

A16/B16

10.1.1.5

MDF connections of ASC21

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

MDF

Colours 16x2

Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB for

ASC21

Cable 2 Patch panel for two-wire connection

Cable 1

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15 a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 a9/b9 a10/b10 a11/b11 a12/b12 a13/b13 a14/b14 a15/b15 a17/b17 a18/b18 a19/b19 a20/b20 a21/b21 a22/b22 a23/b23 a24/b24 a25/b25 a26/b26 a27/b27 a28/b28 a29/b29 a30/b30 a31/b31

550 CSI55 LX 07/2006


WH/BU WE 16 a16/b16 a32/b32

10.1.1.6

MDF connections of ADM

MDF, Cable 1


RD/BU WE 1


WE 1

WH/YE

WH/GN

WE 2

WE 3 WE 2

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 3

WE 4

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 5

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

1st slot

2nd slot

ADM with

STSM

A6/B6

(T)

C6/D6

(R)

A7/B7

(T)

C7/D7

(R)

A8/B8

(T)

C8/D8

(R)

A3/B3

(T)

C3/D3

(R)

A4/B4

(T)

C4/D4

(R)

A1/B1

(T)

C1/D1

(R)

A2/B2

(T)

C2/D2

(R)

A5/B5

(T)

C5/D5

(R)

A6/B6 free

A7/B7 free

A8/B8 free

via CA2B from

ADM with

UPSM

ADM with

UKSM

A1/B1 free

A1/B1 free

A2/B2 free

A3/B3 free

A2/B2 free free free

A4/B4 free

A5/B5 free free free

A3/B3 free


ADM with

ABSM/

ABSM1 a1/b1 free a2/b2 free a3/b3 free a4/b4 free a5/b5 free a6/b6 free a7/b7 free a8/b8 free

MDF Cable 2 via CA2B from

CSI55 LX 07/2006 551



RD/BU WE 1

WH/YE WE 2

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

ADM with

STSM

3rd slot

4th slot

A9/B9

(T)

C9/D9

(R)

A10/

B10 (T)

C10/

D10 (R)

A11/

B11 (T)

C11/

D11 (R)

A12/

B12 (T)

C12/

D12 (R)

A13/

B13 (T)

C13/

D13 (R)

A14/

B14 (T)

C14/

D14 (R)

A15/

B15 (T)

C15/

D15 (R)

A16/

B16 (T)

C16/

D16 (R)

ADM with

UPSM

A9/B9 free

A15/

B15 free

A16/

B16 free

A13/

B13 free

A14/

B14 free

A10/

B10 free

A11/

B11 free

A12/

B12 free

ADM with

UKSM

A5/B5 free

ADM with

ABSM/

ABSM1 a9/b9 free



A7/B7 free a14/b14 free a15/b15 free a16/b16 free a10/b10 free a11/b11 free a12/b12 free a13/b13 free

10.1.1.7

MDF connections of DECT21

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN


WE 1

WE 2

via CA1B from the DECT21

1st Station

2nd Station

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

552 CSI55 LX 07/2006


WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

10.1.1.8

MDF connections of DS02

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

3rd Station

4th Station

5th Station

6th Station

7th station

8th Station

10.1.1.9

MDF connections of DT0

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

MDF


WE 1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2

A1/B1

A2/B2


Cable 1 Cable 2

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

A2/B2 (T)

C2/D2 (R)

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R)

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R)

A5/B5 (T)

C5/D5 (R)

A6/B6 (T)

C6/D6 (R)

A7/B7 (T)

C7/D7 (R)

A8/B8 (T)

C8/D8 (R)

A9/B9 (T)

C9/D9 (R)

A10/B10 (T)

C10/D10 (R)

A11/B11 (T)

C11/D11 (R)

A12/B12 (T)

C12/D12 (R)

A13/B13 (T)

C13/D13 (R)

A14/B14 (T)

C14/D14 (R)

A15/B15 (T)

C15/D15 (R)

A16/B16 (T)

C16/D16 (R)

via CA1x from the DT0

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 553


WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

10.1.1.10

MDF connections of UIP

MDF

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

A2/B2 (T)

C2/D2 (R)

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R)

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R)

A5/B5 (T)

C6/D5 (R)

A6/B6 (T)

C6/D6 (R)

A7/B7 (T)

C7/D7 (R)

A8/B8 (T)

C8/D8 (R)

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

UIP slot

1

2

3

4

via


UIP with four CL2M via


UIP with four

CL2ME

A1/B1 (T)

C1/D1 (R) free free

A2/B2 (T)

C2/D2 (R) free free

A3/B3 (T)

C3/D3 (R) free free

A4/B4 (T)

C4/D4 (R) free free





MDF Connection via CA3B from UIP

The V24M submodules used on slots 1 and 2 can be connected directly to the Sub-D plug of the cable adapter.

In the case of mixed combination, slots 1 and 2 with CL2M, CL2ME and V24M, see table above.

554 CSI55 LX 07/2006

10.1.1.11

MDF connections of ASC2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF

Colours 16x2

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13


Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB for ASC2

Cable 1 Cable 2

WE 1

WE 2 a1/b1 a2/b2 a17/b17 a18/b18

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a19/b19 a20/b20 a21/b21

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 a9/b9 a10/b10 a11/b11 a12/b12 a13/b13 a14/b14 a15/b15 a16/b16 a22/b22 a23/b23 a24/b24 a25/b25 a26/b26 a27/b27 a28/b28 a29/b29 a30/b30 a31/b31 a32/b32

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

10.1.1.12

MDF connections of ASCxx

MDF

Colours 16x2

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

Cable Adapter


a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 a9/b9 a10/b10 a11/b11 a12/b12 a13/b13 a14/b14

CSI55 LX 07/2006


555


WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 15

WE 16 a15/b15 a16/b16

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

10.1.1.13

MDF connections from ATA

MDF


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter

CA1B for ATA

a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 free free free free free a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 free free free

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

10.1.1.14

MDF connections from ATA2

MDF


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

Cable Adapter

CA1B from ATA2

a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 free free free free

556 CSI55 LX 07/2006

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16 free free free free

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

10.1.1.15

MDF connections from ATB


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter

CA1B from ATB

free free free free free free free a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 free

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

10.1.1.16

MDF connections from ATC

MDF


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

Cable Adapter

CA1B from ATC

a1/b1 a2/b2 a3/b3 a4/b4 a5/b5 a6/b6 a7/b7 a8/b8 free free free

CSI55 LX 07/2006


557


RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16 free free free free free

10.1.1.17

MDF connections from ATLC

Main distributor

If necessary, connect the sheath wires of the connecting cable (open end and WP plug) with the ground clamps.

Connect the connectors of the connecting cable from the I55 with the line network (wiring blocks).

Mark the cable at both ends using the supplied labels.

Connections from the ATLC

Variants




Port

8 (1 per line)

8 (1 per line)

8 (1 per line)

Interfaces/procedures

2-wire speech path,

E+M signalling

4-wire speech path,

E+M signalling

4-wire speech path,

E+M and S3an/S3absignalling

Connections a/b

Sin/Sout a/b

Ka/Kb

Sin/Sout a/b

Ka/Kb

Sin/Sout

S3in/S3out

ATLC with SSSM submodules

ATLC with ACSM submodules

ATLC with ALSM/ALSMF submodules or ALSMH

ATLC with PLSM submodules

8 (1 per SSSM)

8 (1 per ACSM)

8 (1 per

ALSM/ALSMF)

(1 per ALSMH)

8 (1 per PLSM) a/b earth

50 Hz alternating current

Special facility (e.g. speech memory)

Analog DID Hong Kong

Special facility (e.g. door handsfree device) a/b a/b a/b a/b a/b c/d e/f

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC board without submodules

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

MDF


WE 1

WE 2


Cable 1 Cable 2

1a/1b

1Ka/1Kb

1Sin/1Sout

1S3in/1S3out

558 CSI55 LX 07/2006


WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

2a/2b

2Ka/2Kb

3a/3b

3Ka/3Kb

4a/4b

4Ka/4Kb

5a/5b

5Ka/5Kb

6a/6b

6Ka/6Kb

7a/7b

7Ka/7Kb

8a/8b

8Ka/8Kb

2Sin/2Sout

2S3in/2S3out

3Sin/3Sout

3S3in/3S3out

4Sin/4Sout

4S3in/4S3out

5Sin/5Sout

5S3in/5S3out

6Sin/6Sout

6S3in/6S3out

7Sin/7Sout

7S3in/7S3out

8Sin/8Sout

8S3in/8S3out

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC board with ACSM or ALSM/ALSMF/ALSMH or

SSSM submodules

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

MDF


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16


Cable 1 Cable 2

1a/1b free/free

2a/2b free/free

3a/3b free/free

4a/4b free/free

5a/5b free/free

6a/6b free/free

7a/7b free/free

8a/8b free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free free/free

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC board with PLSM submodules

Colours 16x2

MDF



Cable 1 Cable 2

CSI55 LX 07/2006 559


RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

1a/1b free/free

2a/2b free/free

3a/3b free/free

4a/4b free/free

5a/5b free/free

6a/6b free/free

7a/7b free/free

8a/8b free/free

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

10.1.1.18

MDF connections from JPAT

MDF


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter CARUB from JPAT

Cable 1 Cable 2 a1/b1 free/free a2/b2 free/free a3/b3 free/free a4/b4 free/free a5/b5 free/free a6/b6 free/free a7/b7 free/free a8/b8 free/free c1/free free/free c2/free free/free c3/free free/free c4/free free/free c5/free free/free c6/free free/free c7/free free/free c8/free free/free

MDF Cable Adapter CARUB from JPAT

5f/5e

6c/6d

6f/6e

7c/7d

7f/7e

8c/8d

8f/8e

1c/1d

1f/1e

2c/2d

2f/2e

3c/3d

3f/3e

4c/4d

4f/4e

5c/5d

560 CSI55 LX 07/2006

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14

WE 15

WE 16

Cable 1 a1/b1 free/free a2/b2 free/free a3/b3 free/free a4/b4 free/free a5/b5 free/free a6/b6 free/free a7/b7 free/free a8/b8 free/free

MDF

Colours 16x2

RD/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

WH/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

RD/YE

WH/GN

WH/BN

WH/BK

WH/BU

10.1.1.19

MDF connections from DDID

WE 7

WE 8

WE 9

WE 10

WE 11

WE 12

WE 13

WE 14


WE 1

WE 2

WE 3

WE 4

WE 5

WE 6

WE 15

WE 16

Cable Adapter

CA1B from DDID


Cable 2 c1/free free/free c2/free free/free c3/free free/free c4/free free/free c5/free free/free c6/free free/free c7/free free/free c8/free free/free

CSI55 LX 07/2006


561


10.1.2

Service panel

10.1.2.1

General Points

The service panel provides all connections required for service purposes. It must be installed above or below the rack with the boards ACB/HSCB and CF22/CF2E.

The service panel requires a height unit.

As a standard, the two V.24 interface connections on the AEV24B/AV24B are offered for the first two RJ45 couplings, viewed from the left side. The last (tenth) RJ45 coupling is reserved for the S0 connection for the service PC (variant main distributor with patch cable).

There are eight RJ45 located in the middle of the panel, which are fitted at the rear with 8 LSA Plus connections each on a circuit board. This means that project-specific connections can be brought to the panel from the main distributor frame. This may also be the S0 connection for the service PC (main distributor frame for cable with open end).

There is an opening on the right hand side to install the error display unit (EDU). This installation is optional.

Service panel I55

1. 10 RJ 45 couplings

2. 8 RJ45 with LSA Plus connections (freely wirable)

3. Opening for EDU board

10.1.2.2

V.24 Interfaces

The connections of the V.24 interfaces (GCU Generic Control Unit, ACB/HSCB) are adapted on the adapter module AEV24B/AV24B with the adapters V.24/RJ45 (connect adapter V.24/RJ45 to 9-pin D-sub-connector).

Then connect the adapter RJ45 with the service panel RJ45 using coupling 1 or 2 to 8-wire panel cables.

562 CSI55 LX 07/2006


V.24 Interfaces to the service panel

1. Adapter module AEV24B/AV24B

2. Adapter V.24 RJ45

3. Service panel

10.1.2.3

S0 connection

There are two possibilities, depending on the type of main distributor frame:

• Connection via patch cable

In this variant, you must make a connection between the patch panel on the main distributor frame and the service panel

(right RJ45 coupling).

• Connection with installation cable via the LSA Plus connections

This is where the appropriate jumpering must be carried out on the main distributor frame.

10.1.2.4

Installing the EDU

Optionally, the service panel can be retro-fitted with the submodule EDU.

A ribbon cable us used to connect the EDU.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 563


Connect the EDU to the EDB

1. ESB Adapter

2. Ribbon cable ESB-EDU

3. Sub-module EDU

The EDU is fastened to the service panel using two screws.

10.2

Line lengths

When planning the network, it is necessary to take into account the fact that the Ranges of the interfaces (S0,

UP0etc.) are different.

When connecting the line network, the following instructions must be adhered to:

• The two transmission and receiving line pairs (S0) and the double wire for UP0, UPN and UK0 must be executed as a twisted wire pair.

• When dealing with cables with four twisted wires, use a four for the joint transmission and reception line of a S0 interface.

• The naked wires of the cable used must be connected to ground potential.

The following diagrams explain the correlations of:

• Ranges

• Interfaces

• Cable types

564 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Cable type

Installation cable

Outdoor cable

Wire diameter

Range of the interfaces in metres

S0bus S0PTP UP0 UPN UPD UK0

short extended

150 500 1000 1800 1000 1000 4500 J-

Y(ST)Y

J-

2Y(St)Y

St III

BD

A-

2YF(L)2Y

0.6 mm

0.6 mm

0.4 mm

0.6 mm

2100

3500 2800 2800 8000

Cabling systems

CAT.5

CAT.5

CAT.6

CAT.6

CAT.6

CAT.7

CAT.7

Cable type Wire diameter

Li-2YCH

4x2x0,48L

J-2YY

4x2x0,51

J-

02YS(St)CY

4x2x0,52

J-2YY

4x2x0,52

J-02YSCY

4x2x0,56

PiMF

J-02YSCY

4x2x0,56

PiMF

J-02YSCY

4x2x0,56

PiMF

0.48 mm

0.51 mm

0.52 mm

0.52 mm

0.56 mm

0.56 mm

0.645 mm

Range of the interfaces in metres

S0bus S0PTP UP0

short

150 extended

500 650 2000

UPN

2000

150

150

150

150

150

150

500

500

500

500

500

500

800

800

800

1000

1000

1000

2500

2500

2500

3000

3000

3500

2500

2500

2500

2500

2500

2800

UPD

2000

2500

2500

2500

2500

2500

2800

UK0

4000

4500

5000

5000

6000

6000

8000

10.3

Configuration Examples

Examples of configuration (installation cable J-Y(ST)Y, wire diameter 0.6 mm)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 565


Short bus

1. e.g. UIP, DS0 or PCM 2 TD or private termination (PT)

2. Last junction box (install the terminating resistors here)

3. 1. Terminal with S0 interface




extended bus

1. e.g. UIP, DS0 or PCM 2 TD or private network termination (PT)






566 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Passive bus, Y configuration

1. e.g. UIP, DS0 or PCM 2 TD or private network termination (PT)






The difference of the cable lengths l1 and l2 may not exceed 50 m

10.4

Contact occupation of the modular plug connection

The cabling systems structured for the application incoming language or data services generally do not use all the contacts of the modular plug connections. The interfaces of the individual services are assigned to the contacts as follows.

Contacts Analogue telephone

ISDN

S0

ISDN

UP0/

UPN/

UK0

Ethernet

10/100

Base T

Token

Ring

TP-

PMD

AS400 3270 ATM

1

2

3

6

7

4

5

8

Adaptationa b

RX+

TX+

TX-

RX-

X

A

B

X

TX+

TX-

RX+

RX-

-

RX+

TX-

TX+

RX-

X

TX+

TX-

RX+

RX-

X

TX+

TX-

X

RX+

TX+

TX-

RX-

X

X

X

X

X

-

CSI55 LX 07/2006 567


TX = Transmitting direction

RX = Receiving direction

Adaptation = device specific in dependence of jumpering distributor components

10.5

LWL-specifications

The characteristics of the LWL cable are available from the relevant documents.

LWL twin cable SC 29.9030.6100-6199

LWL twin cable SC 29.9030.6200-6299

LWL plastic cable 49.9801.3759-3764

568 CSI55 LX 07/2006

11 Note on DECT:


11.1

Intermodule Handover

The new capacity feature Intermodule Handover (IMHO) for the CS155 denotes the consideration of a sequence of important things for the installation and operation. These are to be found in the hardware side as well as the software side. The following instructions contain component and software requirements, the observation of which will ensure the orderly operation of the IMHO. Applies to single, twin or multi-module in principle:

• IMHO is supported first from E06 system software.

• For the central function a CF22 (ref. no: 49.9906.5748) or CF2E (ref. no.: 49.9903.4968) should be used.

• Use DECT or DECT21 boards as connecting circuit board instead of DECT2.

• IMHO and doubling of CF22/CF2E boards are generally only possible with T1 devices. The use of TC93 devices is not possible.

• For the intermodule central function (only for multi-group) aICF with the ref. no.: 28.5630.1321 or .1331

or 49.9905.9146 is required. In doing so, make sure that the software on the ICF is doubling-compatible.

• For this ICF, the CL2ME (material number: 49.9904.2214) should be used.

It is important to take note when planning the radio hops that the base stations of a module represent a cohesive radio hop. The radio hops formed by various modules should meet as infrequently as possible. This will prevent unnecessary handovers between the modules. These would only generate superfluous load for the system switching matrix.

11.1.1

Application in the Multi-Module

The hardware side

An external high precision reference clock is to be connected. See:

Connection of the external high preci-

sion reference clock to the CSI55. This connection is to be connected to the ICF board in the multi-module via the function unit CL2ME. In multi-module with doubling, both ICF boards under application of the CL2ME are to be connected to the high precision reference clock.

The other modules in the multi-group system are supplied with clocks in the usual manner via the LWL paths.

The individual modules may be connected to the multi-module via differing length LWL paths. This length difference results in that the 160 ms frame signal arrives in the individual modules asynchronous. This asynchronous condition is balanced out in that, in the RBS stations, correction values have been entered. These correction values arrive at the radio base stations (RBS) by means of customer data via the DECT boards.

The length input of the LWL path in meters is carried out by means of the aid CAT (Customer Administration

Tool SW E06 and up). The equalization of the phase positions of the 160 ms frame signal is achieved with the aid of the RBS.

In order to measure the optical waveguide length, refer to the regional network service as it has the necessary know-how.

In the event of doubling the multi-module, ensure that the two optical waveguides that lead to the same module also have the same length. This also applies even if the optical waveguides have different line routes. If this is not the case, handover will not be possible following a switchover.

On the boards CF22/CF2E, only switch 1 of the 4 dip switches is to be set to ON, all others remain at OFF.

When the CF22/CF2E become synchronous with the incoming 160 ms clock, LED 3 in the front panel lights up.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 569


The software side

Upon startup, the software sets the clock source of the ICF in the multi-module with the address 7D (Hex) as highest priority. In doubling, the ICF in the module with the address 7E (Hex) follows with the same priority level. After startup the clock sources at 7D and 7E are switched on as clock master.

In the event of failure of the input clock on the ICF in the multi-module 7D, the ICF in multi-module 7E will be switched on as clock master. This then leads the clock supply of the ICF in the module 7D via the LWL path of the alternate route. The clock supply is implemented via the active paths which are connected on the module’s 7D for all connected modules.

During this switchover, however, each of the multi-modules resynchronises to the new clock source. This may lead to a separation of calls in DECT connections.

After an alternative route switchover, a module is no longer IMHO-compatible after the switchover, as it is the only module to be supplied with clock information from another multi-module as a single module. A system half switchover will take place if the module then receives another switchover request. After this, all modules will receive clock information from one B3 module, and IMHO-compatibility is restored.

Multi-module

1. GPS receiver (GPS = Global Positioning System)

2. Clock master in the CL2M mode

Production of the frame and DECT pulse

570 CSI55 LX 07/2006


3. Master clock from doubling clock master after clock switchover

4. Production of the frame and DECT pulse clock slave B3 in the IML mode

11.1.2

Application in the Twin module

The hardware side

An external high precision reference clock is to be connected. See:

Connection of the external high precision reference clock to the CSI55.

In module no. 1, this connection is to be brought about via the CL2ME function unit on the UIP board. If greater safety is desired, a second connection is to be brought about via a CL2ME and another UIP in module no. 1

The module no: 2 remains the clock slave The intermodule handover function is no longer relevant in the event of failure of one of the twin modules.

On the boards CF22/CF2E, only switch 1 of the 4 dip switches is to be set to ON, all others remain at OFF.

When the CF22/CF2E become synchronous with the incoming 160 ms clock, LED 3 in the front panel lights up.

The software side

Upon startup, the software sets a UIP module in module no. 1 as clock source with the highest priority. In doubling and failure of one UIP, the other UIP follows in module no.:. 1 as a clock source.

Here also applies that module no. 2, connected via a LWL path, receives a delayed frame signal in relation to module no. 1. This asynchronicity is balanced out in that, in the RBS stations, correction values have been entered. These correction values arrive at the radio base stations (RBS) by means of customer data via the

DECT boards. The length input of the LWL path to the module no.” 2 , in meters, occurs with the CAT auxiliary item.

The same here applies with regard to the measurement and length of the optical waveguide, see

Application in Multi-Module - The Hardware Side

CSI55 LX 07/2006 571


Twin module

1. GPS receiver (GPS = Global Positioning System)

2. Clock master in the CL2M mode

Production of the frame and DECT pulse

11.1.3

Configurations not allowed

Comments on the inadmissible connection or operation forms and their reasons by which no orderly operation of the Intermodule Handover are ensured.

Application in the Multi-Module

• The hardware side:

Connection via CL2ME and UIP in another module than B3 module.

• The software side:

After startup, this module with its clock source is selected as clock master and drives all other modules via the B3 module.

The module specific delay times may no longer be active in the clock derived module because it would result in a displacement of the edges of the 160 ms frame signal.

In the other modules, the delay for the path from the clock derived module to the B3 module would have to be added to their own delay times. This would all have to occur therewith all modules work with equal phase positions of the frame signal and is not carried out in the software.

Calls will be separated in the event of switchovers, active/passive switch of the CF22/CF2E. The IMHO function is enabled once more once the switchover has taken place.

Application in the Twin Module

572 CSI55 LX 07/2006


• The hardware side:

Connection of another CL2ME via UIP in the module no.: 2.

• The software side:

Up commissioning, a module UIP from the software in module no.: 1 should be used a clock source with the highest priority. In the event of doubling and failure of one UIP, there is a switch-over to the other UIP in the module no.:. 2 as a clock source.

It also applies here that the module no. 2 receives a delayed frame signal in relation to module 1. This asynchronicity is balanced out in that, in the RBS stations, correction values have been entered. These correction values arrive at the radio base stations (RBS) by means of customer data via the DECT boards.

Now model no.: 2 clock master receives module no.: 1 receives a delayed frame signal in relation to module no. 1. Now the RBS stations in module no.: 2 does not require input of the correction value but that in module no.: 1. The would be treated by software and it is not implemented in the SW.

Calls will be separated in the event of switchovers, active/passive switch of the CF22/CF2E. The IMHO function is enabled once more once the switchover has taken place.

It is important to emphasise once more that the system can be switched to an offered exchange line clock with the aid of synchro management in the event of a total failure of the TAREF or upon separation of the connection to the CL2ME: Due to the ”quality” of the exchange line clock, it is not possible to guarantee that continued operations will be absolutely smooth. However, should a longer period of ”only exchange line clock” operation be unavoidable, the switch 1 of the 4 Dip switches must be set to OFF on all boards of the type

CF22/CF2E.

Failure of TAREF and switchover to a different clock source

It is important to emphasise once more that the system can be switched to an offered exchange line clock with the aid of synchro management in the event of a total failure of the TAREF or upon separation of the connection to the CL2ME: Due to the ”quality” of the exchange line clock, it is not possible to guarantee that continued operations will be absolutely smooth. However, should a longer period of ”only exchange line clock” operation be unavoidable, the switch 1 of the 4 Dip switches must be set to OFF on all boards of the type

CF22/CF2E.

11.1.4

Connection of the external high precision reference clock to the CSI55

A device from the firm R.A.M. with the designation TAREF is used as external high precision reference clock.

A coax socket is located on the back of this device for the 2MHz output, which serves as the connection for the CL2ME line. This connect is supplied by the R.A.M. company together with the TAREF, including all of the required ”mini-transmitters” for the implementation of the coax connection on a symmetrical transmission with a 120 Ohm termination according to CCITT G703. The maximum length of these connecting cables is 10 metres. Only connect the braid screen of the cable with the casing of the ICS module. A screened sub-D-plug in 9-pin design is used as a plug connection to the CS155, connection to the adapter module and therefore to the CL2ME. This enables ”plug and play” functions.

The device will be fitted with a second output for 2MHz within the framework of a redesign

(supply starts in June 2001). This means that only one TAREF device is required for a doubled multi-module (ICS or B3 module). The system transmitter will also be integrated in the system. This coax connection to TAREF will then also be modified by R.A.M and the cable is adapted.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 573


11.2

Supply of the DECT-Net Base Station to the Integral 55

The introduction of the Bosch DECT-base station and the PSL55 provides a new and extended calculation basis for the Integral 55.

A PSL55 in one rack can feed a maximum of 5 DECT21 boards. The three vacant slots can be equipped with boards that do not require 48 V.

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

AO* = Connecting circuit (only boards without 48V-requirement)

A second PSL55 provides a redundant power supply for this expansion.

In cases which necessitate up to 8 DECT21 boards per rack, the rack must be fitted with two

PLS55s. PS redundancy is not possible with this configuration.

*CB = ACB/HSCB

CF* = CF22/CF2E

There is also an adaption module - seePS350 Adaption → 94 available.

Up to 7 DECT21 boards can be operated with it. However, with an additional PSL55 no 48V redundance was reached with this configuration.

11.3

Suitable cable types used to connect DECT RBS

General requirements

• A RBS has two UPN-interfaces. The wire pairs of both Un-interfaces must run in the same cable.

• The opposite wires of star-quad cables form a pair.

• No branch lines may be laid out.

• Non-connected connections to UPO-end devices in its cable must be avoided.

• The maximum allowed loop resistance of the cables is 130 Ohm/km.

Minimum cable requirements

574 CSI55 LX 07/2006


J-Y(ST)Y, St III 2x2x0.6

static shielded cable with 2 wire-pairs (twisted quad cable,

opposing

wires form a pair, to be ensured upon installation!) according to VDE

0815.

or

2x2xAWG22 S/UTP category 3

(or higher) according to DIN EN 50173 and ISO/IEC 11801

Wiring to Multiple RBS

J-Y(ST)Y nx2x0.6 Lg static shielded cable with n wire-pair (wire-pairs stranded in positions) according to VDE 0815. n = 4, 6, 8, ...

or nx2xAWG22 S/UTP category 3

(or higher) according to DIN EN 50173 and ISO/IEC 11801. n = 4, 6, 8, ...

Recomendation:

For new installations it is generally recommended the use of twisted pair cables (e. g. J-Y(ST)Y 2x2x0,6 GR,

CU 13 or more pairs) or the use of Cat 3 cables (or higher). With these cables the best experiences could be achieved in the field.

Note:

The laying of parallel wire pairs to different terminals within the same cable may under certain circumstances cause problems if the near-end cross talk level (NEXT) is too high. Cable types of higher quality should therefore be used in the event of problems, e.g. S/STP types.

When using twisted pair cables such problems are not known to us.

Remarks on data cables according to DIN EN 50173 and ISO/IEC 11081:

• AWG (american wire gauge) must be 22 or smaller. 22 corresponds to an wire diameter of >0.643 mm.

The smaller the AWG, the larger the wire diameter.

• S/UTP screened/unshielded twisted pair; cable shielded but the individual wire-pairs are not.

• S/STP screened / unshielded twisted pair; cable and individual wire pairs are electro-statically shielded.

• Category

1. for analog transmissions

2. up to 4 Mbit/s

3. up to 10 Mbit/s.

11.4

The structure of the cables

The wires of the cable are star quad twisted. The wires of the star qued have always the same colour. Five star quads form a basic bundle with all colours.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 575


1.

A-wire : without marks

2.

B-wire : with a ring

3. 2A-wire : with two rings, long distance

4. 2B-wire : with two rings, short distance

another example of star-quad:

Abbr. Meaning

UTP ”Unshielded Twisted Pair” unshielded, twisted in pairs, symmetrical copper cable for data with 2 or 4 wire pairs

S/

UTP

”Screened Unshielded Twisted Pair”

2 or 4 wire pairs, twisted in pairs, symmetrical copper cable for data with an additional outer shield

FTP ”Foll Twisted Pair” shielded by foil, twisted in pairs, symmetrical copper cable for data

S/

FTP

”Screened Foll Twisted Pair” screened in layers and shielded by foil, twisted in pairs, symmetrical copper cable for data

STP ”Shielded Twisted Pair”

2 or 4 wire pairs, symmetrical cooper cable for data with individually shielded wire pairs

Application

Local networks in the close workplace area, connection or installation cable

Installation cable for horizontal cabling


Installation cable for horizontal cabling for data transmission up to100 MBit/s or for the close workplace area, e. g.

between floor distributor and data connection

Installation cable for horizontal cabling S/

STP

”Screened Shielded Twisted Pair”

2 or 4 wire pairs cooper cable for data with individually shielded pairs and additional outer shield

PiMf ”Pair in Metallfoil” shielded with metal foil, twisted pair of a copper cable for data with high close crosstalk attenuation

ViMf ”Vierer in Metallfolie” quad shielded with matal foil, four wires, copper cable for data for wiring of large systems or for transmission of high bit-rates or installation cable for horizontal cabling


576 CSI55 LX 07/2006



Starting with software E07, the communication server Integral 55 offers the integration of voice over IP (VoIP).

Here Integral 55 outlying extensions are integrated into the customer’s existing IP-based data network environment (LAN, WAN, corporate network). In addition, the networking of Integral 55 systems to different locations via the IP infrastructure is possible.

The performance characteristic description as well as the set-up are shown in the relevant documents.

VoIP in Integral 55 (1)

VoIP in Integral 55 (2)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 577



Notes on the installation and service of the OS13 are available in the service and installation manual 0S13,

OSM and OSPC - see OS13.

Notes on the installation and for the service of the OS33 are available in the service and installation manual

0S33, OSM and OSPC - see: OS33.

578 CSI55 LX 07/2006

14 Measuring and Testing Tools


14.1

BA Board Adapter


The board adapter is used for service purposes. The modules to be processed must be inserted in the board adapter, so that it can be subsequently inserted into the PBX.

Board Adapter

1. PIN 1-2 Current reading, PIN 3 Voltage reading

2. Meas. points

3. see table

4. Clock meas. points

5. CBI speed setting

6. Selection of the adapted board (GCU/ICU or CFx)

7. BA chip submodule

8. not clock supplied (only with adapted ICU)

9. clock supplied (only with adapted ICU)

10. Measuring points for C-bus clock

Connectors for C-bus data test pins (3.):

3

4

1

2

GND

GND

GND

GND

CSI55 LX 07/2006 579


13

14

15

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

PF 1

PF 2

ERRV

FCPS

WSYN

ERLINE 1

ERLINE 2

ERBAT

ERDPS 2

REMCNTR 1

ERDPS 1

14.2

CBT C-Bus Tester


The C-bus tester serves as a testing tool for the CS155.

The C-bus tester has two applications:

• Lists the message transfer in the system.

• Tests the other printed circuit boards in the laboratory.

Using this program, it is possible to control two different functions:

• Edit messages and send them to the system via the C-bus tester.

• Save messages from the telephone system on the PC hard disc, and display them on the PC screen.

The C-bus tester is made up of two parts:

• A printed circuit board, which is inserted into the CS155 system.

• A DOS program, named CBTPC.

580 CSI55 LX 07/2006


CBT board, component side

1. Memory

2. HGS Slot

3. Battery

The CBTPC program does not perform an analysis of the messages. The MPA (Message Protocol Analysis) program is required for this purpose. However, if the protocol is recorded in ASCII format, it can be viewed in any text program.

Packets which are to be dispatched within only one control cannot be recorded.

14.2.1

Hardware and Software Conditions

You require an AT-compatible PC with a free serial interface (COM1: or COM2:) and at least 512 kB free RAM.

A mouse and colour monitor are recommended.

In order to save the protocol data of a C-bus test, the PC’s hard disc should have at least 20 MB of free memory.

The CBTPC program is a DOS program. It will not function in Windows.

14.2.2

Installing the Printed Circuit Board

Before a C-bus protocol can be recorded, the printed circuit board for the C-bus tester must be installed in the

I55. The following printed circuit boards can be used:

• CBI1T

• CBI1A (Using this CBI may result in a data loss when recording!)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 581


14.2.3

Conditions

The following components are needed to make a connection to the system:

• Printed circuit board for the C-bus tester with at least 4 MB RAM. In the event of several memory modules being installed, they must be on top of each other in the main memory area.

• AV24B adapter module

• Connection cable for connection of two PC-AT’s (9-pin, hand shake via RTS/CTS).

14.2.4

Procedure

Insert the printed circuit board in a free slot in the system. The B3 module contains a slot specifically for the

CBT.

You should not used the following slots under any circumstances: 0E and 0F reserved slots

14.2.5

Connection cable between CBT and PC

The CBT board and the PC with CBTPc must be connected by a cable.

Insert the AV24B printed circuit board on the back side of the system. Connect the COM 1 or COM 2 interface on the PC to the 1st V.24 interface on the AV24B printed circuit board.

In AV24B, the 1st interface is marked V.24

The cable connects two serial interfaces and must be configured as follows (zero modem):

Signal designation

TxD

RxD

CTS

RTS

DSR

GND

DTR

PC 25-pin socket

2

3

4

5

6

7

20

PC 9-pin socket

3

2

7

8

6

5

4

5

6

7

4

3

8

CBT 9-pin socket

2

582 CSI55 LX 07/2006

14.2.6



O

X

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

CBT board, front side


The LEDs signal the different phases of the reset process (the bottom two LED’s are missing on the old CBTs).

If a module locates a fault, the red LED flashes whilst in the corresponding test, and then lights up again once the reset has been completed.

O

O

X

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

X

X

X

-Resets-tests CPU

-Resets-tests memory

-Resets-tests clock component timed interruptions. If this test fails, no further tests are carried out.

-Resets-tests CBI

(Master and slave reset, describes the Init register, transmits and receives packets, etc.).

-Reset-tests DUART (local transmission, buffer (FIFO) on the receiver side).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 583


O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

X = LED on

O = LED off

Switch Function

S1

S2

S3

S4

Reset switch

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Memory test switch

Left:

Right:

No function

No function

Initializes the individual modules (clock, CBI, DUART ...) The LEDs on the right side have the same denotations as above.

Logging active

Recording messages

Operating status

Reset board, locking, restart

Warm start

Big memory test

Small memory test

14.2.7


The CBT board may be removed or inserted during system operation, if the S1 switch handle has been moved to the left.

Further information can be found in the C-Bus Tester Manual, material number 20.0003.0950, release: 04/95.

14.3

MAHC Measuring Adapter Half Channel


The MAHC (Measuring Adapter Half Channel) provides the measuring interface for transmission-technical half channel measurements on analogue and digital peripheral connectors for the CS155.

584 CSI55 LX 07/2006


For use in the CS155, the front panel plus lever must be removed. It is possible to use the board lever of the

CS155, material number: 4.999.017.193, in conjunction with screw BGH, material number: 4.999.017.192

and axis BGH, material number: 4,999,017,191 is to be used. These parts are required twice per board.

Operation is virtually identical to that of the MAH board for the I33x (8030). See I33x manual

DSV, material number 20.0003.0013.

The measuring adapter is located on a pc board which is inserted into the slot on an ASCxx analogue line circuit in order to carry out the half channel measurements in a I55 system.

MAHC module, component side

The board is divided into five function groups:

• Adaptation part for the control and the analog interfaces.

• Line circuit for the connection of the testing device for connection setup.

• Digital measuring interface for the connection of measuring devices with digital access.

• Analog measuring interface for the connection of analog measuring devices.

• Control elements and display board for setting and displaying the operating functions.

14.3.1

Line Circuit

The line circuit function group is provided for connection setup (switch S3 in ’Test’ position). The test connection is set up using a DTMF or pulse dialling test telephone instrument which is inserted onto the connector studs. These are located on the component side of the pc board. For test connections in an incoming seizure direction, the test telephone instrument must be called. The test telephone instrument maintains the test connection while the measurement is being taken. Because the receiving direction remains through-connected during the measurement, the measuring signals can be overheard.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 585


14.3.2

Digital Measuring Interface

This interface is a 64kBit/s codirectional interface in accordance with CCITT. For purposes of function control and correct setting of the measuring device, a digital short-circuit connection has also been implemented

(switch S3 in ’Test’ position).

14.3.3

Analog Measuring Interface

This interface is a 600 ohm, 4-wire measuring interface that can be switched to ZR. The following features are relevant for the interface:

• The relative input and output level is 0 dBr

• Deviations of the relative level and the frequency response are up to +/-0.2 dB

• Input or output impedance (measured as deflection attenuation) >20 dB

If the analog interface is to be used for exact measurements, the respective deviation must be established

(second MAHC) and the measuring result corrected accordingly.

In order to check the analog measuring interface (switch S3 in ’Test’ position), a short-circuit connection has been provided on the digital side. In doing this, the deviations of the input and output are added.

14.3.4


MAHC board, front side

1. red

2. green

586 CSI55 LX 07/2006


3. yellow


L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

Seizure

ZR

Measuring

Digital

Digital

Fault

500 Ohm

Measuring

Analogue

Analogue

Switch Function

S1

S2

S3

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Reset board

Micro-Module

Digital measurement

Analog measurement

Test/connection setup

Measuring

14.4

SP1 Spy Probe 1 (SP1)

What is Spy and how can I use this tool?

Spy is designed in such a way because it can record as many system events as possible. The Sky predecessor, the CBus Tester (CBT), only recorded CBus packets. The SKy concept permits simultaneous recording, display and decoding of:

• CBus packets messages which run over the CBus. Packets are recorded in separate modules.

• CBus special events

This includes: Packet losses, blocking times of µPs, packet transmission repetition times, CBus load etc.

• Ethernet packets

Ethernet packets can be recorded via a network card of the PC card to be recorded at the same time as the CBus recording.

• CBT recording

Event type which results when reading in BIN files (recordings of CBT)

• Console messages event type S01, HGS, FRP-events on the system console. The corresponding capture files can be import and mixed with a recording and therefore can be brought into a temporal relationship.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 587


• Conversion

The SPY-generated .frec files can be converted to.bin-files. As a result, further use of this is possible through MAT (MessageAnalysesTool).

• IDM (planned) messages between system and terminals or other systems

• Local highways (planned) recording of which highway is occupied, number of the occupied highways

• I2C-Bus (planned)

I2C-Bus signalling in the backplane

For further information on SP1 see SPY1.

14.5

V24IA V24 Interface Adapter


The V24IA is used as a debugging interface in connection with the DS02, ADM, DUPN or ASC2 boards.

Note:

The use of the V24IA board in the Integral 55 Compact is not necessary, because the requirements already have been implemented.

It is connected as an interface between a terminal or PC and the board. The 9-pin Cannon socket is inserted directly onto the terminal or PC. Between the board and the adapter, an 8-pin RJ45-RJ45 cable required (

S0-cable, patch cable).

V24IA board, component side

1. Terminal or PC

2. via cable to DS02/ADM/DUPN or ASC2 board

3. Shrink pipe

The activation of the display at the terminal or PC is carried out via the space key.

The displayed menu items may now be selected.

The following controls may be carried out (DEBUG MENU):

• D channel monitor

• C-BUS monitor

• Layer 1 monitor (crc/abort)

588 CSI55 LX 07/2006


• resource monitor

• show error counters (Bit errorr)

• ci monitor

The reaction times of the board may be increased by activating the controls.



All debugging tasks should be switched off before removing the cable from the board.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 589

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX


15.1

About this Manual

This manual contains information for sales personnel, service technicians and installers for the acquisition, installation, service, maintenance and expansion of the Communication Server Integral 55 Compact.

A separate manual is available for each individual application.

590 CSI55 LX 07/2006


15.2

Important notes

Safety Information

Prior to completing the connection of the system to the mains power, all wiring of the Integral 55 Compact must be completed and checked!

System service and repairs are the exclusive domain of an authorised specialist!

During installation of the Integral 55 Compact in 19” cabinets, desktop, standing or wall mounting, enough strain relief for all cables and accesses must be ensured.

When connecting circuits to the V.24 interfaces, only use the supplied shielded cables.

The Integral 55 Compact must be connected to the potential equalization!

The presence of strong magnetic fields in the vicinity of the Integral 55 Compact must be avoided!

The Integral 55 Compact must not be exposed to shock, impact or vibrations!

For EMC and conformity reasons, in the Integral 55 Compact only boards may be used that are approved and equipped with metal front panels!



In case of wall mounting, a minimum distance for extracting/inserting the boards must be kept.

The following regulations or guidelines must be considered during system installation, commissioning and operation:

• DIN VDE 0100 Setting up heavy current systems

• DIN VDE 0105 Operating heavy current systems

• DIN VDE 0132 Fire countermeasures in electrical systems

• DIN VDE 0298 Use of cables and insulated wiring for heavy current systems

• DIN VDE 0800 Telecommunications engineering

• DIN VDE 0891 Use of cables and insulated wiring for telecommunication and information processing systems

• DIN 4102 Combustive properties of building materials and components

• DIN 5035 Interior lighting with artificial light

• VDI 2054 Air conditioning systems for data processing environments

Additional regulations or guidelines may apply in special or individual circumstances.

Transport

The Integral 55 Compact may be transported only in the original packing or installed in a 19” cabinet.

Check that the system is complete by referring to the delivery note and the accompanying installation documents.

Connections to V.24 Interfaces

To prevent the destruction of the V.24 interface driver and receiver components when connecting devices, it is

imperative, to use the following cables:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 591


Cable for logging (PK HAL

Cat5, grey, 1:1)

Length

1m

3m

5m

10m

Material number

4.999.045.210

4.999.045.212

4.999.045.214

4.998.045.215

Additionally, the adapter plug RJ45/D-Sub, material number: 4.999.059.171, is available.

15.2.1

Environmental Conditions

The following placement guidelines must be considered in order to ensure trouble free operation of the Integral

55 Compact:

• The room must be dry and provide options for ventilation.

• Weight in the case of full capacity, see Technical data.

• The floor covering should possess antistatic properties. It should be easy to clean and abrasion resistant.

• The Integral 55 Compact should not be exposed to heat (e.g. radiator).

• An additional number of earthed mains sockets must be provided for service purposes.

Climatic conditions for operation, storage and transportation - see Tecnical data.

The access to the Integral 55 Compact must be guaranteed from the front and the back.

In the case of wall mounting, a minimum distance for extracting/inserting the boards must be kept.

Technical Data → 596

15.2.2

Required Servicing Procedures

If servicing is required the Helpdesk has been called by:

• the customer,

• the technician/service technician,

• Remote alarm signalling

• TNS (off hours)

.

In most cases, the Helpdesk will already have located the fault through the use of remote diagnostics. If this is the case, if necesary, simply replacing the faulty module will suffice. It should be stated, however, that remote diagnostics are not capable of locating every fault.

You must then:

• Condense the available information

592 CSI55 LX 07/2006


• Interpret fault returns/indications or displays

• Locate the fault using the service PC

• Carry out diagnostics with the aid of the Helpdesk.

15.3

Product description

The Integral 55 Compact is the ideal platform in modern business communication for medium-sized and large companies with branch offices. It is designed primarily for linking branch structures to the headquarter. It supports the standard interfaces of conventional technology as well as VoIP solutions and IP network connections. The integrated VoIP - interface can be configured for subscribers as well as for network connections.

Furthermore, this technology converts the Integral 55 Compact into an ideal supplement of already existing

Integral systems.

15.3.1

Comparison Integral 55/Integral 55 Compact

Overview of the most important differences (details in the text!)

Integral 55

Construction

Installation

19”

In the cabinet

Cable adapter

Multigroup capability

Expandability

Errorsignaling

Potential-free switching contacts:

ISDN emergency telephone required yes yes yes yes yes

CSI55 LX 07/2006

Integral 55 Compact

19”

In the cabinet, wall-mounted, free-standing device not required no, only single module possible no, no ESB/EDU no no

593


Overview of the most important differences (details in the text!)

Blower

V.24

Harddisk

UK0

Slots for boards

Expansion boards not redundant insulated or not insulated

PCMCIA yes

32 arbitrarily

Use of the ATLC and

IMUX boards

Free selection of slots

Power supply

CF22

S2M power supply NT yes yes redundant redundant via ESB board redundant not insulated only Compact Flash no

4

ATA, CAS, DECT21, DT21, DSPF,

IPN and VOIP no conditional not redundant not redundant external plug-in power supply unit

As a member of the Integral 55 family in a new, compact 19” housing, Integral 55 Compact offers virtually the same features as the other Integral 55 systems. The main purpose of the Integral 55 Compact was to achieve a cost reduction in minor expansion options.

• The integration of central components and subscriber/line interfaces on a HW platform (given configuration),

• a cost- and function-optimized power supply unit,

• relinquishment of the rarely used HW interfaces,

• and a new, optimized design, made it feasible to offer the Integral 55 with a variety of features at a competitive price, even in the under 50 subscriber segment.

The Integral 55 Compact runs on the same system software as the other Integral 55 systems. The same service and network administration applications (ISM, ICU-Editor, CAT, ADN, etc.) are also employed for the administration and monitoring of the Integral 55 Compact.

The following differences exist between the Integral 55 Compact system and the Integral 55 system:

General

• 19” mounting system with 3 vertical modules With the appropriate mounting attachments it can be wallmounted or used as a table or upright unit.

• No rear cable adaptors (boards) with champ plugs are used for wiring the interfaces. The interfaces are all accessible from the front and are installed with RJ-45 cabling.

• Only single module configuration is possible. Integral 55 Compact has no IML (inter module link) interface; twin- and multi-module configurations are therefore not possible with the I55 Compact.

• Module type is O1, Integral 55 Compact is currently not upgradeable.

• CF doubling is not possible.

• Integral 55 Compact has no error signalling LEDs, relay contacts or optocoupler inputs. An ESB/EDU cannot be equipped.

594 CSI55 LX 07/2006


• Integral 55 Compact has no free switching points.

• No connection of ISDN emergency phones is necessary (no EES0B board).

• In comparison to the I55 with its standard single fan, the I55 Compact has a redundant double fan system. If one of the blowers fails, the system continues to work in the permissible temperature range.

Integrated components

• The functions of the HSCB/ACB, CF22, ADM and DUPN boards are firmly integrated into the base unit

(BU). CBI addresses / slot assignment are predetermined:

– Slot 3 / CBI address 08: ADM

– Slot 5 / CBI address 0A: DUPN

– Slot 9 / CBI address 0E: HSCB/ACB

– Slot 10 / CBI address 0F: CF22

• Only the non-isolated V.24 interface is located on the HSCBO and ACBO boards. An isolated V.24

interface is not possible.

• The MI switch function has not been implemented on the HSCBO.

• The HSCBO uses only CompactFlash as a medium for the backup memory. Other media such as hard disks may not be used!

• The DUPN built into the motherboard (MBO) supports only 24 subscribers instead of 32.

• The ADM is also integrated into the motherboard (MBO) of the base unit (BU).

– ADM submodule 1 is an ABSM (ports 0 to 3): It is built-in (4 analog subscriber interfaces).

– ADM submodule 4 is an STSM (ports 12 to 15) and also built-in (four S0 or T0 interfaces).

– ADM submodules 2 and 3 can be configured as UPSM, STSM or ABSM. Submodule UKSM cannot be used in the BU.

• Integral 55 Compact has no single port occupation LEDs for the integral ADM/DUPN functions.

Expansion slots

• Integral 55 Compact has two slots for boards. These are only to a limited extent selectable.

• The following rules apply to board slots:

– Slot 1 / CBI address 06 (upper slot on BU):

Only the VoIP, DSPF or IPN boards may be inserted into this slot.

– Slot 7 / CBI address 0C (lower slot on BU):

Boards ATA, CAS, DECT21, DT21, DSPF or IPN may be inserted into this slot.

– When using the DT21 module, the optical 2 Mbit/s interface (submodule OFAS) and coax connection (CA4x) cannot be connected.

– When using the DECT21 board a maximum of 8 base stations may be configured.

• No auxiliary highways are present at these two slots. The DSPF board may therefore only be equipped with a maximum of two ASN3 submodules. i.e. DSPF has access to 64 channels, which is sufficient for the configuration of the Integral 55 Compact.

• When using the DT21 board for connection to an S2M NT, voltage must be supplied to the network terminator (NT) via an external plug-in power supply (material number 27.4402.1056).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 595


Power supply unit

• The Integral 55 Compact power supply unit PSO is built-in. The PSU cannot be doubled.

• No 110V network supply.

• No -60V partial voltage generation in the BU.

Therefore the -72V supply voltage of the UKO interfaces on the UKSM submodule cannot be generated for the integrated ADM.

• No external -48V battery supply.

• No 25 Hz ringing voltage.

15.3.2

Technical Data

Connection options up to 52 voice or data channels in the basic configuration up to 240 VoIP voice channels up to 8 radio base stations (DECT) or 1x S2M

Network interfaces

4 wire ISDN basic access

BRI

ISDN Primary Rate Access (if required) PRI S2M

T0 B+B+D channel structure

30xB+D channel structure

Basic configuration

S0-Interfaces

UPN-(B+B+D) interfaces a/b interface

4

24

4

Expansions a/b or

S0 or

UPN

VoIP

DECT

DT21

ATA

CAS max. 1 x per system max. 1 x per system max. 1 x per system

240 channels for networking and subscribers

8 RBS one S2M-Interface (exchange line (T2) - or FV(TIE, tie line)), 120 Ohm symm.

8 analog exchange accesses (PSTN) one S2M-Interface (exchange interface, connection line or special interface)

* If DT21 is used, DECT is not possible. In this case DECT over IP!

596 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Dimensions

Integral 55 Compact (WxHxD)

Wall-mounted device (wall mount bracket and Integral 55

Compact, WxHxD)

Floor-mounted device (wall mount bracket, pedestal and

Integral 55 Compact, WxHxD)

Weights

Integral 55 Compact

Wall-mounted device (wall mount bracket and Integral 55

Compact)

Floor-mounted device (wall mount bracket, pedestal and

Integral 55 Compact)

482x132x483,5 mm (3 U)

510x530x135,1 mm

510x574x444,8 mm

11.00 kg

16.25 kg

20.50 kg

Colour

Wall mount bracket, pedestal and Integral 55 Compact

Network connection

Mains voltage

Mains frequency

Maximum power consumption

Electrical circuit protection

RAL 7016 (anthracite grey)

230V ± 10%

50 Hz -6% +26%

0.6A

16A automatic circuit breaker C type

Additional data

Heat output at full configuration

Sound pressure level (at 1m distance to EN ISO

3744)

75 W

< 45 dB(A)

Telephones/terminals

Al the telephones available for the Communication Server Integral 55 can be connected:

• IP telephones

• ISDN telephones

• Analogue telephones

Ambient conditions/air conditioning

DIN ETS

Storage:

Transport:

Operation:

300.019-Kl.1.1

300.019-Kl.2.2

300.019-Kl.232

Temperature range

-5

◦

C to +45

◦

C

-25

◦

-5

◦

C to +70

◦

C to +45

◦

C

C

Relative humidity Comments stationary use, weather protected

CSI55 LX 07/2006 597


Reliability

In all of the values stated herein, the power supply device was also taken into consideration. However, the failure of power supply devices is less frequent than the failure of mains voltage due to the the power plant. If

UPS (uninterrupted power supply) is not used, this will lead to total system failure in both cases. This must be taken into account during the use of the values.

Reliability

MTBF for the whole system

Fault rate of individual boards

>

<

<

/= 35 years

/= 0.75%

/= 0.5% in the 1st year in the 2nd year

Traffic capacity

The term traffic capacity subdivides itself into the dynamic one and the static traffic capacity.

The dynamic traffic capacity is the one provided by the system. It is given by the unity BHCA, i.e. Busy Hour

Call Attempts and identifies the number of processed call attempts per main traffic hour. It is given by the unity

BHCA, i.e. Busy Hour Call Attempts and identifies the number of processed call attempts per main traffic hour.

The static traffic capacity describes the performance of the switching matrix. It is shown in the unit Erlang

(Erl).

The basis for the dimensioning of telephone systems is the FTZ Guideline 12TR3. For digital subscribers

(2B+D) it results in a traffic intensity value of 0,3 Erlang (see BAPT - Bundesamt fuer Post- und Telekom-

Angelegenheiten regulations for traffic intensity values).

The values listed below in the table apply for the Integral 55 Compact:

Traffic capacity

Dynamic

Static

8000 BHCA


15.4

Base Unit

Die Base Unit integriert die zentralen Komponenten, Teilnehmer- / Leitungsschnittstellen sowie die Stromversorgung.

Es stehen nur zwei Steckpl ätze zur Verf ügung. Grunds ätzlich wurde die BU f ür die VOIP und DECT Baugruppen konzipiert. Dennoch k önnen diese im Bedarfsfall mit folgenden Baugruppen ersetzt oder kombiniert werden:

• ATA

• CAS

• DSPF (nur 32 Kan äle stehen zur Verf ügung)

• DT21

• IPN

Peripherie-Baugruppen der Base Unit (BU) und die Lage ihrer Anschlussorgane

598 CSI55 LX 07/2006


CSI55 LX 07/2006 599


1. je nach gesteckter AO-Baugruppe

Die Tabelle zeigt die Kombinationsm öglichkeiten aller einsetzbaren Baugruppen in einer Matrix dargestellt.

VoIP

DECT21

DT21

DSPF

ATA

IPN

VoIP

-

X

X

X

X

X

CAS X

X = possible combinations

-

-

X

-

X

DECT21

X

-

-

X

-

X

-

DT21

X

-

DSPF

X

X

X

-

X

X

X

ATA

X

-

-

X

-

X

-

IPN

X

X

X

X

X

-

X

CAS

X

-

-

X

-

X

-

15.4.1

Layout

The base unit (BU) is accommodated in a universal housing. It is intended for mounting in a 19” cabinet (three vertical modules) and can be used as a wall, floor or table-top housing.

• The rack is installed in the 19” cabinet with the aid of two simple mounting brackets and sliding rails.

• As a table-top unit with rubber feet in the base.

• The rack is mounted on the wall by means of a simple enamelled wall holder.

• The basic housing can be used as an upright unit with simple accessories.

All interfaces and control/display elements can be accessed from the front. The blowers can be replaced from the outside during operation.

600 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Interior view of the Integral 55 Compact (motherboard as a board solution lying in housing), seen from above.

1. Blower

2. Socket for third submodule of the ADM (S0, T0, UPN or a/b)

3. Socket for second submodule of the ADM (S0, T0, UPN or a/b)

4. RJ45 connector strips

CSI55 LX 07/2006 601


15.4.2

Front

Front view of the Integral 55 Compact

1. 2x HGS

• top = HGS1

• bottom = HGS2

2. LEDs and control elements HSCBO/ACBO

3. RJ45 jack and 2x USB jacks for ACBO

• top = CU Eth (Ethernet interface for ACBO control unit)

• centre = USB/1 (universal serial bus interface 1)

• bottom = USB/2 (universal serial bus interface 2)

4. RJ45 jacks for HSCBO/ACBO

• top = CU V.24/1 (first V.24 interface for HSCBO/ACBO control unit)

• bottom = CU V.24/2 (second V.24 interface for HSCBO/ACBO control unit)

5. Slot for additional VOIP/DSPF or IPN board

6. Slot for additional ATA/CAS/DECT21/DT21/DSPF or IPN board

7. RJ45 jacks

• top = EU (extension unit port, R1RG/1)

• bottom = SPY (R1RG/2 SPY)

These two ports are reserved for future applications and are not yet usable.

8. LEDs and control elements of the MBO board

9. RJ45 jacks for AO ports

602 CSI55 LX 07/2006


15.4.3

Housing open

If the housing must be opened (e.g. for retro-fitting submodules), proceed as follows:

• Loosen the five Torx screws with several rotations (1.)

• Pull the housing cover towards you.

• Lift the housing cover over the screw heads.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 603


• Now the cover can be removed by pulling it away.

Use the reverse procedure to close the housing.

15.4.4

Table unit

If the base unit is set on a table, it must be fitted with four rubber feet (included in the mounting set) on the underside of the housing.

604 CSI55 LX 07/2006


15.4.5

Install in the cabinet

When installing in a cabinet the base unit must be mounted on sliding rails.

Fit the sliding rails in the cabinet for the base unit.

Provide the appropriate holes in the mounting channels with M6 cage nuts.

The base unit is supplied with mounting brackets already fitted. Place the unit into the proposed verticle module. Secure it in the cabinet by means of four torx screws.

The following illustration shows an installed base unit of the Integral 55 Compact.

15.4.6

Mounting on the wall.

The Integral 55 Compact base unit must be placed in the wall-mounting bracket so that the

LED and switch block are always on top.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 605


The base unit must be assembled in the preferred state, i.e.

left-hand access to boards and patch field.

If the access is on the right, the cable should be long enough to permit the boards to be pulled out for servicing.

The excess cable after commissioning can be stored in the rear.

Three points (1.) for the drillholes can be marked on the wall with the aid of the drilling jig (packaging with punched drillhole diagram).

Drill the holes and insert the enclosed plugs.

606

The wall bracket should be mounted to suit the given circumstances!

Observe: Wall spacing

Sufficient space must be provided for plugging and unplugging the boards.

CSI55 LX 07/2006


The holder should then be hung on the upper two screws and locked in place with the lower screw.

Tighten up all three screws.

The connecting cables of the Integral 55 Compact must be secured on the pull-throughs (2.) and strain relief bars (3.) on the left and right side with cable fasteners.

Set the Integral 55 Compact base unit on the lower plate of the wall-mounting bracket. Push the unit inside.

The springy bracket and mounting bracket at the front will determine the full depth and positioning in the wall-mounting bracket.

Secure the unit on the wall-mounting bracket with four torx screws.

Plug the connecting cable into the corresponding RJ45 jacks on the front of the base unit.

15.4.7

Setting up in the room

Place the holder in the foot with rubber studs.

Foot (from above)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 607


Wall-mounting bracket

1. Connect the holder to the foot with the four torx screws.

The connecting cables of the base unit must be secured with cable fasteners on the pull-throughs at the left and right of the wall-mounting bracket (see illustrations).

Push the Integral 55 Compact base unit into the holder from the side shown in the following illustration.

1. Secure the unit on the wall-mounting bracket with four torx screws.

2. Plug the connecting cable into the corresponding RJ45 jacks on the front of the base unit.

608 CSI55 LX 07/2006


1. Fastening for cables with fast binders (strain relief).

2. Strain relief lug for earthing wire

3. Clamp for earthing wire

4. IEC power plug

Mounting on the wall. → 605

15.5

Boards

The boards inserted in the front side may be removed and inserted during system operation. The ESD measures must be followed

For EMC and conformity reasons in the Integral 55 Compact are used only released boards equipped with metalic front strips!


Board

ACBO → 610

ASC2

ASC21

ASCxx

Base Unit

X

CSI55 LX 07/2006 609


Board

ATA → 628

ATA2

ATB

ATC and

CAS → 632

DDID

DECT21 → 638

DS02

DS03

DSPF → 642

DT21 → 646

DUP03

DUPN

HSCBO → 651

IPN → 654

MBO → 656

SBAO → 664

VOIP → 664

Base Unit

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

15.5.1

ACBO Advanced Computer Board Office


The ACBO board is the basic equipment in the Integral 55 Compact LX. They are located in the Base Unit

(BU). This computer board is used when the software IEEx (Linux operating sistem) is used.

Features

ETX-PC




Modul)


Voltage generation


Hardware watchdog


Ethernet interface 10/100 Base T two V.24 interfaces (not isolated)



Two CBus interfaces (ISA Bus) on for system control reasons one as SPY-remote Interface (SPY = System Protocoller and Analyser)

IDE interface for Compact Flash (HGS)

USB1/2 for more V.24 interfaces

610 CSI55 LX 07/2006



As the software for the logging from remote is currently not implemented, it must be made locally using a SP1 board (reference number: 49.9902.8112) and a PC.

ACBO board, component side

1. HGS, Compact Flash (component side); boot flash, Compact Flash, (conductor side)

2. Ethernet USB 1.1

3. 2 x V.24

4. Battery

CSI55 LX 07/2006 611



6. ETX-PC

7. CBI


9. CBT


11. SEPL

12. Ribbon cable

13. ISA Bus testconnector

14. Power supply plug

Other features


15.5.1.1


with 2 * Compact Flash

1. Position of the control elements and LEDs (Control Unit)

LEDs and switches of the ACBO

ACBO board, front side


612 CSI55 LX 07/2006


S1

S2

Middle:

Below

Switch Function

S1

S2

Reset switch

Middle:

Below:

Operating status

Hardware reset of the board, locking

Above: ACB is shut down (by the operating system), keying


Below:

Above:


Service position: Removing and Inserting the IDE Hard Disk


L3

L4

L5

L2

L7- L10

on: on: on: on:

CBI access

Access to Compact Flash 1/2

Compact Flash (HSG) can be removed/inserted

Power OK

These LEDs indicate the statuses from reset to operation. After the voltage supply has been switched on a functional check is carried out (LEDs light up briefly).

The commissioning status is divided into four groups:

1. ACBO loading from flash software

2. ACBO loading from HGS to operating system level

3. ACBO loading from HGS to application level

4. ACBO loading in special status (APS change) during operation.

No.

L7

15

14

1

1

L8

1

1

L9

1

1

L10 Gr.

Status

1

0

0

0

Commissioning starts

Operating system takes up work

13

12

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

0


CBI


Ethernet

Phase name


Linux-Kernel has been loaded.

GRUB finished and initialization RAM Disc started.

ACB board without HGS is loaded as slave via C bus.

Status 11 and 12 skipped.

ACB board without HGS is loaded as master via

Ethernet.

Status 11 and 13 skipped.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 613


6

5

4

3

No.

L7

11 1

10

9

8

7

1

1

1

0

L8

0

L9

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

L10

1

0

1

0

1

Gr.

0

0

1

1

3

Status


Flash software update

PAL starts

Download of the application files


Phase name


Status 11 to 13 are not processed in the normal order.

ACB flash software in progress.

The PAL server is ready.

All known Pascal tasks are started.

Download of applications files in progress.

Start of the platform applications such as PFSP,

PAL, L4AD.

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

3

3

3

2

2

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

2

2

2

APS change in progress (only displayed on the IVL)

Conversion of customer data

(only displayed on the IVL)


ICU commissioning

Normal operation

ACB with IVL function is preparing an APS change.

Conversion of customer data

(CKDT started with MML command is not displayed).

DMS of the module signales the loading customer data phase


Start commissioning of module(s)


1 = LED on

0 = LED off

On the component side of the ACBO there are two pin strips X11 and X12.

614 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Section of the component side ACBO board

Jumper functions

Jumper on X11

1 - 2

2 - 3 (default)

4 - 5

5 - 6 (default)

Jumper on X12

1 - 2 (default)

2 - 3

4 - 5

5 - 6 (default)

Adress bit A9 = 1

Adress bit A9 = 0

Board passport protected

Board passport not protected

Watchdog enable

Watchdog disable

SCOCON fulfilled (Service entry)

SCOCON not fulfilled

15.5.2



The ASC21 board provides 32 a/b connections for analog terminals, according to country-specific requirements with the following features:





CSI55 LX 07/2006 615






Line resistance 2 x 235 Ohm range: 1.7 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,4 mm



DTMF/pulse dialling










15.5.2.1




The number of the AO for which the current changeover can be made is stated on the conductor path side and on the component side.

Example:


The marking *3 is to be found in each AO area, close to which are four mounting spots for two not equipped resistors (0 ohm).

These mounting spots must be connected in pairs by wire jumpers. It is important to solder two wire jumpers per AO.

616 CSI55 LX 07/2006


ASC21 board

1. Power supply component per AO

2. jointly for four AOs

3. Connector to backplane of I55

For better orientation, please turn the board so that the connector (3) is facing you and the numbers of the

AOs are legible.

The following is a section from the component side on which you can see the position of the mounting spots to be bridged.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 617





The current increase can be set on the component side for the following AOs:

AO number

Number for xx

02

05

10

13

Number for yy

04

07

12

15

618 CSI55 LX 07/2006


18

21

26

29

20

23

28

31


The following is an section from the conductor side on which you can see the position of the mounting spots to be bridged.

A different arrangement applies to AO 01 and the remaining AOs. First of all, the component arrangement for

AOs 01 and 03:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 619



In AO 01 the two bridges to be vertically soldered lie side by side.


The components arrangement is the same for the remaining AOs on which the current increase can be set on the conductor side:

620 CSI55 LX 07/2006




The current increase can be set on the conductor side for the following AOs:

AO number

Number for xx

01

#1

06

09

14

Number for yy

03

08

11

16

CSI55 LX 07/2006 621


17

22

25

30

19

24

27

32

#1 The component arrangement is different on AO 01.


Please connect (vertically) only the mounting spots which are marked accordingly!

Bridges which are soldered differently may result in serious malfunctioning.

15.5.2.2


ASC21 board, front side


S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:



622 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Right:

Right, then left:


L1


Reset board




Board is not busy



Board has gone into operation

15.5.3




ASC

EU: Europe with the following characteristics:


Power demand +5V

Interfaces

Germany, Spain, Netherlands, Switzerland, Italy, Belgium, Austria, Greece,

Mexico and Venezuela

620 mA

16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with country-specific guidelines)

Constant current supply 24 mA, switchable to 30 mA (mounting of a 0 Ohm resistance)


Range 4 km installation cable (J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,4 mm

9 km installation cable (J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm

15 km installation cable (J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,8 mm

Line lengths for Message waiting











CSI55 LX 07/2006 623



Resistance feed (const.

voltage)

2 x 400 Ohm










Power demand +5V

Interfaces

620 mA

16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with British guidelines)

Constant current supply 30 mA

Loop range 900 Ohm







15.5.3.1



Apparatus types

Tel. T40

Tel. TE51

Tel. TE91

Tel. TC91

Tel. TB510LED

DE

Tel. TB519D

Tel. TK40-20-2



1400

1000

1000

379

272

272

1100

1100

298

298

900

300

245

83


Line length [m]

1400

1000

1000

1100

600

900

300

Line length [W ]

379

272

272

298

163

245

83

Recommendation

624 CSI55 LX 07/2006



600 m

1.3 km

2.4 km








15.5.3.2



AO1

AO2

AO3

AO4

AO5

AO6

AO7

AO8

AO9

AO10

AO11

AO12

AO13

AO14

AO15

AO16

197 077

199 128

173 069

179 116

155 077

157 128

131 069

137 116

113 077

115 128

089 069

095 116

071 077

073 128

047 069

053 116

CSI55 LX 07/2006 625


626 CSI55 LX 07/2006

15.5.3.3




1. LED red

2. LED green


S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:


L1 on: flashing:

L2 off: on: flashing:



Reset board




Board is not busy



CSI55 LX 07/2006 627


off: Board in operation

15.5.4

ATA Analog Trunk Interface A


The ATA board provides the interface for up to 8 analog exchange accesses (PSTN) in accordance with country-specific guidelines. It is a universal Euro-based trunk module and can be adapted to individual countries by means of the corresponding submodule and software (level, impedances etc.).

Submodule

SIG A Signalling Unit A

SIG B Signalling Unit B

SIG C Signalling Unit C

SIG

D Signalling Unit D:

SIG E Signalling Unit E

SIG F Signalling Unit F

SIG G Signalling Unit G


Germany, Russia

Switzerland

Luxemburg

Austria

Austria

Belgium

Hungary

A mixed combination of ATA boards and submodules is not possible.


ATA board, slots

Other features


Interfaces

DTMF/pulse dialling

8 × a/b


628 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Other features





In the Integral55, an emergency operation switchover can be set up by inserting an EES1B (EES8B) board behind the ATA board; this is not possible in the Integral55 Compact.

15.5.4.1

Installation

Base Unit

The ATA board must be inserted into the slot shown below.

1. Slot for the ATA board

Details

Use on the ATA slot

Slot address:

CBI address: xx = port number

01-01-07-xx

0C hex.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 629


Connections ATA to contact strip 1

Connections see: Connections from the BU → 680.

630 CSI55 LX 07/2006

15.5.4.2



ATA board, front side


S1

S2-S9

Middle position

Left position

Switch Function

S1

S2

S3-S8

S9

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:

Right:

Left:





Reset board










Board is not busy

CSI55 LX 07/2006 631


L6

L2

L3, L4, L5,

L7, L8, L9

L10 off: on: off: on: off: on: flashing: off: on:



Board in operation

AO1 busy

AO1 not busy

AOx busy

AOx not busy

AO8 busy

AO8 not busy

15.5.5

CAS Channel Associated Signalling


The CAS board is a PCM30 interface for up to 30 B channels in accordance with CCITT. The board contains the following features:

Other features




Line signalling in channel 16 (CAS) in accordance with CCITT or country/customer specifications.

Register signalling in 30 B channels (inband) in accordance with CCITT or country/customer specifications.

Can be used as an exchange interface, connection line or special interface.

Incoming, outgoing and bothway traffic direction, can also be mixed as required



PCM30 interface configuration via board software.



15.5.5.1

Installation

Base Unit

The CAS board can be plugged into the slot shown below.

632 CSI55 LX 07/2006

1. Slot of the CAS board

Details

Slot address:


01-01-07-xx

0C hex.


CSI55 LX 07/2006 633


Connections CAS to contact strip 1


15.5.5.2

CAS-TIELINE User Program

Introduction

The CAS-TIELINE user program was developed for the I55 system on the CAS hardware platform, and is a tie-line transmission program. The 16 different tie-line transmission variants are designated E1 to E10/2.

The user data is adapted to individual requirements by means of the ICU mask.

Hardware

The CAS board (channel associated signalling) is used here. Depending on the application, the 2 MBit/s interface can be configured using the confidata (see Section “ICU mask and confidata”) with impedance of 75

W (unsymmetrical) or 120 W (symmetrical).

Depending on that, for the line connection one of the following adapter boards (only Integral 55) is then required:

• CA1B for 75 W

634 CSI55 LX 07/2006


• CA4B for 120 W

Further general information about the CAS board, in particular about the controls and denotations of the front panel, can be gathered from the appropriate paragraphs.

SoftWare

The CAS board is set up with KAD (customer specific user data) for TIELINE application. This requires the corresponding load list name for the accompanying slot address to be entered.

The necessary parameters (confidata) are then set up using the ICU editor. The corresponding ICP files and the confidata subsequently end up on the CAS board by means of a download.

Short description of Applications

The TIELINE user program supports inband signalling (DTMF dial codes, call progress tones) and line signalling (signalling channel bit a). The following applies to line bits b, c and d: bcd = 101. Only changes to bit

’a’ will be processed by the user program. Changes to the bcd bits will be ignored.

16 different signalling plans are produced from the available signal stock. These plans can be selected using the confidata and always apply to all 30 connecting circuits (AO).

In principle all the AOs are set up for both-way throughput.

Line signalling will not be carried out if all the signals appear as pulsed signals.

DTMF (dual tone multi-frequency dialling) and pulse dialling are suitable dialling systems.

The suffix dialling facility is guaranteed for the entire duration of an outgoing call, and for a predefined period of an incoming call.

If the criterion “message” is identified, an active call will be cancelled and the digits memory will be deleted.

The elegibility or inelegibility of a line can be set up by the confidata seperately for incoming and outgoing

AOs.

In the same way, a 425 Hz continuous tone can be connected to the switching matrix as a proceed-to-select signal for outgoing traffic, or a 425 Hz busy tone to the line for incoming traffic according to configuration.

Up to 10 digits can be programmed for a destination number in outgoing traffic. The destination number will be chosen automatically according to the preset timeout when “elegible” or “inelegible” in the absence of the

“dialling” message.

If “elegible”; incoming “dialling” messages are ignored once the timeout has ended. If “inelegible”; they will always be ignored. The suffix dialling facility is also guaranteed for the previous destination number when in call status.

Outgoing DTMF signals which are “called through” will be identified, and incoming “dialling” messages are subsequently ignored.

An area code may be programmed, which will be relayed to the GCU global control unit during incoming seizure once the proceed-to-select criterion (signal, time) has been met.

Where ”dial” or ”message” information is absent, the release which has been initialized by the user program’s watchdog exists neither for incoming nor for outgoing traffic.

If a fault occurs, trouble signalling to the opposite side can be activated using confidata.

In the same way, an unblocking function can be set up for each connecting circuit: When active (blocking-n = on), and with the front panel switches TBS (total blocking switch) and TBS-N (total blocking switch minus n) switched on, the corresponding connecting circuit will not be blocked.

Specification of Inband Signals

The available DTMF transmitters and receivers are set out in accordance with CEPT recommendation T/CS

46-02.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 635


The tone identifier will certainly operate in the range of 350 to 500 Hz with -30 dBm0.

The tone generator supplies a 425 Hz frequency with a transmission level of -3 dBm0. In outgoing traffic, it can be sent to the switching matrix as a proceed-to-select signal (continuous tone). In incoming traffic, it can be connected to the line as a busy tone (German rhythm).

Synchronization

The CAS board can generally be used as the synchronous clock supplier for synchronization purposes. In the

TIELINE application, however, this is only meaningful if no digital exchange interfaces or tie lines are present.

. This is the reason for the default setting of “No synchronous clock”. This setting can be changed via the configuration data.

15.5.5.3

Identifying the Operation Phase

As described above, the boot software controls

• initialization,

• test and download procedures after a reset and

• indicates various statuses and possible faults by means of the LED’s on the front panel.

If no faults are found and all GCU messages (test messages, “startup ready” etc) have been received, L1 will flash eleven times and L9, L7, L8, L15 and L16 will go out, indicating that the operation phase has been reached.

15.5.5.4


The functions of the switches and LED’s on the front panel differ in boot phase from those in operation phase.

Following a reset, the boot software carries out initialization, test and download procedures, and indicates various statuses as well as possible faults via the LEDs on the front panel.

If no faults are found and all necessary GCU messages (test messages, “ready for startup” etc.) have been received, the CAS board will reach the operation phase, where user software is put into effect.

636 CSI55 LX 07/2006



S1

S2

S3

Middle position

Middle position

Middle position

Switch Function

S1

S2

S3

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Left:

Middle:

Right:

Preparatory disabling (TBS) *

Neutral/release

Reset board


Preparatory disabling (TBS-N) *

Neutral

No function

No function

No function

No function

* With S1 (TBS) in the left position and S2 (TBS-N) in the middle position, all 30 ports will be blocked.

With S1 (TBS) and S2 (TBS-N) in the left position, all ports outlined in the configuration data will not be blocked.

If S1 (TBS) is in the middle position, all 30 ports will not be blocked, irrespective of the position of S2

(TBS-N).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 637



L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

L11

L12

L13

L14

L15

L16

TSL

ESY

LOS

LOF

CRC

RFR

ISU1

ISU3

RDL

MSG

AIS

LMF

BIT

RMF

ISU2

ISU4

Total status LED

External synchronization

No signal

Frame failure

CRC4 test fault

Frame failure at remote side

**

**

LED reset/download

C-bus message

Alarm identification signal

Superframe failure

Increased bit error ratio

Superframe failure at remote side

**

**

** The denotation of the LEDs depends on the application (display of R2 register, DTMF receiver/transmitter, tone transmitter/receiver)

15.5.6

DECT21 ICU for DECT-Applications 21


The DECT21 board is used to connect the Radio Base Station RM 588, material number 4.998.001.296, to the CSI55.

It carries out an automatic run time measurement. The manual measurement of the individual routes up to 1 km is not applicable as long as no repeater is connected between.

Other features


Power demand +5V

Interfaces


1100 mA

8 UPD interface for RBS

One UPD interface physically corresponds to 2 UPN interfaces.

The ADPCM (Adaptive-Differential-Pulse-Code-Modulation, 32 kbit/s) conversion is carried out on the board.

One of the two D channels is used for the transmission of synchronization information between the

DECT21 board and the RBS.





638 CSI55 LX 07/2006


DECT21 board, component side

Line lengths

Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm


Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm and UPN repeater

15.5.6.1

Installation

Base Unit

The DECT21 board must be inserted into the slot shown below.

1.0 km

2.8 km

2.0 km

1. Slot for the DECT21 board

Details

Use on the slot of the DECT21

CSI55 LX 07/2006 639


Slot address:


01-01-07-xx

0C hex.

Connections DECT21 to contact strip 1

The RBSs are connected physically via ports 00 to 07.


640 CSI55 LX 07/2006

15.5.6.2



DECT21 board, front side

Switch Function

S1

S2

Right:

Middle:

Left:

Right:

Middle:

Left:


L1 off: on: on: L2

L3

L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

L11 flashing:

CSI55 LX 07/2006

Reset board

Normal position

No function

Yet to be defined

Normal position

Yet to be defined

Board is not busy

Module is busy in terms of exchange functions

Synch. Master









FP download active

641


L12

L13

L14

L15

L16

L17

L18

L19

L20

L21

L22

L23

L24 off: on: flashing: flashing:

Yet to be defined

Board in operation



All 30 B-channels are busy









SW IDM in ICU activated

Yet to be defined

15.5.7

DSPF Digital Signal Processing Function


The DSPF as the basic board accommodates the ASM3 announcement module. The announcement module serves for recording and playback of ACD spoken announcements and for hotel applications. Depending on the application the DSPF can be equipped with up to:

4 ASM3

2 ASM3 for access to 128 time slots for access to 64 time slots in I55 in I55C

Other features


Power demand +5V


850 mA

For more detailed information about configuration with ASM3 please refer to the service manual.

15.5.7.1

Inserting the submodule

The used ASM3 modules are inserted in the submodule slots “submodule 1” - “submodule 2” of the DSPF.

642 CSI55 LX 07/2006


DSPF board, component side

1. Submodule 1

2. Submodule 2

The position must correspond to the setting in the confidata. The following allocation must be observed:

Labelling Labelling on the DSPF board

0

1

“Submodule number” parameter in the ICU Editor

Submodule 1

Submodule 2

SUB1

SUB2

15.5.7.2

Installation

Base Unit

The DSPF board can be inserted in the slots shown below.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 643


1. Slots of the DSPF board

15.5.7.3

Time slot management

The Integral 55 Compact is designed so that the DSPF can only be plugged into an uneven slot.

Each ASM3 submodule represents an ICU. The DSPF has access to a total of 64 time slots in the Integral 55

Compact. It can realize a maximum of two ICUs. The ICU of the board’s physical slot of the (time slots 0-31) logs on with ICU type DSFM (DSPF master). The further ICU is realized on the same hardware by

logical

address entries (time slots 32-63) in the CBI. These log on with the ICU type DSFS (DSPF slave).

The configuration of a second DSPF in the same module is not expedient.

Allowing for the above conditions, the two submodule slots and thus each of the two ICUs can be assigned to an application (ACD or HOTCOM).

Prior to operation of the PABX the DSFM and DSFS ICUs are assigned with the CAT application and during operation with the service and administration programs with ICU editor.

This module has no external connections.

644 CSI55 LX 07/2006

15.5.7.4



DSPF board, front panel

Meaning of the switch on the front panel of the DSPF board


ICUs can be controlled via the S1 front panel switch as follows:

S1 Reset and blocking switch

Middle position

Left position

Right position

Left position after board reset

All ICUs in operating status

All ICUs in preparatory disabling

All ICUs in reset

Master ICU DSMF (DSPF board) receives a forced ICU download. After commencing the loading process, the switch must be returned to the middle position.

Meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the DSPF board


ICUs is displayed via the two front panel LEDs L1 and L10 according to the following pattern:

The display appears according to priority, i.e., if several functions of the scheme are represented by one LED, the one with the highest priority is implemented. Prio 1 is the highest priority, and prio 5 the lowest. In the cases with priority 1, the board is still in the reset or download phase, whereby the additional ICUs (DSFS) are not yet active.

L1

flashing 5Hz At least 1 ICU is still in startup, waiting for “Switching On” message flashing 1

Hz

All ICUs are preparatory disabled, the board is removeable

Prio 2

Prio 3

CSI55 LX 07/2006 645


L2

an (in) At least 1 ICU has a seizure in terms of switching technology in at least one channel.

All ICUs (entire board) are in reset processing (if L10 is also on) off All ICUs are in a resting state with their ports, the board is not occupied flashing 5Hz At least 1 ICU is still waiting for commissioning

Master ICU DSFM (DSPF board) ICU Download in progress

/ flashing 1

Hz an (in) off

Master ICU DSFM (DSPF board) in reset processing (if L1 is also on)

Master ICU DSMF (DSPF board) Programming procedure in

ICU download

All ICUs in operation

Prio 4

Prio 1

Prio 5

Prio 2

Prio 1

Prio 3

Prio 1

Prio 1

Prio 4

15.5.8

DT21 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 1


The DT21 board provides one configurable S2Minterface.

Other features


Power demand +5V


400 mA

Interfaces a S2Minterface (CO (T2) - or Tie (TIE)), 120 Ohm symmetric or

75 Ohm asymmetric.


Driver for optical interface


Switchable digital attenuation for speech connections (B-channels), adjustable via the ICU Editor

2.048MHz pulse output


V.24 Test interface (front panel)





Cable adapter

if used in I55 if used in I55C

Possible adapter boards:

Power supply NT

CA1B, CA4B, OFA2B, OFAS via ESBx none, direct connection on front side

Power supply NT via external plug power supply (material number

27.4402.1056).

646 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Ranges

if used in I55


Wire interfaces (CA1B or CA4B)

120 Ohm symmetric

75 Ohm coax

Optical interface (OFA1B)

0.9 km

1.8 km

Installation cable

TF cable

1.5 km monomode cable 9/125 micrometer, 11 dB max. attenuation for entire optical path (e.g. max. 20 km at 0.4 dB/km and 7 plug connections 0.4 dB/plug) if used in I55C


Wire interfaces (direct connection on the front side)

120 Ohm symmetric 0.9 km

1.8 km

Installation cable

TF cable

15.5.8.1

Installation

Base Unit

The DT21 board can be plugged into the slot shown below.

1. Slot for the DT21 board

Details

Slot address:


01-01-07-xx

0C hex.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 647


Connections DT21 (slot for DECT21) to contact strip 1

The connections for DECT21 are located in the first 16 block of the Western socket (RJ45) Thus the trunk line interface of the DT21 is also there.

Illustration of a 16 block:

648 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Front view of 16 x RJ45 jacks

The two DECT21 connections for the first RBS stations are in jack 8.

Connection of jack 8

Wire DECT A1 leads to contact no.: 4 (shown in green)

Wire DECT B1 leads to contact no.: 5 (shown in green)

This corresponds to lines TX+ and TX- when a DT21 is used

Wire DECT A2 leads to contact no.: 6 (shown in yellow)

Wire DECT B2 leads to contact no.: 3 (shown in yellow)

That corresponds to wires RX+ and RX- when using a DT21

CSI55 LX 07/2006 649


15.5.8.2



1. V.24 Test plug

1 = not assigned

2 = TXD

3 = RXD

4 = not assigned

5 = GND

6 = D channel data upstream

7 = D channel data downstream

8 = Clock burst 2.048 MHz

9 = +5V


S1

S2

Neutral position

Neutral position

650 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Switch Function

S1

S2 links:

Mean:

Right:

Right, then left:

Left, then right:

Mean:

Right:

L4

L5

L6

L7


L1

L2

L3

On:

Flashing: off:

On:

On:

L8

L9

L10

L11

L12

On:

On:

On:

On:

Flashing: off:

On:

On:

On:

On:

On:



Reset board


Report (fault statistic message to the system console) The switch must be moved back to the middle position after use (2

MHz clock output off) or to the right (2 MHz clock output on).

Normal operating mode / 2 MHz clock output off

2 MHz clock output on



Board is not busy


Remote Alarm Indication RAI (opposite side reporting fault status)

Alarm Indication Signal AIS (opposite side reporting ”Out of

Order”)


Rx E bit errors



Board in operation




Loss of Framing LOF (loss of frame synchronization)

The LED signals an activated debug monitoring. LED 12 is used as indicator as this debugging applies to the real time function of the module. It is possible to activate the debugging with a connected terminal and finally removing the terminal then the debugging remains on and unaffected.

In order to connect an IDM to the front panel, an optional component must be inserted on the

DT21, reference number: 49.9801.4247.

15.5.9

HSCBO High Speed Computer Board Office


HSCBO (High Speed Computer Board Office) is a computer board (central system control) with dynamic RAM.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 651


Features







C-bus interface


2x V.24 interfaces (not insulated)

Downloadable

2x interfaces for Compactflash memory cards

Other features


The Compact Flash can be replaced during operation.

15.5.9.1


with 1 * Compact Flash (HGS)

1. Position of the control elements and LEDs

Control elements and LEDs of the HSCBO

HSCBO board, front side


652 CSI55 LX 07/2006


S1

S3

Middle position lower position

Switch Function

S1

S3


Middle:

Left:

Operating status


Right: Monitor interruption (TENOBUG start), keying

Hard Disk Change Request (HDCHR) below: above:

Operating status: PC-CARD-ATA-interfaces in operation

Service position: Removing and inserting the HGS(s)


L2

L3

L4

L5

L7- L10




Indicates that the system terminal can be connected to the first V.24 interface (service)


0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

1

1

L7

1

1

1

0

2

1

4

3

6

5

8

7

12

11

10

9

No.

15

14

13

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

L8

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

L9

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

L10 Phase name

1 Start reset phase

0

1

Test flash-PROM

Test QUICC




Test dynamic RAM

0


End reset phase








CSI55 LX 07/2006 653


1 = LED on

0 = LED off

15.5.10

IPN Intelligent Private Network


The board IPN module enables the operation of intelligent private networks between systems (CSI55, I33) by means of data transmission in the speech channel of a digital dial-up line.

Other features


Up to 15 IPN connections are possible per board.




The board must operate in conjunction with an ISDN exchange board.

15.5.10.1

Installation

Base Unit

The IPN board can be inserted in the slots shown below.

1. Slots of the IPN board

Details:

The IPN board has no connection via the Western socket.

654 CSI55 LX 07/2006

15.5.10.2



S3

S4

S5

S6

IPN board, front side

Switch Position

S1

S2

Left:

Right:

Left:

Left:

Left:

Left:



L2

L3 flashing:

1x

2x

3x

4x

CSI55 LX 07/2006


Reset board

Board status display not possible at a terminal for testing purposes, as Sub-D plug is not equipped

Test

Further status display of the board is not possible at a terminal for testing purposes, as Sub-D plug is not equipped

Protocol output ’on’

No function

At least 1 connecting circuit is occupied

All connecting circuits are blocked

Operating status

No function defective DSPA test

Reserved

Checksum failure

X-RAM defect

Y-RAM defect

655


L4

L5

L6

L7

L8

L9

L10

9x

10x

11x

13x

14x

5x

6x

7x

8x off: on: off: on: flashing: off: on: flashing: off:

12x on: flashing: off:

SSI defect

Illegal instruction

Receive SSI with overflow

Transmit SSI with underrun

Stack overflow

Illegal host message received

Field 2 info has been received before

External RAM error

External ROM error

Operating status

No function

At least one occupancy is active (occupancy summation display)

Operating status

Reset status


Operating status

Logging switched on

See L3 function

Operating status

No function

Main program runtime > 125 µs


blocked


defective

Operating status

15.5.11

MBO Motherboard Office


The MBO board (Motherboard Office) combines in the BU the functional units of the central functions (CF22) and part of the analogue and digital interfaces (max. 40 port). For cost reduction of the MBO (number of layers), the digital signalling processors that belong to the CF22 have been passed to the DSPO submodule.

Together with the HSCBO board and the PSO they constitute the fundamental components of the I55-Compact system. Via the adapter module SBAO the VOIP and DECT21 boards can be connected to the system.

Features


External synchronization via network nodes (S0, S2M)


656 CSI55 LX 07/2006















Conferences


Call number ID

8 DTMF transmitters for CLIP (call number indication on analogue terminals for incoming calls)

With basic equipment, the circuit of the analogue digital Mixboards ADM contains the function of:

• 24 digital UPN interfaces as subscriber poarts

• four ports for S0 or T0 for subscribers or exchange lines (ADM submodule 4, STSM, built in, port 12 through 15)

• four ports for analogue subscribers, a/b (ADM submodule 1, ABSM, built in, port 0 to 3)

In addition, two ADM submodules, from the following list, can be plugged on this port, according to the requirements or configuration (see the following figure).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 657


Submodule

STSM

UPSM

ABSM

Features four S0/T0 interfaces as exchange, permanent connection or subscriber connection four UPN interfaces as subscriber ports four analogue subscriber ports (a/b)

2nd slot for subboard 2 (SUB2, port 4-7)

3rd slot for submodule 3 (SUB3, port 8-11)

For the ADM board the ”Call Reference Length - (CRL)” can be set to a length of one or two bytes for the whole board by means of the ICU editor. The call reference length of 2 bytes is required for QSIG network connection with some third-party PBX. If this setting is used, all ports have CRL=2 bytes no matter which protocol is selected. This led to the fact that it was not possible to connect subscribers / lines with the protocols TN1R6, 1TR6, DKZN, VN3, NI2 and ETSI with CRL=1 to this ADM board.

As of software version ADM0900.ICL / ADM00009.ICP of the ICU, the behaviour of the ADM board and of the Integral 55 Compact-ADM port has changed. The CRL setting is only adopted for the ports of the board which uses the ”QSIG” protocol. For all other protocolos the call reference length will always be CRL=1.

This makes it possible to configure QSIG ports with CRL=2 for networks with third-party systems, while on other ports with the protocols TN1R6, 1TR6, DKZN, VN3, NI2 and ETSI the CRL=1 is used.

Other features

Countries of application Application in all countries


Interfaces Standard 24 times UPN

658 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Other features

4 times

4 times a/b

S0

Optional (max. 2 submodules)

4 times

4 times

4 times

UPN a/b

S0




In case of logging adapter plug RJ45/D-Sub, material number: 49.9905.9171, has to be used.

In conjunction with ports of the ADM and DUPN protocol interfaces for boards on the PBX front side.

15.5.11.1

Details

ADM on MBO

Slot address:


03.01.01-xx

08 hex.

Connections port ADM on MB0 to contact strip 3

CSI55 LX 07/2006 659


DUPN on MBO

Slot address:


05.01.01-xx

0A hex.

Connections port DUPN on MB0 to contact strip 1 (port) and contact strip 2

15.5.11.2

Current setting

Changes on the MBO are to be executed carefully and using suitable tools because work on a fundamental component is performed.

660 CSI55 LX 07/2006


The circuit of the analog/digital Mixboards ADM includes the ABSM, which realises four ports for analogue subscribers a/b, with a constant power supply of 24 mA. A current changeover to 30 mA is possible. It is implemented per port, connecting the soldering points shown under 1.

Section of the MBO, position of the ports for analogue subscribers

CSI55 LX 07/2006 661


1. Per port (AO) in case of current changeover to 30 mA, insert bridge.

Section of the MBO, soldering points for one port (AO)

Other features


2 x 475 Ohm




662 CSI55 LX 07/2006

15.5.11.3




Control elements and LEDs of the MBO

Switch block and LED block of the CF22


S1 Reset switch

Middle:

Below (left):

Above (right):

Operating status


Reset of the board, keying

On the HSCBO board the switch for the memory test does not exist. In order to be able to execute a restart by means of the switch, the S1 switch of the MBO must be turned upwards

(reset of the CF22). As a result, the HSCBO also executes a restart.


L1 (green) Power Good on: off:

All required operating voltages are present

Failure of one operating voltage

CSI55 LX 07/2006 663


L2 (green)

L3 (red)

L4 (yellow)

CLKUSYN on:

MSMC on: flashing: off:

MANK on:






MSMC active

Master network node


LED block of the DUPN

L1 (green)

L2 (red) on: flashing: off: on: flashing: off:

LED block of the ADM

L1 (green)

L2 (red) on: flashing: off: on: flashing: off:

LED block of the EU (Extension Unit)

Not yet implemented

LED block of the SPY

Not yet implemented


All AOs blocked after preparatory disabling (VSP)

Board is not busy



Board in operation


All AOs blocked after preparatory disabling (VSP)

Board is not busy



Board in operation

15.5.12

SBAO System Board Adapter Office


The SBAO board (System Board Adapter Office) is a small backplane which provides two connecting circuit slots with most signals and tensions used in the I55. It is built in the BU.

15.5.13

VOIP Voice over IP Board


664 CSI55 LX 07/2006


For the VOIP board and all additional information for setup, dimensioning etc. you can find a detailed description under Notes concerning VoIP.

It is shown once again in the figure below.

VOIP board, component side

1. Speech compression / packetizing

2. Echo cancellation

The basic board VOIP (material number: 49.9903.7976) has 6 slots for SOM-2 submodules, with two DSP chips each(Digital Signal Processing Small Outline Module 2, material number: 49.9903.7980) in order to increase the number of DSP chips used in the system. These DSP chips have two functions:

• Voice compression, in order to pack voice information from the highway into data packets and thus to compress the speech data when desired (from G.711 64 kbit/s to G.729A 8kbit/s)

• Echo cancellation for the voice connection from the IP terminal to the ISDN/analog terminals

The upper three slots (in the centre of the board) are used for voice compression and packetizing, while the lower three slots are used for echo cancellation.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 665


Due to the very high cost of DSP chips, the number of SOM-2 submodules must be selected in accordance with the customer configuration (see calculation of the number of SOM-2 submodules).

In addition, 4 DSP chips are soldered on the VoIP board. These are responsible for central functions such as announcements, mixers, and tone input, and support a fixed number of channels for voice compression and echo cancellation.

The VOIP board connection to the peripherals is done via the AEV24B cable adapter.

Other features

Application Integration of the CSI55 extensions into the existing IP-based data network environment of the customer (LAN, WAN, Corporate Network)

Power demand +5V 1800 mA additionally per SOM-2: 240 mA

15.5.13.1

Installation

Base Unit

The VOIP board is always inserted into the upper slot (slot 01).

1. Slot for the VoIP board

In the Integral 55 Compact the slots are addressed in such a way that the neighbouring slots always remain free. Therefore, the VOIP board can occupy 64 channels if required.

Details

Slot address:

CBI address:

01.01.01-11 to 01.01.01-62

01.01.01-00-S to 01.01.01-62-S

02.01.01-00 to 02.01.01-62

02.01.01-00-S to 02.01.01-62-S

06 hex.

666 CSI55 LX 07/2006


1. V24. Console of the VOIP board

Connections VOIP to contact strip 1


15.5.13.2


In the figure below the view of the front panel and the funktions of the switches and LEDs.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 667


View of the front panel


S1 Left:

Middle:

Right:

Right, then left:


L1 on: flashing: off: on: L2 POWER

GOOD)

L3 (ETH Link) on:

L4 (ETH

10/100) on: flashing: L5 (ETH active)

L6


668



Reset


Module is busy in terms of exchange functions (active layer

3 connection)


Board is not busy

All voltages (5V, 3.3V, DSP on-board VCC 1.8V and

PQUICC Vcore currently 2.5V) are within their permitted ranges of tolerance

Ethernet Link has been established

100Mbit transmission is in process (SPEED)

Activity on the Ethernet (transmitting and receiving ends)



Board in operation

Status LED 2/3

CSI55 LX 07/2006


L8

L9

L10 on: on: on:

Status LED 2/2

Status LED 2/1

Status LED 2/0

15.6

Power supply

In principle, the Integral 55 Compact can be connected to the mains voltage

230 V, 50 Hz and 60 Hz. The fuse protection for every electric circuit consists of a C Type 16 A slow acting automatic circuit breaker. It is a separate electric circuit (phase and fuse).

As power supply module the PSO is available. This device is designed for direct supply.

15.6.1

PSO Power Supply Office


The PSO board (Power Supply Office) provides the required voltages for the Integral 55 Compact. Additionally, two module fans are connected to it.

It has the following features:


• Jamming immunity input 4 kV (1.2/50).

• Delayed disconnection of the -48V output in the case of overload/short-circuit


• Board passport

• I2C-bus connection

Technical data

Voltages and Frequencies

Mains voltage

Mains frequency

Reduced voltage

AC ringing voltage

230V; ±10 % (single-phase alternating current)

47 - 63Hz

+5,1V, -5V, -48V

72 V

Ringing voltage frequency 47 - 63Hz

Protection class 1 (in accordance with VDE 0100)



Device Input Side, power and currents

Pprim 138W

Iprim 0.6A

CSI55 LX 07/2006 669


Device Output Side, power and currents

P 102W

+5.1V

10A

-5V

-48V

72V

0.2A

1A, included fan

0,04A

All outputs are short-circuit-proof.

In the embedded document on

PSO you can find more information about the product.

15.6.1.1

Replacement

If necessary, the power supply module is replaced on site.

Proceed as follows:

1. Withdraw the power cable on the IEC power plug.

2. Remove the IEC power plug from the rear side of the housing (two screws).

3. Open the unit (refer to openingof housing).

4. Remove the cover plate from the PSO (1 screw).

5. Pull the connecting cable from the PSO (two blower- and 1 connecting cable).

6. Loosen fixing screws (five screws).

7. Loosen earthing screw (one screw marked with the earthing symbol).

670 CSI55 LX 07/2006


8. Remove PSO and replace.

9. To reassemble, follow this procedure in reverse.

Ensure good contact between the housing floor and the PSO circuit board by means of the earthing screw, so that the requirements of EN 60950 have been fulfilled (earth conductor to housing

<

/= 0.1 ohm).

Housing open → 602

15.6.2

PE or FPE

The Integral 55 Compact can be connected with either a PE or an FPE.

PE

The Integral 55 Compact can be protected by fixed earthing conductor (PE) with lockable plug and cable:

• Length 3m, part no. 4,998,045,750

• Length 5m, part no. 4,998,069,828

By this alternative, connection of the Integral 55 Compact to the equipotential bonding strip via a separate copper wire is not necessary. The main application is likely to be in the form of table and upright units.

FPE

If an FPE is available, this can be used. The main application in this case will be wall and cabinet mounting, althought this does not rule out the table and upright unit.

For connecting the Integral 55 Compact to the mains supply use the power cable with cut off PE:

• Length 3m, material number: 4.999.079.215

• Length 5m, material number: 4.999.079.453

The Integral 55 Compact may only be connected with a variant (PE or FPE).

Loop formation!

15.6.2.1

Connection of the PE

Insert the earthing pin plug of the connecting cable into the Integral 55 Compact.

If you insert the earth plug into the receptacle and press the black lock, the plug will be locked.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 671


1. Wall socket

2. Lock (black)

3. Earth plug, lockable with cable

Putting the system into operation.

Unlocking and pulling the earth plug

Shut down the system.

Use a screwdriver to pull out the black lock approx. 10 mm.

The plug is unlocked and can be removed.

672 CSI55 LX 07/2006


1. Wall socket

2. Lock (black)

3. Screwdriver

15.6.2.2

Connection of the FPE

Secure the earthing wire with a cable fastener onto the lug of the housing (1.).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 673


Clamp the insulated end of the stripped copper wire (FPE=green/yellow, >/= 4 mm2) in the terminal (2.) at the back of the housing.

Check that the FPE on the equipotential bonding strip and PABX has been properly connected!

When you place the Integral 55 Compact into the cabinet, a 2,5 mm earth conductor2 with wire sleeves on both ends is available. The earth conductor is a delivered together with the cabinets.

15.7

View of module in the ISM

The module view shows a sample configuration with VoIP and DECT21 boards.

674 CSI55 LX 07/2006


15.8

Commissioning

Make sure that all cables have been secured.

Cover the free slots of the front AO boards with slot covers.

Insert the safety plug of the power supply cord into the earthing contact socket provided for the purpose.


Switching on with ACBO module (= Advanced Computer Board Office)

The module is switched on and loads the programs in less than 15 minutes. It is ready for operation when

• the yellow LEDs L7 to L10 are off,

• the green LED L3 flashes and

• the green LED L2 is lit.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 675


Switching on with HSCBO module (= High Speed Computer Board Office)

The module is switched on and loads the programs in less than 10 minutes. It is ready for operation when

• the yellow LEDs L7 to L10 are off and

• the green LED L2 is flashing.

15.9

Cable network

Join the cables from the connecting devices at the front side(s) of the Integral 55 Compact with the patch field or main distribution frame using the cable set.

15.9.1

Cross-connect cable

Two cable versions are available for connecting the AO ports on the front side(s) of the Integral 55 Compact with the main distribution frame and a Y adapter for the RBS port:

15.9.1.1

Cable with open end

Cable with solid copper wires, like installation cable J-Y(ST)Y, must be used for connecting the Integral 55

Compact to a conventional main distribution frame (e.g. plug-and-cut method).

8x WE8/4 cable with open end

The cable with material number 4.999.020.564 conforms to requirements and fits all connecting devices. This also applies to an S2M interface when a DT21 is plugged into the BU instead of the DECT21.

676 CSI55 LX 07/2006


External ring (1.)

1. RD/BL

2. WH/YE

3. WH/GN

4. WH/BN

5. WH/BK

6. WH/BL

7. WH/YE

8. WH/GN

9. WH/BN

10. WH/BK

11. WH/BL

Internal ring (2.)

12. RD/YE

13. WH/GN

14. WH/BN

15. WH/BL

16. WH/BL

Cable 8xWE8/4 (16x2x0,6) 5m, material number: 4.999.020.564, with assignment

CSI55 LX 07/2006 677


W

E 1

1

6

7

8

4

5

2

3 free free

WH (P2)

RD (P1)

BL (P1)

YE (P2) free free

W

E 2

1

6

7

8

4

5

2

3 free free

WH (P4)

WH (P3)

GN (P3)

BN (P4) free free

W

E 3

1

6

7

8

4

5

2

3 free free

WH (P6)

WH (P5)

BK (P5)

BL (P6) free free

W

E 4

1

6

7

8

4

5

2

3 free free

WH (P8)

WH (P7)

YE (P7)

GN (P8) free free

W

E 5

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

8 free free

WH (P10)

WH (P9)

BN (P9)

BK (P10) free free

W

E 6

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

8 free free

WH (P12)

WH (P11)

BL (P11)

YE (P12) free free

W

E 7

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

8 free free

WH (P14)

WH (P13)

GN (P13)

BN (P14) free free

W

E 8

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

8 free free

WH (P16)

WH (P15)

BK (P15)

BL (P16) free free e.g. P11 = pair 11

Assignment of the WE plugs

Cable WE8/8, with open end

The cable with material number 4.999.089.690 (length 10m) is used when

• a T0exchange line (ADM board with STSM) at a NTBA or

• the ATA board with eight exchange lines is inserted in the BU must be connected.

678 CSI55 LX 07/2006


Ring (1.)

1. RD/BL

2. WH/YE

3. WH/GN

4. WH/BN

Cable WE8/8 (10m) with assignment, material number: 4.999.089.690

W

E 1

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

WH (P4)

BN (P4)

WH (P2)

RD (P1)

BL (P1)

YE (P2)

WH (P3)

GN (P3) e.g. P4 = pair 4

Assignment of the WE plug

Connection of the RBS

For the DECT connections in the BU are required (see RBS connection → 680). It splits the two connections.

Alternately, in the BU it is also possible to use the WE8/8 cable with open end for wiring the DECT connections.

15.9.1.2

Patch Cable

The following connecting cables are used for the connection of the connecting circuits (RJ45 sockets on the front side(s) of the Integral 55 Compact) to an main distributor made up of patch panels:

Patch cords Length

1m

3m

5m

Material number

4.998.051.621

4.999.045.218

4.999.048.490

CSI55 LX 07/2006 679


10m 4.998.055.426

Y adapters are required for the DECT connections (see RBS connection → 680). It splits the two connections.

Exception!

When a T0 exchange line must be wired, the WE8/8 cable with open end (length 10m), material number 4.999.089.690 must be used and connected to the NTBA.

15.9.1.3

RBS connection

Note that at the DECT21 sockets, in case of direct connection of the cable, only 1 RBS can be operated per plug. If both RBS connections of one socket are to be used, between cable plug and connection socket, the

Y-adapter 8/8 to 2x 4/8, material number: 4,999,028,515 is to be used.

The adapter splits the two connections.

The pinning of the RJ45 sockets for the RBSs on the front side results in the pinning of the RJ45-Y-adapter

8/8 to 2x 4/8.

15.9.2

Connections from the BU

The connections of the connecting circuits are located on the front side of the Integral 55 Compact

680 CSI55 LX 07/2006


1. Contact strip 1

2. Contact strip 2

3. Contact strip 3

RJ45 socket pin assignment

On the contact strip 1 are present:

• Protocol interface of the ADM board

• Protocol interface of the DUPN board

• Protocol interface of the VOIP board

• Ethernet connection of the VOIP board

• Connections for eight Radio Base Stations

1. RBS 0/1

2. RBS 2/3

3. RBS 4/5

4. RBS 6/7 or at 1st the S2Mconnection for the DT21 board or at 1st and 2nd eight analog exchange lines of the ATA board or at 1st S2Mconnection of the CAS board

• Connections for the last eight UPN subscribers

CSI55 LX 07/2006 681


• Connections of DECT21 (RBS/S2M) or DT21

Connections of DECT21 (RBS0) or DT21

Wire DECT A1 leads to contact no.: 4

Wire DECT B1 leads to contact no.: 5

This corresponds to lines TX+ and TX- when a DT21 is used wire DECT A2 leads to contact no.: 6


This corresponds to lines RX+ and RX- when a DT21 is used

Connections of DECT21 (RBS1)






• Connections for the first 16 UPN subscribers


• Connections for four analogue a/b subscribers

• Connections for four S0 or T0 for subscribers or exchange lines and optionally (depending on the equipment of the two slots of the ADM with submodules UPSM, ABSM or

STSM)

• Connections for four UPN subscribers

• Connections for four analogue a/b subscribers or

• Connections for four S0 or T0 for subscribers or exchange lines

682 CSI55 LX 07/2006

Front views

RJ45 sockets

Front view of RJ45 sockets from above


Front view of RJ45 sockets from below

Signal assignment

Board

(Submodule)

Signal at RJ45 pin

ADM

(ABSM)

1 2 3 4

GND a

ADM

(STSM)

A2 A1

5 b

6

B1 B2

7 8

Remarks

A1/B1 = S0 Tx, A2/B2 = S0 Rx

CSI55 LX 07/2006 683


Board

(Submodule)

Signal at RJ45 pin

ADM

(UPSM)

GND A

DUPN

DECT21

DT21

ATA

CAS

A4 B4 B2 a4 b4

B2 b2

B2

A

B

B

GND

A1 B1 A2 A3

A1 B1 a1

A1 b1

B1

A2 a2

A2 a3

Remarks

B3 4 x UP0 per RJ45 for 2 x RBS b3

A1/B1 = TX+/TX- (S2M), A2/B2=

RX+/RX- (S2M)

2 x 4 AOs per RJ45

A1/B1 = TX+/TX- (S2M), A2/B2=

RX+/RX- (S2M)

VOIP [ETH] Tx P Tx M Rx P *1 *1 Rx M *1 *1 *1 Configuration see below

VOIP [V24]

ADM [V24]

DUPN

[V24]

HSCBO

[V24]

ACBO

[V24]

TxD RxD

TxD RxD

TxD RxD

TxD

TxD

RxD

RxD

GND

GND

GND

DSR GND DTR

DSR GND DTR

CTS

CTS

RTS

RTS

V24 signal level (no TTL)





*1

684 CSI55 LX 07/2006

16 Index

33HU, 61

42HU 500mm, 64

42HU 730mm, 65

42HU-can be disassembled, 66

19, 59, 94

About this Manual, 14, 590

ABSM, 293

ABSM1, 294

ACB, 162, 221

ACBO, 610

ACSM, 298

ADM, 301, 381

AEV24B, 230

Air conditioning, 82

ALSM, 307

ALSMF, 308

ALSMH, 309

Analog interfaces, 292

ASC2, 310

ASC21, 314, 615

ASCxx, 233, 324, 623

ASM3, 171

ATA, 330, 628

ATA2, 333

ATB, 336

ATC, 338

ATLC, 341

AV24B, 239

B3 module, 116

B3 module (multi-module), 48

BA, 579

BA Board Adapter, 579

Base Unit, 598

CSI55 LX 07/2006

16 Index

Block diagram of R1 rack, 160

Board overview, 220, 292, 380, 502

Boards, 156, 609

BS Confidata:, 517

BVT2, 387

CA, 240

CA1B, 242, 391

CA2B, 243, 392

CA3B, 243, 393

CA3B/T, 244, 394

CA4B, 245, 395

CA5B, 245, 395

CA6B, 246, 396

Cable network, 545, 676

CARUB, 248

CAS, 397, 632

CBI, 172

CBT, 580

CBT C-Bus Tester, 580

CF22, 173, 248

CF2E, 180, 256

CL2M, 188, 401

Commissioning, 675

Configuration Examples, 565

Configurations, 158

Connections from CSI, 545

Connections to V.24 Interfaces, 18

Connector technology and signaling, 220

Contact occupation of the modular plug connection,

567

Control, Central Functions and Transport, 161

DCON, 403

DDID, 355

Delivery and transportation, 16

685

16 Index

Digital interfaces, 380

DS02, 418

DS03, 421

DSPF, 190, 642

DT0, 424

DUP03, 430

DUPN, 432

Earthing concept, 136

EDU, 263

EES0B, 266, 270, 436, 441

EESS0, 269, 440

EESxB, 275

EMAC, 447

Environmental Conditions, 16

EOCMM, 195

EOCPF, 194

EOCSM, 195

ESB, 276

EU Declaration of Conformity, 19

Expansion options, 26

Front, 602

Fuse Panel, 117

Fuse panels, 116

GCU configuration, 517

HAMUX, 447

HSCB, 197, 281

ICF, 202, 285

ICS (multi-module), 41

Important notes, 591

IMUX, 458

Index, 685

Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX, 590

Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 01, 92

Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 02, 93

Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 33 F, 92

Interface Configuration, 525

Intermodule Handover, 569

IP Telephoning Gateways, 502

IPN, 473, 654

ISMx, 206

ISPS, 125, 126

ISPS (IMTU Supplementary Power Supply), 125

JPAT, 357

Line, 119

Line lengths, 564

LWL-specifications, 568

MAC, 475

MAHC, 584

MAHC Measuring Adapter Half Channel, 584

Measuring and Testing Tools, 579

MLB, 43, 53, 209

MLBIML, 212

Module summary, 161

Modules, 32

MULI, 487

Multi-module, 148

Note on DECT:, 569

Notes to VolP, 577

OFA2B, 290, 491

OFAS, 290, 491

Operator sets, 578

Overview of components (1), 67

Overview of components (2), 73

Packages, 517

PLSM, 359

Power consumption, 142

Power supply, 94, 669

Power supply for DECT, 574

686 CSI55 LX 07/2006

16 Index

Product description, 593

Product overview, 20

Protective earthing, 16

PS280A, 123

PS350A, 124

PSL55, 122

SUTC, 373

SUTD, 379

Technical Data, 27

TER, 292

The structure of the cables, 575

Twin module, 146

Ranges, 564

Required Servicing Procedures, 17

S64LI, 492

Safety Information, 15

Selection of cabinets for installation of the Integral 55,

80

SIGA, 361

SIGB, 362

SIGC, 363

SIGD, 363

SIGE, 364

SIGF, 365

SIGG, 366

SIGH, 366

Single and twin module, 32

Single module, 143

SP1 Spy Probe 1 (SP1), 587

SPCU, 493

SSBA, 367

SSBB, 368

SSBC, 369

SSBD, 369

SSSM, 370

Standing casing, 59

Structure, 20

STSM, 494

Suitable cable types used to connect DECT RBS, 574

SUPA, 371

SUPB, 372

Supply of the DECT-Net Base Station to the Integral

55, 574

UIP, 495

Uninterrupted Power Supply, 126

Universal installation aids, 91

UPS, 126, 127, 130

V24I, 220

V24IA V24 Interface Adapter, 588

V24M, 220, 501

V24NI, 220

View of module in the ISM, 674

W modules, 380

CSI55 LX 07/2006 687

IP Telephony

Contact Centers

Mobility

Services

Blindtext Blindtext Blindtext –

Blindtext Blindtext Blindtext Blindtext

© 2005 All rights reserved for Avaya Inc. and Tenovis GmbH & Co. KG.

4.999.000.000 · 0

7/06 · CSI55 / CSI55LX · gb ·

Avaya-Tenovis GmbH & Co. KG

Kleyerstraße 94

60326 Frankfurt am Main

Telefon 0 800 266 - 10 00

Fax 0 800 266 - 12 19 [email protected]

avaya.tenovis.de

Bedienungsanleitung

Operating instructions

Manual de manejo

Notice d’utilisation

Istruzioni d’uso

Gebruiksaanwijzing

Communication Server Integral 55 / Integral 55 LX

Communication Server

Integral 55 / Integral 55 LX

Operating instructions

Blindtext Blindtext Blindtext –

Blindtext Blindtext Blindtext Blindtext

Bedienungsanleitung

Operating instructions

Manual de manejo

Notice d’utilisation

Istruzioni d’uso

Gebruiksaanwijzing

Related manuals

Table of contents

Communication Server Integral 55 / Integral 55 LX